The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 1
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman

All of the characters mentioned below belong to the people who created them. I know there are more Pantheon Gods from Earth's past like the ones from India, the Americas and many other locations. They will be visited eventually. This is a fan-fiction work.

~~~000~~~

The Emissary star ship flies through the darkness of space. It soon comes near the world of Middle-Earth. We see the familiar landscape from a high orbit above the planet surface. We look on the screen. We see the various landmarks labeled on the image. The Emissaries activate the transporter. We disappear in a blink of an eye.

We appear in the Grey Havens in a blink of an eye. We see the port is not very crowded today. We see several men delivering some goods to another moored ship. We look toward the horizon. Soon we see, a ship that is similar to the one I saw in the third part of the movie. It is an average size sea ship. It arrives from beyond the horizon. Once it has docked into the berth, several ropes are thrown from the ship. Several men tie the ship fast to the posts on the dock. A ramp is pulled up from the docks and onto the ship. We see the familiar figure of Gandalf the White stepping down the plank and onto the docks.

He walks up to us to greet us.

“Greetings, Gandalf. It has been too long since I have been on Middle-Earth.”

“I remember you now. You were a wizard apprentice to one of the Blue Wizards. There were twelve in your group. That group comprised of six sorceress and six wizard apprentices. However, the Blue Wizards were not with you at the time.”

“That’s right, Gandalf. We found a small blue stone pillar here on Middle-Earth. It originated on Earth.”

“You did? That’s interesting. Please tell me more. Let’s meet in the Port Hall here. It will be comfortable for us.”

We follow Gandalf to the Port Hall. He opens the door. We follow him inside. We see it is very empty of people at the moment. However, there are plenty of tables and chairs to make ourselves comfortable.

As we reposition the chairs around a table, my fairies begin to giggle.

“What’s this I’m hearing from you, Richard?”

“When I met you before, you were not aware of what I can do. The only thing you knew was that I had a drop of Eingana’s blood in me.”

“That’s right.”

“I have been given a new title. I am the Omega Unicorn Dragon.”

“That’s interesting. What does that mean?”

“The first part is the Omega Unicorn. I don’t know if you remembered what I told you the last time we met. On our world, the male unicorn gives birth to fairies. Come out my fairies.”

All of my fairies fly out of the pockets. They fly around quickly giggling and laughing. They hover in front of Gandalf to check him out.

Gandalf has a big smile on his face, “They are delightful!” He chuckles while he sees them flying about.

Then Rubio flies and hovers in front of me. “We like him, father. He has a good soul. He wants to do what is right.”

“That’s good, Rubio. I like him too. I was chosen by the Creator to be the Omega Unicorn on Earth, Gandalf.”

I take off their satchel from my shoulder and lay it on top of a nearby table. The fairies fly over to it and land on the table. They proceed to open it up to take out some small nuts and berries to eat.

Gandalf, the Wizard, Brianna and I look at them with big smiles. We sit down on the chairs and make ourselves comfortable.

“That’s amazing, Richard. Did you give birth to these fairies?”

“Yes, I did, Gandalf, except for two of them. This will be a continual process from the Creator. Do you have fairies here on Middle-Earth?”

“We don’t know, Richard. That was one of the tasks we assigned to the apprentices. To check out the flora and fauna of our world. When the twelve apprentices disappeared, that investigation stopped.”

“I remember that now, Gandalf. We found the Ents and the Entwives in Fanghorn Forest. That immediately told us that Middle-Earth is a very unique world.”

“As you know, Merry and Pippin discovered the Entwives are missing.”

“Hmm . . . it has been speculated by some of our readers that the Entwives gave birth to the Hobbits, Gandalf.”

“That’s an interesting proposition, Richard. So, what happened next, wizard?”

“Then one day we found a small blue stone pillar. When we applied magic to test the pillar, it glowed blue. In the next instance, we were transported to another blue stone pillar on Middle-Earth in a blink of an eye.”

“Where did you find the first blue stone pillar?”

“The first one we found is out in the plains near Lonely Mountain. The second one is found at the base of Mt. Doom.”

“That’s very interesting. It’s probably located where Isildur cut off Sauron’s One Ring. Please go on.”

“When we applied magic to the second blue stone pillar, we disappeared in a blink of an eye and appeared on Earth. We appeared on a large island that is north of a large continent that is now called Europe today. When we looked around, we found eighty holes in the ground with several other larger blue stones laying about. The size of the holes matched the size of the blue stone pillar.”

“Hmm . . . then what happened next?”

“We investigated the island. We found some local people who were very capable in understanding their world. We found centaurs, dragons, dwarfs, unicorns, leprechauns, fairies, men and women. Then a few days later, a sailing ship appeared at one of their ports. The ship captain said they are from Atlantis. Then another man walked up to his side, he said he was expecting us.”

“That sounds a bit fishy, wizard.”

“We thought so too, Gandalf. So, we boarded the ship and sailed west toward the setting sun. Once we arrived there, we sensed several problems on the subcontinent. The first thing we noticed is the subcontinent straddling a major earthquake fault line, bisecting it. The second thing we noticed is a major civil war was about to happen. The western half contained the good forces, while the eastern half favored to do evil. We were escorted to a hall in the eastern half. When we arrived there, we looked up to see someone sitting on a throne. It was at that moment I sensed his evil hatred. It was even stronger than Melkor. I turned around and fled the hall quickly. I ran down streets and alley ways to find a place to hide. I eventually found some shelter to hide in. I didn’t know what happened to my friends until later in life. I fell in love with a girl named Fila. I resorted to being a jewel thief to make a living.”

“But things didn’t go well with you, isn’t that right?”

“That’s right, Gandalf. Sigh . . . I was slowly forgetting where I came from. Then one day, I decided to do one more heist. This was when the subcontinent was experiencing a lot of earthquakes. I used that moment of confusion to get the jewel. I was able to steal the jewel with no problems. But in the process, my Fila died along the way. I then fell through a roof and survived it. I have forgotten that I was an elf with a long life by then.”

“Then you met the eleven apprentices again.”

“Yes I did, Gandalf. However, their demeanor has changed for the worst. They wanted me to join their little Cabal group to take over the world. I refused and ran away from them. I vowed to find a way to stand up to them. While I was in Heaven, King Arthur told me what the Eleven Magi did. In that hall, they met King Azazel. When the Fall of Atlantis took place, King Azazel was taken by the Emissaries in chains. He was then thrown into a dark place called Hell. They must have been offered a method so that they would become more powerful. Upon reciting a spell, at a full moon, they would become stronger. But it didn’t happen that way. The spell caused their good side to leave their body and go somewhere else.”

“Where did their good side go to, wizard?”

“During one of my times in a small village, in my closet appeared eleven skin suits.”

“Skin suits?”

“Yes, if worn, then you become that person for a short time. Then the skin suits return back into my closet once the spell has run its course. Most of the time, people use them to live an alternative life style. But, the good news that Arthur told me, is once these skin suits are returned back to the rightful owners, they will become whole again. Then the twelve of us will help you when the Door of Night is opened.”

“Excellent, that is very good news indeed.”

“Gandalf, I need to tell you of something else that will happen when the Door of Night is opened.”

“What is it, Richard?”

“We know how the dragons appeared on Middle-Earth.”

“Ah, then they did come from your world.”

“That’s right, Gandalf. It happened when a small group of dwarves and dragons were being surrounded by soldiers. They were under orders to kill them all. The group made their way to a monument area called Stonehenge. It is the same location where the twelve apprentices showed up. As they were being surrounded, one of the dwarves activated a special ore called the Ethereal Space ore. It is the source of magic on our world. Once it was activated, they disappeared and appeared near Lonely Mountain. In their place, appeared Feanor and thirty other elves and men who were fighting Gothmog. One of them is Anyawin. Feanor was badly wounded. She found some healing herbs on the Isles.”

“Anyawin? I remember her. She has the healing touch gift.”

The wizard speaks up, “That’s right, Gandalf. She has used her gift for the good on our world. She is doing very well. But she knows it must be done in secret for direct contact. She has taught some doctors on Earth, the proper procedures in helping patients to heal faster. She did find the herbs to heal Feanor much more quickly.”

“Ah, that is what happened to his body. We thought it was consumed in fire. Did he have the Silmarils gems with him?”

“According to the story I read on Earth, the gems are hidden deep in Middle-Earth. They won’t appear until some earthquakes happen to reveal them. There is one the ocean, there is one placed in a star, the third one is buried in a fiery pit.”

“That is what remembered here. They are in the sky, earth and water. I wouldn’t be surprised if Feanor still has them. He knows the importance of keeping them safe.”

“I have yet to meet Feanor, Gandalf.”

“You will, Richard when you visit the Isles. He made several other precious gems and powerful gem weapons as well. One of them is the sword. It is very similar to your Gondolin sword, Gandalf. But it has some different properties.”

“That’s good.”

“The other news you need to know, Gandalf, is Anacalgon.”

“The Black Dragon? You are about to tell me his is still alive.”

“He is, Gandalf. However, I am the solution to the problem.”

“You are? Please go on.”

“When he comes forth through the Door of Night, he will face me. I will fly up to him and hover in front of his face. He will then sense that I’m part dragon. He will sense Eingana’s drop of blood in me. Then he will know he is facing his great mother as well.”

“Ah yes, that is an excellent idea.”

“I will then draw out the tiny spark of light that is left inside him. I will help restore his balance of the Light and the Dark in him.”

“That is very good, Richard. I’ll be sure to tell Earendil the good news. What will Anacalgon do once he is restored?”

“He will take the Black Army away from Melkor that he amassed behind the Door. That will leave Melkor and Sauron standing alone to face their final judgement.”

“I love it, the Black Army is redeemed from the darkness that he created. Melkor and Sauron will then face Turin for the last fight. Thank you very much for the good news. That is greatly appreciated.”

“You’re welcome, Gandalf. Before you leave, I would like to reveal myself to you. I think you will then understand more fully what the Creator wants to accomplish.”

“I would greatly appreciate that, Richard.”

“Brianna, stand up, it is time for you to transform as well.”

“I understand, Richard.”

Brianna and I stand up together. I look behind her back and see two hidden folds in the dress she is wearing. “Brianna, there are two hidden folds of cloth in your dress. They are for your wings.”

“That’s good, Richard. I will have to thank Rosella for thinking ahead on that one.”

The Wizard looks at us with a raised eyebrow. He wonders what I meant by that statement on wings.

We give ourselves some room between the chairs and tables. We concentrate within ourselves. Very quickly, two feathered wings sprout out from our shoulder blades. My fairies hover around us singing shouts of joy.

“You both have feathered wings! This is amazing. I can now sense you are more powerful now.”

“That’s right, Gandalf. For further proof, we’ll show you the unicorn images.”

We concentrate again, then twelve unicorn images appear from me and six unicorn images appear from Brianna.

“Now I understand what the Creator wants to do. He is using you both to help redeem your world, besides helping our own.”

“That’s right, Gandalf. These twelve unicorns are still alive on another world.” Then we let the images and our wings return back to us. “Now I need to show you the Omega Dragon part.” Brianna stays out of the way. I then sprout out my dragon wings while my eyes have a golden glow.

“Yes, I now see you are both. You are even more powerful than before. You have combined the Light and Dark side within you.”

“That’s right again, Gandalf.” I then let the dragon wings return back into me and my eyes return to normal. “I am still in training and earning the black sashes in the martial arts. Once all ten are earned, I will then have the title of Shaolin Dragon Master. I will then be powerful enough to stand up to Sauron with no problems. Even now, I’m a thorn in his side. I have thwarted him several times already.”

“That’s good, Richard.”

“I am also told there are still some dragons hidden on Earth. When the time is right, I will seek them out and inform them of the latest news and when the time is right for them to appear.”

“That’s very good, Richard. Well, is there anything else you need to tell me?”

“There is only one piece of news, Gandalf. On my world, there are two people who have the gift of long life like an elf. King Arthur told me that his cousin, Mordred, and his mother, Morgan Le Fay, practically made a deal with the devil. Somehow their human blood was exchanged with elf blood. Probably one of the elves in Anyawin’s group was taken. Those two are known as Mordred’s Legacy. They have become assassins for the current ruling monarchy on the Isles. I will be facing them one of these days. Arthur said there is still a chance to save their lives.”

“Then we’ll have hope that you can save them, Richard. Don’t forget that the elves became goblins when Melkor corrupted them. The race of men became orcs when Melkor corrupted them. I shudder to think what they will look like if both of them are combined together. You’ll probably have precious little time once the transformation takes place. You must be quick and sure about it.”

“I will, Gandalf.”

Then we all stand up together. Then my fairies do something I haven’t seen for a while. They hover in front of Gandalf. Amber and Cobalt speak up for them.

“Gandalf, we wish to give you our blessings and thanks. It is not too often that we see people with very honest souls. Perhaps someday in the future, fairies will appear on Middle-Earth. Then everyone will rejoice that peace has come to your world.”

“Thank you, kind fairies.”

“My name is Amber, and this is my soul mate, Cobalt. Hold still while we give our blessing and thanks to you.”

Then all of the fairies fly around him and above his head three times. Gandalf and the rest of us smile while they do that. Then they hover in front of him. “You are now a Fairy Friend for life. Have a long life until we meet again. Be safe and take care. Thank you for your generosity, caring and laughter.”

“Thank you, fairies of Richard, the Omega Unicorn. Thank you for the honor. I will remember this always. Indeed you are precious gifts of life from the Creator. Who knows, there might be fairies on Middle-Earth after all. We still have not thoroughly investigated our world after all of this time.”

“Gandalf, I have a question before you go.”

“What is it, Richard?”

“The last entry I read in the story concerns Frodo. Has he been totally healed yet?”

“Sigh . . . no he hasn’t, Richard. Even though the wound is healed, it is the mental scars and the memories that are still plaguing him. The only hope we see, is for the return of the Silmarils gems to relight the Trees.”

“I understand, Gandalf. If and when I get the sword that is promised to me, I was thinking it could be used to heal him. It does have the touch of Feanor in the sword.”

“Anything is possible, Richard. We’ll keep in touch from time to time.”

I walk over to the table. I put the bags back into the satchel. Then I put the satchel onto my shoulders. My fairies fly into the pockets to calm down and get quiet. Soon, their heart beats are in rhythm with mine. We walk out of the Port Hall and head toward the docks.

Gandalf stops before he steps onto the ramp, he turns to face us. “Our two worlds are tied to each other. According to our reckoning, it is the Sixth Age on Earth for you. Our world has not changed much since the rule of Aragorn. The difference is the Valar and the Undying West. Perhaps Tolkien was referring to the Atlanteans and Atlantis when he wrote our story. Anything is possible in the Creator’s Creation, Richard.”

“Indeed, anything is possible, Gandalf.”

“Take care until we meet again, especially at the Ultimate Last Battle.”

We all nod our heads to one another. Then Gandalf walks aboard the sea ship. The plank board is removed by the men. The ropes are untied from the posts and thrown onto the ship. The elves on the sea ship set sail to the Undying West into the sunset. We put our hands onto each like before. Then in a blink of an eye, we are aboard the Emissary star ship.

“That went well, everyone. The next location is a special place for us. CS Lewis wrote about it in the Chronicles of Narnia. It is the Woods between the Worlds. We’ll be using it to visit other worlds and other multi-verses. There is one world we’ll see before we go there. That is Never Never Land.”

Once my fairies hear the name, they poke their heads up quickly from the pockets. “Yes! We are going to see Peter Pan and Tinkerbell!”

We all begin to laugh and giggle together.

“That’s right, fairies. Never Never Land is one of twelve magical worlds in your galaxy. In fact, it is one of four worlds that can intersect with the other multi-verses. If those four worlds were to get destroyed by King Azazel, then the Milky Way Galaxy will start to unravel in all of the multi-verses. We know there is a black hole mass in the center of the galaxy, but it is those four worlds that act in harmony to keep the galaxy together.”

“What about the Doctor from Gallifrey? What’s his world classified as?”

“Gallifrey is classified as one of the four worlds with ties to all of the multi-verses. Now you are wondering if there are other worlds like those two elsewhere in the Creation.”

“That’s right, Emissary.”

“They are found in the nearest galaxy to yours, Andromeda. That is why King Azazel wants to destroy both galaxies. If he were to do that, it would send gravitational forces throughout the multi-verses. It would undo the Creation. However, as you might surmise, that won’t happen when he tries to destroy your world first.”

“I see, then we have a lot of work to do to get ready for that confrontation.”

“That’s right, Richard. Now you are wondering about those eighty bluestone pillars. Where are they located?”

“That’s right, Emissary.”

“When the eighty holes were set and filled for the first time, we took those eighty pillars and placed them on certain worlds. When the people came back the next day, they found the holes empty. So, they made another set of eighty pillars. Arthur, at the time, knew twenty were gone by then. After his death, we took the rest of the bluestone pillars and scattered them around Earth.”

“Does that mean, we’ll be visiting eighty worlds?”

“No, it doesn’t, Cobalt. For example, Middle-Earth has two of the bluestones. Twainor has only one of the bluestone pillars. When magic is used to activate the pillars, you can go to any bluestone pillar. However, when the Ultimate Last Battle takes place, they will send the forces to Earth only. They can get back to their own world and universe with them.”

“The Woods between the Worlds is located in the Heavens for our use. The bluestone pillars are used for this purpose only. Once King Azazel declared war on the rest of us, the Creator devised a way for this to happen with the bluestones.”

Then the Emissaries stop the star ship. We look on the screen. We see the world of Never Never Land. “There it is, Never Never Land.”

“Captain Hook is going to need proof that Never Never Land could be destroyed.”

“We know, Richard. Look on this other screen. You will see the proof.”

Then we see two star ships coming in silently and orbiting the world.

“Who are they from, Emissaries?”

“These two star ships are from a war world. They have been in contact with some angels and demons from King Azazel. Already, the lines are being drawn.”

“I thought King Azazel is still locked up in the Hell Galaxy.”

“He still is. However, he is about to be freed from his prison.”

Then all of a sudden, the warning lights flash like crazy. The Emissaries change the view on the screen to view all of the multi-verses. We see a single star exploding in each of the galaxies at the same time.

“How many stars exploded, Emissaries?”

“For every star in the Milky Way Galaxy, one star exploded in each galaxy. It was triggered by a single demon or angel at the same time.”

“Well, it is time for you to fly down to the surface. The Wizard is staying here for the moment. We have some things to talk about while you are down there.”

The wizard and I look at each other. We nod our heads up and down while we smile at each other. Then the Emissaries press a button on the console. Brianna, my fairies and I disappear in a blink of an eye.

We appear in the sky above Never Never Land. Brianna and I extend our feathered wings immediately. My fairies fly out of the pockets quickly. We glide down toward Captain Hook’s sea ship. It is docked at the local port on a continent. My fairies are giggling and laughing while we make our descent. I help Brianna to learn quickly how to glide down safely.

~~~000~~~
~~~000~~~

Off in the distance, in a black corner of the cosmos, there is an evil laughter sounded out loud and echoing in space. “Hah, hah, hah, hah,. . . . !”

~~~000~~~
~~~000~~~

Q (think John de Lancie) looks all around the sky. He sees the stars exploding at once, one star in each galaxy. “This is not good. Something terrible is about to happen.”

Then Q hears a voice from outside of himself. “Have no worries, Q. What you just witnessed is the release of King Azazel in the Hell Galaxy.”

“That means he’ll want to exact his revenge on Earth. But which one, Creator?”

“You need to meet a servant of mine on Earth.”

Q gives a quirky smile, “That’s fine, Creator, but which Earth do I go to?”

“That’s what I like about you, Q. You have that edge of getting to the point. I put a bluestone pillar on your plane of existence. It is connected to Earth where your story is told.”

“That means, the Borg, Janeway, Picard, Kirk and the others are connected as well from their universe.”

“That’s right, Q.”

“Which mortal did you choose for this task, Creator?”

“His name is Richard Moore. He has a wife as well. I granted them long life until the conclusion of the Ultimate Last Battle. Richard is the Omega Unicorn Dragon.”

“The Ultimate Last Battle, isn’t that your war that will end all wars?”

“It is, Q. However, be wary of Richard. He is no ordinary human being. He and his wife are very smart. Richard is the best security computer programmer on Earth for his time.”

Q smiles again, “Thank you for the tip, Creator. I’ll look him up when I get the chance. There might be hope after all for your Creation.”

“That’s the intent, Q. Have a nice day.”

“Hah! Hah! That’s very funny, Creator. You know there are no days and nights here in the Q Verse.”

He gives another quirky smile when he gets no response from the Creator.

“Hmm . . . It shouldn’t be too hard to find that bluestone pillar. Now then, where would he put it? It has to be in a location that is not too noticeable. He looks around Q Verse. He smiles when he notices a blue dwarf star nearby. “That’s very clever, Creator.” Q holds out his hand, a palm upward. In a blink of an eye, the bluestone pillar appears in his hand. He looks at it closely. “Ah, yes, I haven’t been to this Earth in quite some time. I’ll have to access their history to get myself up to date with them. Now that I know which one it is, it shouldn’t be too hard to find the Omega Unicorn Dragon.”

Q looks at the bluestone pillar again, it disappears in a blink of an eye and is returned to the blue dwarf star. Q then disappears in a blink of an eye.

~~~000~~~
~~~000~~~

All of the Pantheon Gods look up in the sky. They too sense the dreaded name has been released from Hell. The leaders immediately gather together on a nearby moon to discuss their options. Each one is sitting in a stone-carved chair. Above each of the chairs is a symbol representing each of the Pantheon Gods. The Lightning Bolt is for Zeus. The Spear is for Dagda. The sun disk is for Amun Ra. The Valknut, three interlocking triangles, is for Odin.

“Zeus, you know he will attack us eventually.”

“I know, Odin. The problem is when and which Earth he will attack.”

“Dagda, isn’t there one Earth that is common to all of us?”

“There is only one Earth that is common to all of us, Amun Ra. It is where the last unicorn was still alive.”

“But he was killed by men for his horn. It soon turns to dust when it is cut off from the head.”

“I know, Zeus. But among us, there is only one goddess left on that Earth, Rhiannon.”

“Wasn’t she banished for marrying a mortal, Dagda?”

“She was, Odin. We’ve had no contact with her since then. We often wondered what she has been up to. But we all made a vow not interfere with that Earth. We did all we could to help that Earth to grow up the quickest.”

“Yes, ever since King Azazel left his mark on Atlantis, we were asked by the Creator to help them grow up. He must have some good reasons for us to be there.”

“Then the Creator tells us there will be one mortal who will come to our solar system that will release us from our vows.”

“Yes, The Creator said he will have his wife with him and his own children with him as well.”

“Since when do men give birth to children? That has never happened.”

“That’s true, Amun Ra. But, has the Creator always spoke to us in riddles?”

Everyone smiles and chuckles as they recall the tactic from the Creator.

“Yes, that is the way with the Creator. He wants us to think carefully about our actions.”

“That is very true, Odin. Well, let’s keep wary with our charges. We shouldn’t be surprised if King Azazel recruits Loki for example.”

“Thank you for the reminder, Zeus. Loki will definitely have to be watched carefully. I’m sure there are others among you that will cause every one of you some problems.”

The other three think about the other Eternal citizens they have that can cause them problems. Then they all look at each other again.

“We’ll meet again if there are any sudden changes in our realm.”

“That’s agreed, Amun Ra. We must keep alert at all times now.”

Then all four leaders disappear in a blink of an eye. A quiet stillness returns to the moon. A rock rolls around. It unfolds to reveal a small stone troll. He mutters to himself, “I must warn Loki and the others about this mortal who will come to our realm. But, no mortals have never been here. They don’t know who it is. Either way, they must be warned.”

The stone troll folds himself back into a ball. He rolls along the ground until he comes to a cave. He rolls into the cave, deep inside it. He unfolds again. He walks up to a communication console. He pushes a button, “Loki, do you hear me? This is Moondust.”

“This is Loki. What did you find out?”

“They are aware that King Azazel will recruit you and others like you.”

“That’s expected, Moondust. Is there anything else?”

“They said, there will be a mortal who will eventually come to us.”

“A mortal? How can a mortal come here? They don’t even know where the Eternals reside? Who said that?”

“The cursed Creator.”

“Hmm . . . do you know which world he will be from?”

“From Midgard. However, this Midgard has only one goddess residing there. It is Rhiannon.”

“Rhiannon? I think I know which Midgard is that one. You did well, Moondust.”

“Thank you, Loki. It’s very possible they will meet here again.”

“That’s good, Moondust. You’ll have to stay there for the next meeting.”

“I understand Loki.”

“Ending transmission.”

Silence returns to the cave. “Yes, Moondust, is all alone again here. Well, I need to continue excavating my way in this cave. Eventually I will find the Great Troll buried here. Loki doesn’t suspect a thing on why I was chosen among our troll clan to be here. When I awaken him, the Great Troll, Geirrodur, will have his revenge on the Asgardians. Heh, heh, hah, hah, hah, . . . .!”

~~~000~~~
~~~000~~~

In the other multi-verses, scientists, astronomers, religious leaders, mystical and magical worlds all saw the stars explode at once. They all give their opinions to their leaders. They tried to assure the public that everything is okay.

However, there are some worlds know exactly what happened. They start entreating the Creator for the safety of their world.

~~~000~~~
~~~000~~~

Amun Ra, looks up toward the sky, from the balcony of his temple living quarters. Hmm . . . I wonder if the mortal knows about the pyramids in Egypt. Creator, does he know about the secret way to our world?

He is aware of the secret way, Amun Ra. In a moon period, the secret way will line up with your world.

That’s good, Creator.

Also, he knows how to card duel. He has already met the Ancient Fairy Dragon. This was done to get him prepared mentally for what will happen in the future.

That is good news as well.

Yes, it is, Amun Ra. He is my servant that has been promised in China and the Isles.

Are you telling me the Omega Unicorn Dragon is coming here?

He is, Amun Ra. He will visit your world first, then the Greeks, the Celtics and the Norse last. Then you are released from your vows.

Thank you, Creator, for all of your wonderful blessings.

Your welcome, Amun Ra. My advice to you now, is to keep close tabs on Set. King Azazel will try to lure him away.

I understand, Creator. What about Loki?

His heart has long since betrayed him. He already has chosen which side he will support. But there is hope for everyone that they make the right choice. The Lake of Fire is reserved for King Azazel and his followers. I know of some who will follow them there. I wish for no one to go there.

I agree, Creator. I will make sure Set is watched carefully. Amun Ra turns around and walks back into his temple to get ready for the arrival of the Omega Unicorn Dragon.

~~~000~~~
~~~000~~~

On Never Never Land, Peter Pan is arguing with Captain Hook on his ship. Tinkerbell and Smee are in the Captain’s room with them.

“How do I know you’re telling the truth, Peter?”

“Have you been contacted by anyone lately that is not from Never Never Land?”

“Yes, I have, Peter. They told me they are orbiting our world right now. They have every intention of protecting us when the war breaks out.”

“Hmm . . . Okay, I’ll let it slide for right now. But, I’m warning you, Captain Hook. These people might be more ruthless than you are. Did they ask you for some sort of payment? I don’t think they would do it for free.”

“I was told, they only want two gold bars from us.”

“Two gold bars? I bet they want to know if we have any valuables here. What I really need, is for a friend of mine to show up here. He should be able to convince you of the danger that is happening here.”

“Then where is he? He probably doesn’t know where we are!”

“He does, Captain. Believe me. He does. He certainly knows of our location.”

Then they hear a shout from the deck. “Captain Hook! Get out here now! There are two-winged people flying down to us, right now!”

They all scream inside the room, “What?!”

Peter Pan, Captain Hook, Smee and Tinkerbell quickly leave the Captain’s quarters. The climb the stairs to the top deck. He sees the men pointing up in the sky. They look up in that direction. They see two-winged people flying down. Around them are several smaller winged people.

The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 2
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman

As we glide down in circles to Never Never Land, I hear a familiar voice in my head.

You’re doing great, Richard.

Is that you, Croin?

I was wondering when you’ll sense me.

I thought my memory of you returned to you.

It did, Richard. However, once you looked at me in the courtyard at Thryson Castle, my memory got updated in you.

That’s great. “Brianna, is Lavan and Bianca are with you?”

“They are, Richard. They are helping me to learn how to fly.”

“That’s great. I just want to tell you, my memory of Croin is with me again. It got updated when I looked at him again the Thryson courtyard.”

“That is good news, Richard.”

We continue making our circles as we get lower and lower. Then we see, Peter Pan and Tinkerbell fly up to us from Captain Hook’s ship.

“Is that you, Richard?”

“Yes it is, Peter.”

“When did you get the wings?”

Peter flies around us. My fairies become more excited as they see Tinkerbell flying among us.

“About five months after I met you, I met Leviathan out in the Atlantic Ocean. Once he breathed upon me, I sprouted these wings. Don’t worry, Peter, Brianna and I can retract the wings back into our bodies as if we don’t have any.”

“That’s good, Richard. Meet us on the top deck of Hook’s ship.”

“Okay, Peter. Brianna, I will land on the deck first to catch you.”

“I’ll be above you for assistance.”

“Thank you, Richard and Peter.”

We make our way down to the top deck of the ship. Everyone else is in awe as we get closer and closer to the ship.

Captain Hook and Smee make room on the top deck as I land on the deck first. I retract my wings back into my body quickly. I reach my hands upward to Brianna. Captain Hook does the same as he gets closer to me. Brianna gets instructed by Lavan and Bianca to tilt the wings upward to brake her speed. Once her legs are within our reach, she retracts the wings back into her body. Peter reaches for her hands. Brianna takes hold of it. Peter lowers her down as Captain Hook and I ease her down onto the deck. Then Peter stands by our side.

“I hope you are not angels.”

“We are not angels, Captain. I was given these wings under very special circumstances. I have an interesting story to tell you, if I have some time.”

“I’m sure you do. My name is Captain Hook, this is Smee, my first mate. Welcome aboard the Jolly Roger.”

“I’m pleased to meet you, Captain Hook and Smee. My name is Richard Moore. This is my wife, Brianna.” At least his jaw is not like the cartoons. The chin doesn’t drop that far down from the mouth and his smile is still the same. His moustache is still long and thin with a curl on both ends.

“I’m pleased to meet you both.” Captain Hook shakes my hand. I don’t see a change in his face when I do that. Captain Hook then takes the hand of Brianna and gives the gentleman hold and kisses her hand. “Welcome aboard, my lovely lady. If you weren’t married to him, I wouldn’t mind chasing you.”

“Thank you for the compliment, Captain. However, Richard and I have known each other for a long time. I suggest you keep your distance and don’t come between us. You might get a sword point at your throat from my husband.” She smiles at him.

Captain Hook smiles, “A sword point?” Captain Hook looks at me with another smile, “that means you know how to use a sword. Isn’t that right, Richard?”

“I do know how to use a sword, Captain. I have come here to prove that those two space ships out there are not friends of yours.”

“How can you do that?”

“With some magic, Captain. We’ll visit their ships to check them out. We’ll see and hear what their true intentions are.”

“What about these other fairies that came with you? Are they coming with us?”

“They will come with us. In fact, they will sit in these coat pockets. But, I need to show you my armor and sword underneath it. We must be prepared for anything up there.” I unbuttoned the jacket. I take off the jacket and hand it to Brianna.

“That’s impressive, Richard. That’s a fine-looking sword you have there.”

“Thank you, Captain. So, here is the decision. Do we go up there now or do we go up the next day?”

“Let’s do it right now.”

Brianna hands my jacket back to me. She helps me put it back on and buttons it back up. My fairies fly into the pockets to get comfortable. Bianca and Lavan fly over to Brianna and settle into one of her coat pockets she has on.

“I need you to place your hands onto my shoulders. I can take up to ten people if I have to.”

Tinkerbell sits on Peter Pan’s shoulder. She puts her legs into a loop near his collar. Peter Pan puts his left hand onto my right shoulder. Captain Hook stands behind me and puts his left hand onto my right shoulder, next to Peter Pan’s hand. Smee puts his left hand onto Captain Hook’s right shoulder. Brianna puts her right hand onto my left shoulder.

“Now, when I recite the spell, we’ll disappear in a blink of an eye. We’ll fly up faster to the ships up there. Since they are not suspecting any surprises, their shields should be down. When we get on board, the ship, we’ll be invisible to them. We can talk between ourselves and they won’t hear us. Is everyone ready?”

Everyone responds in one voice, “Yes!”

I recite the spell to myself. The spells inside the helmet detect what I said. We disappear in a blink of an eye. We fly up very fast to the two orbiting star ships. We pass through their shields and hull of the ship. I move about the ship until we find the command level of the star ship. We stay out of the way as we listen to their conversations among themselves. I pass my hand through one of their soldiers on the bridge. I pass the language to the others in our group. Soon, we begin to understand their speech.

~~~000~~~

“Did you get those two gold bars analyzed, Tresxn?”

“I did, Commander. The gold content is the purest gold that we have ever come across. It is 100 percent gold.”

“Excellent, did you scan the surface for other riches?”

“I did, Commander. We found deposits of precious gems like rubies, emeralds, diamonds and metals like silver. It is a very rich planet.”

“Excellent, once we have enslaved the inhabitants and sell them to the other planets, we’ll send down our auto-mining machines. It will scour this world for its riches. The person whom contacted us, wants this world destroyed.”

“I agree with that assessment, Commander. However, I did detect an anomaly on the planet.”

“What is it?”

“There is a time differential with the planet. I don’t know how old they really are from here. They could be a lot older than we are.”

“Hah! That’s nothing compared to our might and strength.”

“That’s very true, Commander. They only have one very old sea ship.”

“I see that our contact from Hell Galaxy is right.”

“I agree Commander. To think that red skinned people want us to come here to act as forward forces. They said their invasion plan is more than ten thousand years old.”

“They give me the creeps, Tresxn. I’m sure they have some sort of secret plan they are hiding from us.”

“I’m sure they do, Commander.”

By this time, Captain Hook is furious and mad. Peter Pan and Tinkerbell give a slight smile. He guessed right they are not to be trusted.

“Richard, I would like to turn the tables back on them. Do you have any ideas?”

“I do, Captain Hook. I can send a virus into their machinery to make it very sick. It will take down their shields and turn off their engines. You should be able to send them a few shots of your own from your ship. With the pixie dust from Tinkerbell and the others like her, I think we can send them a message that you and Never Never Land are not to be trifled with.”

Captain Hook gives an evil smile. “I like the idea, Richard. Let’s look around the ship here. I need to know what their main fear is.”

“Yes, Captain Hook.” I move the group through the ship. We see and hear the common talk among the soldiers.

~~~000~~~

“I tell you, Crox. I’d rather be on the ground fighting than being in this space tub.”

“I hear you, Thorxan. I remember the last time we encountered a solar storm. It knocked out our stabilizers. We were floating adrift in space for weeks until we got it repaired.”

“Don’t remind me, Crox. Half the crew threw up because of the motion sickness in space.”

“Ugh . . . we smelled for weeks cleaning up the ship.”

“Then someone had a bright idea that we disinfect the smell with flowers.”

“Phew! Flowers are fine for our women back at home. I’m glad to be out here from that horrid smell.”

On and on it went. Some talk about the conquest of the previous planets they conquered. Some talk about being back home again. We slowly get the picture of what they hate the most. Captain Hook gets an evil idea fomenting in his mind.

“Can you do something like that to the ship? To get them sea or space sick as they call it?”

I smile back to the Captain. “That is no problem, Captain. We’ll get them to turn tail and slink off like the skunks they are.”

“Excellent. We’ll need to be back on their bridge. I want to take back my two gold bars.”

“I’ll time the program just right that you can have your confrontation with the Commander. Then everyone connects back up with me to escape just in time.”

“Then we’ll use some pixie dust on my ship to fly me up here to send that message to them.”

By this time, the rest of us are giggling and laughing.

I float around the ship until I find a private room with a console. I end the transport spell, we appear in the room in a blink of an eye. I push a button on the screen. A foreign language appears that I have never seen before. “Hmm . . . I’ll need to read one of their leaders’ minds. I need some passwords. Then I can decipher this computer language. I’ll be right back.” I recite the transport spell. I disappear in a blink of an eye. I travel through the ship. I see a well-dressed man walking down the hallway. He must be a leader, Croin.

I think he is one, Richard.

I float up to him. I pass my hand through his head. Quickly, I learn more of his language and some key passwords from him. He stops and shakes his head to get the cobwebs out before he continues walking down the hallway. I reappear back in the room in a blink of an eye where the others are at.

“I’ve got it, my friends. This should be really easy. Captain, they use brute force to get their way. They have no finesses like you do.”

“Ahh . . . then they will be really easy to exploit their weakness. Proceed with the plan.”

“Yes, Captain.”

I access their terminal with ease. They don’t have any really anti-virus protection. The only means of security is a complex set of passwords. I quickly determine their pattern. I access their ship controls and put in my own anti-virus program to render their ship weapons, engines and shields to be turned off. Then I set the timer for the stabilizer gyros to be turned off when I say the phrase, “Have a nice day.” I then connect them all together to the phrase. I exit the program before I initiate it by pushing the button on the terminal.

“It’s all set, my friends. Once I push this button, it is set. When we are on the bridge, I will say the phrase, “Have a nice day.” That will give us one minute before everything is shut down. The program will shut down their shields, engines, their weapon controls and the ship weapons and the stabilizers to the ship. They only forward thrust they have is impulse power. That is like using the oars, Captain. I have also sent a copy to the other ship. That copy will activate once it detects this ship adrift.”

“Well done, Richard. They won’t be able to fire at us in retaliation. We’ll get the last laugh. Can I see their faces when that happens?”

“I have already access their communication network. An image will appear from my crystal on my helmet. You can give your last comment to them at that time.”

“Excellent. Push the button, Richard.”

I push the button on the console. It loads the program into their computers. We see the lines scroll up the screen. It then sits quietly as the screen becomes blank. It waits for my phrase until we need it. Everyone reconnects back to me. I recite the transport spell. We disappear in a blink of an eye. We travel as a group back to the bridge. Captain Hook sees the two gold bars resting on a console nearby.

I maneuver us to a clear area in front of the Commander’s chair. We draw out our swords. Captain Hook points his at the Commander. I point my sword at the pilot. Peter Pan points his sword at a soldier. Captain Hook says the word, “Now!”

I end the transport spell. We all appear before them in a blink of an eye.

Captain Hook speaks up next, “Don’t move one inch! Or the Commander gets reamed by my blade!”

Everyone freezes before putting their hands to their guns.

“That’s better.”

“Captain Hook, it is good to see you again. How did you get up here so fast?”

“I had some help getting here. I heard some of your talk with the crew up here.”

“You did? What did you hear?”

“You are here to rape, pillage and steal our riches. That is after you sell us as slaves to other worlds. Then you’ll destroy Never Never Land. To me that is underhanded and unforgivable. I’m the master of treachery and ruthlessness here!”

“Really, whatever gave you that idea?”

“You analyzed my two gold bars.” Captain Hook turns around and picks up the two gold bars and puts them into red coat pocket. He looks at the Commander again. “I have decided to cancel our agreement. Besides, I think you will be in more trouble than you ever thought.”

“We can fend for ourselves, Captain Hook. We take what we want anyway.”

I speak up next, “You better listen to Captain Hook, Commander. This is a magical world. But, before we go. I need to shake your hand.”

I step forward to shake the Commander’s hand. Then all of a sudden his face changes.

“Who is speaking to me in my head?”

“It is the Creator, Commander. Listen to him and share that handshake with others. Have a nice day!”

Peter Pan speaks his favorite phrase, “Bang-o-rang!”

Then everyone reconnects back to me. I recite the transport spell. We disappear in a blink of an eye.

“What does he mean by that Commander?”

“I don’t know, Tresxn. Right now, the Creator is telling me we need to get back quickly to our home world.”

“Is it under attack?”

“Not yet, but we need to be there . . .”

Then all of a sudden, the lights go flashing on the ship. Everyone floats up from their seats.

“What!? How did this happen?”

~~~000~~~

We appear on the top deck of the ship. “Quickly Tinkerbell, we need pixie dust on the ship!”

“Yes, Peter Pan!”

She giggles as she spreads the pixie dust all over the ship. It starts to sparkle and have a glow about it.

Then Captain Hook speaks up, “To battle stations’ men! We are going to send them a message! No one beats Captain Hook in treachery and ruthlessness! They wanted to enslave us all, steal our riches and destroy our Never Never Land!”

All of the men roar out loud, “Yeahhh! Aye, aye Captain!”

The men set the sails. Men walk down below to the cannon deck. Tinkerbell flies down quickly and puts more pixie dust on the cannon balls and the cannons.

The men lift the anchor. As soon as that happens, the Jolly Roger floats up in the sky. Captain Hook turns the wheel and flies upward to the sky with a full wind in the sails. Another flag is raised next to the Jolly Roger’s flag. The flag is a skull and cross bones with a bloodied blade in its mouth. We enter the blackness of space. We see the two star ships adrift in space.

~~~000~~~

“Commander, half of our men are throwing up. They can’t control themselves.”

“I know that, Tresxn. We’ve got to regain control of the ships.”

Then a light flashes on the monitor. They check their monitors. They see the sea ship approaching them.

“This is impossible! How can a sea ship fly up to us in space?!”

“They said this is a magical world!”

~~~000~~~

“Get between the two ships. Keel haul those brigands! Fire!” Yells out Captain Hook.

Then all of the cannons are fired from the Jolly Roger. The cannon balls shoot out of the cannons with a light beam behind it. The cannonball has a yellow glow around it. A stack of cannonballs never goes empty. Once a cannonball is removed from the stack, another one appears to take its place in a blink of an eye.

“Keep firing on both ships, men! I discovered some of their weaknesses. They are not sea worthy and the men from their world are allergic to flowers. We are going to fill up their ships with flowers!”
Everyone laughs out loud as they continue firing the cannons at the space ships.

I turn on the crystal to my helmet. The image of the bridge appears before me.

~~~000~~~

“Sir, there are five lasers being shot at us! No, make that a lot more at both of our ships!”

“Brace for impact and a breach!”

Then all of a sudden, the cannonballs pass through the hull without making a hole. One of the cannon balls appears on the bridge. It rolls around with a golden glow.

“How did it get in here?”

Then the cannonball explodes. In its place the entire bridge gets engulfed with flowers as they float in the air! Soon, they can’t see each other. Some begin to sneeze and have allergies to the flowers!

Everyone yells out loud.

“Uggh!! Phew!”

“Aaaa-CHOOO!”

“Sniff . . . sniffs. . . . My eyes are crying! Aaaah . . . chooo!”

“I hate flowers!”

Then the Commander notices the smiling face of Captain Hook on the screen when he pushes some flowers out of the way.

“Why Captain Hook! Aaaah. . . . Chooo!”

“Like I said, Commander, I’m the master of treachery and ruthlessness. I am hundreds of years older than you. I have had a lot of practice to get it right. There is no way you’ll destroy Never Never Land! Even though Peter Pan is my greatest adversary, without him I’m nothing. From what I found out on your ship, it should be stinking really badly now. According to my book, your men are unworthy to be seamen. They get sea sick too quickly, or in your case, space sick. Don’t come back here again. If you do, I’ll turn your engines into blooming flowers! I’ll protect Never Never Land from scurvy scum like you! Now begone, brigand! End the transmission, Richard.”

I end the transmission.

~~~000~~~

The Commander screams, “Grrrr! I hate you, Captain Hook! Sniff . . . sniff. . . . Ahhhh . . . Chooooo! But from what I’m hearing in my head, aaaahhh . . . Chooooo! He is the least of my worries. Tresxn, we need to regain control of the ship! Ahhhh . . . choooo! Now!”

“Yes, sir! Aaaa-choooo!”

“Sniff . . . sniff . . . . We need to get these stinking flowers. . . . Aaah. . . . choooo! Out of here, now!”

` “Yes, sir! Aaaa-choooo!”

“He figured out we are allergic to flowers. Aaaah . . . Chooo! I don’t know how our women do it. But, sniff . . . sniffs . . . if we make it home in one piece, we might finally be cured of these bothersome flowers. Aaaa-chooo!”

“Yes, sir! Aaaahhh . . . Ahhhh . . . choooo!”

The two star ships slowly turn around. They slink off really slow on impulse power. They expel the flowers in their wake as they leave Never Never Land.

~~~000~~~

Everyone laughs out loud on the Jolly Roger when they see the flowers being emitted behind the star ships. They slowly disappear from view. Captain Hook turns the wheel and heads back to the docks on Never Never Land. The ship slowly glides down beside the docks in the water. The anchor is lowered to secure it down. The glittering pixie dust disappears from the Jolly Roger.

“That was a great idea, Richard. Thank you very much. It will take them months to get the ships repaired and cleaned up from the stench.”

“You’re welcome, Captain Hook.”

“Richard, can you tell me why they came here to destroy Never Never Land?”

“I can Captain Hook. If you like, I would like to tell everyone here. I’ll start with you and your men.”

“That’s greatly appreciated.”

The men gather around on the main deck to hear what I have to say. It takes about thirty minutes to summarize it all. Everyone gets quiet and mulls over the new situation.

“Richard, I have confession to make.”

“What is it, Captain?”

“Even us pirates have our bad nightmares. As much as we like to do what we do. We too, can sense an evil hatred that wants to destroy us all.”

The men on the dock nod their heads up and down. “Aye, aye.”

“That is very true, Captain.”

“I guess we are closer to his thinking than most people realize. Then when I heard your story, Richard. I just came to realization on why we are here. We are here to protect Never Never Land from people like on those two ships in space. In addition, you told me, we are one of four intersecting worlds that keeps us together.”

“That’s right, Captain.”

Captain Hook steps up to the railing. “Men, we have a mission to do. As much as I would like to keep fighting Peter Pan and his friends, we’ll use those times to keep ourselves sharp and ready if we are attacked again. I will give you the day for you to decide. Go in town and talk to your love ones. Tell them what you heard and seen here. Then at sunset, meet me on board here to give me your answer.”

“Thank you, Captain Hook.”

Then the men start to chant, “Hook! Hook! . . . .” As they depart the ship on the gang planks.

Captain Hook and Smee turn to us, “So, what do you say, Peter Pan? Are you up for it?” Captain Hook reaches out with his hook from his right arm.

Peter Pan looks at Tinkerbell. Tinkerbell nods her head up and down. Peter Pan extends his right hand and grabs his hook. “It’s a deal, Captain Hook. Everyone here on Never Never Land will help each other to protect our precious world.”

“I agree that we need to protect our world.”

Peter Pan lets go of the hook.

“Richard, how long can you be here?”

“I was planning to be here for two days at least. My fairies would like to meet the fairies here on Never Never Land.”

“Make it three days, Richard. For one thing, we need to know how to communicate better.” Captain Hook smiles at me, “Besides, I need a new adversary. I’m getting used to Peter Pan’s tactics.”

Peter Pan and Tinkerbell smiles, “Captain? Are you saying I’m boring?”

Captain Hook smiles at Peter Pan, “You could say that. So how about it, are you up for a round of sword fights?”

I smile at Captain Hook, “What are the conditions and the goal?”

“It will be on the ground of course. Have you ever fought drunk?”

“Yes I have, Captain Hook. I can even fake it.”

He smiles again, “Excellent. Then Peter Pan and I will meet you here on my ship tomorrow morning at 8 AM. We’ll meet in my quarters below.”

“Is there lodging in the town, Captain?”

“There is, Richard. I recommend you go to Hook’s Inn. I use it once in a while for a change of pace.”

“Thank you for the tip, Captain Hook. My fairies, you have a decision to make. You can follow Tinkerbell to find the other fairies or stay with Brianna and me.”

My fairies get together quickly with Tinkerbell. They discuss their options quickly. Then they hover in front of us.

“We’ll spend the night in Pixie Hollow for the first night, father.”

“You better introduce yourself to everyone here on Never Never Land, Richard. You need to show them your unicorn images.”

“Okay, Tinkerbell. Enjoy yourselves my fairies. I’ll have your satchel with me. Discover what they eat, how they live, etc., etc.”

“Thank you father, mother, Omega.”

I blow some air in front of them, they fly through it quickly before they fly off to find Pixie Hollow. We hear them giggling and laughing as they leave.

“Smee, escort our guests to my Inn. They can stay in the second best room.”

“Yes, Captain.” Smee escorts us into the port town. We follow him to Hook’s Inn.

Smee checks us in.

The lady gives us the price. “That will be one gold piece for each night.”

I open my coin bag and retrieve two gold pieces. I hand them to her. She looks at it closely.

“Hmm . . . I don’t recognize these markings. But, gold is gold no matter where it comes from. She takes a key from a bin behind her. She hands to me. I take the key from her. “There are several established eateries. I recommend Hook’s Wine and Dine and Hook’s Surf and Turf. They are located on the main street here. Your room is on the second floor.”

“I take it no one goes into Hook’s private suite, but himself.”

“That’s right. Everything in there is according to his taste.”

“Thank you, ma’am.”

Smee escorts us up the stairs to the second floor. The third floor is dedicated to Captain Hook alone. We walk down the hallway. Smee opens the door for us. We all walk inside. We see a four-poster bed with a canopy. Two sets of dressers, a mirror on the wall. On top of one of the dressers is a pitcher of water and a bowl. In one corner of the room is a copper tub for bathing. For lighting in the room, we see wicks, oil cups and a glass fixture on top. We then realized there are no power generators here on Never Never Land for electricity. There are several pictures on the walls. One of them is a portrait of Captain Hook smiling widely. The other two pictures are paintings of his ship in port and the town itself.

Smee then leaves us and closes the door.

Just before we take our satchels off, my fairies and Tinkerbell find us in our rooms. I open the window for them to fly in. “That was fast, is there something on your minds?”

“You must come with us. You need to visit the Indians. You will understand our excitement once you greet them.”

Brianna and I walk back out of Hook’s Inn. We follow the fairies until we leave the town.

“You’ll have to fly there to greet them.”

“Okay, Tiger.”

Brianna and I extend our wings from our backs. We flap our wings and fly to follow the fairies. It doesn’t take long to find the Indian’s camp ground. We glide down and land in the clearing near the main campfire. We retract our wings into our bodies. Once we did that, the Indians come out from their lodges. When Brianna and I noticed one of the men, we get the biggest surprise of all.

“You’re Crouching Bear!”

“That is my name, Omega Unicorn. However, I never have met you before.”

The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 3
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman

The list of characters mentioned in this story belong to J. M. Barrie and the Walt Disney Company. This is a fan-fiction story.

~~~000~~~

Just before we take our satchels off, my fairies and Tinkerbell find us in our rooms. I open the window for them to fly in. “That was fast, is there something on your minds?”

“You must come with us. You need to visit the Indians. You will understand our excitement once you greet them.”

Brianna and I walk back out of Hook’s Inn. We follow the fairies until we leave the town.

“You’ll have to fly there to greet them.”

“Okay, Tiger.”

Brianna and I extend our wings from our backs. We flap our wings and fly to follow the fairies. It doesn’t take long to find the Indians’ camp ground. We glide down and land in the clearing near the main campfire. We retract our wings into our bodies. Once we did that, the Indians come out from their lodges. When Brianna and I noticed one of the men, we get the biggest surprise of all.

“You’re Crouching Bear!”

“That is my name, Omega Unicorn. However, I never have met you before.”

~~~000~~~

The Four Season Ministers and Queen Clarion gather around the source of the pixie dust in Pixie Hollow.

“Queen Clarion, did you see those two people with wings in the air above us?”

“We all did, Autumn.”

“Sigh, I know. But what does it mean? Is it written in our records somewhere?”

“It’s possible, Autumn. We must search the records thoroughly.”

“But we don’t where or when to start looking in the correct annals.”

“That’s the hardest part, Winter. It would be like trying to find a mustard seed in a stack of hay.”

Then Tabby flies in and lands outside their circle. She waits patiently until she is noticed.

“Someone must know something about this.”

Then Tabby interjects a word into their conversation. “Ahem!”

The five fairies turn around to see whom spoke up. Queen Clarion smiles, “Do you have something to tell us, Tabby?”

“I do, my Queen. It has come to my attention that Tinker Bell and Peter Pan found someone on Earth who has replaced Caliber the Unicorn.”

All five look alarmed now, “What?!”

Then Tabby smiles again, “You’ve been thinking about the Earth where Wendy came from.”

They all smile together.

“That is right, Tabby.” Queen Clarion smiles some more.

“We would have to search all of our annals to all of the Earths we have access to if you hadn’t reminded us.”

“Now that we know which annual to bring up, it shouldn’t be too hard to find Caliber’s last words.”

The five turn around and form a circle around the upper pool of the pixie dust source. They hold their hands out toward the pool. Then several tomes rise up from the pool with a golden glow about them.

Queen Clarion speaks up next, “Find Caliber, the Last Unicorn on Earth before he was killed.”

One of the books rises up and opens up. The pages turn quickly until it is found. Then an image appears above the opened book. They see the recording of Caliber talking with Oren.

~~~000~~~

“Oren, you must be brave and strong for my children and your kin. There is some one out there who wants my horn.”

“Why, Caliber?”

“They think it has magical properties to render any poison neutral.”

“But we know that is not true, Caliber.”

“That’s right, Oren. However, if my horn is cut from me, I will die within thirty days.”

“Don’t say such things, Caliber! You gave us life! What are we to do? We will be in butterfly mode for a long time!”

“You must have hope. For one day in the future, the Omega Unicorn will come and restore your lives. He will usher in the beginning of the world to be redeemed. In time, the forests will reclaim the deserts and the waste places. Earth will be green once again. Peace will come to all peoples. He will be tested to make sure of his call. I was also told by the Creator, he will find Avel and the others who were here before the Great Ice sheet melted.”

“But we know they will have their wars of conquest. Where can we go to be safe?”

“You know my children and your kin are scattered through out the Earth. They are waiting for that day as well. The sea dragons have told me there are two continents to the west of here. They are beyond the setting of the sun in the western sea.”

“Yes, I remember you telling me that. Are you telling me that I should take a group of us there?”

“Yes, Oren. The sea dragons will provide transport for you along the way. They will stop at islands so you can rest and feed as well. I was told the Omega Unicorn will come from this land.”

“But, we were told the Omega Unicorn will be a descendant from these lands here.”

“That’s right, Oren. There will be some people here who will get in boats and to arrive there in the future. He will give birth to his own fairies.”

“I will miss you very much.”

“I know, Oren. I will miss you very much as well. Tell White Dove these things over and over and to the rest of your kin. Commit my words to memory.”

“I will, Caliber.”

~~~000~~~

Everyone has tears coming down their faces. They clean up their faces quickly with some pixie dust.

“Apparently, Caliber knew it would be a person and not another horse with a single horn on its head.”

“It seems that way, Summer. How can a person give birth to fairies?”

“Hmm . . . here is a thought. We knew Caliber was male and dual gender. Isn’t that right?”

“That’s right, Spring.”

“Then it stands to reason that the Omega Unicorn is also dual gender as well.”

“Hmm . . . that’s an interesting idea. The Creator must have done this to hide the Omega Unicorn among the people. There is no horn for the people to cut off this time.”

“That makes sense, but it still would be proper if the Omega Unicorn had a horn. What or where would he get one to be his horn?”

“That’s a new mystery to think on, Spring.”

Then the five turn to Tabby again.

“Are you saying the Omega Unicorn and these winged people we saw today are one and the same, Tabby?”

“That is right, Spring. The female is his wife. Tinker Bell told me they found Avel and the eleven unicorns on another world. It was there that Richard Moore got transformed. She also told me that Richard has a drop of Eingana’s blood.”

“What?! He has a drop of the greatest sea dragon in him?”

“That’s right. She also told me, she and Peter witnessed the projection of the twelve unicorns from within himself. It is his proof that he is the Omega Unicorn.”

“Amazing.”

“That’s not all. The animals of the land and the sea are aware of him as the Omega Unicorn. They too have been waiting for his return.”

“This is too much to take in all at once.”

“I agree, Spring. We must find and welcome him, his wife and his fairies to Never Never Land.”

The Four Season Ministers nod their heads up and down in agreement to Queen Clarion’s suggestion.

“You did well, Tabby. You have performed well in displaying your talent.”

“Thank you, my Queen. He has already met Captain Hook, my Queen. They took care of the two ships in space. I just heard the latest news from Fawn. The birds told her the Omega Unicorn is meeting with the Indians right now.”

“Thank you for the update, Tabby.”

Then all six fly together as a group toward the Indian Camp Ground.

“Come, fairies of Pixie Hollow. We are flying to the Indian Camp Ground. We are going to meet these two winged people.”

“We should be witnessing a unique miracle.”

“What is it, Queen Clarion?”

“It is the return of the Omega Unicorn.”

“The Omega Unicorn? What or who is that, Bobble?”

“I don’t know Clank. But, I’m curious just like everyone else here.”

The five elders invite at least half the fairies they encounter to fly along with them to the camp ground.

~~~000~~~

“If you know my name, then someone told you about me.”

“Yes, someone did tell me, Richard. It is King Oren and Queen White Dove whom told me. I was walking the Trail of Tears to Oklahoma.”

“Gasp! Then you must be an ancestor of the Crouching Bear that I know!”

“I am, Richard. My younger brother stayed behind in the mountains of our ancestral home lands, he promised me he would name his son to honor me. Those two butterflies told me the Omega Unicorn would come. I kept the hope inside me when the two tree pieces would be rejoined together.”

“Then how did you know I’m the Omega Unicorn?”

“These eyes haven’t grown dull in hundreds of years. When I saw you land, I saw a slight golden glow around you. This lovely lady must be your wife.”:

“Yes, she is, Crouching Bear. Her name is Brianna.”

“I’m pleased to meet you. I also saw a slight golden glow around you as well. Including the other fairies that are with you.”

Then we hear a twig break in the woods. We see the Grand Elder approach us. I know him as the SRU Wizard or Merlin.

“Greetings, Grand Elder. Welcome to our campsite.”

“Thank you, Crouching Bear. I have come with a surprise guest or two.”

“You’re speaking in riddles again, Grand Elder.” He smiles at the Grand Elder.

The Grand Elder smiles back, “I guess I am. Come out King Oren and Queen White Dove.”

King Oren and Queen White Dove fly out of the Grand Elder’s coat pockets. They fly quickly to Crouching Bear and hover in front of him.

“You’re here! Praise to the Creator. I’m glad to see you again.”

“We are glad to see you again, Crouching Bear. There is a descendant of yours in Cherokee. He is descended from your younger brother. He is the current leader of the Eastern Cherokees. His name is Crouching Bear as well.”

“That is good news. Thank you, kind fairies.”

I then interrupt the greeting, “Did you reveal yourselves to him, King Oren?”

“We did, Omega Unicorn. We gave him the same words of hope from Caliber that the last unicorn would come to Earth in the future.”

“Then the Creator took me just before I breathed my last breath. He brought me here to Never Never Land. Did those two tree pieces get rejoined?”

“Yes, Crouching Bear. I breathed upon the two pieces. They rejoined and a new leaf sprouted from it.”

“I’m glad to hear that. Now my spirit can rest in peace.”

“Then who are these other Indians with you?”

“In the beginning, we were from each of the Indian tribes on the Western Hemisphere of your Earth. We then merged together into one tribe over the years. We called ourselves, the Pick-anyone tribe as a joke that only we understood. Then the author Barrie changed it to the Piccaninny tribe.”

“The author was here?”

“She wasn’t here, Omega. Peter Pan told her about us.”

“I think you better start over from the beginning on the history of Never Never Land.”

“Peter Pan, the mermaids, and the fairies were here first. Then Peter Pan flew to various Earths from different multi-verses with Tinkerbell’s help. They found boys who were left alone and abandoned. He brought them here. They became known as the Lost Boys.”

“Then Captain James Hook showed up with the Jolly Roger. He doesn’t remember it at all. The ship got caught in a maelstrom at night. A water spout picked them up. They were all asleep while it happened. The Creator brought them here. The town is their creation. We avoided them as much as possible.”

“Then who was on the Jolly Roger to be awake at the time? It had to be someone from here.”

“It was me, Richard.”

“It was you, Grand Elder?”

“Yes, it was me. The Creator told me to hide as a crewman on the ship. Creating the disguise and putting them to sleep was easy. I kept everyone safe. When we arrived in the ocean here, I woke them up. Then I was picked up by an Emissary star ship. They took me to several other worlds to help keep watch.”

“I thought that was the Emissary’s job. Why did they ask you to help out?”

“There are some worlds that require the presence of a real wizard. The beings on those worlds would easily detect the Emissaries as outsiders. They are not ready to know about the Creator, the Emissaries and the heavenly realm.”

“Then who will tell them about it?”

“You will, as the Omega Unicorn.”

“Huh?”

“You need to learn how to combine the twelve images of the unicorns into one image. So will you, Brianna.”

Brianna and I look at each other and smile. My fairies smile as well.

“I have never done such a thing.”

“You will when you visit China in two years.”

“Can we see these twelve unicorn images?”

“Yes you can, Crouching Bear.”

Brianna and I stand up together. Then we see the animals come in closer and stand near the edge of the forest. I also see the fairies of Pixie Hollow sitting on branches as well. They are watching with anticipation.

“Hold still everyone. The animals of the forest are right behind you.”

“What are they waiting for?”

“They are waiting for the appearance of the unicorns.”

“Has this happened before, Omega?”

“Yes it has, Crouching Bear. On my world, Caliber was the last unicorn on Earth. He was killed for his horn by men. They thought it held magical powers to neutralize any poison. Then the animals on my world have been in mourning for over two thousand years. My Earth always had a unicorn. They represented the purity of light and truth from the Creator. If Brianna and I were to talk with someone, then we can get them to tell the truth. They can’t lie to unicorns. I was told, the Omega Unicorn is for the Earth, while the High King of Earth is for the people. I will help Earth get renewed. I will contact the hidden First Ones on Earth. There are dragons still hidden on Earth. They are waiting for the right time to come forth to help protect it when the Ultimate Last Battle takes place.”

“Is this right, Grand Elder?”

“He is right. There is Quetzalcoatl from Mexico. There are the Gold and Silver Dragons from South America. There are the Nine Dragons in China. There is the great bird, Roc, from the Indian Ocean. There are the great Thunderbirds from the Navajo. There is the Serpent Mound in Ohio. There is Leviathan and the Sea Dragons in the Oceans. The Romanian Dragons in Europe. He will also be meeting other mythical dragons and animals found on other worlds as well.”

~~~000~~~

The fairies quietly talk and murmur to each other.

“There are dragons on his world, Queen Clarion?”

“Leviathan and Eingana are the ones who gave birth to the land and sea dragons, Autumn.”

~~~000~~~

“How will he get there?”

“There is a bluestone on those worlds. The Creator put them there for this purpose only. They will come to our Earth when needed.”

“Is there a bluestone on Never Never Land?”

“There is Crouching Bear. It is located in the ocean where the underwater compass is found. It is located in the middle of the compass north arrow.”

“Then that must have been where Captain Hook showed up with the Jolly Roger.”

“That is right. Richard and Brianna, go ahead and display the unicorn images.”

“Yes, Grand Elder.”

Brianna and I concentrate on the images. We move our arms outward from our sides and open the hands once we get the images in our minds. Then all of a sudden, twelve unicorns appear, six on either side of me. For Brianna, six unicorn images appear, three on either side of her.

Then all of the animals sound out their calls. We hear the calls from the bear, the panther, wolf, the hawk, the eagle, the raven, song birds from several different species.

Brianna and I approach the animals as they walk up to us. They rub or press their heads into our bodies. “Brianna, blow some air from your mouth for the birds.”

“Okay, Richard.”

We blow our breath up to them. The birds squawk and chirp with delight. They drop a feather from each one. They fly back to the trees and rest there.

“Talk to them in their minds, Brianna.”

“I’ll try.”

Greetings, animals of Never Land. My name is Brianna.

It is good to see unicorns once more, Brianna. We’ll keep you safe.

I still have to visit other worlds.

We know, Omega.

Then a shaman comes up. He picks up the feathers. “These feathers are thanks from the birds.”

“Shaman Red Fox took the feathers and made a feather necklace for me. I wear it when I attend the Planting Festival in Cherokee, North Carolina.”

“Then I’ll make one for Brianna before you leave Never Land.” He takes the feathers and carries them into his wigwam. He then comes back out to join the gathering.

Then we see an entourage of fairies flying in from the forest. They are being led by five older fairies. One of them has a golden glow about her. She flies up to me and Brianna.

“My name is Queen Clarion. Welcome to Never Never Land, Omega Unicorn, your wife, Brianna and your fairies.”

Brianna, my fairies and I nod our heads to the fairies. “Thank you, Queen Clarion. My birth name is Richard Moore. We are pleased to meet the fairies from Never Never Land.”

“Apparently our story is told on your world. We tried to visit as many of the Earths that are connected to us. But, there are some worlds that are too hostile for us to be there.”

Autumn speaks up, “So, what are your fairies’ names and their talent?”

“The easy part are their names. The first two fairies I met on the planet, Twainor are Amber and Cobalt. I gave them those two color names for their eyes. They became heart attached to me first.”

They fly up quickly and land on my shoulders.

“They are from Avel the Unicorn. Twainor is a magical world. My Earth used to have magic, but it was abused a long time ago. Therefore, the Creator removed it from us. There is a special ore that gives our magic. It is found on Twainor as well. It is the Ethereal Space ore. So, what are your talents when lived on Twainor, Amber and Cobalt?”

“We flew about making sure the pollinator bees and insects do their jobs. We also check out the wild herds of beasts nearby. If a lightning bolt were to hit the grass fields, they could bolt in terror. They could stampede a village and cause harm to the people. Then, with the centaurs help, we can direct the wild herds away from the villages or towns. Since we are with Richard, we keep his balcony growing with the fruits and nuts we love to eat.”

“The other ability that we have, is that we can all change into butterflies.”

Then all of my fairies change into butterflies in little flashes of light. They hover around some more before they change back. Everyone claps and cheers when they see it happen.

“My first born are Tiger and Tigress. Their names are based on their wing pattern and colors. They are tiger swallowtail butterflies. They can easily mix in with the other butterflies and don’t get noticed right away.”

Then we see a fairy fly up and hover near by. “My name is Fawn. I can speak with all of the animals, except for butterflies. Can you speak the butterfly language?”

“We can speak with any animal, large or small. We can help you learn how to speak to the insects.”

“Thank you, thank you.”

Tiger and Tigress fly up to me and land on my head.

Most of the fairies giggle and laugh when Fawn gets done speaking.

“I’m given a six month rest between cycles of giving birth to fairies. This is a continual process from the Creator. Why?”

Some of the fairies say it out loud. “Why?”

“Because, when peace finally comes to my Earth. All of the fairies will come out of hiding. They will finally be accepted as part of normal life on my Earth.”

All of the fairies cheer out loud that they no longer have to hide from the people.

“The next two fairies I gave birth are Bianca and Lavan. They are white morpho butterflies. They are heart attached to my wife.”

Bianca and Lavan fly to Brianna and sit on her shoulders.

“The next pair are Ruby and Rubio. They are ruby red wing butterflies.”

I put my hands above my hips. They land on my arms and sit there.

“The next pair are Emeril and Esmeralda. They are emerald butterflies.”

They fly over and land on my arms and sit there.

“I gave birth to another pair of fairies. However, they are not here. They became heart attached to two fairies in King Oren’s fairy troop. Their names are Victor and Victoria, they are viceroy butterflies. The last pair of fairies I gave birth to are Shiri and Levi. I became pregnant with them after Leviathan breathed upon me. When he did that, I sprouted the feathered wings you saw. However, these two are special. They have another form besides butterflies.”

Shiri and Levi fly up and hover in front of us. They quickly change into butterflies in a blink of an eye.

“But if you noticed, their wings patterns are different from the others. The other form they have are dragon butterflies.”

They quickly change into dragon butterflies in a blink of an eye.

Everyone is amazed by the sight. “Gasp!”

They shoot out streams of flames from their mouths.

“They shoot out flames of fire!”

“That is great!”

I raise my hands to calm them down.

Shiri and Levi change back into fairies. Everyone claps and cheers.

“There is something I must tell you about me. I have a drop of Eingana’s dragon blood me. What this means, I am part dragon as well. The other half of my title is that I’m the Omega Dragon. I am currently training in the martial art classes on my Earth. When I have earned all ten black sashes, I will then have another title of Shaolin Dragon Master. I will be able to use and control the four basic elements of air, water, earth and fire. There is a fifth one, spirit. That one won’t be learned until the first four are learned. Even my own fairies will train along with me. Right now, they know how to control air or bend air. I’ll demonstrate for you. Get into position, my fairies.”

They fly and hover in front of me in a circle. I look within myself to combine the light and dark side in me. My eyes have a golden glow. I extend my dragon wings quickly. Then I fold them behind me.

Everyone realizes that I have two different sets of wings. It depends on which one is needed at the time.

I bring up my right hand and give it twist. A small tornado, the size of my hand appears. I blow it to Amber and Cobalt first.

Amber and Cobalt flap their wings, to keep it in front of them. Cobalt gets underneath it, he puts his hand into the base of the small tornado. He then does a throwing motion to Ruby and Rubio. They catch it and keep in front of them. By this time everyone is getting the picture that they are playing a game of catch with the small tornado. After each pair ‘catch’ the small tornado, they position it in the center of their circle, they fly around it and disperse the tornado into the air.

Everyone cheers and claps out loud. I see Vidia with a wide smile on her face. “Vidia, catch a small tornado.” I twist my right hand to create a hand size tornado. I blow it toward her and above her.

What’s this, he knows my name?! Uh, oh . . . here it comes. This will be fun to do.

She flies upward to ‘catch’ the small tornado. She plays with it from hand to hand. Everyone cheers that she is able to do it. After playing with it, she then disperses the small tornado with her wings into the air. She has a big smile on her face as she flies back to her friends. They hug her and congratulate her.

I then let my eyes become normal and the dragon wings retract back into my body. “Not only that, my fairies have learned how to do their version of the martial arts. They can do wing slashes with their wings. They can push someone back or put a small cut onto a person’s face or arm. They also have their own flint knives for protection. As you might have noticed about their clothing, their clothes match their wing patterns.”

Then Queen Clarion flies up to me. “Then that means, your fairies will be multi-talented like you are.”

“That’s right, Queen Clarion. That is a must on my world. I have a lot to do on my world. In fifty years, the Emissaries will arrive. I must prepare Earth to get ready for the idea that there is life outside our solar system. Also, Brianna and I are destined to be King and Queen of a country. We don’t know when that will happen. Right now, we are visiting other worlds such as yours. We are letting the people or the inhabitants know what will happen in the future.”

“What is that, Omega Unicorn?”

“Sigh . . . about 900 years from now, there will be a war that will end all wars. For lack of a better title, it is called the Ultimate Last Battle. The first enemy of the Creator is going try to come to my Earth to destroy it. Why? King Azazel or Lucifer rebelled against the Creator a long time ago. He was imprisoned on my Earth for a short time. When he saw the rise of mankind on my world, he then knew that he will be replaced. His job was directing the praise and songs to the Creator. He and his followers rebelled against the Creator. He now knows that it will be us, the humankind creation, who will give the praise and songs to the Creator. Those two star ships that appeared here, were sent here to destroy Never Never Land.”

“What?! We won’t let that happen!”

The other fairies murmur as well.

“Captain Hook has vowed to protect Never Never Land. Therefore, he now has something new to do. I will be visiting Captain Hook and Peter Pan on the Jolly Roger at 8 AM, tomorrow morning.”

“Thank you for telling us about yourselves. Ah, now we see it is getting late in the day. It is time for the night rest. Where are you planning to spend the night, Richard?”

“Before we arrived in the campsite, I just paid two gold coins to stay in Hook’s Inn for the next two nights.”

“You can stay with us, Omega Unicorn. We do have an extra wigwam available.”

Brianna and I look at each other. “I think it is best we stay here tonight, Richard. You can go to Hook’s ship in the morning. I’ll stay here.”

Then my fairies fly up to me. “We’ll be more comfortable there, father.”

I smile, “I know when I’m being outvoted. Okay, we’ll spend the night here.”

All of the fairies and the Indians shout out with praise and thanksgiving to the Creator.

Queen Clarion flies up and hovers nearby. “Yes, your fairies are welcomed in Pixie Hollow. We’ll give them a grand tour and places to stay tonight and tomorrow night.”

“I have your satchel with me if you need it.”

Then my fairies, King Oren and Queen White Dove get escorted to Pixie Hollow by the other fairies. Everyone is excited as they fly back.

However, Vidia flies up to me quickly. She talks to quietly to me. “How did you know my name?”

“There are stories told about the fairies on my world. I even saw the recording of when your friends tried to rescue you from your capture by Lizzy’s father.”

“You saw that?”

“Don’t worry about your image of being a hard nose fairy being tarnished. You still need your strong image when you need it. You can still be soft with your closest friends in private.”

“That’s good.”

We smile at each other. Then Vidia turns around flies quickly to rejoin the other fairies.

The animals return back into the forest. Then a beautiful Indian maiden gets up and walks up to us. “My name is Tiger Lily. Follow me, I’ll lead you to the wigwam.”

“We’ll have the evening meal soon, Richard.”

“Thank you, Crouching Bear.”

“Are you staying with us, Grand Elder?”

“I will be here for the evening meal, Crouching Bear. I already have a place to stay tonight. I’ll be with the Emissaries tonight. I need to take King Oren and Queen White Dove back tomorrow afternoon. They already know about it.”

Brianna and I follow Tiger Lily to the wigwam. She opens the flap. We walk inside and place our satchels on the warm skin furs on the ground. We then walk back outside. We see everyone else getting ready for the evening meal. The men walk down to the stream to catch some fish for the evening meal. Some of the women walk to the storage wigwam to retrieve some vegetables. Everyone will be getting an ear of corn and a small acorn squash with the fish.

~~~000~~~

The story on Never Never Land will continue with the next two chapters at least. I’m giving some detail here to make it more interesting and fun.

The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 4
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman

The list of characters mentioned in this story belong to J. M. Barrie and the Walt Disney Company. This is a fan-fiction story.

~~~000~~~

While the fish, the corn and the acorn squash are cooking over the coals, Brianna and I gather around with others. We sit on logs set about the campfire.

The Grand Elder speaks up, “One of the main reasons you are here, Richard, is to meet each of these Indian representatives. Several of them have a connection to a dragon or a mythical beast in their culture.”

“Richard, this is Chieftain Talact of the Olmecs.”

“Greetings, Omega Unicorn. Today is a glorious day that I get to meet you.”

“How did you hear of me?”

“We heard of your coming from Quetzalcoatl himself. He received word from King Oren and Queen White Dove that Caliber’s life was taken. He then instructed us to build a large building for him to hide in. We also built a labyrinth maze and traps for any looters who might be trying to find any gold or silver. He knew no mountain cave will be able to conceal him. Besides, most of the mountains are volcanoes where we used to live. We built the foundation of the elaborate building in the Valley of the Sun. It was finished by our Mayan friends.”

“I have seen pictures of that place. It is a very large complex now.”

“That’s right, Omega. Underneath the Sun Temple we built the first structure before it was enclosed by the Temple itself, generations later. At the mid point level, there is a landing and an opening to the tunnel. The Creator gave me a dream you would have twelve unicorn images of six males and six females. When you arrive inside there, you will find thirteen paved stones. The one in the middle will be set forward. Stand on that one, then the light beam from the shaft will reflect off the pool and hit your chest. Then you can project out your twelve unicorn images. Each of the twelve stones has a single small gem set with magic spells to detect the light images. This will cause a small pillar to rise up. On top of the pillar is a small jewel. With our magic, we were able to create a message for you. You will also find the key to unlock the stone box in Quetzalcoatl’s temple. A new key will appear. You will need to take it to South America to find the Silver and Gold Dragons.”

“But, I don’t know your language, Chieftain Talact.”

The Grand Elder smiles, “That’s why I am here. I’m going to transfer their language to you. However, it will be hidden in an area of your memory so it won’t interfere with your daily speech. You will be able to recall it when you need it.”

I get up and sit next to the chieftain. The Grand Elder stands up to get behind us. He places his hands on top of our heads. He recites the spell to transfer his language into my brain. I don’t feel any significant change in my mind.

“Once you have taken the silver key, Quetzalcoatl will wake up. However, it is your choice when you need him. After your talk with him, then you need to travel to Bolivia, South America. The Silver Mountain is near Potosi.”

Then another man speaks up, “My name is Chimalma, my name means Shield Bearer. I was Shield Bearer to our Inca King. We knew of the Silver Dragon within the mountain near Potosi. Ollqe, the Silver Dragon, gave us permission to mine the silver there. However, he told us that we are to go no further into his lair. So, we stayed outside that line. When the Spaniards showed up, they forced us to mine deeper into the mountain. When we told them about the line that we are not to cross, they laughed at us for believing in fairy tales. They didn’t believe in dragons. They said all of the dragons are dead in the world. But we knew better. Some of the Spanish leaders walked into the inner lair and never returned. There was one who escaped his doom. He saw his fellow countryman turned into a silver statute. He didn’t see the dragon at all in the lair.”

“Is it because the Silver Dragon can blend in the background of the silver cave walls?”

“That’s a very good guess, Omega. Yes, the Silver Dragon can move about freely in his lair. You can sense a subtle change on the silver walls as he moves about. He should be able to sense you as part dragon. This time, you will see thirteen silver plates with the middle plate set forward before a large silver box with a small opening. Stand on the middle silver plate with a gem. Project your twelve unicorn images above the other twelve silver plates with gems. That will be your opportunity to put the silver key into the silver box. It will then reveal the gold key for you to take to the Gold Mountain.”

“Isn’t the Gold Mountain a reference to the Spanish legend of El Dorado, Chimalma?”

All of the Indians smile together. Most of them chuckle with a slight laugh.

“We are all aware of that Spanish legend. We leaked it out as a rumor for them to look elsewhere. We knew if the Spaniards found the actual location of the Gold Mountain, we would have no value. This became evident of how we were treated to mine the Silver Mountain. We were entrusted by Qori, the Gold Dragon, to keep his location hidden. When our King was murdered by Pizzaro’s men, we then knew they were not to be trusted. We returned the ransomed gold and silver to Qori via a secret path that only a few of us knew.”

“Then where is the Gold Mountain located?”

“Ollqe will tell you where it is, Omega. I refuse to tell you its location. I am under a solemn vow not tell anyone where it is.”

I give a slight smile, “That’s fine, I will honor your vow by not forcing you to say it.”

Chimalma smiles back, “Thank you, Omega Unicorn.”

“Omega, when you enter inside Quetzalcoatl’s room with the stone block, you should see two paintings on the wall.”

“What do the images show, Chieftain Talact?”

“They came from two dreams that our shaman saw. He awoke quickly and drew the two images before he forgot them. He instructed our artisans to paint the two images on the walls inside the chamber. The first one he saw, he saw a wave of light come from the north lands. The light drove out the darkness upon our lands. Peace came to our Earth that lasted for eight hundred years. He looked closely at the waves to see who was leading them. He saw a man with twelve unicorns behind him, six male and six female unicorns. You have a host of at least one thousand in your army that could not be killed.”

Brianna and I smile together, “I know which thousand you are talking about. They are the memories of the people and the dragons on Twainor that I have met. They are alive and well today. I can show you one of them right now. His name is Croin. He is the first dragon I met on Twainor. We became good friends over the years.”

“Can we see him?”

“Croin, raise your head above me. Then rise up to show them with your wings spread out.”

Croin slowly raises his head above me as he smiles. All of the Indians are smiling widely. Then Croin comes out of me in full form. He spreads his wings and flies about.

“I remember him, Omega. He is one of the images in your army.”

“That’s right, Talact. The twelve unicorn images that I can project can be more solid if I want them too.” Croin returns back into me.

“The next painting shows the wave of darkness coming from the stars. The wave of light is led by the High King. You are one of his generals leading a great host to battle the wave of darkness. The wave of darkness is led by the King of Darkness.”

I smile, “I know whom you are talking about. His name is King Azazel or Lucifer. He is planning to be here with one billion star ships to destroy my Earth. Because, that is where he was thrown down to after his rebellion against the Creator.”

“Is it possible the Creator can come up with a force that large, Grand Elder?”

“Anything is possible with the Creator.”

We see several Indians stepping toward the fire. They check the food to see it is done. They see the fish and the vegetables are done. We are handed a woven mat of reeds with the food on top of it.

The Chieftain Talact gives the evening thanks. “We thank you Creator for all of your wonderful blessings. For us Indians here on Never Land, we finally are able to meet the Omega Unicorn. He is your servant that you have promised to our Earth. Keep him, his wife and his fairies safe while they do their duties in serving you. We thank you for this food that you have provided for us. Thank you, Creator.”

Everyone responds in one voice, “Thank you, Creator.”

We then proceed to eat the evening meal.

~~~000~~~

The fairies approach their grounds of Pixie Hollow. They see the source of Pixie Dust coming from a very special tree in the center of the hollow. The other fairies who were left behind see the others flying toward it. They fly up to see what is happening.

The fairies from my Earth follow Queen Clarion and the four Season Fairies to the center while the rest of the fairies take their places among the branches and leaves of the tree.

Queen Clarion steps forward to give greetings, “Fairies of Never Land, we have among us a very special group of fairies visiting with us. Each of them is unique in their own way. First of all, as you can see, their wings are not like ours. Their wings are like the butterflies of their world. They can change into those butterflies to hide among the human races on their Earth. King Oren and Queen White Dove are fairies from Caliber the Unicorn. King Oren, how are fairies born to your world?”

King Oren steps forward, “The male unicorn is dual gender with both male and female aspects. He gives birth to us while his female mate gives birth to more unicorns.”

The fairies murmur among themselves, while the fairies from Earth are smiling widely.

“That’s interesting King Oren. Are there any more unicorns on your Earth?”

“Alas, there are none that I know of. Before the Great Flood on Earth, the Creator took the last six unicorns to another world for safe keeping. This includes some dwarfs, centaurs and dragons. If there are any of these still hidden on Earth, then it was done without my knowledge. There are still hidden mysteries on my Earth. I do know that Leviathan and the sea dragons are still in the waters of our oceans. Caliber and his mate stayed behind and did give birth to more unicorns, but I don’t know where they went to hide. For once a unicorn’s horn is cut off from the head, the unicorn dies within thirty days. Also, the unicorn’s horn turns to dust in that same amount of time. I sent word of Caliber’s death to all of the fairies, dragons, centaurs and dwarfs hidden around the world. As a whole, they are known as the First Ones.”

“Then let us have hopes the Creator hid Caliber’s offspring and the First Ones well. Whom is the leader for the Omega Unicorn’s fairies?”

“It is I, Queen Clarion. My name is Tiger. I am the first born. This is my twin sister, Tigress. After nine months in his womb, we are born, brother and sister. Then he is given a six-month rest before the cycle begins again by the Creator. The male children will be dual gender as well. They too will give birth to fairies as well. We surmise there will be an increase in the fairy population on Earth during the next 900 years or so. The girls from his first generation will all give birth to normal children of two boys and two girls each. Their ages will reach 120 years maximum while the Omega Unicorn and his wife will live long enough to encounter the Ultimate Last Battle.”

“We saw some of your talents on display earlier. What are some of the immediate goals for the Omega Unicorn?”

“We’ll be traveling to other worlds to warn them of the impending battle that will happen in the future. Hopefully, with our presence, they will realize we are telling the truth. Also, the Omega Unicorn is in training to earn the ten black slashes that lead to the Shaolin Dragon Master title. By that time, he will learn how to use the basic elements of air, water, earth, fire and spirit. As you have noticed earlier, we’ll be in training right along with our father, mother. We too must be ready as well. His wife, Brianna, will learn the martial arts as well. It is up to her how far she goes.”

“Thank you, Tiger, for that update. Fairies of Pixie Hollow, I know you are eager to show our guests our wonderful world here. There are only a dozen here. King Oren and Queen White Dove will stay with us. We suggest that each pair go with each of the divisions of talent that we have here. So, leaders of each major talent, please come forward. That would be Animal, Light, Tinker, Water, Garden and Wind.”

Then six leaders fly down and land in their midst. They quickly walk up to a pair of fairies they like. Shiri and Levi are immediately led to the Light group. Tiger and Tigress are led to the Animal group. Rubio and Ruby are led to the Garden group. Emeril and Esmeralda are led to the Tinker group. Bianca and Lavan are led to the Water group. Amber and Cobalt are led to the Wind group.

“You have them for this night at least. Learn all you can about our guests as they learn about us.”

The fairies all laugh and giggle as they fly away to different parts of their Pixie Hollow.

~~~000~~~

A group of Light Fairies with Shiri and Levi are flying together.

“What are your names again?”

“My name is Levi. It means ‘my heart’. This is Shiri, my twin sister, her name means ‘my song’.”

“That’s lovely. I saw you transformed into dragon butterflies earlier. Can your brothers and sisters do it yet?”

“We don’t know. It is still early in our lives. As we train with father, mother, we’ll get stronger and stronger. I’m very sure we all be able to control the five elements at some time in the future. What are your names?”

“My name is Fira.”

“My name is Iridessa.”

“My name is Luna.”

“My name is Glory.”

“My name is Sparkle.”

“My name is Helios. We are triplets.”

Soon they arrive in a large field of sun flowers. “This is where we live. We love the sunlight very much. It helps us recharge our energy to do great light magic.”

Shiri and Lavan feel the warmth of the sunlight on their bodies.

“Yes, we feel it too.”

Then their bodies begin to glow with a yellow hue. They quickly change into dragon fairies in a flash of light. They blow flames upward in the sky. They fly around quickly to make a helix tower of flames. Then they fly through it safely. Then fly around the flames to disperse the hot air into the sky above. Then the flames fade from view.

“Wow! That was great!”

“That’s a beautiful display and control of the fire.”

Then they change back into their normal selves in flashes of light.

“Thank you. It is easy for us because we are part-dragon as well.”

“How did that come about?”

“We were conceived in Richard’s womb when Leviathan, the great sea dragon breathed upon him. All of our brothers and sisters have a small drop of dragon blood in each of us.”

“Where did Richard get it from?”

“He got it when he was on Twainor for the first time. It’s a long story to tell.”

“That’s okay. Do you have sunflower seeds on your world?”

“We do, Fira. It is one of our favorite seeds to eat.”

“That’s great. Let’s gather up some sunflower seeds to have our evening meal.”

They fly throughout the sunflower field. They pick up sunflower seeds and bring them to the ground under one of the sunflowers.

~~~000~~~

Amber and Cobalt are flying with Vidia and others from the Wind group.

“So, do you have any fast flyers on your world?”

“We do on Twainor. That is where we are from. We have to keep up with the insect pollinators as they fly about from flower to flower.”

“Hmm . . . that’s an idea. Have races with the insects. I do that all the time anyway. Obviously, when you are in butterfly mode, you are slow.”

“We are, Vidia. But, we can conserve energy very well in that mode and fly great distances before we need to feed again.”

“I’m sure you do.”

Soon, they enter an area that has a slight breeze flowing through the area. They fly up to several tall trees. They see holes in the side of the trees. They land on a branch together.

“This is where we live. These holes are hollowed out by woodpeckers. It is a lot more sturdy than living in fairy-built shelters.”

“We have the same setup on Earth and Twainor as well.”

“That’s good. Well, lets gather up some seeds and fruits. Show them where get them from friends.”

“Yes, Vidia.”

The other Wind fairies quickly show them where to gather the seeds and fruits from the several trees and plants in the area. They are surprised to see Amber and Cobalt are able to keep up with them as they fly about quickly.

~~~000~~~

Tiger and Tigress are being led by the Animal talent group.

“Did I hear right that you can speak with all of the animals, Tiger?”

“Yes, we can.”

“How do you do it? Do you burp like a frog?”

“Sing like a bird?”

“We do it with our minds.”

They all exclaim out loud, “What?!”

“How can you do that?”

“It’s easy for us, because we can change into butterflies. We are a part of nature right away.”

“We are a part of nature are we, Buck?”

“We are, Nellie. We are born from the laughter of babies and flowers. We can speak with the animals.”

“So, how do you use your minds to talk to them?”

“We’ll show you. It is all based on wavelengths or being in tune with their minds.” Tiger flies up and sees some blue birds flying by. He flies up quickly to chat with them. Hello. My name is Tiger. What is your name?

My name is Blue Wing. What can I do for you?

I want to show these fairies how we talk with animals, such as you, on our world.

That’s fine.

The three blue birds follow Tiger down to the other fairies. They land on a large tree branch nearby. The other fairies join them on the tree branch.

“Fawn, put your right hand on my head and your left hand on Blue Wing here.”

“Blue Wing? He told you his name is Blue Wing? Okay . . .” Fawn puts her hands on their heads.

“Now reach out with your mind and try to read my thoughts. I am saying a simple word.”

“Okay.” Fawn looks at Tiger really hard. Soon she hears a thought from Tiger. Hello. “You said, hello.”

The other fairies look astonished, “Gasp!”

“That’s right. Now look at Blue Wing and read his mind.”

“Okay.” Fawn looks at Blue Wing really hard. Soon she hears two words spoken to her. Hello Fawn. “Gasp! You said, Hello, Fawn.”

Blue Wing and the other birds chirp in agreement by nodding their heads up and down.

“So, that means, if I can do that. I can learn how to speak to the insects on their level.”

“That’s right, Fawn. Once you are in tune with their minds, you can talk to them directly, from mind to mind.”

The other fairies cheer in delight. The blue birds chirp in delight as they fly off to continue their journey. The fairies enter their bungalow area near the ground. They talk excitedly on what they can do next in learning how to talk to insects.

“Why are your names Tiger and Tigress?”

“When we change into butterflies, we are like the tiger swallowtail butterfly in our region. It helps us to blend in right away and not get noticed by the human population.”

“That’s interesting. It does make sense for you on your world.”

~~~000~~~

Ruby and Rubio are being led by the Garden fairies. “So, what do you do on your world?”

“Well, we are not part of King Oren’s fairy troop. They do what they can in helping the insects pollinate the flowers in the forests. We grow our own plants and flowers grown on fathers’ apartment balcony. A lot of them are very colorful that attract the bees to pollinate them. When we are in butterfly mode, we can drink the sweet nectar from them. However, there is one small plant that is a favorite of ours. We like to eat the nuts from it.”

“What is it?”

“It’s a small nut bush from Twainor. We make sure it doesn’t mingle with the native plants on Earth.”

“Why?”

“If it’s so good, you should share it for all to enjoy.”

“If you had a plant that is not native to a region or country, it would not have any natural checks. It would overgrow and over take the land where it shouldn’t be. It would suppress the other natural trees and flowers from growing.”

“I hadn’t thought of that.”

“You’re right Chloe. We didn’t think of that.”

“The problem is that man has done enough damage introducing plants where they shouldn’t belong. There are three trees that are native to other countries. They grow too fast in a southern state where we live. Fortunately there is a northern limit to some trees and plants.”

“Well, thank goodness for colder regions.”

“Brr . . . you can say that again, Lily.”

They land in their garden area. They see small fairy houses dotted about. They see beautiful flowers in bloom from all colors of the rainbow.

“Do you have magic to make a flower bloom quickly?”

“No, we don’t Chloe. The magic on our world was removed by the Creator.”

“Why did he do that, Ruby?”

“Because men and women abused it. They used it to control other people against their will.”

“Uggh . . . I would rebel against someone who tried to control me.”

“So would I, Ivy.”

“I do love the color of your clothes. They match your wing patterns very beautifully. Are they flowers?”

“Thank you, Rosetta. No, they are not. Touch them. They are made from cloth and thread. It lasts much longer than flowers.”

They all touch their edges of their clothes.

“You’re right. Flowers don’t last long on your world. Everything we have here will keep their color and freshness, even during the cold winter.”

“Where do you stay or sleep when it gets cold at night, Ruby?”

“We have our own beds and clothes. We sleep inside the apartment. They are in mothers’ satchel.”

“Are you referring to Brianna?”

“No, Richard is both our father and mother at the same time. Remember that he is dual gender. He was raised as a boy. He didn’t know he was dual gender until after his family was killed in a plane crash.”

“I’m sorry to hear that.”

“Even though his family is missed, Brianna’s family is alive and well. We enjoy being in their presence from time to time.”

“Well, lets get some food together. We are hungry again.”

Everyone giggles and laughs together. They soon realize there are some common traits between them.

~~~000~~~

Emeril and Esmeralda are following Tinker Bell and the other Tinker fairies to their Tinker village and workshop. They exchange their names in their flying group along the way.

They see a lot of busy fairies doing their tasks for the day. They land in the center of the village.

Fairy Mary walks up to them. “We are the Tinker fairies, Emeril and Esmeralda. We do all sorts of construction projects around here. We fix and repair things. We use and make all sorts of tools to help us. We also like to invent things that will make our lives easier. We find lost things and make use of them. Sometimes, a repaired item gets returned to the rightful owner, whether here on Never Land or on the mainland.”

“What or where is the mainland, Fairy Mary?”

“That is where you are from, my dear.”

“But, we have never seen you on our world. We heard of you from stories told on our world.”

“That’s right. We are aware there are twelve intersecting universes. We know how to get to each one. It keeps us very busy. However, there are some universes or Earths we’ll not go to. That is because the people are too hostile for us to be there. We hope someday as the Omega Unicorn stated earlier, fairies will come out of hiding and be accepted as part of normal life on all worlds.”

Then Bobble steps up to speak. “My name is Bobble. Have you ever made or built anything useful?”

“Not really, Bobble. We are very few in number right now. Father, mother will give birth to many more fairies over the years. It is expected that he will give birth to about eight hundred pairs of fairies by the time of the Ultimate Last Battle.”

“What?! That is sixteen hundred fairies! Where will you all stay?”

“We are taking it year by year as we grow in number. Richard will be a very rich man someday. He is looking out for our well being. We have no problems sleeping in the woods. There are ways to stay dry and warm. You just need to find shelter and fly south for the winter.”

“Yes, just like the birds do on Wendy’s world. I forgot about that.”

“Now fly along now, Bobble. You’ve got things to do.”

“Yes, Fairy Mary.” Bobble turns around and flies off to join Clank.

“Tinker Bell, will you please come here?”

“Yes, Fairy Mary. What is it?”

“You’ve been with Peter Pan a lot. What have you seen on the various Earths that you have been too? What are they like?”

“Well, the Earth that Emeril and Esmeralda are from is too hostile for us to be there. There is no problem with the children. They are like Lizzy. It’s the adults that are the problem. Some are too aggressive for their own good. There are still a lot of wars on their world. Richard has his work cut out for him to bring peace to the world and be accepted in the Local Group.”

“Hmm . . . that’s interesting. What is the Local Group?”

“Richard is one of twelve ambassadors to Twainor. They are from worlds in the area. They are to look out for each other. From what I have heard so far, that unification will help them repel any invader from another world outside their group.”

“Hmm . . . that’s interesting, too.”

“However, there is something new to think about. You know about that problem we had with Kyoto the dragon.”

“Perish the thought, Tinker Bell. Fortunately your new cage is strong to keep him away.”

“Here is something new to think about. Perhaps Richard can find a way to cure or mend his mind from being bad.”

“Hmm . . . That’s a good idea. But does Richard has the knowledge to figure out what is wrong with him?”

“I don’t know, Fairy Mary. But it is worth a try.”

“Are you saying there is a dragon here on Never Land?”

“Yes there is, Emeril.”

“Then we need to know his total background. How did it get here? Why is he acting badly? The dragon must be here for a reason. Perhaps father can give him a new reason to live so he won’t hurt others. He could be helpful to defend Never Land in the future. I can go on, but you get the idea.”

“You’re right, Emeril. We need to know everything about the dragon. We lost several fairies when they encountered his rage one day. We were sad for many days.”

“That is a normal grieving process, Fairy Mary. Life is precious in the sight of the Creator. But we are given choices on how to live our lives. There are consequences for each decision we make at each moment in our lives.”

Tinkerbell thinks and smiles to herself as she recalls a memory. Yes, that is what I learned the hard way when the moon stone broke into pieces. Fortunately, I was able to right the wrong. I renewed my friendship with Terence later in that fall month.

“Now, for this evening, you’ll be staying in one of our dormitories. I hope you don’t mind being split up.”

Emeril and Esmeralda look at each other with a smile.

“As long we are not too far apart. We can sense each other when the other one needs help.”

“That’s good. Emeril, you’ll be staying with our sparrow men. That is what we call our male fairies. Esmeralda, you’ll be staying with a group of our female fairies. We usually eat together. We have several kitchens to serve up our food. I think you’ll like what we put together.”

“So, in other words, it is not boring and tasteless.”

All of the fairies giggle and laugh together.

“That’s right, Emeril. Our food is definitely not boring and tasteless.”

Emeril and Esmeralda are led to each of the dormitories. They see comfortable beds laid out. They have leaf covers to stay warm under neath them. Once they are shown around, they gather back outside. They walk over to one of the kitchens. They are given an acorn cap full of food. They see acorn pancakes, cups of fruit juices, fruit pieces, etc., etc.

~~~000~~~

Bianca and Lavan are with the Water fairies. The Water fairies tell their names to them, Rani, Tally, Cera, Silvermist, Marina and Humidia. They are shown a beautiful area along a small stream. They see reed houses woven together. Some houses are built next to a hole in a tree that is carved out by woodpeckers.

“Well, this is where we live. I guess from seeing those wings. You don’t get them wet too much.”

“That’s right, Silvermist. We don’t like to get the wings wet. However, we are planning to learn the water element next.”

“That’s great, Lavan.”

“Rani, how come you don’t have any wings?”

“I sacrificed them to save Mother Dove’s egg. However, with them gone, I’m the only swimmer among all of the fairies. I get around with the help of Brother Dove.”

Brother Dove coos out loud, “Cooo!”

“But there is one thing we like to do when we are around water.” Lavan looks at his sister, Bianca, with a big smile. “Are you ready, big sister?”

“I’m ready, big brother.” She smiles back.

Lavan and Bianca fly up quickly. Once they find a fish under neath the water swimming slowly, they dive toward the water quickly right in front of it. They make a big splash when they enter the water. As soon as they enter the water, they fly out quickly. The fish jumps out of the water in trying to catch them. Bianca and Lavan are too high, the fish dives back down to the water.

Bianca and Lavan look at the other fairies with big smiles.

The other fairies laugh and giggle when they see the spectacle just performed in front of them. They all clap and cheer together.

“I love it! That was great. Apparently he thought you were his next meal.”

“That’s right, Silvermist.”

They gather around one of the homes. They bring out a variety of nuts and fruits to eat such as water chestnuts, blue berries, melons, etc.

~~~000~~~

Back at the home tree, King Oren and Queen White Dove follow the five fairies to their own abodes. They fly around toward the base of the tree. They see five well-made homes built into the side of the tree.

“We have room in each home to accommodate guests.” They enter Queen Clarion’s home. It is golden in color throughout the interior of the home.

They see a well furnished home with sitting areas and tables. Queen Clarion shows them the guest room. “This will be your room for the night.”

“Thank you, Queen Clarion.”

“Do you have such richness in your place on Earth?”

“Well, it might not glow with the golden edges. Our abodes are deep in the forest. It is a natural setting. During the Spring and Summer we are in the Appalachian Mountains. During the Fall and Winter, we are in a southern region where it is a lot warmer for us.”

“That’s right, you must move with the seasons.”

“That’s right. We are more connected to the land.”

They all walk into another room. They see a large dining table set up with chairs.

“We’ll eat here for the evening meal.”

“I have a question, Queen Clarion.”

“Yes, Queen White Dove.”

“After the meal, do you see the sun set as the sky changes colors and the stars come out?”

“We do. Why did you ask that question?”

“It is a custom for us back on Earth. It allows us to take time to see the beauty of the Creation from the Creator. Sometimes we see the moon come up as well. On Twainor, they have two moons around their world. Also, high in the night sky are two prominent nebulas. It is very beautiful to behold. The people on Twainor do it each night. It is a constant reminder to remember the Creator.”

“Yes, we can do that after we eat.”

Nuts and fruits are brought out. They serve themselves and eat the table. “King Oren, would please give the evening thanks to the Creator?”

“Thank you for the honor, Queen Clarion. Creator of the Universe, we want to thank you that we get to meet fairies on another world. They have a connection to all of the Earths. Keep them safe as go about their tasks. We thank you for providing the food we are about to eat. Thank you, Creator.”

Everyone responds together, “Thank you, Creator.”

They all participate in eating the evening meal. They do some small talk between each bite.

~~~000~~~

When we get done eating around the campfire, we follow the Indians to an over look area. We are standing on the edge of a cliff. We look across the water and see the sun set on the horizon. The sky and the clouds change color as it sets. Then the stars come out shining brightly. Then I see something that I didn’t expect to see in the night sky.

We see the Crab and Horse Head Nebulas. I also see the edge of our home solar system.

“How is this possible? Everything is closer here. Somewhere in that space between the two nebulas is Twainor.”

“The reason is simple, Richard. Since Never Land is an intersecting world, everything in this quadrant is a lot closer than it seems. Because of the magic on this world, it is not as far to the other worlds in this quadrant.”

“So, that means, when I visit the Pantheon Gods, it will be the same effect in the sky.”

“That’s right, Richard.”

Brianna moves in closer to me. We put our arms around each other and hug each other tightly.

~~~000~~~

All of the fairies on Never Land are looking up as the sun sets as well. Some clap and cheer to the grand spectacle they see in the sky.

~~~000~~~

We all retire to our beds where we are staying for the night. Some change into night clothes. Everyone has a peaceful night sleeping tonight on Never Land.

The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 5
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman

The list of characters mentioned in this story belong to J. M. Barrie, J.K. Rowling and the Walt Disney Company. This is a fan-fiction story.

~~~000~~~

While we sleep at night, I get a new dream from the Creator. I find myself flying northward from London on the British Isles. When I pass over Hadrian’s Wall, I see Scotland before me. I fly along northward, flying around and through the valleys. Then I see a shrouded valley covered with clouds. As soon as I pass through the cloud, the cloud disappears. I stop to get my bearings. I look up to see a blue sky becoming brighter with a few stars in the West. I look around to see a normal valley lit up by the sun that is just breaking over the eastern horizon.

“That’s strange Creator. I must be in a very special valley.” Then I hear the Creator’s voice in my head.

“You are, Richard. Keep flying up the valley. You will see a familiar sight.”

I fly up the valley along the long loch. When I make a bend around a cliff, I see a large building that I have seen on the movie screens and DVD’s. I see Hogwarts Castle. I stop and hover above the loch.

“This is not a memory from the movies. This is for real, Creator.”

“That’s right, Richard. You need to speak to someone from here. She is sleeping as well. That is her flying to you in a dream she is having.”

I look toward Hogwarts. I see a young lady flying toward me. Then Brianna flies up to me. She hovers by my side.

“The Creator asked me to be here with you.”

“Thank you, my love.”

The yong lady stands in front of us. Brianna and I hold hands together while we speak to her.

“My name is Hermione. I am the actual granddaughter of the one portrayed in the movies. What are your names?”

“My name is Richard Moore.”

“My name is Brianna. I am his wife. I can sense you need some questions answered.”

“That’s right, Brianna. Ever since my grandmother expressed her feelings on how that dragon was treated by being chained up, it has left a residual mark on her children. I didn’t realize it until recently when I did some research on dragon history and their connection to royalty.”

Brianna and I smile at her. “What did you find out?”

She smiles back, “I found out that King Arthur had the title of Pendragon. It means ‘head dragon’. It got me thinking about the red dragon on their country’s flag.”

“Did he have a name?”

“Yes, I found out his name is Y Ddraig Goch. I then started to do some more research on dragons here on Earth. I do know there is a group of dragons in Romania. That is where my great-uncle Charlie went. However, I kept thinking about the white dragon my grandmother rescued.”

“So, let me guess. You think there are more dragons here in Scotland.”

“That’s right, Mr. Moore. However, I don’t know where it went. It has to be another hidden place like we have here for this valley.”

“Well, from my own research, there is a white dragon associated with Scotland. Her image is found on older flags and shields. I found out her name is Albion.”

“Albion? Thank you for telling me that. I’ll need to double check that.”

“Here is something else to think about. Do you remember what King Arthur said just before he passed away?”

“He said he’ll come back when we need him the most. Also, his wife, Guinevere will be there as well. They will reestablish the true crown for the British Isles.”

“That’s right. So, here are some new questions for you. How many original houses are there on the British Isles?”

“I think there are three. That would be Cymry, Erie and Scot.”

“No, there are four. The one you missed is Pict.”

“Pict?”

“That’s right. They are represented by Albion, the white dragon.”

“I thought it was the unicorn.”

“A Scottish king chose the unicorn to replace Albion on the flag.”

“Now you are sounding, you know more than we do. You both have an American accent.”

“That’s right, Hermione. That is because our ancestors are from here. That unicorn’s name is Caliber. Our ancestors fled the British Isles to escape from Mordred’s Legacy.”

“Mordred’s Legacy?! I never heard of that group.”

“I didn’t think you would. You do know whom Mordred is?”

“Yes, Mr. Moore. He is King Arthur’s nephew. He became very mad when he wasn’t chosen to be the next king.”

“That’s right. Did King Arthur have a son?”

“If I remember right, his name is Loholt. But from what we know, everyone tries to claim they are descended from him.”

“I’m not surprised, but they are not. My last name is Moore. My wife’s maiden name is Wilson. I have an Erie and Celtic background. Brianna has a Pict and Scot background. Be careful in your research. You might get someone’s attention that is trying to make sure the, ahem, current royalty stays in power in London.”

“Thank you for the tip. Well, you have given me some more questions to ponder. Apparently I need to do some more research. I hope to see you both again, real soon.”

“You take care of yourself now. Study hard.”

“Thank you, ma’am.”

Hermione quickly hugs both of us. She turns around and flies back to Hogwarts.

“Do you think she’ll figure out who we really are?”

“She just might, Bri. But, she will have some tough decisions to make once she finds the answers.”

“Yes, she will.”

I look at Hogwarts again. “Hmm . . .”

“What’s on your mind, my love?”

“I think the basilisk underneath the castle gave birth to another basilisk before it was killed by Harry Potter. Right now the serpent is still in the egg.”

“You’re probably right because of your dragon instincts. Hopefully we can find a better solution for it at a later date.”

“Yes, before it hatches.”

We fade from view in the loch. We slowly wake up underneath the blankets in the wigwam on Never Land.

~~~000~~~

Hermione wakes up on her bed. She gets out of bed and gets ready for another day.

“Hmm . . . those two people I met last night in my last dream acted very strange being from America. They seem to know exactly what is going on around here.”

She continues to change clothes for the day and make her bed. “I need to check the Moore and Wilson family name very carefully. I have a sneaking suspicion they are the true descendants of the four ancient houses of the Isles. Mr. Moore gave the name of the unicorn as Caliber. The white dragon of the Picts is Albion. That is too much of a coincident. Also, he thinks Mordred’s Legacy is the one who is keeping the current monarchy to stay in power. Oh my head is hurting on this information hunt.”

She picks up her books and walks out the door, then she closes it. There is more to this than meets the eye. I know there are lots of more mysteries hidden here at Hogwarts.

She walks down the stairs. She pauses before a picture. It shows a lady wearing a black cloak. She whispers to the lady. “Do you know who or what is Mordred’s Legacy?”

“Shh . . . don’t say that name out really loud. Who did you just meet to hear that name?”

“I met a couple in my dream last night. I met Richard Moore and Brianna. Her maiden name is Wilson. They said they have their roots here. They are from America.”

“Oh saints preserve us. Thank you, Maker. The four ancient houses are finally reunited.”

“What are you talking about?”

“Did they tell you anything else?”

“Mr. Moore said the unicorn’s name is Caliber and the white dragon of the Picts is Albion.”

“Oh, that confirms it. Put your ear to the canvas. I’ll whisper the answer to you.”

Hermione puts her ear to the canvas. The painted lady whispers into her ear. Some students look at her strangely or walk past her quickly.

“You just met the future king and queen of the British Isles. I knew who the family names were, but not their first names. Are they a young couple?”

“Yes.”

“Good, that means they are not ready to rule. Only they would know the true name of the unicorn’s name. The white dragon’s name is a little easier to find. They have a lot of learning to do until the current monarchy collapses. They also need to solve some hidden mysteries that have lain dormant for thousands of years.”

“But, what can I do?”

“Keep their secret as long as possible. There is more to them than meets the eye. The prize and the two original rings will confirm their heritage. I remember hearing they have their true lineage written down.”

“Okay, I’ll try ma’am.”

“I know you will, my dear. Keep your ears tuned to the Creator. He’ll help guide your steps.”

“Thank you for the reminder, ma’am.” She steps away from the picture and walks down the stairs to the main hall for breakfast.

The lady resumes her pose in the picture with a smile, Heliotrope Wilkins. She is just like her grandmother. She’ll make her proud.

~~~000~~~

Brianna and I wake up at day break. We take the blankets off and sit up at the same time.

“Do you think our royal secret is still safe?”

“I think so, Bri. The Creator will have to help her and remind her what is at stake.”

“Yes, I see what you mean. Are you ready to meet Captain Hook and Peter Pan this morning?”

“I am. Are you thinking of staying here or coming with me?”

“I think I will stay here. I remember walking in that town. I got a lot of looks from the men and women there. It might be from being a new visitor, but some of those looks were too lustful for me.”

“Hmm . . . I agree with your assessment.”

We get ourselves dressed. I also put my armor and sword on. We step out to join the others around the campfire. We see there is fish and corn set over the campfire. We are handed oven baked clay cups filled with fruit juice.

“Grand Elder, Captain Hook asked me how he is going to communicate with Peter Pan when he needs to. I was thinking of using the crystals that are used on Twainor.”

“That’s a very good idea, Richard.” The SRU Wizard puts his hand into his coat pocket. He takes out two quartz crystals and hands them to me. “Don’t worry, there are spells set on the crystals. Also, it won’t be picked up by another star ship with their equipment.”

I put the crystals into my coin bag and put it back into the coat pocket. “That’s good. I find it a bit ironic that Peter Pan and Captain Hook are now working together to keep Never Land safe.”

Then I hear and see Emeril and Esmeralda flying toward me quickly. They are followed by several fairies.

“Father! Mother! There is a dragon here on Never Land!”

“His name is Kyto!”

“There is?”

Emeril and Esmeralda quickly land on my shoulders to rest. The other fairies land on several tree branches nearby. They watch what will happen next.

“Yes there is. However, he is currently caged so he won’t cause problems here on Never Land.”

“What kind of problems did he cause?”

“He killed several innocent fairies with his fire.”

“That’s not good. So, you are hoping that I would speak with him to find out why he is bad.”

“That’s right, mother. He could be useful to help defend Never Land.”

“Well, I need to know everything about him before I go out there to meet him.”

“We said the same thing, father.”

“Okay, I will make plans to be here again if I have to.”

“Thank you, father!”

“Are you going to meet with Captain Hook this morning?”

“I am, Esmeralda. You still have time to be with the fairies here. We’ll be spending one more night here. Then we must leave tomorrow morning.”

“Thank you, father, mother! You’re the best!”

Esmeralda and Emeril hug my ear lobes in affection and kiss them. Then they fly off to join the other fairies. They start giggling and laughing as they fly back to Pixie Hollow. We all laugh and giggle as we see them fly off into the woods.

After the giving of the morning thanks to the Creator, we eat our breakfast. When we get done, the Grand Elder speaks up.

“After your meeting with Captain Hook and Peter Pan, come back here. There are few more Indians and stories that we need to tell you. We’ll also talk about Kyto the dragon as well.”

“Okay, Brianna is going to stay here. I paid the inn keeper two pieces of gold.”

“Don’t worry about it, Richard. Those two gold pieces have been replaced in your coin bag. King Tierion asked me to put a refill spell on the coin bag. Any coin that you take from it and it is used, will get refilled from a separate treasury box that is set aside for you. There is a light crystal on top of the box. When it lights up, it will let them know you used your coin bag.”

“Thank you for telling me that. That solves a lot of problems for me.”

“Yes, it does.”

I walk to a clearing area near the campfire. I extend my feathered wings out. “I should be back in a few hours or marks on the sundial.” I put my helmet on. I flap my wings to fly straight up. Then I glide around the camp site before I fly off in the direction of the port town.

The others are looking up as I fly off to meet Captain Hook.

“He is a remarkable young man. The Creator chose the right one to be Omega Unicorn Dragon.”

“Not only that, Chieftain Talact. He’s my husband and soul mate. I love him very much.”

“I’m sure you do, Brianna. Well, while he is with Captain Hook and Peter Pan, we can do some things this morning like caring for the household and keeping your heritage intact over the years.”

“I have no problem with that. In fact, I already received some advice from some of the queens on Twainor.”

Everyone giggles and laughs together that every effort is made to make sure the family has a solid foundation in family values.

~~~000~~~

I fly close above the tree line. Some birds fly along with me as I approach the port town. Once I get close to the port, they fly off and continue on their journey. Some of the other birds decided to shadow me and to keep an eye on me. They told me they can send a message to an animal-talent fairy if help is needed. I land outside the town behind a building. I retract my wings back into my body. I take my helmet off and carry it with me. I walk into town down the main street to the docks. I get a few nods of the head from the men. At least they are showing me some respect. However, some of the ladies try to get my attention.

“Come over here, my knight in shining armor. I have a place for you to sleep tonight.”

“Nah, he’ll want to sleep with me instead. He slept with the local Indians last night. I’ve got a nice soft bed for you here.”

“I see you left your wife with the Indians. What’s the matter, honey? Are you tired of your wife already?”

I turn to face them. “If you want to know the truth, ladies. My wife loves me very much as much as I love her. Not only that, she is a lot better in bed than most of you put together. So, have a nice day, ladies.” I turn around with a smile and walk toward the docks.

All of the men in the street who heard me speak to the ladies, roar and laugh out loud. “Hah, hah, hah! He told you off! Serves you right! Hah, hah, hah!”

Most of the ladies give a “Humph!” They turn around and return back into their storefronts or homes. The men continue their tasks in the storefronts, docks and street. They chuckle to themselves that someone else told them the truth.

I continue walking toward the dock. I stop before the gang plank. I see Peter Pan flying in toward me. He lands besides me.

“Good morning, Richard.”

“Good morning, Peter Pan. Are you ready?”

“I’m always ready. I’m curious how you will do against Captain Hook in a sword fight. I might pick up some new moves from you.”

“The Captain could say the same thing.”

We both smile at each other, then we look up to the ship. We shout out together. “Permission to come aboard, Captain Hook!”

Captain Hook walks up to the railing and sees us standing down at the docks. “Permission granted to Richard Moore and Peter Pan to come aboard the Jolly Roger.”

“Thank you, Captain Hook.”

Peter Pan takes the lead and walks up the plank. I follow behind him. As soon as we get on deck, Captain Hook takes out his sword and quickly points his sword at my throat.

“On guard, Richard!” He smiles at me.

Peter Pan and I smile back quickly.

“I accept the challenge, Captain Hook. First one to drop his sword, is the loser and the fight is over.”

“That’s a worthy goal, Richard.”

“Then I’ll start here from your vantage point.”

“That’s the intention.”

Peter Pan takes my helmet and quickly flies up to get out of the way. He sits on a sail arm to watch our fight. I quickly back up a step and quickly draw my sword out. I bring it up to touch his sword and push it to the side.

Captain Hook steps back. We do the standard sword movement when two blades meet each other. “Clang!”

Then all of the men on the Jolly Roger start to shout out loud and cheer Captain Hook on to win.

We then start swinging at each other to find each other’s weakness. “Clang!” “Clang!” “Clang!” “Clang!”

Then Captain Hook tries a maneuver. Once our swords meet again, “Clang!” He tries to bring my sword down. As soon as our swords are horizontal, he comes in quickly with a slash to my mid-section. I quickly turn to avoid the slash. I bring my sword around to meet his sword again. “Clang!”

We smile at each other. We back up again to get our bearings. I then come in quickly. He brings his sword up to defend himself. “Clang!”

He then turns around to see if he can get to my back side. I see the slash coming around quickly. I bring my sword down behind me, sword blade pointing down. I block his hit. I then try to bring his sword down as I reposition myself.

This time we start to struggle against each other with our blades crossing each other. This time I do a quick maneuver with my wrists. Quickly I gain the advantage. Captain Hook quickly realizes the disadvantage he is in. Captain Hook’s sword flies out of his hand and upward in the air. It lands on the deck, pointing into the decking.

The men all groan when they see their Captain lose.

Captain Hook smiles at me. “Only one who is trained to use a sword properly would know that move. Well done, Richard.”

“Thank you, Captain.”

Peter Pan flies down and lands beside me. He hands my helmet back to me.

Captain Hook walks over to his sword to retrieve it. He puts it into the scabbard on his belt. “Follow me into my cabin where we can talk privately. Smee, you’re coming in as well to take notes.”

“Yes, Captain Hook.”

Smee, Peter Pan and I follow Captain Hook into his cabin. Smee closes the door once we are inside. We sit down on some chairs around a table. I see the cabin is pretty much laid out very decoratively that suits Captain Hook’s life style.

“So, have you given any thought how we are to communicate with each other, Richard?”

“I have, Captain Hook. I have it in my pocket here.” I take out the coin bag and open it. I take out the two quartz crystals and place them on the table. I put the coin bag back into my pocket. I pick up the two crystals.

“On the planet Twainor, they use crystals to communicate with each other. The world is also a magical world. However, the source of their magic is found in a special ore called the Ethereal Space ore. I have some of that ore on my armor here. It is very safe to use. When words are spoken for a spell to happen, the action gets performed. Crystals must be of the same frequency to communicate with each other. I’ll demonstrate.” I hand one of the crystals to Peter Pan. I put my right hand above the crystal in my left hand.

“I have to get the picture of the one I need to talk to in my mind, Peter Pan.”

Then the crystal in Peter hands begins to glow.

“Now, touch your right hand to the crystal.”

Once Peter does that, an image of me appears above the crystal in Peter’s hand. Also, an image of Peter appears above the crystal in my hand.

“That’s amazing.”

“That’s right, Captain Hook. Now we can talk to each other. Once the conversation is over with, we touch our hands or fingers to the crystal to end the communication.”

“Do I need that special ore here to use, Richard?”

“No, you don’t, Captain. These crystals are already set with spells for this purpose. Now you are wondering about how to turn invisible on the space ship we were just on.”

“That’s right, Richard. Can we do it again without you being here?”

“This is where Peter Pan comes into play. Peter, can you become invisible if you need to?”

“I can, Richard. That is why Tinker Bell is with me. She uses her pixie dust to do that. That is the source of our magic here, Captain.”

Captain Hook nods his head up and down with a smile. “That’s good.”

I hand the crystal in my hand to Captain Hook. He tries to communicate to Peter with the steps I just did. Soon both of their images appear in the other persons’s crystal.

“The nice thing about this Captain, distance doesn’t matter in this case. If Peter is somewhere here or on another world, you can still communicate with each other.”

“That’s good. But can the communications be detected by other star ships?”

“I was told these crystals won’t be detected by other star ships.”

“That’s good. We’ll need secure communication so that we can’t be detected. What happens if we find ourselves badly outnumbered? Whom can I call for help?”

“You can call Twainor. However, they have no star ship of their own built right now. They are planning to build star ships as quick as they can. But they can reach other worlds in the Local Group who can come here if you need help.”

“That’s good. Who would reach there for help?”

“There are several people I know there. One of them is King Dryden. He is the current leader on the planet. Then there is King Tierion. He is a good one to contact as well. I can contact them with the crystal on my helmet.”

I put the helmet on my head. I think of King Dryden. Soon the image of King Dryden appears in front of me.

“Greetings, Richard. What can I do for you?”

“I am on the world of Never Land here, King Dryden. I need for you to meet two important people here. Their names are Peter Pan and Captain Hook. They will be the main defenders for their world. They do have their own kind of magic here.”

“That’s good, Richard.”

“I have given them two quartz crystals for communication. If for some reason, they are over whelmed with a large number of star ships. I was hoping they could contact you for help. You can reach the other worlds in our Local Group for assistance.”

“That’s a very good idea, Richard. We can use the crystal frequency to zero on their location. Already, Wizard Eldwin here has figured out which direction their world is in.”

Wizard Eldwin comes into view. “This is interesting, Richard. If I’m looking at the star charts right now, Never Land is located within our Local Group.”

“That’s right, Wizard Eldwin. Never Land is an intersecting world. With their magic, they have access to twelve universes.”

“That’s very interesting.”

“Yes, it is. I was told there are four intersecting worlds in our galaxy. If those four worlds get destroyed, we will find the fabric of the Creator’s Creation start to unravel. I will be visiting these worlds to warn them of the danger that is coming in the future.”

“Yes, you better, Richard. Greetings, Captain Hook and Peter Pan. Welcome to the Local Group.”

Captain Hook speaks up, “Thank you, King Dryden. How many worlds in the Local Group has access to star ships?”

“Right now there are ten worlds that have interstellar travel. Some are close to achieving it. Have no worries. We’ll look out for each other. We can be there in a day or two if you need any help.”

“Thank you for your assurance. At least I know that we are not alone.”

“Yes, that is what we learned as well. We are not alone. We do have friends.”

Wizard Eldwin speaks up next, “What kinds of weaponry do you have on your world, Captain Hook?”

“Well, we have the standard use of swords. However, with the magic here, we can do almost anything with it. This sailing ship can fly into space once it is dusted with our pixie dust. We can suffer no ill effect being open in space.”

“That’s a very good tactic. Perhaps one of these days we can see each other’s worlds.”

“I have no problem with that, King Dryden. I can use Peter Pan here to transport us around here.”

“That’s fine, Captain Hook. Well, it is pleasure to meet you. Take care until we meet again.”

“Take care until we meet again.” Captain Hook touches the crystals with his fingers. The image disappears from view.

“Thank you very much, Richard. This is a very good gift. Thank you.”

“You’re welcome, Captain Hook.”

“Oh, there is one thing that is on my mind. Peter Pan tells me there have been some movies made about our exploits.”

“Yes, Captain. Is there one in particular that got your attention?”

“Yes, Richard. I understand there was a movie made about us when Peter and I got older.”

“Oh, that story. I take it there something you don’t like about it?”

“Yes, there is. If there is some way you can deliver a message to those movie people. I don’t want anyone having us look old.”

I smile back. “I’ll see what I can do, Captain Hook.”

“Good, at least it’s a start. I can surely tell you that Peter and I are not old.”

Then all four of us start to laugh together. We get up from our chairs and leave the Captain’s quarters.

We walk down the ship’s plank to the deck. We shake hands with each other again. Then Peter Pan flies off back to the Lost Boys encampment. I put on my helmet and extend my feather wings out. I flap them a few times. I fly off to find the Indian encampment. Once I get low enough, all of my own fairies join me, with some fairies from Never Land. We all giggle and laugh as we fly together.

I then land in the Indian encampment. Then I retract my wings back into my body. Brianna comes up to me to hug and kiss me.

“We got word from the birds who followed you. You easily defeated Hook.”

“Yes I did, Brianna.”

“The birds also told me what you said to those ladies on the streets.”

“Did I do all right there?”

“Oh, you defended me very much.” Then she whispers to me. “Tonight, I will thank you very much.”

I whisper back, “Oooh! A special night of thanks in bed tonight.”

We then turn around to rejoin the Indians around the campfire. We sit on the logs set about the campfire. My fairies then follow the fairies from Never Land back to Pixie Hollow.

“Now that is over with, we can talk about the other special dragons and mythical beasts you will need to find on Earth.”

“Yes, Grand Elder.”

The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 6
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman

The list of characters mentioned in this story belong to the various authors that created them. This is a fan-fiction story.

~~~000~~~
We sit on the logs around the campfire. The Grand Elder speaks up.

“The Serpent Mound in Ohio is a unique mound structure in the area. In fact, it is the largest mound structure in the world. When you arrive there, you’ll be given a tour of the place. Try to be there at the summer solstice sunset. The arrangement of the mound coincides with Draco, the Serpent among the stars. At one time, Thuban, a star in its lower body was the North Pole 5,000 years ago. It ceased to be the North Pole until the year 1900 before the common era.”

“The people who built the serpent mound have long since vanished, or so we thought. We have here, among us, one of the first Indians who arrived here at Never Land. I present to you, Chieftain Hileni.”

A man stands up, “Greetings, Omega Unicorn. It is a pleasure to meet you. This story is not too widely known among the people whom came after us. They only remember bits and pieces of it. The Serpent Mound was built to house the spirit of the last great horned serpent in North America. She made a deal with the Thunderbirds that her spirit should still rest upon the land while they killed her body. The Thunderbirds asked why such leniency. She gave her answer as such.”

~~~000~~~

“I know many have sought me to achieve great fame and wealth within the tribes. For just like you, we are protectors of the land in our own way.”

“That is very true. You are in the water and on the land, while we rule the air and the weather.”

“Isn’t also true of the news we heard about Caliber’s death from King Oren and Queen White Dove? We must be vigilant and be patient until the Omega Unicorn comes.”

“Yes, he will need us when the accursed Dark Forces come from the stars. We’ll be needed to help defend this world. Therefore, we will go back to our nests in the western mountains. When you are awakened by the Omega Unicorn, then you can summon us with the blazing diamond on your forehead. We will come.”

“Then my brood of eggs will each bear the spirits of my children. We’ll rise up to crush the enemy of the Creator. For the blazing diamond on our foreheads can vanquish the Dark Ones with ease.”

“Yes, the wind in our wings can disperse them with ease. I know you have lightning in your tail just as we have lightning in our talons. With our lightning eyes, we can see the true nature of the Dark Forces. I agree to your terms, Uktena. You may send your spirit to the mound that bears your image.”

“Thank you, kind and Great Tsidi.” Then Uktena leaves her body and enters inside the mound. She guards her eggs until the time is right for her to emerge to help the Omega Unicorn. Tsidi swoops down and picks up her body. He brings it back to the nest so their fledglings will have food to eat.

~~~000~~~

“So, when you arrive at the mound on that day, you can call forth Uktena. She will then rise up and call the Thunderbirds as promised.”

“If I were to arrive on a different day. Can I still talk to her?”

“Yes, you can speak with her, Omega Unicorn. However, she won’t be able to rise up until that day.”

“I was hoping for some sort of connection to her. I can’t be in two places at once.” I smile at the Chieftain.

He smiles back, “I understand, Omega. That is for you to discover.”

“I have a new question, Chieftain. This pertains to history. Where did Uktena come from? Did she come from the Nephelim?”

“She came from Leviathan and Eingana. She did not come from the Nephelim. She was accused by many tribes that she sent the snakes to harm them. However, that is not true. Those snakes were the accursed Nephelim beasts the Creator changed into. They kept the promise from the Creator ever since that fateful day the Nephelim was judged for interfering with our world.”

“Thank you, Chieftain Hileni.”

“I am the last of our people. When I came here, I discovered the uniqueness of each of the tribes here. Now that we have met you, our dreams and visions will finally come true. You have our prayers that you are successful to help the High King defend our beloved Earth.”

“Thank you, Chieftain Hileni.”

Chieftain Hileni sits down. Then another Indian rises up. “My name is Garud. I am from India. I was given the name in honor of Garuda, the great King of Birds from our ancient lore. I studied everything I could find about my namesake. I read many stories and legends. I discovered Garuda is known in other countries besides India. When I was brought here, it was then that I realized why I am here. I am here to tell you where to find Garuda. He is not on this Earth. He is in the heavenly realm of the Eternals.”

“I know which one you are talking about. I will be visiting that abode when I get back on Earth for my real one month honeymoon trip.”

“That’s good. But you don’t know which direction or which star system they are located at. How will you know?”

“I will be meeting the High King first in Israel. He will tell me what to look for.”

“Then I will have to trust the Creator that you will be told.”

“That is all we can do at this moment. We need to trust in the Creator.”

Garud bows his head. He turns around and sits back down on a log.

The Grand Elder speaks up. “Roc, the giant sea bird will be there as well, Richard. He will come with Garuda to assist him. There are nine dragon spirits in China. They dwell in the Cave of the Nine Dragons. About a thousand years ago, there was a Japanese General with the name of Ronin. At the time, Talpa, a demon general under King Azazel, came to our Earth to wage war. Ronin knew he needed a special armor and weapons to fight against this wave of darkness. He sought the help of anyone who could help him. He found help on the British Isles. He found Feanor. Feanor created nine gems for nine different weapons. There were nine dragon spirits who were on the Isles. They became intrigued by what Feanor was creating. They agreed that each one would send their spirit on a separate gem before it was set into the weapon. Ronin, then departed and returned to Japan. When he arrived, he saw Talpa was wrecking havoc to Japan and China. None of the forces were able to stand up to them. Ronin then engaged the enemy. With such ferocity, he was able to repel Talpa’s army. Talpa regrouped and decided to attack the lone warrior. Again Talpa had to retreat.”

“During this lull in the action, Talpa decided to take a different approach. He analyzed his foe very carefully. He came to the conclusion that Ronin’s armor and weapons were the keys. He didn’t know about the dragon spirits that resided in the gems. Talpa made another advancement on Ronin. He became determined that he wanted the armor for himself. So, he designed a specific attack on each weapon.”

“Ronin then retreated to China. Eventually, he found himself in a large cave system. He asked the nine dragon spirits to leave the gems and reside here. He wanted to keep them safe and not get corrupted by Talpa. The nine dragons greatly appreciated Ronin for his thoughtfulness. So, the nine dragon spirits left the gems to reside in the cave system. Ronin then left the cave system to return back to Japan in darkness. He was eventually surrounded by Talpa’s forces. But, Ronin stopped at a particular location in Japan. It is the location where the first atom bomb would be dropped a thousand years later. I was able to send Ronin to our nearest galaxy for safe keeping. But, alas, Talpa found out where he went.”

“This is where the story is picked up on your world When Talpa found him, Talpa was able to defeat him and take the armor for himself. Talpa felt invincible with the armor on him. So, he attacked again on Ronin. But Talpa didn’t know about the staff that Ronin had. It contained a very special gem.”

“So, Ronin took the staff to defeat Talpa again and retake the armor. This time, Ronin rebuilt the armor into nine different armor sets with the nine different weapons. Thus dividing and keeping the ultimate power hidden from Talpa. Talpa was able to take four of the weapons with each set of the armor. He gave them to four men who were worthy to receive it.”

“But, if I remember right, Grand Elder, that all took place in Japan. How could it have happened in another galaxy?”

“The reason is simple, my young dragon. In the Andromeda Galaxy, there are worlds that are similar to the stories told here. If there is a Japan type country here, there is a Japan type world there. In fact, it is the Creator who is giving the inspiration to the authors here about the stories that are being played out in the Andromeda Galaxy and elsewhere throughout the multi-verses.”

“Then where are the cartoon characters? Are they in their own universe?”

“That’s right, Richard. The fourth intersecting world is actually an intersecting solar system. We’ll be visiting a cartoon solar system. Because in that solar system there is a world where Santa Claus resides. The people and the animals there are life like. The artists on Earth make them look like cartoons.”

I put my right hand to my head as I look down and shake it from side to side. Brianna puts her hand around me. “Oh my head is spinning on this one.” I look up again. “You said there are twelve multi-verses. What are they?”

“The first one is ours. The second one is the cartoon universe. The third one is Q-Verse. The fourth one is Mirror Verse. Well, I could go on, but,” the Grand Elder smiles at me, “I don’t want to worry your brain too much right now.”

I smile at the Grand Elder, “Gee, thanks for your thoughtfulness. All right we’ll take it one step at a time.”

“That’s my boy. It is what I do to keep things straight in my head. Now as far as Kyto the dragon is concerned. You need to do some research on him. There are various books back on your Earth that tells his story. You need to read all of them. Not only that, you need to have a stronger will. He has become very cunning and very dangerous. He wants to destroy Never Land and Pixie Hollow very badly. If someone did get to him to make him go bad, you will have a hard time to get his yin yang in order. The only solutions I see right now is to show yourself as the Omega Unicorn Dragon. Hopefully, by seeing you it will shake him up to get himself straightened out.”

“I would need a talk with Eingana or Leviathan. Perhaps one of them knows what happened to Kyto.”

“It’s possible, Richard. Hopefully, with your unicorn gaze, you can get Kyto to speak the truth and tell you what happened before he came here. After our noon repast here, I need to tell you some stories from other worlds you’ll be visiting. This is just to prepare you for what is ahead. The last two dragons hidden on Earth are very unique. They are ice dragons. They live in a mountain cave in Antarctica. You’ll be down there at some time in the future. They will sense you right away as you try to find them with your own dragon instincts. Their names are Frieza and Frigga. The Emissaries tell me, those two dragons know all about the Nephelim star ships that are buried underneath the ice. They know the star ships will break free before the Ultimate Last Battle.”

The Indians get the noon repast together. This time we see several different kinds of vegetables are going to be cooked up. For the evening repast, they will cook fish for the evening meal. We continue with the light talk. After the noon repast we pick up where we left off.

~~~000~~~

Meanwhile, back on Earth. Tyrone has Josh’s father pinned against the fence while they have their outdoor break at the penitentiary.

“What’s the matter dad? You can tell me why you hit your wife and daughter.”

“No way I’m going to tell you anything, Tyrone. I’m keeping my mouth shut.”

“That’s fine. Have it your way. But all I have to do is spread a vicious rumor here that you did it. We’ve got some inmates here who are dead set against men who do such things. They would love to rip you apart. They don’t mind doing extra time in the solitary cell.”

‘No, no . . . don’t do that. I’ll tell you why. You can tell Josh for me. I can’t even face my own son.”

“Then why did you hit them?”

“They were going to go to the police when they suspected where I got the extra money from. I just lost my cool. I slapped them across the cheek and grabbed their arms. I was so mad. I was not about to lose everything that I worked for.”

“Well, guess what? You did lose everything.”

Then Tyrone steps aside. Josh’s father sees Josh standing there looking at him. “You should have never gotten into dealing with stolen cars. What were you doing? Were you using the cars as decoys to smuggle drugs and guns?”

“A lot more than that, Josh. There were also used to smuggle gold.”

Tyrone and Josh yell out together, “Gold!!”

“Yeah, that’s right. It took awhile to set up the network to convert the gold into cash. It was such a rush to see money coming in. We were all getting very rich. But, once the Feds investigated further, they found someone who was dissatisfied with the operation. They used him as a mole into our operation. Looking back on it now, we were having a harder time to find the right car for a client. Soon, the client wouldn’t pay what we charged for. Then the bottom fell out.”

“Well, you deserved it. Yow reaped what you sowed.”

“Yeah . . . we sowed nothing and we got nothing when it was all said and done . . . sigh.”

“See you around, dad.”

“See you around, Josh.”

Josh and Tyrone turn around and leave him leaning against the fence.

Josh’s dad grumbles to himself, “I also lost my family as well. Forgive me Lord!”

Then he hears a voice within his mind. Its about time you humbled yourself to admit you’re wrong.

I’m sorry Creator. I’m sorry for everything.

Now go see your son and ask him to forgive you as you forgive him.

Thank you, Creator, for a second chance in life. He stands up erect. He walks over to Josh standing with Tyrone in another part of the recreation compound.

They exchange the words. Soon, both are hugging and crying on each other shoulders. Tyrone is smiling widely as he puts his hands on both men’s shoulders.

Now, it is time for Michael and Darrell, Creator.

That’s right, Tyrone.

~~~000~~~

“The next world we’ll be visiting is Aang’s world.”

“Isn’t he known as the Last Air Bender?”

“That’s right, Richard. There are at least two dragons on that world. You will be there for a week. Hopefully, in that time you will learn the water element. You’ll be visiting his world from time to time to learn the other elements. You won’t meet the two dragons there until you are ready to learn the fire element.”

“Does that include my fairies learning how to move water as well?”

“Yes, they will learn how to move water like you saw on the DVD movie. There are several worlds that are in the Magic Universe that will need your presence. There are several worlds that are waiting for the return of the unicorns.”

“If that is true, does that mean I have to stay there forever if they saw my twelve images?”

“No, the unicorns that are on those worlds are well hidden. When you project your unicorn images, hopefully the people there will realize the wrong they have done. Then you can tell them about the danger that will happen in the future.”

“Are there Bluestones on those worlds?”

“Yes, there are Bluestones on those worlds. There is another multi-verse that will require your presence. However, you must wait until you have learned the tenth degree black sash. It is Demon World. It is the Purgatory that is referred to in the Bible. Another multi-verse you’ll be seeing belongs to the monsters. They include Godzilla, Rodan and the rest of them. Leviathan and Eingana gave birth to them long before they came to your Earth. However, as you know, Godzilla is the exception.”

“In the Cartoon Multi-verse, there is a lot to do there. The worlds we’ll be visiting there are the Cars and the Lunatics for example. We’ll also visit the Earth where the super heroes reside like Superman and the others.”

“What about the villains there? What about them?”

“They will be recruited by King Azazel to come to your Earth to wreck havoc.”

“So, that means I need to contact those super heroes and let them know where they went.”

“That’s right.”

“I take it that Q will do his part in contacting the people he normally comes across.”

Then all of a sudden, Q appears before us in a blink of an eye. We see that he is wearing his favorite Star Trek Uniform with the Admiral pins on the collar. “My, my, isn’t this a gathering here. It took awhile to find you, Richard.”

I stand up to greet him, “Hello Q. I was wondering when or where you’ll show up.”

Q turns to face the Grand Elder. “You have been busy as well I see, Grand Elder. Or should I say, wizard. Are you doing your part in this neck of the galaxy?”

“I am, Q. The Creator keeps me busy. You must already be aware that King Azazel is freed from his prison by now.”

“I saw it from my Q-Verse. The Creator and I had a short talk. He asked me to look up, Richard.” Q looks at me again. “We have a lot of work to do. I see you’re slowly earning the ten black sashes. I can tell you will be a responsible leader when you become king one day.”

“Thank you, Q. I’m sure we’ll keep in contact from time to time. But, then time and distance is measured differently in your neck of the Q-Verse.” I smile at him.

Q smiles back, “Yes, it is, Richard. At least I see your education is more advance than most humans I’ve encountered. You are more aware of what is going on. I’ll do my part in rounding up the good guys I know and bring them here. I know a few Borg Cubes that would love to join the fray here. Ever since Janeway disassembled their network, it has been easier for me to work there. However, the Bajoran Prophets will be a tougher nut to crack. Fortunately, my only link to them is Sisko. It is going to be very crowded here.”

“Yes, it will, Q. Hopefully we can convince the bad guys they are being duped in working for King Azazel. Because, with all of us here, he will send his dark wave of Darkness upon my Earth.”

“Yes, but at least we know that Light always trumps Darkness. Until, the next time we meet, Richard Moore, the Omega Unicorn Dragon.”

“Until the next time, Q. But, I know your time is not measured like mine here.”

We smile at each other again. Then Q disappears in a blink of an eye. The Indians then start preparing for the evening repast. We talk about some other worlds I’ll be visiting like the Eternals and what to expect when I get there.

About an hour later, the evening meal is ready. It is fish, vegetables and some fruit to choose from. We watch the gorgeous sunset as the colors change in the sky again.

Then finally, we all go to bed again. Under the covers, Brianna brings me to another erotic high as she thanks me for defending her when I was in the port town earlier this morning.

The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 7
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman

The list of characters mentioned in this story belong to the various authors that created them. This is a fan-fiction story.

~~~000~~~

When we finally fall asleep during the night, the Creator takes me to another world in my dream. I see a world that is very beautiful to behold. As I get lower, I start to see the familiar Air Temples from Aang’s world. Then I enter the spirit realm of their world. I land on the ground before a large cave. I wait for what will happen next.

Soon, I see a subtle movement inside the cave. I see a blue dragon snaking out toward me. Then I see a red dragon snaking out as well. They look down at me.

“Brother, we have a most unusual visitor with us.”

“Yes, we do brother. What should we do with him?”

“Let’s ask him some questions. From that we can tell if he is worthy to stay here.”

“That’s a good idea, brother. Here is the first question, visitor. What are our names?”

“Besides stating the obvious that you are red and blue dragons. I am guessing your names are Ran and Shaw.” Both dragons narrow their eyes down at me the same time. “However, from what I have read and seen about you on my world, I don’t know which name belongs to whom.”

“That is correct, visitor. The next question we have pertains to what we sense about you. You have some dragon blood in you and the smell of unicorns upon you. Explain this paradox.”

“I come from the world called Earth. My name is Richard Moore. Your story, along with Aang, Zuko and the others here are told on my world. Plus, there are many other stories told on my world. The dragon blood you are sensing comes from your Great Mother, Eingana. Your Great Father, Leviathan breathed upon me to activate the drop of her blood within me. I was chosen by the Creator to be the Omega Unicorn Dragon. Here is my proof, that I’m speaking the truth.”

I then quickly project out the twelve unicorn images. I quickly produce my feathered wings, retract them and produce the dragon wings. My eyes have a golden glow. Then Croin comes out of me. He hovers above my head. Then Croin speaks.

“He speaks the truth, dragons. For me, I am a memory for Richard here. He came to our world, the planet Twainor. He was chosen by the Creator to be one of twelve ambassadors to their world. I will now pass through you quickly. You will then get a memory update that I’m speaking the truth.

Croin flies through the two dragons. Then he flies back and hovers above me.

“Here is a demonstration of the air bending abilities I have learned.” I fold my wings back. I go through the basic movements. When I do an upper arm slash, a gust of wind flies out. When I do a horizontal wing slash, both dragons feel air brushed against their faces. Then I twist my hand quickly to produce a mini tornado. I move it about with my hands. I make it small or larger, before I disperse it in the air. Then I take aim at a nearby leaf. I do a crane wing slash, I slash a small ‘x’ on the leaf and yet it doesn’t slice into pieces. I then fly around quickly and do some maneuvers. After that, I hover before them. I flap my wings to create a wall of wind. Ran blows out some fire. I easily repel the flames and direct them away from us. Ran and Shaw smile slightly.

I come down and do the traditional bow and hand clasp. Then I rise up and put my hands down by my side. “I am hoping to arrive here to learn the water bending element from Aang. With each step I learn, I will earn the ten black slashes that leads to the title of Shaolin Dragon Master. Even right now, I am learning how to walk like a dragon. There are about forty masters on my world that have achieved this rank at any given time.

“You speak the truth, Croin. It is an honor to meet you, Omega Unicorn Dragon. When you come to visit our world, young dragon, you will need to find Iroh. He is Zuko’s uncle, he operates a tea shop. Once you find him there, he will take you to Zuko. Then Zuko will take you to Aang’s temple which is nearby.”

“You have proved yourself worthy to learn the next level. We will meet in the spirit realm as needed. But you won’t meet us until you are ready to learn the fire bending method.”

“We can also sense that when you learn the fifth element of spirit, it will be different for you. You will not be able to remove one’s element bending ability, that is reserved for the Avatar alone. You will use the spirit bending like how the Saiyans learned how to use it. But, with your abilities, you will be able to do more than them.”

“That’s right, my brother. You are more connected to the animals because of your unicorn abilities. For that, we will gladly welcome you here.”

“Yes, it seems our Great Mother and Great Father has indeed chosen the champion that will represent all of us at the Ultimate Last Battle.”

“We thank the Creator of the Universe that the Omega Unicorn Dragon is indeed the champion for all animals. He will bring harmony back to the worlds so that the animals and the two legged beings will finally be at peace. The two legged beings will no longer have to kill the animal for food. They will become vegetarians as it was meant to be.”

“So, that means, when I learn the water element, the eating of fish will become abhorrent to me.”

“That’s right, Richard.”

“Sigh . . . so be it. My wife will have to make a decision on how far she will go. At least I know that our children won’t be like me. They can eat meat if they want to.”

“Have no worries, Richard. She might be a lot more understanding than you think. Your fairies are already vegetarians.”

“Yes, that’s right, Ran and Shaw. Okay, I will wait patiently and take each step one at a time. I know I have been given a great responsibility. I will do it with honor and the best of my abilities. I won’t do it in anger. It must be done with a clear and calm mind.”

“That is all we ask of anyone who learns the elemental bending techniques. If it is done in anger, then you will never achieve the maximum results the Creator wants. We await your arrival here. You have our permission to come to this world.”

“Thank you, Ran and Shaw. You have made your Great Mother and Great Father proud.” I give them a formal bow and rise up. I then fade from view.

~~~000~~~

I wake up in the morning at day break. I open my eyes and see the top of the wigwam. Brianna slowly wakes up as well. We look at each other as we smile.

“So, what do you think of my thank you present to you?”

“It was breath taking, Brianna. You took me to another level.”

“Hmm . . . You are expressing it with a half of your heart. What happened last night?”

“I had another dream from the Creator. This time I flew to the world where we’ll be going to next. I met two dragons there in the spirit realm. They are welcoming us to their world. That’s not the issue. The issue is I’m learning the next element. To learn the water bending element, I must give respect to the wild life in the water. That means, I will become a vegetarian.”

“I see. That means no more fish and bird for you. I need to know everything about it. I need to see recipes for vegetarians. I need to find other sources of protein to help keep your muscles strong.”

“What about you and our children? I would think the children will still want meat once in awhile. Once they leave the household, they can do what they want.”

“That’s true. At least there is one thing about food preparation that is needed. All foods need some sort of spice and herb combination to help it. I have seen both sides of the issue with soy products. It is not the only bean that has protein.”

“All right, I give. I’ll leave it with you.” We take the covers and get ready for our trip to Aang’s world.

~~~000~~~

The fairies wake up in Pixie Hollow. After they have their morning breakfast, they all fly to the home tree. The fairies all gather around on the tree branches while my own fairies, King Oren and Queen White Dove walk down to the center. The Four Season fairies and Queen Clarion are there as well. Everyone gets quiet as Queen Clarion steps up to speak to everyone.

“Good morning, fairies of Pixie Hollow. It is now time to say good bye to our special guests. This is not a permanent farewell. We’ll see them from time to time over the years. Their tasks as fairies on their Earth are not finished. We must now send them on their way. I hope we have made a good impression on them to remember us always. We will count them as friends as they will for us.”

“It has come to my attention that Richard will come back some day to face Kyto the dragon. We pray that he is successful to find out why the dragon came here to destroy our world.”

“Now, let’s give them a Pixie Hollow send off.”

Then all of the fairies fly off the tree branches. They form two long columns from the home tree. The fairies from Earth get escorted by Pixie leadership and fly between the two columns. Some of the fairies fly toward the Earth fairies to hug them. Each of the Earth fairies receive a small gift from the fairies, a bag of pixie dust.

“Use the pixie dust wisely, King Oren and Queen White Dove.”

“We will Queen Clarion. Once Richard gets some Ethereal Space ore, we’ll compare it and see what happens. We’ll let you know how the dust reacts with the ore.”

“Yes, we are curious about what will happen.”

The Earth fairies are then escorted by the Pixie fairies to the Indian campground.

~~~000~~~

The Indians get the morning meal put together. It is another round of fish and vegetables.

I look at the cooked fish on the woven mat. “Sigh. . . “

Brianna sees my reaction. She knows exactly what is going through my mind. She whispers in my ear, “You need to tell them what happened last night.”

“You’re right, Bri.” I look up at my hosts. “Friends, something new happened last night.”

“What happened, Omega?”

“While I slept last night, I was given another dream from the Creator. I went to the next world that we’ll be visiting. I met two dragons in the spirit realm there. The next element that I’ll be learning there is the water bending element. The two dragons have come to the conclusion that I’m the champion for the animals. I’ll be representing them at the Ultimate Last Battle. If I’m representing the animals, that also includes the fish and sea life as well.”

“So, what you’re trying to tell us, Omega. You can’t eat that fish.”

“That’s right, “Chieftain Hileni. My wife and I will have to become vegetarians. However, our children can eat meat if they want to.”

“Then you must, Omega. That is the honorable thing to do.”

“Thank you, my friends.”

An Indian comes up and removes our fish from the woven mats. He places another vegetable and a fruit on the woven mat. We then give thanks to the Creator for all of his wonderful blessings. We then proceed to eat the morning meal. We get done in about thirty minutes. When we get done, we see Peter Pan and the fairies flying toward us.

The Never Land fairies land on the branches nearby. Peter Pan, the Earth fairies and the Pixie fairy leadership come closer to us. My own fairies fly toward us. They land on our shoulders and head. King Oren and Queen White Dove fly over to the Grand Elder and land on his shoulders.

“So, how did it go, my fairies?”

Tiger speaks up first, “It was great father, mother. They agreed to visit us now and then. They also gave us a special gift. Each of us have a bag of pixie dust.”

“That’s highly prized gift.”

“Yes it is, father, mother. We are curious how it will react with the Ethereal Space ore.”

“Well then, let’s find out. Grand Elder, if you please?”

The Grand Elder smiles, “Yes, let’s find out what happens.”

The Grand Elder walks up to me. I take off the belt and hand it to him. He turns around and faces everyone.

“Each of the small ornaments on this belt contains some Ethereal Space ore. This ore is from Twainor. There is Ethereal Space ore on Earth, but it is mixed in with the magnetic rocks. However, before the Great Flood, it was very abundant on Earth. The Creator removed the Ethereal Space ore from the people because they abused its power. I did found out the Eleven Magi on Earth were able to secure the last of the pure ore before it sank into the Atlantic Ocean. This special belt will allow Richard to do magic when he needs the armor on. Let’s see what happens.”

King Oren flies around and uses his bag. He opens it up. He takes a small handful from the bag. He let’s it pour onto the belt. All of a sudden the belt starts to glow with a golden color. Then the belt floats in the air. It becomes a circle. Then the space within the circle begin to get very bright. Then all of a sudden it starts to rain more pixie dust than what King Oren used.

Everyone “gasps” when they see the reaction. Then they all start to cheer out loud!

Queen Clarion flies up closer to see the reaction. Everyone gets quiet to her speak, “Well, it seems to me, that the Creator has other ideas about magic. It will be renewed when the time is right.”

“Yes, it will be, Queen Clarion.”

Then the Grand Elder steps forward and reaches for the belt. Once he opens the belt, the pixie dust stops falling. Pixie dust fairies quickly come forward with bags to gather up the fallen pixie dust. They will take it back to their shop for storage. They inspect the belt for any reaction or to find any pixie dust on it. An elderly male pixie inspects it closely.

“My name is Fairy Gary. We can’t find any pixie dust. It must have been absorbed into the ore. Put the belt on, Richard.”

“Yes, sir.”

I take the belt from the Grand Elder and put it on. This time, the belt glows with a golden color. The armor quickly gains a golden hue then it fades. “I think it got absorbed into the armor.”

“I think you’re right, Richard. Your magic should be a lot stronger now.”

“Yes, it will be. How does it feel, Croin?”

Croin flies out of me quickly. He hovers above us. “I feel much stronger now. It feels like Twainor.”

The Croin flies back into me.

“If we set up a ring of Ethereal Space ore in the woods, King Oren. It will be your souce of pixie dust.”

“That may be true, Richard. The problem will be the people. If they discover it, it might cause a lot of problems we don’t need right now.”

“You’re probably right, King Oren. But it does provide hope for the future.”

Peter Pan speaks up, “Richard, before you leave. Is it possible that Captain Hook and I can each have another crystal? We liked what you did in shutting down the star ships capabilities.”

I smile at Peter Pan. “I understand.” I turn to face the Grand Elder. “Do you have another pair of crystals, Grand Elder?”

“Of course, Richard.” He reaches into his pocket and takes out two yellow quartz crystals. “Touch your finger to each one, Richard. I will then copy the program that your wrote on that star ship. It can be used on any star ship. All you have to do, Peter, is touch the crystal on a display screen or a control panel.”

I put my index finger from my right hand and touch the crystal. The Grand Elder then hands the yellow crystals to Peter Pan. “Don’t worry, Peter. It will work on any star ship.”

“Thank you, Grand Elder.” Peter Pan takes the crystals and puts them in his pocket.

“It is time to go my friends. Richard and Brianna will be back one day to confront Kyto the dragon. If you decide to visit our Earth, you know there will be good hospitality for you there. Peter will let you know where Richard and his fairies are. They do travel to several locations. The best hidden area is where King Oren and his fairies stay near Richard’s cabin in Mt. Blanc, North Carolina.”

Brianna and I put on our satchels. My fairies fly into the coat pockets that I have on. Bianca and Lavan fly into Brianna’s coat pocket. Then the Grand Elder gets between Brianna and I. Then a light beam appears on top of us. It is from the Emissaries’ star ship. We disappear in a blink of an eye.

~~~000~~~

Kyto the dragon looks up at the sky and grumbles to himself. “Hmm . . I could have sworn I sensed another dragon here. Now he is gone. If that dragon ever comes back, I hope he breaks me out of this prison. We then can destroy this world together! Hah, hah, hah . . .!” Sauron would be pleased if I were to do that. He promised me that I can have all of the gold and treasure this world provides for my first dragon hoard. My older brother, Smaug, would be proud if I were able to do that.

The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 8
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman

The list of characters mentioned in this story belong to the various authors that created them. This is a fan-fiction story.

~~~000~~~

We travel in the Emissaries’s star ship. It doesn’t take long to arrive at Aang’s world. We look on the monitor screen to see their world.

“This visit is for both of you and your fairies. The wizard won’t be with you on this trip. We’ll be back here in seven days to pick you up. We have complete confidence that you will learn the water bending element. Brianna, it is time for you also to learn the martial arts. Richard will teach you the basics of the white sash in the Shaolin discipline.”

Brianna nods her head up and down, “I understand, Emissaries.”

“Richard’s fairies will also start to learn the water bending element as well. By the time Richard is a Shaolin Dragon Master, his fairies will be just as strong as well. When all of his fairies are united together. They will do the impossible as well. This unification will be needed during the Ultimate Last Battle.”

All of the fairies respond together in one voice, “We understand, Emissaries.”

“What about us, Emissaries? Won’t we be able to do those impossible feats?”

“You will, King Oren and Queen White Dove. Your clan will be taught by Richard’s fairies back on Earth.”

“Thank you, Emissaries.”

“Richard, we are going to beam you and Brianna down to a secluded area that is several blocks from Iroh’s tea shop. The name of the city is Ba Sing Se. Then you can walk out from the alley and get on the main road to the tea shop, which is to the left. The tea shop is located in the upper ring of the city.”

“Put these robes on. It is the current fashion for them.”

An Emissary walks over to a closet, he removes two cloak robes for us. They remind me of the cloak robes from the Shaolin movies that I have seen. We take off our satchels and place them on the floor. We put the robes on and button them in place. We then put the satchels back on our shoulders.

“Fortunately, you already have your armor underneath your current clothes. Keep your sword sheathed. Don’t draw it unless you are threatened.”

“At what point in the story are we arriving there, Emissaries?”

“That’s a good question, Richard. You’ll be arriving when Katara has given birth to their first child. Their third child will be an air bender. It will be six months after his birth. Zuko is the current Fire Lord. He still hasn’t found his mother yet.”

“Will he find her?”

“He will, Richard. He hasn’t exhausted all of the possibilities of where she is hidden. It will be the last place he will find her.”

“Did Aang find anymore air benders?”

“No he didn’t, Richard. New air benders will be born soon. Aang is slowly rebuilding the Air Temples one at a time. Right now he is at the Northern Air Temple. ”

Brianna and I hold our hands together. We disappear in a blink of an eye. We appear in an alley way. “Now remember my fairies, keep quiet as long as possible.”

“We’ll try, father, mother, Omega.”

We adjust our cloaks and put the hoods over our heads. We exit the alley and walk out onto the sidewalk and turn left. We walk past a large beast pulling a cart full of building material. The beast senses me quickly. We look at each other quickly.

You’re a beast, but you look human.

I am the Omega Unicorn Dragon on my world. I am here to meet Iroh.

He’s an honorable man. I’ll tell the other animals that you are here.

I am here for seven days only to learn the water bending element. I will be representing the animals at the Ultimate Last Battle. I will be here a few more times to learn the other bending elements.

Ah, that explains it. I am honored to meet you and your mate.

Then the driver on top of the beast yells out, “Come on now! Get going! We have work to do! I am sorry for the interruption, sir.”

I keep my head down and let the hood hide my face. “That’s okay, sir. We just had a nice conversation about the weather.”

“The weather!? Since when do animals talk? I never heard them speak a word!”

“Maybe it is because you don’t know how to talk to them. Besides, animals are very sensitive to the weather, land and sea quakes. Anyway, I have a question before you go. Where is Iroh’s tea shop?”

“His tea shop is the fourth building on the left. It’s called the Jasmine Dragon.” He kicks his legs into the side of the beast. “Come on now, get moving!”

The beast continues to pull the cart. The beast grunts a laugh as we walk by.

That’s the way to remind them. Heh, heh, heh, . . .

Brianna and I chuckle to ourselves when we heard his comment in our minds. My fairies chuckle lightly as well.

We walk down the sidewalk next to the street. I see other beasts in the street as well. We nod our heads up and down slightly. The beasts nod their heads up and down slightly in response.

We find the fourth building on our left. We see a large sign on an outer wall, “The Jasmine Dragon.” We walk up the steps and open the door and walk inside. Soon, we smell the wonderful aromas of the many different teas that are sold here. We see there are many sitting areas for groups to gather or to sit by themselves. Some of the sitting tables have windows viewing the outside.

A bearded man sees us come inside. “Welcome to Iroh’s Tea Shop, The Jasmine Dragon. Is there a particular blend you are looking for?”

“Some of those aromas I’m smelling remind me of the ones where we come from.”

Iroh smiles, “That’s good, my lady. That means I have a customer already.”

“Well, truth be told, we were just married about a week ago.”

“Congratulations on your marriage.”

We both respond with a smile on our faces, “Thank you, Iroh.”

“Now you didn’t come all this way just to meet me. Did you?”

“Not entirely, sir. We are here for you to take us to meet Zuko, your Fire Lord. He will then take us to see Aang. I am here to learn the water bending element.”

His eyes narrow at both of us, “Hmm . . . there is more to you than meets the eye. Please remove your hoods. I need to see your faces.”

We push our hoods back to reveal our faces.

“You’re not from around here.”

“No, we are not, sir.”

“Follow me. We need to meet in a private room.”

Iroh leads us to a large room. He slides the door and we walk inside. He then slides the door back.

“In fact we are from another world called Earth. Your story with Aang, Zuko, Katara and the others are told on our world. In fact there are many stories that we have written about on other worlds. I know for a fact they are for real.”

“I see, so, we are not alone in the universe.”

“No, we are not, Iroh.”

“Then you are here for a particular reason besides trying to see Aang.”

“That’s right sir. I don’t know when according to your time cycle, but on our world it is different. In about 800 years, our world will see a major battle take place. For lack of a better name for it, it is called the Ultimate Last Battle. It is when King Azazel will send his dark forces of demons and fallen angels to attack our world. We are expecting a billion star ships to arrive at our world to destroy it.”

“Why would he do such a thing?”

“Because he rebelled against the Creator of the Universe. He was thrown down to our Earth a long time ago. He refused to give the praise of the angels to the Creator, he coveted the praise for himself. When he was on Earth, he saw men rise up to take his place. He therefore became determined to destroy all mankind. If we don’t stop him on our world, he will come after others like your world here.”

“Hmm . . . I think you speak the truth on the matter. Ever since I became a true fire bending dragon, I have often felt the pulse of our world more acutely than others. Not only that, I also sense a darkness trying to creep back in that will disturb our just earned peace.”

“I have felt the same way as well. But in my case, I am different than the others on my world. We have Shaolin Dragon Masters on our world. There are about forty at any given time on our world. Some are good, some are bad. Or at least they have been told lies. There are no Avatars on our world. We have over one hundred countries on my world. We used to have magic on our world, but that was removed from the people because they used it to control people. However, there are still traces of magic hidden on our world. People have tried to find it and use it for the wrong or right reasons. The skilled martial art masters can do the element bending techniques. For me, I am the Omega Unicorn Dragon that is promised on my world. My wife and I will live long enough until this Battle is over with.”

“I see there are some common traits between our worlds.”

“That’s right, Iroh. Since I’m the Omega Unicorn Dragon, my wife and I can communicate with the animals easily with our minds. I already have made a connection to your animals in your town here.”

“Will you turn our animals against us?”

“No, that is not my intention. It is matter of giving them respect and taking care of them properly. When the Ultimate Last Battle takes place, I will represent the animals at the battle.”

“Ah, now I understand what you are trying to say. Do you mind if I give you a test? It is for me to determine if you are telling me the truth or not.”

“I know what test you are referring to. But after you test me and Brianna, you must test my fairies as well.”

“Fairies? What are those?”

“Fairies are small winged people. On my world, fairies come from male unicorns such as I. I am dual gender with both sexes. My wife Brianna, is a female unicorn who will give birth to our children.”

“Can I see these fairies?”

“Yes, you may.” I unbutton the cloak and open it up. Stay in this room, my fairies.”

“We will, father, mother, Omega.”

As soon as our cloaks are wide open, they fly out of the pockets. They quickly fly around. Then they hover in front of Iroh to check him out. They quickly talk among themselves.

“I like him, he has a good heart.”

“I like him too, Tiger.”

Iroh smiles at the compliments from the fairies.

“What kind of test is this, Iroh?”

“It’s an element test, my lady. You don’t have to do anything. The elements will react automatically when you are near it. I’ll be right back.” Iroh chuckles to himself as he walks out of the room. He comes back in carrying a tray. On the tray is a small ewer of water, a stone and a candle that is lit.

“Now my fairies, we must do this one at a time. You need to keep your distance and not get near it, but you can watch.”

“Yes, father, mother, Omega.”

Iroh takes the ewer and pours out some water on the tray. It is oblong in shape. Then it slowly forms a circle. The small stone is placed before me. It moves and stands up erect. The candle flame gets higher.

“Well, that answers that question. You do have the potential to learn the element bending techniques. The only question left is the spirit bending. What form will that take place within you?”

“Last night, I had dream that I visited your world. I met the red and blue dragons in the spirit realm. I know their names are Ran and Shaw.”

“That’s interesting. Continue with the story.”

“They said I am welcomed here to learn the element bending techniques. However, they said I won’t be able to remove one’s element bending technique. That is reserved for your Avatar. They said I will use the spirit bending like how the Saiyans use it.”

“How do they use it?”

“They use it as a weapon. They can shoot out large amounts of energy. If one is strong enough, you can withstand their attack.”

“Then you will need to learn the lightning attack as well. That is a special form of energy from the fire bending. I can help you there when you start learning the basics when we get to that point in your training. Let’s see how your fairies and your mate react to the test.”

One by one, my fairies come up. They giggle and laugh when they see the results. The results from the tests are the same for them. It is even the same for Brianna as well.

“Well, this is most unusual. I don’t see a family exhibiting these results at all. But, if the Creator is behind this, then you must be a very special family. I am honored to meet you and your family. Now there is one more test to do. I need to see a small demonstration of the air bending technique. That will tell me the extent of your abilities. From that, Aang might have you to teach you some more air bending techniques than what you know.”

“I understand, Iroh.”

I take off the satchels and put them on the floor. Then I take the robe off and hand it to Brianna to hold.

I step aside to get some room. “I am sure you are aware of the yin yang, the good and the bad in people. We must strive for a balance in our lives. While seeking that balance, you must have a clear mind and be calm with your thoughts.”

“That is what I learned a long time ago. If you have that teaching, then there are definitely connections between our worlds.”

“There are, Iroh. It is learned from the dragons. We have dragons on our world. However, they are hidden.”

Iroh smiles, “That is very good news.”

I smile back, “Yes it is. Within me is a drop of Eingana’s blood. She is the Great Mother of all sea dragons. I received it on Twainor a few years ago. When I returned to Earth, I then had an encounter with Leviathan, the Great Father of all fire dragons. They have given birth to all dragons found on all worlds. Only the Creator knows how they got there. Ran and Shaw would even recognize them as well.”

“That is good news.”

“When Leviathan breathed upon me the first time, I sprouted these feathered wings.” I sprout out the feather wings from my back.

“Oh my, they are beautiful to behold. Does your wife can sprout those wings?”

Brianna speaks up, “I can, Iroh. After I was changed on Twainor, I can now sprout wings like my husband.”

“Now, Iroh here is a question for you. Which part of my chi am I expressing myself here?”

“That is easy, Richard. You are expressing your good side or the yang.”

“That is right, Iroh. Then one day, I learned how to combine both the yin and the yang within me. This time, the wings will come out different.”

I retract my feathered wings into my body. Then I produce my dragon wings. My eyes are glowing with a golden color.

“In all my life, I get to see it for real. I see someone whom has combined both the yin and the yang perfectly. Truly, you are a dragon.”

“Thank you, Iroh. Now, here is a small demonstration of my air bending techniques.” I fold my wings behind me.

I twist my hand to form a mini tornado. My fairies gather around quickly in a circle in front of me. I send the mini tornado them. They catch with it their hands. They play a game of catch with it. When each one has a turn playing with it, they quickly dispel the mini tornado into the air with their wings.

“I love it. That was great.”

All of my fairies smile and give a bow, “Thank you, Iroh.”

“You’re welcome. Now I presume you know how to fly with those wings?”

“I do, Iroh. I can do some very tight moves, dives, sweeping moves and so on. I can even create a wall of wind to keep the flames away and redirect it elsewhere.”

“That’s good, Richard. For your benefit, when you start learning from Aang, you must be able to do those air bending techniques without resorting to extending your wings. If you can keep them hidden, then you will have the advantage when you do need them.”

“Hmm . . . I see what you are saying.” I retract the dragon wings back within my body. My eyes return to normal. I take the robe from Brianna and put it on. Then I put the satchels back on the shoulders. Brianna does the same as well with her robe and satchels. My fairies quickly fly back into our coat pockets. We then button the cloaks back up.

“Fortunately, Zuko is here right now. He is visiting the Earth King. They are discussing what else needed to bring peace to the world. Follow me please.”

We follow Iroh out of the tea shop. He talks to a co-worker who will over see the shop while he escorts us to the royal building.

It takes awhile to walk down the streets to the main royal building. We get stopped at the main doors by the guards there.

“What is your business here, Iroh?”

“I am escorting these two people to see Zuko only.”

“That’s fine, Iroh. He is now free to meet people this morning. You know which way he is located.”

“I do, guards. Thank you for your assistance.”

Iroh leads us down the hallways until we come to a side room. There are two fire nation guards at the door. They come to attention when Iroh comes near. They turn and open the doors to the side room. A man comes up quickly to greet Iroh.

“Hello Iroh. What can I do for you?”

“I have two people here that want to meet with Zuko. Is he available?”

“He is, Iroh. Right now he is trying to calm down from the latest talks with the Earth King. It was a bit grinding on him. This will be a nice distraction for him.”

“I appreciate it. Thank you.”

We follow Iroh and see Zuko sitting on his portable throne. He looks up and sees his uncle approaching him. He smiles and steps down to greet him.

“It’s good to see you, Uncle Iroh.”

They hug quickly and break apart.

“It’s good to see you again, Zuko. How is it been going?”

“We are making headway in the talks. I see two people behind you that I’ve never seen before.”

“You haven’t Zuko. They are visitors to our world.”

Zuko quickly catches the inference with his words. He comes in close to whisper.

“They are from outside our world?”

“They are Zuko. They are here to see Aang. They have business with him. He and his wife are here to start learning more air bending techniques.”

“They are air benders? He appears to be a warrior. I can see he has armor underneath his robe.”

“I saw it too, Zuko. On his world they have masters who can do all of the element bending techniques. However, there are forty at a given time.”

“Hmm . . . that is most unusual. All right, I’ll take them to Aang. He is at the nearby Northern Air Temple.”

They break apart and approach us.

“I’ll take you to see Aang. It will be good to see him again as well. We have an air bison right here for me to use. It allows me to get around quickly.”

We follow Zuko and Iroh down several hallways until we come to a large open area. We see several bisons on the large quad grass area. A bison quickly recognizes him. He walks up to Zuko and stops.

“We need to see Aang at the Northern Air Temple.”

The air bison nods his head up and down. He kneels down for us. We climb up his tail and get into the large saddle seating mounted on his back. The air bison then floats into the air. Once he is high enough, he flaps his tail to move forward.

“What are your names?”

“My name is Richard Moore and this is my wife, Brianna. I am here to start learning the water bending. Hopefully I will get it learned in seven days.”

“Usually that take years to get it right.”

“Don’t worry. I have had about twelve years of martial art studying. I have the first degree in the black sash. Once I earn all ten black sashes, I will be a Shaolin Dragon Master. During that time, I will be learning all five element bending techniques.”

“I will need to see a demonstration when we see Aang. Iroh and I need to know everything about you.”

“I have no problems with that, Zuko. Your world is told about in stories on our world.”

“Do you know where my mother is hidden?”

“You will look everywhere, Zuko. It will be the last place that you will find her.”

“Sigh . . . well at least that provides some hope.”

We fly high above the ground. Soon we see the Northern Air Temple at the edge of the seas. Across the expanse of the water, we see the large island for the Northern Water Tribe. We make our descent to the Northern Air Temple. We see several Earth Benders helping Aang in rebuilding the Northern Air Temple.

They look up to see us flying in. The air bison hovers lower to the landing area for us to disembark. We climb down from the air bison.

Aang quickly smiles as he sees us. He runs up to greet us. He hugs Zuko and Iroh quickly.

“What brings you here, Zuko and Iroh?”

“Some two students for you to teach.”

“That’s great, Iroh. Which tribe are they from?”

“They are not from here, Aang. They are from another world.”

“What?!”

The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 9
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman

The list of characters mentioned in this story belong to the various authors that created them. This is a fan-fiction story.

~~~000~~~

We fly high above the ground. Soon we see the Northern Air Temple at the edge of the seas. Across the expanse of the water, we see the large island for the Northern Water Tribe. We make our descent to the Northern Air Temple. We see several Earth Benders helping Aang in rebuilding the Northern Air Temple.

They look up to see us flying in. The air bison hovers lower to the landing area for us to disembark. We climb down from the air bison.

Aang quickly smiles as he sees us. He runs up to greet us. He hugs Zuko and Iroh quickly.

“What brings you here, Zuko and Iroh?”

“Some students for you to teach.”

“That’s great, Iroh. Which tribe are they from?”

“They are not from here, Aang. They are from another world.”

“What?!”

“You heard me, Aang. They are from another world.”

Aang looks at us to see if Iroh is right.

“Hmm . . . I think he is hiding his abilities. If he is, he is very good at it. Let’s begin with your names and where you are from.”

“My name is Richard Moore. This is my wife, Brianna. We are from the planet Earth. Your story is told on our world. In fact, we have many stories from many other worlds told and written there. I need to tell all three of you our full story. Is there a place that is more comfortable?”

“There is, Richard. Please follow me.”

We walk along a worn path toward a courtyard area. We see a circle of benches that has a wonderful view of the ocean. We can barely see the Northern Water Tribe’s island. We sit down where we want. Brianna and I sit next to each other on a bench.

“I guess I’ll begin with my story. It is connected to Brianna as well.”

I then start to give a summarizing story of my life. That includes how I met Brianna the first time and later when I was in the hospital. Then I relate the time when was I asked to be the Outside Helper for Twainor. I also tell them that some day in future, Brianna and I will be the Queen and King of the British Isles. “When I was told I’ll be giving birth to my own fairies, I found it hard to accept it at first. It also ranks up there when I learned I was dual gender during my time in college. It was a bit overwhelming at first. But, I knew the Creator has chosen me to be the Omega Unicorn Dragon. Now, I must introduce to you, my fairies.” Brianna and I unbutton the robes. “The first pair who came heart attached to me are Amber and Cobalt. They are from Avel the Unicorn on the planet Twainor”

Amber and Cobalt fly out of my pocket. They quickly land on my shoulders. They have big smiles on their faces.

“Then I gave birth to my first born pair, Tiger and Tigress.”

Tiger and Tigress fly out of a coat pocket. They immediately land on the top of my head. They have big smiles on their faces.

“The next pair is Lavan and Bianca. They are heart attached to my wife, Brianna.” Lavan and Bianca flies out of Brianna’s coat pocket. They land on her shoulders with big smiles on their faces.

I call out each pair of names, Ruby and Rubio, Esmeralda and Emeril. They come out of the pockets and sit near us. “The last pair of butterflies is very unique. Their names are Levi and Shiri.”

They fly out and hover in front of us. “They were born after Leviathan breathed upon me. All of these fairies have another form. They can change into butterflies.”

All of the fairies change into butterflies in little flashes of light.

“Levi and Shiri have another form. They can change into dragon butterflies.”

Shiri and Lavan change into dragon butterflies in another little flash of light. They quickly blow some flames as they fly around each other.

Aang, Zuko and Iroh quickly smile when they see the wonderful demonstration from Levi and Shiri. Then all of my fairies quickly change back into their normal selves.

“As I learn the element bending techniques, so will they. Even my wife will start learning this as well.”

“That is a fantastic story, Richard. I have a new question. Usually when we see someone wearing armor such as yours, we usually find a way to exploit it and use it against you.”

“I realize that, Iroh. However, this armor is from Twainor. It has magical capabilities. It can become invisible and appear somewhere else. The metal in the sword and the armor is a special combination of the Ethereal Space ore and the Evenshard stone. What that means is this. I can withstand a laser attack or probably your lightning attack with ease. I then can redirect that energy to somewhere else.”

“That we would like to see. Get yourself ready, Richard.”

“Yes, Aang.” I stand up before them. “Now here is what I can do with magic. Outer clothes off, folded up on the stone bench.” The outer clothes I’m wearing quickly disappear in a blink of an eye. The clothes appear on the stone bench in a blink of an eye. “This helmet I’m wearing is very special. I don’t have to recite the words out loud to do the magic. All I have to do is think of the words, and it will happen. On the wrist gauntlets are darts. I can put a spell on them to behave a certain way. I can put a sleep or freeze spell on the darts. Once the darts are launched, I can direct which way I want them to go. If the sleep dart hits you, you will fall asleep immediately. It will be up to me when you wake up. The freeze dart will make you frozen where you stand. I can control when it will stop freezing like letting your mouth not get frozen so you can speak. But ordinary heat and flames can thaw you out if you want to.”

“Can you set a poison on those darts?”

“I can if I want to, Iroh. But that is not my agenda. I want people to live after the encounter. It will give them an opportunity to think over their lives and hopefully they will change so they will be better citizens.”

“Excellent. You are concerned and care for all people, even the animals. I just want to make sure what your motives are.”

“Now I need to give you proof that I’m telling the truth.” I look behind the group. I see animals coming in closer. They are waiting as well. “Hold still everyone. We have some guests here. They are waiting as well.”

Iroh, Aang and Zuko slowly look around. They see several birds, one flying lemur and other animals coming in closer. They are amazed at the sight.

Brianna quickly stands up. She gets into position. Brianna and I extend our arms outward. Then all of a sudden the twelve images of the unicorns come out from me and the six unicorn images come out from Brianna.

Then all of a sudden the animals, sound out their calls. Brianna and I let the animals come close to us. We let them brush up against us. We blow some air to let the birds fly through. All of them chirp, snort, bray out their calls in delight.

“I have never seen this type of reaction, Zuko and Iroh.”

“Neither have we, Aang.”

Slowly the animals return back where they come from. Brianna and I retract the unicorn images back within us. “Now for the feathered wings, Brianna.”

We concentrate on ourselves, the feathered wings quickly come out from us. We fly up in the air quickly. We are joined by our fairies, the birds, the flying lemur and the air bisons. We do several maneuvers flying around. They all enjoy it. Even the Earth benders look up in the sky to see what is happening. Iroh, Aang and Zuko have big smiles on their faces. Once we get done flying around, we come back to land back where we started. The air bisons return to the landing area. Most of the flying birds return back to their flocks. However, two or three flying birds and the lone flying lemur stay nearby.

“What you just saw is the yang side of me. I will now combine both the yin and the yang within me. This time a different pair of wings will come out.”

I concentrate quickly. My feathered wings retract back within me. I quickly sprout out my dragon wings, my eyes have a golden color.

“Gasp! You did it! I feel a true dragon before me. You are more powerful than before.”

“However, I have yet to master all of the element bending techniques, Aang. Right now, I can do the air bending with ease.”

“Can you retract your dragon wings and still combine both sides?”

“I haven’t done it, Aang. Iroh made the suggestion when I met him earlier this morning.”

“Well, you must try, Richard. You can use the wings later, if and when you need them for your own surprise.”

“Yes, Aang.” I look within myself. I see the energy flowing within me. I concentrate on each aspect. I see the dragon wings within myself. I keep the energy flowing while I retract the dragon wings. Then the dragon wings quickly retract within myself while I still keep the balance.

“You did it! That is great. I felt your effort from here. That is the way to do it. Now let’s see those air bending moves.”

“What I will show you are the moves I learned from my Shaolin master. They will be incorporated into the animal moves that I have learned so far. I am also well versed in how to use several weapons as well.”

“I expect nothing less, Richard.”

“Have a leaf in your hand, Aang. There will be a move that I will do to it.”

“Okay, Richard.” Aang quickly looks for a small leaf. He finds it and picks it up. He holds it by the stem.

I then start going through the moves. I first use the weapons that I have on me. When I use a star, I aim for the tree that is behind Zuko and Aang. I aim it just right. It flies between their heads. They looked afraid for a second, but calmed down when they realize I’m a good marksman. I then recall the star back to me with a silent spell. It flies back to my hand and I catch it between my two fingers. I then put the star back behind my breast plate. Then I summon by magic, one by one, my staff, the numchucks, the sais, two batons. Each time I get done with a weapon, I make it disappear by magic. If you’re wondering where I’m getting them from, I am summoning them from my apartment closet.

When I get done with the weapons, I start doing the animal fighting forms. However, this time a new reaction takes place. When I do the tiger stalk, a faint image of the tiger appears around me. As I do the slashes with my arms, the tiger imitates the move as well.

“Roaar!” This time the roar is more heart felt. The rush of wind flies out from my arm. I move a bunch of leaves along the ground from me in a large wave of wind.

Everyone has a big smile on their faces.

I then move into the snake moves. Again the image of a coiled snake appears around me. As I move along the ground, the snake coils and uncoils as I move about. Then I do a strike into the air. The snake strikes as well. I then move about some more. This time I do a lunge to wrap my arms around an imaginary foe. The snake image coils its body in mimicking my moves. I land on the ground and uncoil quickly. Then I move into the horse stance by rolling and standing up quickly. The horse image appears around me. I stomp my feet a few times. When I stomp the ground, everyone feels the vibration in the ground.

“What’s this? He has already learned the first basic move for Earth Bending. I felt the vibration, Iroh.”

“We all did, Aang. This is incredible.”

Then I do the dragon walk. They are amused that I’m walking like a dragon. A small winged dragon gets superimposed around me while I walk like a dragon. However, it is not Croin. You might say it is his younger brother.

Are you surprised, Croin?

I am not, Richard. I have always considered you as my younger brother. Heh, heh, heh . . .

I then go into the stance of the mantis. An image of the preying mantis appears around me. I do some quick jabs and hit blocks. The preying mantis quickly imitates my moves. Then I move into the blue scorpion moves. An image of the blue scorpion appears around me. This time I look stronger and more menacing. I do the moves for that as well.

“Get ready with the leaf, Aang. Hold it high above you. Iroh, I need your body for a launch.”

Aang stands up and holds the leaf above his head. Iroh stands up as well. The image of the crane appears around me. I quickly do the crane kicks. They feel the air brush past them. Then I run up to Iroh. I quickly jump up and put my right foot on his chest. I leap even higher this time. I come down with a double crane wing slash that is aimed at the leaf. I cut a small ‘x’ on the leaf without slicing it into pieces. I land on my feet in a somersault. I then stand up erect breathing slowly.

Aang, Iroh and Zuko are smiling when they see the small cut I made on the leaf.

I raise my hand in front of me. I quickly give it a quick twist. A small mini tornado appears. I make it larger or smaller. When I make it smaller, I yell out, “Get ready, my fairies.”

They quickly fly around in a circle in front of me. I send it to Tiger first. He catches the tail of the mini tornado with his hand. He plays with it from hand to hand before he sends it to another fairy. Once all of them have played catch with it. They quickly fly around it to dispel the mini tornado into the air.

As I breathe slowly some more, my eyes return to normal.

Everyone shouts out with clapping of hands, cheers and accolades.

“That was a beautiful demonstration!”

“That’s amazing! Even your own fairies have learned how to air bend!”

“Those animals we saw, are they from your world, right?”

“They are, Aang. A long time ago, the battles in one country were too even. Then a monk noticed the animals. He copied the moves from the animals to form a new fighting style. Soon, it was taught to the other students and warriors. The size of the two insects is really small.” I quickly wave my hand to show their true size.

“I thought so. What was that four-legged beast? You stomped your foot and we felt the vibration in the ground.”

“That was the horse. That is not our largest animal. The largest land animal that we have is the elephant.” I wave my left hand, the image of an elephant appears.

“Oh, my. That is a huge animal.”

“Yes, it is, Zuko. When I start to learn the Earth bending, the foot stomp from the elephant will really send out the vibrations.”

“I believe you, Richard.”

“Can you bring up images of the people you have met so far?”

“I can, Iroh. The first ones I’ll show are my family.” The images of my family appear to my right. “They were all killed in a plane crash while I was in school. Once in awhile I’ll see them in my dreams when I sleep at night.” Then I wave my hands again. The people I met on Twainor appear.

“All of these people are alive. If you noticed, I met some dragons there as well. The largest dragon you see is Eingana. She is the Great Mother of all sea dragons. This is Marcon, Ryujin. They are brothers. The reason why Ryujin is white is a rather interesting story. He can generate very powerful lightning strikes from his claws and tail. He can still breathe flames if he wants to. These eleven people that are different from everyone else are the Ambassadors to Twainor. They are the Outside Helpers for Twainor. Each one of us has a different talent. There is one memory that is special to me. His name is Croin. He was the first dragon I met on Twainor.”

Croin flies out of me quickly. He spreads his wings out and hovers above me with a smile.

“What makes him unique is that his flames can be hot or cold. All dragons and unicorns on Twainor can talk. Hello Croin.”

“Hello, Richard. It is an honor to meet you all.”

Aang responds, “It is an honor to meet you as well, Croin.”

“He can lend me his wings if I should get tired.”

“Do you live off of Richard’s energy, Croin?”

“I do not, Iroh. Memory has no energy. But I can use the magical energy that is stored in Richard’s belt. It contains the Ethereal Space ore. When I’m back on Earth, I will sleep at night in a cave carving from Twainor. I can restore my energy that way. I only reside in Richard as extra protection if he should need me. I can become invisible to check out an area for possible traps and such. He helped Twainor immensely a few years ago when a space ship came to rob us of our wealth. Richard’s ideas quickly turned the tables so we can rescue the inhabitants of the space ship from two mind-bending giants who seized control of the star ship.”

“What is your expertise, Richard?”

“It is security. I have created a very powerful computer program that can block all of the known viruses that can attack and disable a computer network. Do you have electrical inventions here?”

“Hmm . . . I don’t think so, Richard. Mainly this is a mystical world. Can you describe it in another way?”

“I think I can. Our technology progressed through the ages. The first one is the power of fire. We were able to build steam boats such as your war ships. Or steam powered trains.” I wave my hand, the image of steam powered boats and trains appear. “As you can see, tracks of metal are used to guide the train.”

“That wouldn’t work on our world. Earth benders could easily disrupt that technology.”

“Then we looked at the power of lightning and how to control it. We were able to create large electrical engines that would supply power to the homes and factories.” I wave my hand to show those images of dams and energy plants.

“Hmm. . . I don’t think that will work either. All it takes is a fire bender with an electrical attack to disrupt that technology.”

“Yes it would, Zuko. But, you have to remember, for our world, we have no magical powers on my Earth. This is our type of magic. From that understanding of electricity we were able to create computers to network the world. This is done through the air or via satellites that we have orbited our world.” I wave my hand again to show pictures of computer screens of information scrolling by or showing images of the internet in use by people.

“Hmm . . . that is very interesting. You seem to have combined the old world with a new world. The mystical world is an intricate part of your inner world with the modern world acting on the outside.”

` “That’s right, Iroh. I encountered the same thing on Twainor. Therefore, I operate within their understanding. For instant, they use crystals to communicate with each other. Distance is not a problem when using the crystals. I’ll demonstrate.” I think of King Dryden. Soon his image appears in front of me.

“Ah, I was wondering when you’ll call again, Richard. King Oren and Queen White Dove appeared here not too long ago. They told me you are learning some more martial art lessons. What world are you on? Grand Wizard Eldwin is triangulating your location.”

“I am on the world of the Avatar. This world has some very strong magic. They can element bend what is around them. They can element bend air, water, earth, fire and spirit.”

“I understand now. The five basic elements of a world. Eldwin has located your world. You are within our Local Group. Welcome to the Local Group. My name is King Dryden. I am the elected grand king here for our world. There are sixteen kingdoms here.”

“Thank you for the introductions. There are royalties here, but they are elsewhere. Our world is divided according to the four element bending techniques. They are designated as tribes or kingdoms. My name is Fire Lord Zuko. This is my uncle, Iroh. He is a very powerful fire bender within our nation. He has earned the title of Dragon of the West. This is Aang, who is the current Avatar at this time. The Avatar is the only one who can do all five elements at once. There is an Avatar for each generation. The Avatar’s purpose is to keep the peace on our world. We are glad that Richard is here. We’ll teach him the five elements to make sure he is well equipped to be the promised Omega Unicorn Dragon on his world.”

“Thank you for looking out for him and his family.”

The image in front of me changes to a star field and Wizard Eldwin. He highlights the stars for the Local Group. “This is where you are located, Aang. This is the world where Richard is from. Over here, is our location. These other worlds that are around us, form the Local Group. As Richard discovers a new world, we’ll add it to the image here.”

“That’s amazing. So we are not definitely alone.”

“No, you are not. I take it you don’t get any visitors from other worlds?”

“Richard is the first one to come to our world. We discovered a lot of connections between our worlds, King Dryden.”

“I’m sure you did. Richard, we are sending you a contact crystal. Hold out your hand.”

I hold my hand out. In a blink of an eye, a contact crystal appears. I hand it to Aang.

“Keep this crystal in a safe spot. In case you ever get invaders from outside your world, you can contact us for an emergency. That crystal will reach our world easily. We can send some star ships to show up quickly.”

“We greatly appreciate the idea, King Dryden. But, I think if they were ever to get on our surface they are in for a big surprise in what we can do. Richard can demonstrate the element bending techniques when he is back on your world.”

“We are already aware of what Richard can do. He is an amazing young man. I trust his judgement. He has proven his worth for us here. Well, it is time to go. Don’t forget us here on Twainor as we won’t forget you on the Avatar world.”

“Take care until we need each other again. May the Creator keep us safe until we do actually meet.”

The image disappears in a blink of an eye.

“When I was there the first time, we discovered some big surprises on Twainor. The Creator took Eingana, the dragons, the centaurs and dwarfs from our world to preserve their uniqueness. Leviathan is the Great Father of all fire breathing dragons.” I wave my hand to show his image. “There are still dragons hidden on our Earth. Some are hidden in the oceans. Some are hidden in caves. Some view the dragons as threats to the human population, so the humans killed them. Some of the countries revered the dragon. They are given high honor in their history and culture. There is a symbol on our world that displays the yin and the yang.” I wave my hand to show the yin yang symbol.

All of them start to laugh out loud.

“Hah, hah, . . . I love it! We have that symbol as well.”

“That confirms it. You did learn it from the dragons!”

“Hah, hah, hah,. . . .!”

“Aang, when he starts to learn the earth bending technique, we must let Toph be the teacher for the finer points in the technique.”

“I agree, Iroh. I’ll start him with the basics when that times come. But for now, we need to expand his air bending techniques today and tomorrow. Then tomorrow at noon, if all goes well, we’ll visit the Northern Water Tribe.”

“There is one technique left to check out before our lunch break. I want to see his armor stand up to my lightning attack.”

“Okay, Iroh. Let’s find out.”

“Richard, stand over there in that clearing. I will start with a small lightning blast to see how it works.”

“Yes, Aang.” I walk over to the clearing area near the trail. I set the visor down and put the mouth shield in place. I quickly put on my left forearm shield. I withdraw my sword with my right hand. “I’m ready.”

“Here it comes, Richard.” Iroh opens his right palm upward. He concentrates on it. Soon, little sparks of lightning are being emitted from his hand. He quickly aims his hand at me. A bolt of lightning shoots out from his hand.

The lightning bolt hits the shield and the sword at the same time. They see sparks flying and sparking around me. I concentrate on the power of the lightning. I recite the words to myself. Transfer lightning to the sword. The lightning jumps from the forearm shield and any stray sparks on my armor to the sword. The sword begins to glow with a white hue.

“Gasp!”

“He is able to control it!”

Brianna and my fairies are smiling widely.

I then point the sword upward to the sky. Discharge lightning into the sky and disperse! The lightning power shoots straight up in a white beam. Once it reaches the upper atmosphere, it disperses in the air.

They look at me with awe. Soon they are all smiling at me.

“That was incredible. I wished I had that capability when I was hit by lightning.”

“I hear you, Aang. That was incredible, Richard.”

I push the buttons on the side of the helmet, the visor moves up and the mouth guard opens up. I smile at all of them. I stick my sword into the ground to discharge any electrical charge on me. I feel a little bit transferred into the ground. Brianna comes up to me with a piece of cloth as we smile at each other. I take it and wipe the dirt off the blade and get it clean. I then put the sword back into the scabbard. I tuck the cloth into my belt.

“Thank you, my friends. I really do mean it.”

“You’re welcome, Richard. I think we can count your family as special friends. We’ll need to make sure you and Twainor are recorded in the scrolls for future reference.”

We all follow Aang, Zuko and Iroh down the path toward the large stone buildings. We enter in one of them. Aang turns around and faces us.

“I went to all of the Air Temples to bury the dead. They are buried with dignity and honor. The graves are located in their designated areas near the temples. After a month of mourning, I became determined to rebuild the Air Temples. I realized new air benders will be born again soon. They must have a place to live in peace and perfect their abilities given by the Creator.”

“Aang, before I came here. I received an update on your situation. I don’t know if it would be wise to tell you. But it will give you hope that all is not lost here.”

The three look at each other and nod their heads up and down together.

“Please tell us, Richard.”

“This word of hope is for the future. I received it from the Emissaries. The Emissaries are the agents of the Creator. They go about to make sure nothing out of the ordinary happens to a world.”

“That’s understandable, Richard. Please go on.”

“The Emissaries told me that Katara will give birth to three children. Your third child will be a boy who will inherit the Avatar. You will teach him everything that you know, Aang. He will teach the new Avatar for the next generation. It is in this generation that your world will be tested again.”

“I see. A new threat comes to disturb our peace. In what way will we be tested, Richard?”

“It will be the people who can’t do the element bending against those who can, Iroh.”

“I see. You don’t have tell us anymore. I have often felt a hard look from those people who can’t element bend. They wonder why they can’t do it. But it is them, we need for the future. It has been known that element bending skips a generation or two each time. That future Avatar will have its work to do. To reunify our world is the most important goal for any Avatar that comes.”

“Your place to sleep tonight is in this building. We have set up a small eating area in the room over here. I had to bring in fresh food. It will take awhile to get the gardens to produce food again.”

Aang leads us down the hallway. He stops before an open door. We all walk inside. “This will be your room to sleep tonight. Are you needed to talk with the Earth King again, Zuko?”

“Yes, Aang. I must leave for now. We expect to hear good reports from you concerning your very special guests.”

“I am needed back at the Jasmine Dragon as well. It was a pleasure to meet you, Richard. Your presence brought new joy into my soul. I get to see a dragon displayed in human form. For that, I will thank the Creator for bringing your family here.”

“You’re welcome. Thank you, Iroh and Zuko.”

We all hug each other. My fairies fly above us singing a song that our friendship will last forever.

We put our satchels on the beds. I leave my fairies food satchel on my shoulder. We then walk back out to the dining room. We gather around a low table. Aang walks into the kitchen. He returns with food in his arms. The Earth benders also join us as well. They are carrying in food as well. There is a total of ten Earth benders in the reconstruction projects at the Northern Air Temple.

We gather around to eat together. We see that it is an assortment of fruits and vegetables on the table. Brianna and I smile at each other. I place the food satchel next to me and open it. My fairies get inside the satchel to get their food bags.

“Father, do they have honey here?”

I look toward Aang.

“I’m sorry. I don’t have honey here. It is difficult to store right now.”

“That’s okay. I will use the cups I brought with me. I will use some sugar packets and the water in my skin.”

“That’s fine, Richard.”

I open the satchel some more. I take out their cups and place it nearby on the table. I open the bag and take out several packets of sugar from the bag and reseal the plastic bag. Tiger and Lavan take the packets and open them up carefully. They pour the sugar into the cups. Then they take the water from the skin and fill up the cups. They take a small stick to stir up the mixture to dissolve the sugar. Each fairy takes a turn sipping from the small cups of sugar water. They also eat some of the nuts and berries from the food bags as well.

Meanwhile, we eat what is available to us. We find their fruits are just as different here as it is on Twainor and Earth. However, the fruits all have their own sweetness and flavors. Their vegetables consist of several different kinds of beans and grains. We see that their food is softened by water and steam. We use a spoon and fork to pick up the food and bring it to our mouths to eat.

We find the flavors of their food is not too far off from our own foods back on Earth. It takes about a half hour to finish eating the lunch. We do little talking between bites. When we got done, I realized we haven’t given thanks to the Creator for the food. Just as about I was to clear my voice to speak up. I get interrupted by Aang.

Aang speaks up, “Creator we want to thank you for this wonderful food we have eaten today. Let it give us the strength and energy to do more for you. We thank you for sending a very special family to us. We appreciate the news he brought to us. We hope we are steadfast and diligent to keep the peace on our world safe as always with each succeeding generation. We will count Twainor, Richard, Brianna and his fairies as friends for all time. Again we thank you for all of your wonderful blessings. Thank you, Creator.”

Everyone responds together in one voice, “Thank you, Creator.”

We get up from the table. The earth benders clear out the table and return the empty bowls, plates and utensils to be cleaned in the kitchen.

My fairies quickly put their food bags, their cups and the water skin back into the satchel. I then put it on my shoulder. We walk back to our room for the night. I drop off the satchel there with the other satchels we dropped off.

We then walk out of the building together.

We give our hugs to each other. Even my fairies get in the act as well.

“Iroh, Zuko and Aang, please stand together. My fairies would like to do something for you. It is their way declaring that you are fairy friends.”

“Fairy friends?”

“Yes, they can sense the attitude in people very well. They have an excellent judgement ability.”

My fairies hover in front of them. Tiger speaks up for them, “We would like to thank you in our own special way.”

They quickly fly around them three times. Then they stop and hover in front of them. Tiger speaks up, “Now we can call you Fairy Friend. Thank you for your generosity, caring and laughter.”

They all smile together. “We’ll remember it always. Thank you for the honor, fairies of Richard Moore, the Omega Unicorn Dragon.”

Zuko and Iroh walk toward the air bison. They climb up the air bison and sit in the saddle. The air bison floats straight up, then it flaps its tail to fly back to Ba Sing Se.

We look up at them until they disappear from view.

Aang looks at me, “Now we can do some one on one training. Get ready, Richard.”

I look at Aang, “Yes, Aang.”

The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 10
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman

The list of characters mentioned in this story belong to the various authors that created them. This is a fan-fiction story.

~~~000~~~

Aang, Brianna and I turn around and walk back to the building. But then, Aang makes a right turn in the trail to another trail. Soon, we see the outdoor training area complex.

“Aang, I will be teaching Brianna the beginning moves for the Shaolin white sash. So, I will need time set aside for that.”

“That is no problem, Richard. We’ll incorporate that into the teaching today. We need to get her mind geared up to do the beginning air bending movements as well. I will get a new challenge as well to teach your fairies. The idea of teamwork to do the air element bending is rare for the air bender. It usually is done alone. There are teamwork lessons when learning the next three element bending techniques, however.”

“I think I know why, Aang. If two tornados are generated from two different air benders, the clash could cancel the tornados out.”

“That’s one of the reasons, Richard. I’ll show you what else can happen when we send a tornado at each other. Creating the mini tornado in your hand is a good sign that you can do more. You’ll need to take off your armor and get into your training clothes. Brianna, do you have any workout clothes with you?”

“I do not, Aang. Are there women sizes here?”

Aang smiles, “The Northern and Southern Air Temples are for the men. The Eastern and Western Air Temples are for the women. The men get buffeted by the cold air, while the women are in the warm air.”

Brianna smiles back, “Aha! That explains it for the men. The cold air will keep your libido in check.”

Aang smiles again, “That is one of the reasons, Brianna. Of course, it is for modesty’s sake and respect for the other gender.”

Brianna smiles again, “Of course. But, Richard is an exception, he is dual gender. I wouldn’t mind if he keep his male libido side in check this week. It will all be the better for us in bed the next week.”

I feign a smile and a look of astonishment, “Gee, thanks for that vote of confidence.”

Then we all break out into giggles and laughter, including my fairies.

We walk over to an area that has several stone benches on the edge of the training field. “I think I can help out Brianna with a set of work clothes. It will be from the dojo in Charlotte, NC. First I need to contact my attorney.” I take out my contact crystal in my pocket and hold it in my hand. I think of Anna Dawson’s video cell phone number. Soon an image of Anna Dawson appears above me.

“Is that you, Richard?”

“Yes it is, Anna. I am on the Avatar world right now.”

“That’s great. I can’t wait to hear your stories. What do you need for me to do?”

“You’re perceptive as always, Anna. I need for you to make a purchase for a dojo outfit from the Peaceful Dragon. Brianna needs it to work out here. She is starting this week.”

“That is no problem Richard. What is your size, Brianna?”

Brianna steps to my side. “I am 5'5". I think a medium will do, Anna.”

“That sounds about right. Are you going to use magic to get it there, Richard?”

“I am, Anna. I will leave a note in place of it.”

“They will be surprised to see the note. It’s good to see you both again. Take care until we meet again at the cabin.”

“See you then, Anna.”

The image disappears from in front of me. I put the crystal back into the pocket. I open the satchel and take out a note pad and pen. I write a short note to my sensei at the Peaceful Dragon.

To the Peaceful Dragon and Sensei Chou.

Brianna and I are having a wonderful honeymoon. We’ll see you when we get back and do a show and tell in what we learned, especially with the second element. My attorney is making the purchase for another dojo outfit for my wife. I am teaching her the moves for the white sash. She was tested here by the element test. She has the potential to do at least four of the elements. That also includes my fairies.

Your student and friend, Richard Moore.

I fold it up and place it in my hand, the palm upward. I concentrate on it and the destination, the store room at the Peaceful Dragon. In a blink of an eye, a folded up dojo outfit appears in my hand in place of the note.

~~~000~~~

Sensei Chou opens the closet door to retrieve a dojo for the next student. He sees the note and picks it up to read it. He smiles at seeing the familiar handwriting.

“Yes, I can’t wait to see what you have learned in doing the water bending element, my young dragon.”

He folds up the note and the dojo. He walks into his office and puts the note on the desk. He walks back out to greet the latest student to the Peaceful Dragon dojo.

~~~000~~~

“That is amazing, Richard. I never thought it possible that magic could go that far. Are there others like you on your world?”

“I don’t know, Aang. I know there are traces of magic left on my world. Some of them can only use it locally. If and when Brianna and I are crowned, I know I will have to keep it hidden from the people. The people won’t expect someone like me to come along. Once my reign is over with, I will need to separate myself from that circle of influence and do my work in secret as best as I can.”

“I see. What are the age ranges on your world?”

“Most people will live up to 60 years. It is not unheard of for people to live into their 70s and 80s. The rare ones are in the 90 to 120 age ranges. There are very few that will reach 120,but you must live a very good life and eat the right foods.”

“That’s interesting. Our age range can double that easily. The maximum age is 300 years, and those are rare. So, that means, your women become pregnant in the early part of their ages.”

Brianna speaks up, “That’s right, Aang. The average child bearing age is in the twenties. Some have occurred as young as 15. That is too young, if you ask me. They are still in school. The oldest age that a child was born is 57. I wouldn’t dare push it to that age. The ideal range is 20 to 35 years.”

“Hmm . . . that means, on average, your life span is shorter. Well, you can change your clothes over there.” Aang points to a door way opening to his right. “You’ll find another door in the hallway. Open the second door on your left. It is a changing area for the senior leaders. There is a warm mineral spa in another room within it.”

“Oooh . . . I like that very much.” Brianna takes the dojo clothes from my hands. She walks toward the doorway and enters the hallway. She opens the door and immediately feels the warm air from the spa inside. She quickly changes clothes into the dojo outfit. She opens another satchel to retrieve a towel if she should need it on the field. She puts on her tennis shoes and walks back out to the training field.

I recite the spell to quickly take off my armor and place it near the concrete bench with my satchel. In the same instant, my dojo clothes appear on me as well.

My fairies hover near us, as Brianna and I stand side by side looking at Aang.

“The first thing we need to do is start teaching the basic moves to Brianna and your fairies, Richard. After an hour of that we’ll focus on the beginning air bending moves.”

I start teaching the beginning moves to Brianna. My fairies follow along as well. They do it while hovering in the air. After an hour for Brianna, we stop to get our breath ready for the next phase.

Brianna speaks up once she has learned the moves. “Those are some interesting moves, Richard. I could have certainly used some of them to defend myself against the attackers.”

“But, they had the numbers. More than likely you would have made them madder and could have you hurt some more. Eventually, you’ll learn how to face multiple attackers.”

“Sigh . . . okay. I see what you are saying.”

Aang speaks up, “That is true, Brianna. After you learn how to defend yourself against one attacker, then the lesson continues as the number of attackers is increased. When you face two or more attackers, you have to be very alert as to who makes the next move. It is a step by step process. Okay, now let’s try some beginning air bending techniques. Hold up your right hand, Brianna.”

Aang and I raise up our hands. Brianna copies my movement.

“Now, look within yourself. You can close your eyes for the first time so you can look within yourself.”

Brianna closes her eyes.

“Now, look within and see your energy flowing throughout your body.”

“What energy should I be looking for?”

“It is called the chi, Brianna. It is your inner energy that gives you peace and strength at the same time.”

“Okay.” Brianna looks within herself. She searches for it. Soon she sees a spark within herself. “I see a small spark within myself.”

“That’s good, Brianna. Now concentrate on it. Feed it with whatever is available within you. It could be confidence. It could be your love for Richard. For you, you need to feed it with your emotions. I know they can be complex, but it must be one at a time. If you over feed it, we must help you calm down so it won’t overwhelm you.”

“I think I know what you are saying. I surely don’t want to feed my anger at it.”

“That is a must, Brianna. Don’t feed it with your anger. You will get some disastrous results. Once you find that peaceful state, twist your hand like you saw Richard have done it.”

“Okay.” She looks at the spark again. She feeds it with her love for Richard. The flame gets bigger. Feeling more confident now, she feeds the flame with her love for her parents. The flame gets bigger again. This time she feeds it with the love from the animals she has met so far. All of sudden the flame gets very large. She tempers it, so it won’t go out of control. Once she has it under control, she twists her hand. A small tornado appears in her palm. She feels the air current. She opens her eyes slowly. She smiles when she sees the results.

We all have big smiles on our faces. My fairies try the same thing, too. They think of their love for me and Brianna. Quickly they feel themselves filled up as the tiny flame gets bigger and brighter. Each of them gives a twist in their hands. Quickly, small tornados appear in their hands. They open their eyes to see the results.

“That’s great everyone. I knew you could do it. Now keep it in your hand as you walk farther apart. You are going to try and make them bigger and smaller. You can use the other hand if you want to.”

We get farther apart. We put our other hand near it. We continue to concentrate on the mini tornado. We move the hands apart. The mini tornado gets bigger. Then we move the hands back together. The mini tornado gets smaller.

“That’s great again. Now for the big lesson when two tornados meet each other.”

We make the mini tornados larger again. We send the mini tornados toward each other. Soon, the mini tornados are fighting each other as they bounce off of each other. We try to control it by concentrating on the tornados. Then all of a sudden, the tornados combine into one tornado and it gets bigger. I concentrate on it to control it. I bring it toward my hand. The tornado comes closer to me. Then I bring the hands apart quickly to disperse the tornado into the air.

“That’s incredible. That is rare to see them combine together. What were you thinking when you combined them?”

“I think we had to be of one mind or in agreement, Aang.”

“I see. That would be very important for two air benders to work together.
Now, Richard. We are going to create a tornado around ourselves. We will use it as a shield against multiple attackers. Then once that is done, we’ll fly up inside the tornado to make it a pillar tornado. We’ll come close to each other while we still try to control it. The problem is the surrounding vortex of wind from the pillar tornado. Sometimes it can twist out of control. We’ll try to wrap it around each other to create a helix pillar. Keep your wings within your body.”

“Okay, Aang.”

Aang holds his closed glider in his hand. Then I see Aang bends down and spins quickly to create a tornado around himself. I do the same thing as well. I point my arm toward the ground and create a tornado around myself as well. We then the let the inner currents lift us up higher. Soon we each create a tall twisting pillar tornado. We come closer and let the pillars interact with each other.

The tornados slowly come together. Sometimes a bend in the tornados jerks toward each other. Slowly, we create a twisting helix tornado. Then we feel the strength from the two tornados combined together.

Aang yells out loud, “This is great, Richard. I have always wanted to try this. I knew it had to be someone who has a strong will like mine. Now the tornados are stronger. We can do almost anything with it as a team. Aim one hand at that target on the opposite side of the field. Shoot a fist size tunnel of wind at it. I’ll aim for the one on the left.”

I yell out loud, “Okay, Aang.”

We aim our hand toward the targets. Quickly a fist size tunnel of twisting wind is emitted from the hand toward the target. It arrives there very quickly. It splinters the wooden target into pieces. Everyone smiles at each other.

“Okay, now that we are up here. We’ll let the tornados shoot us out of the pillars. I’ll use my glider and you can use your wings to get back down to the ground.”

“Okay, Aang.”

We let the force of air shoot us out of the pillars. As soon as we do that, the tornados quickly dissipate into the air. Aang opens his glider and glides back down to the ground. I extend my feathered wings and do the same thing.

We all laugh together at what we accomplished together.

“I have always wanted to try that. I will certainly write it down in the scrolls for any future Avatar that might need that technique. Thank you, Richard.”

“You’re welcome, Aang.”

“Now, let’s walk over to the circular panels. I’ll show you how it works. It is a lesson in control.”

We walk over to the round stone roof. We see the hanging stone panels. It is exactly the one that is shown in the first movie. Aang stands in the middle of the platform. He spins around quickly to evenly spread out the panels and makes them flat. He has created a wall around himself. He then swings his arm upward to repel an imaginary attacker. Two panels quickly swing outward and swings back. With another movement of his arm and hand he is able to turn the panels so they are turned ninety degrees and you can see inside the circle. Then with another arm movement, he pushes the panels so they are all flat against each other.

“Now you try it, Richard. We’ll even let your fairies try it as a team effort after you. Brianna, you must try it as well.”

“Okay, Aang.”

I step into the middle of the platform. Aang steps out of the platform and onto the ground. I try the same movements. It was a little slow in the beginning. Once I got the hang of it, I was able to duplicate Aang’s demonstration.

Everyone claps their hands and cheers me on. Then my fairies get into the middle of the platform. They realize this time a team effort must be used. They quickly fly around in a circle. They quickly spread out the stone panels and make them flat. Then two of them are able to kick out one stone panel by doing a somersault in the air. Then each pair of fairies does the same in another section around the perimeter. Everyone likes the results they are seeing. Then with another movement of acting together, they turn the panels ninety degrees and push them all to the side.

“We did it! Did you see that father, mother, Omega?”

“We all saw it, my fairies. That was great.”

“Now imagine when there are a thousand of us doing this. We’ll be a force to be reckoned with.”

“Don’t get too far ahead, my fairies. You’ll need to learn how to use those skills against the other element bending techniques.”

“That’s right, Richard. It is a different mentality when facing pieces of ground being tossed at you. Or water and fire being shot at you. You need to learn how to quickly create shields in front of you. Okay, Brianna. It is now your turn.”

“Okay, Aang.” Brianna walks into the center of the platform. She concentrates on what she saw earlier. Once she has it in her mind, she quickly unleashes the power of the air from her arms and hands. She easily repeats the demonstration. Once she has calmed down, she feels a bit light headed.

I see her legs wobble a bit. I run up to catch her. Aang and the fairies do the same thing as well. We set her down and let her sit on the stone floor of the platform.

“Oooh . . . that was little too much, too soon, Richard. I think it is how you felt when you used your wings to keep the flames back the first time.”

“That’s right, Brianna. You’ll work up to it. As you earn the Shaolin sashes, your mind will grow along with it.”

“I hope so.” She tries to stand up again. We escort her down from the platform. Bianca and Lavan are sitting on her shoulders to comfort her as she regains her breath and energy.

She sits down on a stone bench while she watches Aang and me continue our training together.

Aang and I continue with some more moves on the platform. We do several different combinations of protecting ourselves from attackers from different locations. Soon, I able to control the air bending very well just like how Aang controls it.

“That is great, Richard. You’re a fast learner. I really like that.”

“I applied it the same way when I earned the Shaolin sashes. I earned the purple sash two years earlier than most people earn it.”

“Aha . . . that explains your attitude. That is a very good attitude to have. Now you are going to create some air shields in front of you. I am going to shoot the four elements at you. It is up to you to figure out how to create that air shield without using your wings. After that, then I will test your fairies.”

“I understand, Aang.”

We walk back out to the training field. Aang walks down to a part of the field that has piles of loose dirt, rocks and small boulders. Also, there are two large tubs filled with water. “I’ll be down here, Richard. I have what I need here for this part of the exercise. You stand over there.” Aang points to where I will stand. I walk down half way of the training field. We turn to face each other. I estimate we are about one hundred and fifty feet apart.

Brianna and the fairies walk over the stone bench where our satchels are. They watch with intensity and hope I will do well.

“Before we start, Aang. I already have been put into a similar situation several years ago on Twainor.”

“That’s good, Richard. Remember that intensity.”

“Yes, Aang.”

Aang quickly moves his arm and hand at me. He shoots an air punch at me. Loose pieces of grass from the training field kick up and give me the clue that it is coming at me very fast. I quickly bring up my right arm in a counter clockwise circle. I create a shield of air in front of me.

Aang smiles at my reaction. Then he picks up the pace by using both arms and hands. He shoots multiple air punches at me and coming in from different angles. I quickly use both of my arms in a spinning motion. I quickly block his efforts to hit me. Once I feel a pause in his attack, I quickly do a crane wing slash at him. He quickly brings up his arm to block my attack.

I then do a low tiger slash along the ground. Then I do a high arching curve wind slash like doing a curve ball in baseball.

Aang sees the low blast coming at him. He quickly blocks it. From the loose grass in the air he sees the twisting and curving air punch coming at him. He quickly creates an air shield just in time.

We drop our hands as we smile at each other.

“I love it! I have never met someone who could evenly battle with me. This is testing me as much it is for you! Thank you, Richard!”

“You’re welcome, Aang.”

Then Brianna and the fairies cheer and clap their hands for the demonstration they are seeing.

“Okay, now for the water attack. Be ready for it. Not only can I move the water, I can also freeze it when I need to.”

“I see, so it can be double jeopardy as well.”

“That’s right, Richard.” Aang points his hands at the two water tubs. He concentrates on the water. Then he goes into a different set of arm and hand motions. They appear fluid in motion. Then the water rises out of the tubs at the same time. He removes two hand size water balls from the bulging water. The rest of the water moves back down into the tubs. He aims his hands at me. Quickly, the two water balls coming flying at me.

I quickly bring up my arms and hands in a circular motion. I create an air shield in front of me. The water blobs quickly break apart into smaller water droplets and fall to the ground.

“That’s good, Richard. Now, here it comes.”

He brings up many more water balls. He shoots them at me from all sides. I quickly create two air shields in front of me. I move the air shields around to block each hit. Just when I think he is done, something new happens around me.

He brings up the water droplets up from the ground and try to surround me with water. I quickly move my arms straight out from me. I quickly push the water away from me before it becomes enclosed around me. The water droplets come at me again. This time, I do spinning motion with my body. I create a tornado around me. I collect the water droplets into the tornado. Now I have control of the water. I quickly punch my hand through the wall of spinning water. A blob of water with the air punch, shoots at Aang. He quickly gets control of it before it hits him.

He smiles that I’m catching on fast.

I then do a double punch through the water tornado. I shoot all of the water and wind at him. He quickly brings up a water shield to protect himself. The water gets absorbed into his water shield. He then directs the water into the two tubs.

“That was great, Richard. You caught on fast on how to use your air bending to protect yourself and use the tornado to send the water back at me. You didn’t give me time to freeze the water around you.”

“Thank you, Aang.”

Again, Brianna and my fairies cheer that I was able to do that.

“Now for the earth bending.” He does some different arm and hand motions. He also includes some foot stomps to hit the ground. He points his hands at the loose rubble. Dirt and pebbles rise up from the ground. He quickly points his hands at me to shoot the dirt at me. I create an air shield in front of me. I quickly disperse the dirt and it falls to the ground.

But, just like with the water, the dirt rises up from the ground. I quickly do a twisting tornado around me. The dirt comes flying at me. I collect the dirt and create a dust and dirt tornado around me. I do the same thing in returning the dirt and rubble at him. He defends himself easily. I keep the tornado spinning around me while he lifts up the small boulders, the dirt and the loose rubble of pebbles. He quickly sends them toward me.

As soon as it gets near, I get a new idea. I extend up the tornado a little higher into the air. I let the top opening of the tornado catch the boulders. Soon we see them hovering up there and spinning up there.

Aang smiles that I was able to create a new move. I then curve the tornado toward Aang. Aang gets ready for what I am about to do. I quickly shoot the boulders, the dirt and rubble at Aang like a cannon. He quickly sets up a tornado around himself. He quickly does the same thing that I did. He catches the boulders with the top part of his tornado. Once he has gained control of it, he breaks the tornado down and lets the boulders , the dirt and rubble fall back down to the ground.

“That was great, Richard! I love it! I am getting excited by this challenge we are setting up for each other. And you have yet to learn the other element bending techniques.”

“You’re welcome, Aang!”

“Okay, now for the last one, fire. After this, it is Brianna and your fairies turn.”

He does a different set of arm, hands, body and leg motions this time. Two sets of flames come out from his hands. But we can see he is not hurt at all. My fairies hope they can do the same thing as well.

He then creates large arches of fire streams in a circular motion around himself. It is just like how I saw it on the videos once when the dragons air danced around Zuko and Aang. I get my air shields up before me.

He shoots out two streams of fire at me. I quickly block the hit. He comes at me from several different angles. I block them all. I then try for something new. I quickly generate a tornado in my hand. I move it about the field quickly. It collects any water that is in the ground. I bring it back to me quickly. I bring the misty tornado around me.

Aang smiles that I’m trying something new. He sends several streams of fire at me. One of the flames hits the misty tornado. There is a reaction of steam as the fire hits the misty tornado. I then blow the other streams of fire away from me.

He ends the fire streams and puts the fire out from his hands.

“That’s great, Richard. You used water in your tornado to defend yourself. Until you learned the fire bending techniques, don’t let the fire get absorbed into your tornado. It will become very hot and unbearable for you. When you learn the fire bending element, you will learn ways how to keep yourself cool.”

“I hope so, Aang.”

“Okay, Brianna. Are you ready?”

“I hope so, Aang.”

“Don’t worry about it. I will send small amounts of water, dirt and fire at you. I just want to see your reaction with each one.”

“Okay, Aang.”

Aang brings up two small water balls. Brianna brings up an air shield in front of her. Aang aims his hands toward Brianna. The water balls hit the air shield and quickly break apart. Aang then goes for one more toss of the water balls. This time they are coming from opposite sides of her. She quickly creates two air shields and blocks the water balls with no problems. Aang quickly gathers up the water droplets and return them to the water tubs.

This tactic is done again for the earth and fire as well. Soon, Brianna gets the idea of what is going on. She is more at ease using the air shield around herself.

We all clap and cheer that Brianna is able to protect herself better. Brianna and I quickly hug each other. My fairies stay on the training field while we walk back to the stone benches.

This time, Aang realizes it is going to be a team effort to protect themselves. My fairies quickly create several air shields around them. They get the same results as I did. They are able to control the water and earth very easily with their air shields and tornado. However, when it comes to the fire, Shiri and Levi quickly change into dragon butterflies. They quickly gain control of the fire streams and return them back to Aang.

Aang quickly regains control of the fire streams as they come back to him. He smiles and laughs as he ends the fire streams from his hands.

“Hah, hah, hah, . . . I forgot they could change into dragon butterflies. But that was an excellent demonstration of control. Thank you.”

Levi and Shiri quickly change back into fairies. They all respond together, “Thank you and your welcome, Aang.”

“Well it is time for the evening repast. Get yourselves cleaned up and change clothes. I know I’m sweating really well now.”

“Thank you, Aang. Can we have our meal after a dip in the warm mineral spa?”

“Yes, by all means do so. There are several warm mineral spas in this complex. I’ll meet you back at our dining room area.”

“Okay, Aang.”

My fairies land on our shoulders and head to rest while we walk to the warm mineral spa where Brianna changed clothes earlier. We see the water steaming above it. I bring our clothing satchels to us by magic from the room where we’ll be sleeping tonight. I set up my fairies’ water shower with the curtain around it. I set their towels and soap pieces near by. They get behind it and quickly get themselves clean. Brianna and I get undressed and enter the water naked. We just soak our bodies in the water and let the warm water soothe our tired muscles. We put our arms around each other and relax. Once my fairies are clean, they sit near us as well.

“That was great my fairies. You did really well.”

“Thank you, father, mother, Omega. You and Brianna did very well as well. Now it is time to learn the water bending element tomorrow.”

“Yes, it will be very interesting and something new to learn.”

After about fifteen minutes of being in the warm water, we get out and put on gee clothes again. I get everything packed up and back into the respectful satchels. Brianna and I pickup the armor pieces and carry them back to the main building where we are eating and have our rooms. Once we drop off the armor and the satchels, we join our hosts in the dining room. I carry my fairy’s satchel with me to the dining room.

We see the earth benders are letting the air bisons graze on the grass in the landing area.

We see a large array of different foods this time. I set the fairy’s satchel down next to where we are sitting. We try the different vegetables they have. They are very tasty and good to eat. My fairies make several more cups of sugar water to drink while they eat the berries and nuts in the satchel.

We get done in about a half hour. The earth benders are impressed with how we are progressing in learning the air bending techniques. They said I will be an excellent fighter once I have learned them all.

After saying the evening thanks to the Creator, we step outside to watch the sunset. We are treated to a beautiful display of color changes in the clouds. We see streaks of different colored rays of light as the sun peeps around the clouds. Once the sun sets, we see the stars come out in full brightness. We clap our hands that we get to witness another beautiful day on the Avatar world.

We then walk back to our rooms to sleep the night away. I set up the fairy’s blankets and pillows on several blankets that we brought in the satchels. We get under the covers to get a great night of sleep to restore our energy for the next day.

The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 11
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman

The list of characters mentioned in this story belong to the various authors that created them. This is a fan-fiction story.

~~~000~~~

In the underground cave within the Northern Water Tribe domain are the two spirits of the water world, Ocean and Moon. They sense new arrivals have come to their world. They enter the spirit realm to confirm with the red and blue dragons.

“Ran, Ocean and I feel a group of new kindred spirits here. Do you know anything about it?”

“We do, Moon. It is the Omega Unicorn Dragon. He and his family are here to learn the element bending techniques.”

“He is a human that the Creator has chosen. He will represent the animals at the Ultimate Last Battle, on their world.”

“What is their spirit connection to us, Shaw?”

“He has within him the power of twelve unicorns. His life was changed on the planet Twainor. He also has a drop of Eingana’s blood, our Great Mother. Our Great Father, Leviathan breathed upon him to complete the dragon aspect within himself.”

“What level is he?”

“He has earned the first of ten black sashes that will lead to the title of Shaolin Dragon Master on his world.”

“We welcomed him when he visited us in the spirit realm two nights ago. He is honorable and trustworthy. He and his family we’ll be arriving at your location tomorrow to learn the water bending technique.”

“That takes several years to get it right. But it is not unheard of if one is gifted to learn it in several months. We know of several leaders in the Northern Water Tribe that will object to his arrival. He will have to prove himself to them.”

“We expect nothing less, Moon.”

“Very well, we trust your judgement. We just hope he never encounters the faceless one, Koh.”

“We hope so, too, Ocean. But, if the Omega Unicorn Dragon becomes strong enough, he might be the one to force him to give up the faces he has stolen.”

“If that happens, then the faceless one will finally be weak enough to be dealt with once and for all. But Kuruk is still on his mind.”

“We can only hope, Ran. We’ll keep this conversation just between us. To think, we have someone whom we can finally speak to, mind to mind. Heh, heh, heh . . . ”

They all look at each other with smiles and nod their heads up and down. Then they all fade from each other’s presence in the spirit realm.

The two glowing koi fish, Tui and La, continue to swim in the Spirit Oasis pool underneath the Northern Water Tribe’s main city.

~~~000~~~

We wake up in the morning underneath the warm covers on our bed.

“I wish we could stay warm like this all day, Richard.”

“You can, Brianna. You can warm up your chi to keep yourself warm.”

“Hmm . . . I like that idea. I will think of you to keep my heart warmed up.”

“I will do the same as well, Brianna. That includes the rest of you, my fairies.”

“Yes, father, mother, Omega!”

“We’ll be traveling farther north today. We are entering their arctic circle region. It will be a lot colder there. I think we’ll be given some bigger and warmer coats to wear.”

“I hope so, Richard.”

We get out from underneath the covers and quickly change into our warmer clothes that we have brought. Then we put the gee clothes on. I can tell already it won’t be enough for up there. We put everything away into the satchels.

“How are you doing with the food I brought for you, my fairies?”

“We’ll definitely need a refill with the nuts and seeds, father.”

“Okay, let me refill the bag before we go.” I take out the bag of nuts and seeds. I hold it in my hand, palm upward. I concentrate on the storage bin in my apartment that is on the counter. I recite the spell to fill up the bag. The bag quickly gets refilled. I place the bag on the floor. I keep my palm upward, I concentrate on the plastic bottle that is filled with honey in the cupboard. I recite the spell and it appears in my hand in a blink of an eye.

“Thank you, father, mother, Omega! You’re the best. Now we can stay fully charged up.”

“You’re welcome, my fairies. All you have to do is warm it up with your chi or ours to make it pour easier.”

“Of course!” They all respond in one voice with big smiles on their faces.

I put their nut bag and honey container within another plastic bag into their satchel. We walk out of the room to the dining hall.

We gather around the table to eat our last meal here for the day. We see the same foods that were served up yesterday for the evening meal. My fairies take the honey container out of the plastic bag and unscrew the little cap on the tip. They squeeze some honey into each cup. Then they add some water to help drink it down. Then Shiri and Levi warm up the cups of honey water carefully and adds the nuts and fruits. They enjoy having a warm meal this morning. Once they get done eating, they put everything back into the satchel.

We get done eating and drinking in about half an hour. After the giving of the thanks to the Creator, Aang speaks up.

“The next phase this morning is for all of you. Every one of you can transform into another form. You will then use the air bending techniques that you learned yesterday and apply it. I suspect we’ll get some interesting results and a greater show of power.”

We get up from the table and walk back out to the training field.

“The first thing I will show you is two air bending tricks. I want to see if you can do the same.” Aang points to the ground with both of his hands. He spins the hands and arms quickly. All of a sudden a cloud of air appears underneath him and lifts him up several feet. He then quickly moves around the training field.

We have big smiles on our faces as he has some fun. Then he comes back and hovers in front of us.

“This is my air scooter. It allows me to move around quickly without tiring myself out, if I were to run on two feet. Now you try it.”

We do the same thing. All of sudden we all have an air scooter underneath us. We move about the training field quickly. We are giggling and laughing while we move about. We try to play a game of tag with the fairies. They are having a lot of fun as well. They now have a new tactic so they won’t get too tired on long flights. They can see this being used by King Oren’s fairy troop to get around quickly in the forest or when they fly north or south with the seasons.

After our little game of tag, we come back and hover in front of Aang. We then end the air scooter underneath us.

“I thought you would have some great fun with that. Now here is another trick. I am going to run up to that wall with the stone arch. I will use an air trick for my feet. It will allow me to run up the wall and run underneath the bottom part of the arch without falling down. This trick is especially useful if you are in a long hallway and you need to get to the other side if someone is blocking your escape.”

Aang quickly shakes his feet from side to side. Then he quickly runs up the wall and underneath the arch. He then runs up and down several more walls. Then he runs up to us and stop.

“If you didn’t see it. I shook my feet from side to side like this.”

We look down at his feet. We see him shaking his feet from side to side. Then we see some little air currents about his feet. We can tell because the grass is moving near his feet.

“I know you don’t need it, fairies. But it might help you fly closer to the wall if you need to.”

“Okay, Aang.”

We do the same thing that Aang did. Quickly we see little air movements around our feet. We run up to the wall and back down. Once we feel more confident with it, we run up the wall again with the arch. We find it an unusual sensation running upside down and not falling down. We do it several more times to get used to the disorientation. We then run up to Aang to get our breather.

“That was great, everyone. You did very good.”

“Aang, there is one thing you should now about me. Because I am like a unicorn. I can use the combined strength of the twelve unicorns within me to be stronger or faster. I know I can run faster than a normal human.”

“Hmm . . . that would make sense for you. That will be the same for Brianna as well. Okay, change into your alternate forms. Let’s do some air bending that we learned from yesterday.”

Brianna and I produce our feathered wings quickly. My fairies all quickly change into butterflies in little flashes of light.

“Okay, let’s do some wing slashes. You see those paper banners hanging down at the end of the field. See if you can cut small slices into the paper without shredding it up and falling to the ground. This is a lesson in control again.”

Aang turns around, he moves his arm to create a wing slash. It flies down the field and slices a small cut into the paper. “If you happen to shred it, we will hang up another banner.”

“I know you can do it, Richard. You learned it from the crane bird on our world. How am I going to do it?”

“You need to concentrate within yourself and look at your chi again, Brianna. Once you feel the confidence, then let it fly.”

“Okay.” Brianna looks within herself to find her chi. She fans it with her love for me and my love for her. Quickly, the chi builds up quickly within her. She opens her eyes and looks at the target. She swings her right arm in a side motion from right to left. The slice of air flies down the field at a very high rate of speed. The wing slashes slices the banner into two pieces. The lower half falls to the ground.

“You did it, Brianna!”

We all gather around Brianna to congratulate her.

“Thank you, thank you.”

“Okay, now you know what it takes, see if you can control it and make a smaller slice.”

“Okay, Aang.”

My fairies do the same thing. They quickly send down small wing slashes toward the banner. They create little slices of x’s in the paper. They are smiling widely; they can do it as well. Now they know they can help each other and the other fairies from King Oren’s troop. They will teach them how to do the impossible. If they should find any more fairies hidden around the world, they will teach them as well.

Brianna sees me do the same thing as well. Then she tries again with less energy and a smaller swing in the arms. Once she has it in her mind, she lets fly another wing slash from her arm and hand. This time the slice in the paper is a lot smaller. She smiles widely that she can do it.

After about fifteen minutes of that exercise, Aang speaks up again.

“That’s very good. Brianna and Richard now you need to do it with just your wings this time. Obviously, it is a lesson in self control. Even though you can create a wall of wind in front of you, now you need to focus on a smaller object.”

Brianna and I respond together in one voice, “Yes, Aang.”

I turn around and face the open space behind us. I try to flap my wings horizontally. Once I get the motion understood, Brianna tries it as well. She tries to repeat the motions as well. The motion is when the wings are behind us. Then we turn the wings slightly forward and down. Then we let the curvature of the wings swing forward to create an arc. Then the wings are folded and moved behind us. Once we get the motion memorized, we turn to face the targets.

“Croin, are we doing this right way?”

Croin flies out of me and faces us.

“You are, Richard. It is like doing a hovering technique to brake the speed, but the movement is now more forward. There is also a balance with the body as well.”

“Okay, Croin.”

Brianna watches me first to see how I do it. After a couple of practice swings, I look within myself and find that chi. Once I feel confident enough, I look at the target. I swing my right wing in the horizontal position. A slice of air current flies toward the paper banner. It slices a foot long slice in the paper.

“All right! You did it! You saw how he did it Brianna. It’s your turn.”

“Okay, Aang.” Brianna tries this time in not closing her eyes. She looks within herself to find the chi again. Once she finds it, she fills herself up my love for her and from my fairies. Once she feels she is confident, she looks at the target. She does the same wing motion as I did . A slice of air current flies toward the paper banner. A foot long slice appears over mine to form an ‘x’.

“All right! You did it, Brianna! Congratulations!”

“Thank you, Aang.”

“Now you need to try it while hovering and moving in the air. Obviously, you are using your wings to stay in the air. You’ll be using your arms and hands this time. During one of the flights, fly by it and see if you can slice the paper from your wings. I know your fairies can do it really easily.”

Brianna and I use our feathered wings to lift us up in the air. We hover above the ground. We then start to realize what we need to do. We are trying to do two things at once, hovering and fighting at the same time.

While I’m hovering, I concentrate on the paper banner. I do two arm slashes at the target at the same time. I see the air slices fly above the banner. I focus again. I look within myself for that extra energy, my chi, and remembering what I did in using the stars to hit a target while I moved. Once I get it in my mind, I look at the target again. I do another double arm slash at the paper banner. This time, I am on target. An ‘x’ appears on the paper banner.

Now that I have the proper frame of mind, I fly around and hit the paper banner with ease each time. Then I do another fly by and focus in my mind my wings doing the same thing. Once I get set, I flap my wings at the target horizontally for a brief moment. Quickly another ‘x’ appears on the paper banner. I fly back with a smile on my face back to the group. Once I land, I’m greeted by everyone there.

“That was great, Richard. You learned how to fight in the air.”

“You did it, father, mother, Omega!”

Brianna folds her wings back and gives me a hug and quickly breaks apart. She has a big smile on her face.

“Thank you, everyone. It took some concentration and building up my chi to get it right. There is a lot more to it than just concentrating on it. If there is going to be a drawn out fight, you will need every thing working together. It is more complicated in the air than it is on the ground.”

“That’s very true, Richard. When you get back to your world, are there places where you can practice like that?”

“Right now, I know of none. I will have to ask my sensei if he knows of any remote locations that are very secluded and private. I know there are large tracts of land held by private organizations or by very few individuals. Most of the open land is held by the states or federal government as parks and preserves. But, a lot of them border other pieces of property held by individuals.”

“Well, you’ll have to take it one step at a time.”

“That’s right, Aang. I do know that I will be very rich one day. That money will have to be invested wisely whether in land or durable goods. It is a step by step process that our family will grow into and get used to it.”

“That’s the right attitude. So, Brianna, are you ready to give it a try?”

“I’ll give it a try, Aang. I probably won’t be comfortable with it until I earn the higher sashes.”

“Just do your best, Brianna.”

Brianna flaps her wings to hover above the ground. Bianca and Lavan quickly hover near her to give her advice if she needs it. Brianna tries to remember what I said earlier about putting it all together. She looks within herself to find her chi again. She feeds it again that will help her gain more confidence. Once, it is filled up, she looks at the target again. She moves both her arms and hands making a crossing slash in front of her.

We see the air slices fly through the air. The air slices cut an ‘x’ on the paper perfectly.

Everyone cheers and congratulates her.

“Yes, I did it!”

“Congratulations, my love. You did it on your first try. Now let’s see you try while flying around.”

“Okay, Richard.”

Brianna flies around the training field while trying to send an air slice at the paper banners with her arms and hands. She misses three times before hitting it five times in a row. Then she tries for a fly by air slice. She is able to do so once she gets the timing down right on the third try. Then she flies back to us and lands near me. We retract our wings within ourselves. We hug each other tightly. I see a tear coming down her face. My fairies quickly gather around us and land on our shoulders and heads. They start to hum a soothing melody.

“I love you so much, Brianna. I want only the best for you.”

“I know, Richard. I want to learn as much as I can. I don’t want to see people getting hurt.”

“It goes with your time at the Rescue Mission. You are still emotionally attached to the place.”

“I know. I must find another way to use my talents when we get back home.”

“We will, Brianna. We will.”

We break apart. The fairies take off from us and hover near us. Brianna tries to wipe the tear away carefully. She knows she will have to touch the makeup before we leave for the north bound flight.

Then my fairies do the same thing like I did. They are amazed they can hit something that far away. Doing the fly by slices proved to be really easy for them.

“Well, I have taught you more than enough about the air bending technique. It is up to your imagination on how to use it differently each time. I look forward to it when we meet again for the other element bending techniques. I hope your stay will be longer the next time you are here. Now we must get ready for the Northern Water Tribe.”

“Are you coming with us?”

“Of course, I am. I need to be there to represent you. They have no idea who you are or where you come from. This will be a big surprise for them that another air bender is from another world. Besides, we need to get some warmer coats for us to wear up there. It is a lot more colder up there.”

We walk back to the stone bench to pick up the satchels. My fairies rest on our heads and shoulders as we walk back. We go into the room we are using and change clothes to look presentable. I put the armor on, then the outer clothing. Then we put on the multi-pocket coats. We enter the dining room to have our last meal. It is a small meal. It is just enough so we won’t be hungry right away up there. My fairies eat some fruit and nuts as well. They did a lot of flying this morning.

Once we get done, some of the earth benders come in carrying three large winter coats with hoods in their arms. Once I get mine on, my fairies quickly fly into the coat pockets to get warm. Then I button the coat up and put the hood over my head.

“How does that feel, my fairies?”

“It is very nice and warm now. I don’t think we want to leave if we wanted to.”

Then all of them begin to giggle and laugh.

Bianca and Lavan fly into Brianna’s coat pocket and get comfortable as well. She buttons up the coat as well and puts the hood on top of her head. Then we carefully put the satchels onto our shoulders.

Then we are handed two face coverings. We put the hoods back down and put the face coverings on to cover our mouth and nose. Then we put the hoods back on one more time and put the gloves on to cover our hands.

“These coats are from their wool bearing animals. Yes, they do kill the animal for the pelt.”

“Sigh . . . we learned how to create very warm clothing without killing an animal.”

“I understand your misgivings, Richard. Sometimes I wished we didn’t. But these are water benders. They use what is available to survive in the harsh environment up there.”

“We have several animals that grow very long hair. It is called wool. The people would sheer or cut it off to make warm clothing. Sometimes the animal is kept alive to grow more wool or killed for meat. It is going to take some time to get their attention that it’s wrong.”

“Well, you have about 800 years to get it done. Let’s take a ride on Appa to the Northern Water Tribe.”

Aang quickly puts on his coat and head covering. He puts on his satchel filled with clothes and two scrolls sticking out. We give our farewells to the earth benders and a promise that we’ll be back to learn the other elements.

We walk out of the building and toward the landing area where the air bisons graze. Appa sees Aang walking toward him. He walks toward him as well.

“It is time to visit the Northern Water Tribe.”

He nods his head up and down. He kneels and lets us walk up his tail to the mounted saddle on his back. Once we are secured in the saddle, Appa floats up in the air. He turns around and flies toward the north flapping his tail up and down.

We see a line of clouds at the horizon.

“It is a lot farther than what you see. Once we enter that bank of clouds, it will be another two marks on the sundial before we see the ice wall opening.”

“I’m guessing you are using your Avatar sense to zero in on the location.”

“Not only am I using it, so is Appa. He knows the way to their city.”

“Do they have underground farms to grow food there?”

“No, they don’t. They harvest seaweed for their greens. It is used in soups and bread. They found some plants thriving on the tundra behind the city. They found a hardy plant that produces a delicious fruit called sea prunes. They mostly fish from the ocean for their food. They will hunt the furry animals once in awhile.”

“I hope they don’t over kill the furry animals. If it is like my world, food is very scarce for them too.”

“Yes, that is my hope as well.”

“I know there are places on my world. The people would purchase additional foods to keep a variety available to serve up different types of meals.”

“I will have to ask them if they do that.”

Brianna and I stay seating next to each other with our arms interlocked together. We sense our fairies are fast asleep and conserving their energy for the cold days ahead.

We feel the cold air getting colder and colder as Appa flies further north. We enter the bank of clouds. The wind picks up as Appa slowly descends to get underneath the clouds. We see the cold ocean is very rough with white caps on the waves. I would think this type of weather would be calm for some sailors. We see the occasional fishing boat bobbing up and down on the surface. Some would wave their hands at us. We would wave our hands back at them.

Just about when Brianna and I would fall asleep we get nudged by Aang. We wake up from our drowsiness and see Aang smiling at us.

“We are here. I woke you up in time to see the approach.”

“Thank you, Aang.”

We see a huge white wall of ice before us. My fairies slowly make their way to the top of the coats. They look at the spectacular sight.

“Brrr . . . it’s very cold here.”

“Don’t forget my fairies. You can recite your own spell to keep yourself warm. You can use it to warm up your clothes if you want to.”

“Thank you for the reminder, father, mother, Omega.”

Once they got a good look, they crawl back down to the coat pockets to get comfortable and warm again. Then each one recites a spell or phrase to warm up their clothes. Now they feel a lot more comfortable as they settle down in the coat pockets. I turn my attention back to the ice wall.

“That’s very impressive, Aang.”

“Yes it is, Richard. We are arriving in their summer months. Fortunately it is slightly warmer than the winter seasons.”

Appa continues to fly toward the wall. Then we see the opening in the wall clearly. Once we get through, we see a series of canals and locks. This allows a gradual change in elevation to the tundra level where the city is built. They made sure it is like a fortress here. It is no wonder. The city survived the siege from the Fire Nation.

We see buildings made out of stone that was brought in from another location on the subcontinent. There are canals leading everywhere between the buildings. Then we see the main complex straight ahead. Appa lowers himself down toward a landing area with a large building nearby. Once he is down, he kneels down for us to disembark. Some stable boys come quickly carrying large bundles of seaweed for Appa to eat. As we get ready to leave the landing area, we are greeted by several men.

“Aang, it’s good to see you again.”

“It’s good to see you again as well, Chief Ratook. Do you stay busy up here?” Aang gives a big smile after asking the question.

Ratook smiles back, “Busy? That’s not the half of it, Aang. I have to make sure our food supplies stay up when we enter the winter months here. You know how harsh the conditions are here.” He looks behind Aang to see two people standing there. He notices the helmet I’m wearing beneath the hood. “Isn’t that man from the Fire Nation?”

“No, he isn’t Ratook. We need to have a meeting with the council. I discovered he is a very good air bender.”

“Which tribe is he from?”

Aang gets closer to him and whispers to him, “He is a visitor from another world. He can do things we can only imagine. I was told there are element benders on his world.”

Ratook whispers back, “They have Avatars on their world? I thought we are the only world that has them.”

“That’s what I thought. He said there are no Avatars but element benders on his world. He is an excellent fighter with the weapons. However, his fighting style is based on the animals from their world.”

“He’s an animal fighter? This we have to see.”

“There is more to them than meets the eye. His wife can also air bend as well. But, she is in the early stages of the learning the martial arts.”

“This story is getting better and better. Okay, we’ll meet in the council hall of the central complex. I’ll get the council members to attend for this special meeting.”

“That sounds fine, Ratook. We’ll be there in about a half-mark.”

“That should give me plenty of time to get them there.”

They break apart. Chief Ratook quickly walks away to find the council members of the Northern Water Tribe. Aang motions his hands toward us to follow him through the city.

As we make our way, Aang stops to greet the people along the way.

“Aang, it’s good to see you again.”

“It’s good to see you as well.”

“Whom are these two people with you?”

“They are air benders. They are here to learn some water bending.”

“I thought you were our Avatar here.”

“I still am, madam. This is to see if they can do it.”

“Okay, Aang.”

On and on it went down the streets and crossing the bridges. At one bridge something new happens. Several koalaotters jump out of the water to greet us.

We heard you are coming here, Omega.

Welcome to the Avatar world. We are called koalaotters.

Thank you, koalaotters. We are here for about five more days before we leave. We are here to learn the water bending technique.

We know you’ll do well. There is one leader here who is still full of ice water in the nose. His name is Hahn. He is still bitter that Princess Yue gave her life to preserve the water spirits.

Thank you for telling me that. I’ll be sure to remind him when I meet him.

Then Brianna kneels down and pats their heads with a smile. You are so cute and cuddly. Don’t lose that charm of yours.

Thank you, Miss Omega. We won’t lose that charm of ours.

Then the koalaotters quickly turn around and dive back into the canal. The people around us are amazed the koalaotters came close to us and allow us to touch them. They wonder who we really are.

Aang walks up to us and whispers, “Did they say anything that I should know about, Richard?”

“They did, Aang. Hahn is still bitter about Princess Yue giving her life to preserve the water spirits. They said his nose is still full of ice water.”

Aang smiles, “They said that? That’s funny. That means he is still full of himself and trying to feel important around here. He is a member of the council here. When you face him during the test, I wouldn’t mind if you knock him down an ice cube or two. Hopefully that will wake him up to see the truth about himself.”

“I have no problem with that, Aang. I have faced people like him before. They are always too over confident in their abilities. That gives me my advantage.”

My fairies try to suppress their giggles beneath the coat.

“That’s good. Let’s continue walking toward the council hall.”

We continue walking down the streets. At another intersection we are greeted by some soldiers. There are several buffalo yaks grouped together. They nod their heads slightly at Brianna and me. We nod our heads up and down slightly as well.

Look out for the soldiers, Omega. Some of their noses are full of ice water.

Then one of the soldiers bumps into me to get my attention.

“Uh, excuse me. I’m sorry. I thought I saw a fire warrior. You’re too small to be one of ours.”

I look up at him. “That’s no problem. However, I never consider size to be a problem. All it takes is the right attitude to be a good soldier. Look at Aang. He’s small for his size. Have you challenged him yet?”

The soldier looks at Aang. He sees Aang smiling back and raising his hand up to get his attention.

“Uh, no. He’s our Avatar. I would never go up against him. He brought peace to our world.”

“That’s right. Now if you don’t mind. I need to have a meeting with your council members. You might see me yet displaying my fighting abilities.”

The soldiers do a double take looking at me.

“What?! Are you a warrior?”

“I am, sir. However, my abilities are different from Aang. I already know how to air bend. I’m here to learn the water bending element.”

“Are you an Avatar?”

“I am not, sir. There is only one Avatar here for your world. You’ll have to wait until after the test to hear the rest of my story.”

Aang then walks up to the soldiers. “You better be patient about him. I can sense he can take you all down without breaking a sweat. But like he said, wait until after the test from the council members. Your attitudes might change after that.”

“If you say so, Aang. We’ll keep our mouths shut until then.”

I look at the soldiers one more time, “You also need to pay attention to your mounts. They have a good sense of danger and the weather.” I turn around to join Aang and Brianna walking down the street. We giggle and snicker among ourselves on what I just said.

The soldiers looked perplexed, “Huh?”

They look at their buffalo yaks. They see them nodding their heads up and down and grunting some laughter.

That’s the way to remind them. Heh, heh, heh . . .

“This is creepy if you ask me, Torin. I could have sworn he just talked to our buffalo yaks.”

“Yes, and they understood what he said. Let’s wait and see what happens with the council members. They are some of our strongest water benders. If that visitor beats them all, then we better train harder, Claskon.”

“I hear you, Torin. I hear you.”

“I just got the impression from that visitor he is not from around here.”

“What gave you that idea, Northwood?”

“He said our Avatar is the only one for our world. I think that means he is from another world.”

“He’s from another world? Hmm . . . I see what you are saying. Let’s keep this to ourselves for now. Our questions just might be answered by the end of the day.”

“I hope so, Torin.”

The three of us continue walking down the streets. We see the central complex getting bigger as we walk closer to it. When we make one more turn at the corner, we see it rise up before us. We walk up the many flights of stairs of the central complex. We stop at the third landing and turn right to face a door. Aang opens the door and we walk inside. We feel it is a lot more warmer here than outside. We see a long table set up. There are many torches lit in the room. We see that there is no smoke being emitted from the flames. There are no black spots on the ceiling above.

Behind the long table are the council members sitting down on chairs. In the middle is Tribal Chief Ratook. There are three members on either side of him. That makes a total of seven members for their tribal council. I recognize one of them right away, Hahn.

Aang whispers to us, “Keep your hoods and face wrap on. Wait until they ask you to take them off.”

We whisper back, “Okay.”

Tribal Chief Ratook speaks up, “Welcome, Aang, to the Northern Water Tribe. It is good to see you again.”

“It is good to see everyone here as well. Has it been a good year so far?”

“It has been, Aang. The fishing has been excellent. We get the usual snow storms around here. Who are these two visitors with you? Please take off your coats and face wraps. We need to see who we are meeting for this special occasion.”

Brianna and I take off our coats and face wraps. We drape them on a nearby chair. Once Hahn sees Brianna’s face. He becomes more alert now. Brianna and I see his reaction out of the corner of our eyes.

“What are your names? Where are you from?”

“My name is Richard Moore. This is my wife, Brianna.”

Then Hahn’s face looks crestfallen and his shoulders slump a bit once he heard what I said. Then he straightens up again.

“I am from another world, called Earth. We are here for only one purpose, to learn the water element bending techniques here.”

The council members murmur among themselves.

“What is your personal background? Do you have the training to be a bender?”

“I do, sirs. I have been training for more than ten years. The title that I am seeking is Shaolin Dragon Master. By that time, I will learn how to use and defend against at least 600 weapons. In the Shaolin teaching, the fighting moves are from the animals on our world.”

“So, you’re an animal fighter.”

“That is right, sir.”

“We are told you know how to air bend. You are here seeking to learn how to water bend. According to our tradition that is not allowed. The only person who can do all of the element bending here is the Avatar.”

“Well, there is a progression of teaching in the Shaolin way. We learn the animals in the four different groups of the four elements. However, the fifth one is very different for us. The spirit bending is used as a weapon. It is not used to remove an element bending ability from a person.”

“That is interesting, Richard. What about your wife? We are told she can air bend. Does she intend to learn like you?”

“That is up to her. She gets to decide how far she wants to progress. The decision is up to her. She does have a kind heart and wants to help people. Her knowledge is dealing with mothers and their children. Some of them have been hurt by their husbands. She is a counselor for them.”

“Well, it sounds like she is suited for the healing arts here. Only our women learn to do that. They don’t do water bending.”

“I remember a story I heard about there. There is one lady who came here to be a better water bender. Her name is Katara.”

“She is an exception. We relented and allowed her to learn the advance water bending techniques. Has your wife been tested for the four the elements?”

“She was tested by Iroh. Yes, she tested positive for all four elements. Aang can vouch, she knows how to air bend.”

He looks at Aang. Aang nods his head up and down in agreement.

“Very well, but we want still want to test you. We need to know the extent of your abilities.”

“That is fine sir. I am ready to face any one of you.”

“It won’t be one against one, Richard. It will be all seven of us against you.”

“That is fine, sir. I have complete confidence in myself that I can win the match.”

“We doubt that you will, Richard, but you can try.”

“We will have the match right now. Follow us, please.”

All seven members stand up. They walk out of the council hall and walk down the stairs to the main level where the canals are. We follow them.

“Prepare yourself, Richard.”

“That’s fine sir.” I walk over to Brianna. I unbutton my coat. I whisper to Brianna, “Open your coat, Bri. Fairies, please get into her coat pockets. I will reveal this to you later.”

Tiger whispers back, “Thank you, father.”

Brianna unbuttons her coat and opens it. I open my coat. We come close to each other so no one sees what is happening. The fairies quickly fly out of my coat pockets and fly into Brianna’s coat pockets. Then Brianna buttons her winter coat back up. I take off the winter coat and the outer coat that I’m wearing. I also take off my outer clothes by hand and fold them up. Aang takes the clothes and the jackets and places them on a stone railing nearby.

I whisper to Aang. “Don’t worry, I’m going to set a warm spell on the padding underneath the armor.”

Aang whispers back, “That’s a good idea.”

I turn around and walk to the center of their circle. I set a warm spell on the armor padding to keep me warm. I push the buttons on my helmet to close the mouth guard and lower the eye shield down. I leave the sword in the scabbard. I turn around slowly looking at the seven men. I can see them with a grin on their faces. That tells me, they are too over confident. They are not expecting what I can do.

Quickly, all seven of them bring up huge amounts of water from the canals. They have water blobs hovering above them.

“Now!”

They send the water blobs quickly at me. They quickly encase me in the water. They raise me in the air with the water blob. Then they freeze the water blob into one huge ice ball.

“That’s it. There is no way he can get out of that. I am sorry, madam. He is no match for us.”

“He hasn’t done anything yet, sirs. I have complete confidence he will win.”

“Paah!”

I look within myself and talk to Croin. Are you ready Croin?

I’m ready, Richard. Let’s show them what we con do.

I recite the spell to transport out of the ice ball. I disappear in a blink of an eye.

“What?! Where did he go?”

They quickly look around. They can’t find me at all.

“That’s impossible!”

They lose their concentration. The ice ball drops to the ground and shatters into hundreds of pieces.

“Is he dead?”

“Where did he go, madam?”

Brianna smiles, “He used magic, sirs. He transported out of the ice ball.”

“Magic? We have the magic here!”

While I’m invisible to them. I set the freeze spell on the darts. I shoot seven darts and have them assigned to the seven members of the council. I shoot out the darts to be hidden and hovering in several locations where the darts can’t be seen.

Then I move down to the middle of the ice ball rubble. I end the transport spell. I appear in a blink of an eye and stand in the midst of the ice rubble. “Now, it’s my turn!” I quickly point my hands toward the ice rubble. I turn around quickly to create a tornado around me. I gather up the ice pieces into my tornado.

Brianna and Aang are smiling widely. Brianna can hear my fairies giggling with laughter. They know what is going on. They are peeking through the opening of the coat.

The soldiers who are watching, are not surprised by the tactic. They have seen Aang do something like this once before.

Water Master Pakku exclaims out loud. “Look out! He is using the ice we created against us!”

The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 12
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman

The list of characters mentioned in this story belong to the various authors that created them. This is a fan-fiction story.

~~~000~~~

Then I move down to the middle of the ice ball rubble. I end the transport spell. I appear in a blink of an eye and stand in the midst of the ice rubble. “Now, it’s my turn!” I quickly point my hands toward the ice rubble. I turn around quickly to create a tornado around me. I gather up the ice pieces into my tornado.

Brianna and Aang are smiling widely. Brianna can hear my fairies giggling with laughter. They know what is going on. They are peaking through the opening of the coat.

The soldiers who are watching, are not surprised by the tactic. They have seen Aang do something like this once before.

Water Master Pakku exclaims out loud. “Look out! He is using the ice we created against us!”

Tribal Chief Ratook and Master Water Bender Pakku quickly bring up water shields in front of them. Several koalaotters jump out of the canal. They gather near the buffalo yaks.

I quickly grind all of the pieces of ice until they are about the size of a pea or smaller. Once I get my chi built up to the maximum, I launch my attack. I aim for the council members who don’t have a shield up. I lunge forward about a foot while staying inside the icy tornado with both hands and roar out loud a tiger roar. “Rooooar!”

I quickly jerk back from my lunge within the tornado. The air I displace from my body is in the shape of the tiger as it flies through the wall of the icy tornado. The air shape of the tiger takes some ice pieces along the way. The council members see a white ghost of a tiger roaring at one of them. There are two forefeet on either side of it with claws out.

The council member quickly brings up a water shield to protect itself just in time. The image of the tiger gets absorbed into his water shield.

“Aaarrgh! Pant . . . pant . . . pant . . . What was that animal?”

Brianna smiles with the answer, “That was a tiger, sir. It has a very lethal bite and a vicious slash with the claws.”

“Pant! Pant! . . . That’s incredible!”

Then I start doing a random attack on each council member. I project out a panther and get the same results.

“Arrghh! We’ve underestimated him!” He absorbs the panther into his water shield.

I then project out a very strong flying crane at one of them. The wing slash tries to cut through the water shield. It makes it through the water shield and misses his chest just barely.

“No! Pant . . . pant . . . he almost got through my water shield! He has a very strong will!”

I project out a praying mantis toward Pakku. He looks really scared as he brings up his water shield.

“Was that an insect?”

“Yes, it was sir. However, it is only as big as my hand.”

“Then why did he learn that insect?”

“The techniques of the praying mantis are very good in hand to hand combat, Pakku.”

“This is too much. I didn’t realize animals could teach those aspects.”

I then aim a huge boa constrictor at Hahn.

It comes at him with its mouth wide open at him. The length of the snake body is in ‘s’ shape as it hurls toward him.

“Aaagghh! No!” He doesn’t get his water shield up in time. He brings up his arms to try and block the hit.

He stands there shell shocked. Chief Ratook couldn’t get a water shield in front of him in time. The water boa constrictor dives toward his chest and hits his arms. The ice particles quickly shred his coat arms into pieces.

He looks at his arms. He sees small cuts of skin on his bare arms. Each cut is bleeding a few drops of blood. “My arms! He cut my arms!”

The other members quickly realize why I made the pieces smaller. If they don’t get a water shield up in time, they will get cut as well. Aang quickly writes on the scrolls what I’m doing. He is getting great ideas for the next time he faces an adversary and to pass it down to the next Avatar.

I then project out several other animals that I have seen. I project out the koalaotters. Several ghostly koalaotters quickly fly through the air from the tornado.

“Arrrggggh! He using our animals against us!”

Then I shoot out several buffalo yaks at several council members. With heads down and horns coming at them head first.

The buffalo yaks are moving their heads up and down and grunting with delight.

Yes! That’s the way to teach them a lesson! We’ll get the respect we deserve. Thank you, Omega!

The koalaotters are jumping up and down with delight.

We are with you, Omega!

The soldiers see the reaction from the animals. They begin to smile and understand what I’m trying to do. They join in the yelling and cheering as well.

“Keep it up, Richard!”

“Give them a taste of their own medicine!”

I then project several of the large beasts that I met and saw in Ba Sing Se.

They are astonished that I could do something like this. One of the council members creates two water shields, one for himself and one for Hahn. Hahn is now afraid of what I’m going to do next.

I then project several more of the large beasts that I met in Ba Sing Se. I get their nerves rattled again as they try to block the icy images. Then I point my two hands upward. I create a helix tower of tornados about ten feet high. I bring it down through the main tornado. I shoot out a double icy fist at them that twists around each other.

Aang smiles that I created my own helix tower. He quickly writes down on the scrolls the tactics that I’m using here.

They quickly block all of the hits.

“Those air fists are coming at us faster and harder when he does that.”

Water Master Pakku speaks up, “We’ve been on the defensive since he started attacking us. We must turn it around quickly.”

Okay, Croin. It is time for some fire and ice this time. Get ready.

I’m ready, Richard.

I end the tornado and let the ice pieces fall into the canals.

“That’s incredible, Richard.”

“I’m not done yet. Now for some fire and ice.”

“You don’t know any fire bending.”

“I don’t, but my friends do. Darts! It is time!” Hit them in the neck and return to my gauntlet. Freeze spell from the neck down.

The hidden darts come flying out of their hiding area. They fly quickly to their assigned targets and hit them in the neck. “Thoo! Thoo! Thoo! Thoo! Thoo! Thoo! Thoo!”

The darts return to my gauntlet. “Thwip! Thwip! Thwip! Thwip! Thwip! Thwip! Thwip!”

One of the council members tries to put a hand to his neck. But they quickly get frozen where they are standing.

“What’s the meaning of this, Richard?”

“I can’t move!”

“We all can’t move!”

“I set a freeze spell on the darts. Now you can’t move. Now I’m going to test you on how fast your reaction is.”

“What do you mean?”

“I said earlier it is now time for some fire and ice. Here comes the fire from my friends! Now! Warm them back up!” I wave my hand in the air.

Then all of a sudden seven dragon memories appear in a blink of an eye, including Croin, Marcon and Blacklaw. They shoot out hot flames at them.

“Arrrgghhh! Dragons!”

“Quickly use your chi to get yourself free!” Shouts Pakku.

“Get a water shield up now!” Shouts Ratook.

Six of the council members quickly thaw themselves out before the flames reach them. They bring up a water shield to block the flames just in time.

Croin aims his flames at Hahn. He stands frozen before Croin with his mouth wide open. There is sweat going down his face. “Nooooo . . . !”

A council member quickly gets a water shield in front of Hahn. However, it is not quite fast enough. The flames touch his coat, then the water from the water shield quickly puts it out. Hahn collapses in fear to the ground.

The dragons all disappear once they attacked. Croin returns within me.

The council members see Hahn curled up in a ball on the ground shaking with fear.

“I failed my mission! Fire! Help me! Put out the flames! Please!”

Master Water Bender Pakku looks at him, “The fire is put out, Hahn. The test is over.”

“Huh?!” He looks at his clothes and sees the flames are put out. He quickly gets up to face me. “How dare you use our animals against us?!”

“Is that your problem? Look at the buffalo yaks, the koalaotters and the soldiers over there. They are yelling in approval for what I did here.”

They all turn to face them. They see them jubilant and happy that I was able to beat the council members.

Then Tribal Chief Ratook speaks up. “He is right, my friends. We have been too arrogant with our thinking here. We need to re-evaluate our priorities and get them straight.”

“I agree, Chief Ratook.”

The other council members quickly agree with Pakku, but Hahn still objects.

“What? Are you all crazy! He humiliated every one of us! I want revenge now!”

Pakku yells out loud, “No, Hahn!”

Hahn quickly lunges at me. He tries to bring up a blob of water to hit me. I quickly hit all of his pressure points through the clothes. He collapses to the ground with his arms and legs shaking wildly.

“What . . . .d . .d. did . . y . . .y.. . .you . . .d.d.d.o?” He looks at his hands. “I c . .c . .an’t wa. . . wa . .ter b . . .b . .end!”

“I applied pressure points to your limbs to get your attention. Is there a healer here?”

A lady comes walking up quickly.

“What did I do, madam?”

“You applied pressure points to cause his limbs to shake wildly. Apparently you know the acupuncture techniques to heal a body. But in this case, you did it to cause a backfire. He shouldn’t be able to water bend until his chi is back in balance.”

“That’s right, madam. You can go ahead and rub his limbs down. Let him limp around as a reminder until his own body heals itself.”

“Thank you, kind sir.”

“A count of ten is long enough for this situation. A longer count might be needed if you have someone is unrepentant and wants to hurt you very badly.”

Another lady healer comes forward to help. Once his limbs are rubbed downed, he finds himself able to stand up.

“I did that to you for a reason, Hahn.”

“Wha. . . what. . . is . . .it . .t?”

“First of all, you will remember this for days. But the pain will stick in your mind for months. You won’t ever forget it. I was given this during my training days when I was younger. Therefore, I do know what you are going through in your mind. Also, you are still bitter that Princess Yue gave her life to save the water spirits.”

“Tha . . .that’s right. She had no right to do that. I loved her!”

“No, you didn’t, Hahn. You loved her position so you could become a prince. You would have been a tyrant among your people here. Your shouts of revenge are proof of that.”

The council members quickly look at each other and nod their heads up and down in agreement.

I continue with the dialogue, “It was her father who decided her fate. He wanted his daughter to live when she was born. Tui gave part of her spirit essence to Yue. But when the Fire Nation came here, they took the life of the Moon. If Princess Yue didn’t return the gift of life back to the Moon. Then you would have a very different world here. There would be no water bending. Your world would be in chaos.”

Aang walks up and stands by my side. “He speaks the truth, Hahn. You must let go of your selfish desires. Stop thinking about yourself, think of others.”

Then Hahn falls to his knees and weeps before us. “Please, please forgive me. I’m sorry for everything I did.”

The council members smile at him.

“That’s the first attitude to have, Hahn. But, first, you will be suspended from the council until next year. Use that time to get your life reordered and get your chi back in balance. We’ll make sure you learned your lessons from us and the healers properly.”

“I . . . understand . . . thank you for this opportunity to get my life straightened out.”

“You’re welcome, Hahn.”

“Now for you, Richard. I have a question or two. The first one is this. How did you know about Hahn’s problem?”

“When we were walking down the streets here, the koalaotters told me a couple of things. The first thing they told me is that Hahn is still bitter that Princess gave her life to save the water spirits.”

“I didn’t tell them that, Richard.”

Then several koalaotters come walking up quickly. We turn to face them.

That is not true, Omega. Every time he comes to a bridge, he talks to us. We are good listeners, but they know we can’t talk back to them.”

“What did they say, Richard?”

“They said he comes to the bridge to talk to us. They are good listeners, but they know they can’t talk back to you. This is the first time someone like me whom can speak with them, mind to mind.”

The koalaotters nod their heads up and down.

Then most of the people begin to laugh out loud. “Hah, hah, hah, . . . “

”So they do understand what we are saying. We just can’t hear them speak to us.”

Then Torin gets bumped behind him by his buffalo yak. He hears two words from him in his mind. That’s right.

“Oh, my stars. My buffalo yak just talked to me in my mind. He said, That’s right.”

All of the buffalo yaks nod their heads up and down in agreement.

Then all of the soldiers hug their mount’s necks. The buffalo yaks press back into the soldiers.

“Well, it seems we haven’t been paying attention to the animals like we should.”

“That’s right, Pakku. They have very good observation skills in us. They all sensed another problem with Hahn and some of your soldiers.”

Aang and Brianna are smiling now.

Chief Ratook sees their reaction. He smiles as well, “What is it, Richard.”

“They said, that some of the soldier’s and Hahn’s noses are filled with ice water.”

Hahn now looks embarrassed as everyone is laughing out loud. Then they quiet down when Chief Ratook raises his hands.

Torin looks at his mount and smiles, “I give up. I know when I’m beaten by my mount. I’ll have to pay more attention to you now.”

The soldiers laugh while Torin hugs his mount again. His buffalo yak presses back with equal force.

“We know what that means, Richard. So, Hahn, are you ready to humble yourself and learn to be a better citizen and a water bender?”

“I am definitely ready, Master Pakku.”

“That’s good. Meet me at my study room tomorrow morning at the second mark after sunrise.”

“I’ll be there, sir.”

“Richard, I have another question. It pertains to your story. You said there are element benders on your world, but no Avatars. Is that correct?”

“That is true, sir. It is learned by anyone who wants to achieve the goal of Shaolin Dragon Master. There are about forty masters per generation. The teachings are passed down from generation to generation. For example, the crane wing slash. It takes a master to generate the air currents off the hands as it slices through the air. Most of the time, there will be one or two Shaolin Dragon Masters per generation that can do all of the element bends.”

“My world used to have magic. But the people abused it when they try to control the people and rule the world with an iron hand. Therefore, the Creator removed it from our world. However, there are still traces of magic left in the world. What is unfortunate, there are people who go out of their way and risk their lives to achieve it or find it.”

The people nod their heads up and down in agreement. They have encountered the same problem on their world.

“What is also true is this. We have dragons on our world. It is from them that we learned about the yin yang principal. I’ll show you.” I turn around and walk to my satchel containing my gee. I take it out and unfold it for them to see.

Once they see the symbol, they start to laugh out loud. “Hah, hah, hah . . . .!”

“Yes, you did learn it from the dragons. That is great, Richard. Where did those dragon images come from, Richard?”

“It is a bit of a long story. I hope you don’t mind if I tell it to everyone here.”

They all look around and nod their heads up and down. They gather in closer to hear the story. They sit on the steps, the bridge railings, and stone benches.

I then tell a brief summary of my story. Brianna interjects her point of view to add more depth to the story.

“That’s an amazing story, Richard. Do you have the proof that you are the Omega Unicorn Dragon?”

“I do sir.” Brianna steps away to make room for us. Brianna takes off her winter coat and hands to a healer. We look within ourselves. Quickly, we sprout out feathered wings and the unicorn images from our bodies. My fairies quickly fly out of the coat pockets and hover near us. Croin flies out of me and hovers above us.

“Gasp! It is true.”

All of the animals shout out in excitement with their noises. Then all of the people begin to clap their hands and cheer us on.

I put my hand to quiet them down. “Now for the dragon wings.” I retract the feathered wings. Then I sprout out the dragon wings. My eyes now have a golden glow.

Aang speaks up, “I was able to teach them how to control their alternate forms without revealing their power. I had a marvelous time as Richard and I tested each other. I knew he would do the same thing to you. We even did some team tactics as well. I wrote everything down on these scrolls. It will be passed onto the next Avatar as a resource guide if he or she should need the ideas. I’ll show you one of the team tactics that we did together. You probably won’t see this again until there are more air benders back on our world. We both have a strong will to make this work.”

I retract my wings. We stand next to each other. Aang has his glider folded up in his hands. We make a tornado around each other. Then we lift ourselves up to create two tornado pillars. Then we let the pillars wrap around each other to create a helix tornado tower. We shoot out air fists of spinning air at the water in the canals. When the air fists hit the water, it creates a very big splash in the water. Everyone claps and cheers when they see the results. Then we let the tornados shoot us out into the air. The tornados dissipate quickly. Aang opens his glider and uses it to glide back down where we started. I extend my feather wings and glide down next to Aang.

Everyone claps and cheers more loudly now. Even the animals make their sounds in approval for what they saw. Aang raises his hands to quiet everyone down.

I continue with my story. “Now we come to the reason why I’m given this big responsibility. These beautiful winged people that you see, are my fairies. I gave them life. This will be an automatic process from the Creator. It is possible there will be more people on Earth who will give birth to fairies. They too will be dual gender like me. Who knows, the Creator might extend the gift here to your world. It is up to him. In 800 years or so, there will be a terrible war on my world. It is called the Ultimate Last Battle. This is when King Azazel, will bring his minions of demons and fallen angels to come and destroy my world. I heard he will try to bring one billion star ships to come and try to destroy it. Now you are wondering if there is hope for my world. There is.”

“What is it, Richard?”

“On our world there are many stories told. Even your world is told about on my world. We think all of the good people and the good forces will come to my Earth to help protect it.”

“We don’t know where your world is, Richard. Is there a way to get there?”

“There is, Master Pakku. On my world is a collection of bluestone pillars that was taken a long time ago by the Emissaries. They are placed on several worlds. All you have to do is apply magic to the stone, then whomever is near it will be transported to our world.”

“A bluestone pillar? Is it about this long and round?” Master Pakku uses his hands to describe the shape and size.

“That is right, sir.”

“Oh my stars. We have it here, Aang.”

“Where did you find it, Pakku?”

“We found it in the frozen tundra one day while collecting some sea prunes.”

“Then you must keep it hidden until the time is right.”

“Yes, we must, Aang. We’ll need to write some scrolls to explain its purpose and how to use it. Richard, I need to know something. What would happen next if your world gets destroyed?”

“The first thing is that your story won’t be recorded on our world. That doesn’t mean you no longer exist. This is a revenge tactic by King Azazel. When he rebelled against the Creator millions of years ago, he was thrown down to our world first.”

“What did he do against the Creator?”

“He coveted the praise from the angels and the Emissaries for himself. He wanted to be the Creator.”

“Aha! Now I understand why he was thrown down. Then what happened next?”

“While he was on our world, he saw the race of men come forth and populate the Earth. They gave the praise to the Creator for all of his wonderful blessings upon them. Therefore, he learned he was being replaced by the humanoid population scattered throughout the cosmos.”

Everyone smiles upon hearing the answer. Even the animals nod their heads up and down in agreement.

“Then he was taken from our world and imprisoned in the Hell Galaxy. Did you see in the night sky a bunch of stars exploding some time ago?”

“We did, Richard. We thought it was a bad omen.”

“It was a bad omen, Master Pakku. The demons and angels figured out how many stars had to explode to release King Azazel from his prison. All I know is this. He is now putting in motion his plan to destroy the Creator’s Creation. I encountered an attempt not too long ago on another world. The people of that world were able to defend their world successfully.”

“That is good news to hear, Richard. We’ll have to hope that we can do the same as well.”

“I did learn not too long ago some interesting facts about the universe from the Emissaries. There are twelve different universes in the Creation. However, there is a common point to them all. There is another galaxy that is nearby. We named it the Andromeda Galaxy. It looks exactly like ours. Both of our galaxies are in the center of the Creation. We are the heart of the Creator’s creation. Within both galaxies are four different worlds that are very unique. They are intersecting worlds. The twelve universes are tied through these four worlds. The people who live on these worlds can travel to any of the twelve universes if they want to.”

“Have they visited other worlds, Richard?”

“They have, Pakku. They influenced the worlds as they saw fit. Now, I need to mention something about the dragons. It is very important. There are two dragons that are very important. They are very powerful and have long lives. The first name is the Great Mother Eingana.” I wave my hands, an image of Eingana appears above us.

The crowd looks astonished. “Gasp!”

“The next one is the Great Father Leviathan.” I wave my hands again, an image of Leviathan appears next to Eingana.

The crowd looks astonished again, “Gasp!”

“Those dragons are huge, Richard.”

“Yes, they are Pakku. I actually met them. These two dragons gave birth to all dragons found throughout the multi-verses. Eingana is found on the planet Twainor. Leviathan is found on my world, Earth. Now to prove something else to you. I met your two dragons here. It was done through a dream on the previous world I was on.” I wave my hands again. The red and blue dragons appear nearby, Ran and Shaw.

“So you entered the spirit realm here before you came here, Richard.”

“That is right, Aang. They welcomed me here because they sensed the dichotomy within me, the unicorn and the dragon aspect. They recognized that I encountered Leviathan and Eingana.” Then I wave my hands again to make them disappear.

“Where did those seven dragons come from Richard?”

“They are from the planet Twainor. I met them on that world.” I wave my hands to show the thousands images. “I met them all while I was there. The first dragon I met is very special to me. His name is Croin.” Croin flies out of me and hovers above me with his wings spread out.

“I’m pleased to meet you all.”

“What? You can speak? How is this possible?”

“It is because of Richard and his armor. All dragons can speak when they want to. Twainor is a magical world. Richard can make me more solid if I need to be. I can shoot out cold or hot flames. It is all done with magic. Richard can give any of these memories more abilities if he needs to.”

“So, are you a memory?”

“I am, Pakku. My real self is alive and well on Twainor.”

“Now I need to bring in closer the important people on Twainor.” The thousand images disappear with a wave of my hand. I wave my again. The images of the sixteen Kings and Queens appear and the eleven other ambassadors to Twainor. “The leader of the kingdoms is King Dryden.” He moves forward with Queen Lorinor and Grand Wizard Eldwin. “This is Grand Wizard Eldwin. I will now contact them. They will get your location and get it added to the star charts. These eleven other people who are very different from the others are the Outside Helpers or ambassadors to their world. I am the twelfth one in that group.” I concentrate on the contact crystal mounted on my helmet. It glows, then the image of King Dryden appears before me.

“Greetings, Richard. It is good to see you again.”

“It is good to see you again, King Dryden. Do you still have the location of this world?”

“Wizard Eldwin is confirming right now. He’s got your location. Are you still on the Avatar world?”

“We are still on the Avatar world. I’m doing another proof to the people here. I just had a test from the water benders here. Needless to say, they were surprised by my tactics.”

The people laugh, snicker and giggle when they hear my assessment of the test battle.

“Your world is within the Local Group here. Richard has already given a contact crystal to Aang. It is to be used if you are seriously threatened by an outside force that you cannot handle.”

“My name is Ratook. I am the Chief Tribal Leader for the Northern Water Tribe. We understand King Dryden. Here is some interesting news. We found a bluestone pillar here. Richard explained its purpose to us.”

“That’s good, Chief Ratook. Keep it well hidden and protected. It is only to be used when the Ultimate Last Battle takes place.”

“I don’t know when that will occur on our world, but according to Richard, it will be 800 years on his world when that battle will take place. We’ll keep it hidden and well protected.”

“That is all we can ask for. We know there will be many worlds that will be tested until that time comes. We hope and pray that your world will overcome the difficulties until that time.”

“We hope as well, King Dryden. It is good to know that we are not alone in the Creator’s Creation. Peace unto you, King Dryden.”

“Unto you peace, Avatar world.”

The image disappears in front of me.

Everyone gets quiet as they think about the words that were just spoken. You could hear a pin drop if you wanted to.

“Richard, I think we can teach you the water bending element. You have a very good command of the air bending technique. We hope you are a fast learner.”

“When will I start, Master Pakku?”

“Right now. But first you need to come with us to the Spirit Oasis.”

Everyone splits apart and walks back to their various duties in the city. The koalaotters dive back into the canal. The soldiers return back to their posts at the various intersections of the city.

When I put my multi-pocket coat back on, my fairies quickly fly back into the pockets to get warm again. Then I put the winter coat back on and button it up. I put the outer clothes and gee clothes back into the satchel. I put it around my shoulders to carry. Aang, Brianna and I follow the six council members to the main complex. We walk up the steps to the second level and enter into a tunnel that slopes downward. We see torches sticking in the walls along the way so we can see where we are walking. Slowly, we feel the air get warmer in the tunnel. Then the tunnel ends and opens into a large cavern. There are only two torches lit in the cavern.

We stop at the edge of the cavern floor and look into the water. We see two glowing koi fish circling each other. One is black with a white spot on its head, the other is a white fish with a black spot on its head. The living symbol of the yin yang being shown to us. They push and pull against each other as they swim around each other. Brianna and I unbutton the winter coats so my fairies can see them. They fly out of the pockets and hover about above them. Then they fly over to a rock ledge to rest and watch what happens.

Master Pakku speaks up, “The white koi is the Moon Spirit, Yue. The black koi is the Ocean Spirit, La. Since you can speak with them mind to mind, we would greatly appreciate hearing what they say to you.”

“I understand, Master Pakku. This will be a first for you to hear their words indirectly. Brianna, could you please speak for the water spirits?”

Brianna smiles, “Of course, Richard. I will gladly repeat what they are saying in my mind.”

Once they make a mind connection to Brianna, she feels the fluidity of the water world around them. She feels everything is peaceful and calm on the Avatar world right now. Brianna’s eyes have a bluish white glow. Brianna speaks for them.

“Greetings, Omega Unicorn Dragon. Welcome to the Avatar World.”

“This is La speaking. We hope the council members didn’t give you too much trouble during the test.”

Everyone smiles at the remark from La.

I smile, “They didn’t La. They were surprised on what I can do.”

“I’m sure they were, Richard. We had a talk with Ran and Shaw not too long ago in the Spirit Realm. They confirmed what we felt when you arrived on our world. We felt kindred animal spirits when you arrived here. For that, we thank the Creator that you arrived here.”

“I thank the Creator as well, La.”

“This is Yue speaking. Master Pakku, you will teach the beginning water bending techniques for the five days they are here with you. Then each time they come back, you will add more techniques and special abilities.”

“Will Brianna be taught any of the water bending techniques?”

“She will learn the basics this week so she can defend herself. She will also learn the healing arts as well. She will use this talent to help heal the hurt animals and the people she will meet throughout her life. Richard will also be taught the healing arts also. But, most importantly, their fairies will be taught as well.”

“I understand, Yue. It will be done.”

“This is La speaking. On Richard’s world, there is one moon, just like it is here. On Twainor there are two identical moons. Teach them the advantages and disadvantages with the moon cycles.”

“Yes, La. I understand.”

“You have probably seen the yin yang symbol that Richard has on his gee.”

“I have seen it La. He said this came from the dragons on his world.”

“That is correct, Pakku. This symbol should have been taught to everyone throughout the multi-verses. However, the enemy, King Azazel and his minions corrupted this teaching by saying the two sides can never can be combined. Be thankful that teaching is preserved on worlds such as ours.”

“Yes, La. We now see the big picture. We must make the effort to keep the teaching alive and well for all generations.”

“That is correct, Pakku. Richard, this for you to know. The Emissaries told you there are twelve universes, each one is on a different plane of existence.”

“That is correct, La.”

“The versions of you and Brianna are killed on each of them, except for yours and another one. There is an Anti version of you and Brianna in the Anti-verse. You will meet each other at the Ultimate Last Battle.”

“From what I know about in my science studies, the two sides should never meet, or there will be total annihilation.”

“That is true if two like objects come in contact with each other. You must be opposite in nature in order to combine with each other.”

“So, what you are saying, is this. I should be in unicorn mode while my anti-self is in dragon mode. The yin yang symbol to perfection.”

“That is correct. When you do combine together, both of you will become the hidden weapon the Creator will use at the Ultimate Last Battle. We don’t know how he will use you and for what purpose. We don’t even know what you’ll look like when you are combined together. The Creator told us this so that you can have hope.”

“Thank you La and Yue. Thank you for telling me that. I will keep that tucked away in a part of my mind so I can recall it later.”

“That is all we need to say. We thank the Creator that Brianna is providing us a voice so that you can hear us. This will probably be the last time you will hear us speak to you this way. It will have to be in the spirit realm if you need to talk with us again.”

“We understand, La and Yue.”

Then La and Yue release their mind connection to Brianna. Her eyes return to normal. Brianna teeters a bit. The fairies quickly see this. They fly over quickly and help her to sit down. I sit beside her and put an arm around her.

“Oooh . . . that took some energy.”

Pakku kneels down in front of her. “What did you feel?”

“I felt the fluidity of the water all around me. I felt the ebb and the flow of the tides. I felt the wind blowing across the water surface. I felt that water is the life-giving force for all. Yet, I am truly humbled by the experience.”

Pakku smiles, “That is exactly how it is for us water benders.” Pakku looks at me. “Richard, you must do the same thing. If you can mind connect with the sea life that will allow you to be a very powerful water bender.”

“I think already have, Pakku. I met some dolphins on my world. I was able to talk to them mind to mind.” I quickly move my hand to show them an image of a dolphin. Then I make it disappear with another wave my hand.

“That’s good. You need to recall that experience to feel the water flowing around you.”

I look within myself and close my eyes. I try to recall the conversation I had with the dolphins. Soon, I recall their words in my mind. I then try to remember that environment of being in the Atlantic Ocean talking to them. “Sigh . . . “ I look at La. Can you help me, La?

I can Richard. You have the words in your mind, now remember how the water felt while you were standing in the water next to them.

Once I remember the water around me, my mind gets a huge input of the water animals on the Avatar world.

Slow down, Richard. Breathe really slow. You just got overwhelmed by our water world. Concentrate on my voice.

I slow my breathing down by breathing deep breaths in and out. I concentrate on La to block out the other voices.

That’s it. Concentrate on my voice. I’ll guide you step by step. The first step is the water in Oasis Pool.

I slowly move my mind to the Oasis Pool. I feel the water all around me.

That’s it, Richard. Now try and find the source of water in the Oasis Pool.

I search the depths. I remember there are subtle temperature readings concerning sources of water. That even includes salinity levels.

That’s right, use your senses. Feel the temperature changes in the water as you move about, taste the salinity levels in the water.

I look around in the pool, then I feel a colder source coming from the bottom. I check it with the salinity levels. The water is slightly more salty in the same direction.

You’re doing great, Richard. You found the direction of the source. Follow it.

I follow the direction. I see a hole opening in the rocky bottom. I travel through the tunnel until I reach the end. I see and feel more microorganisms are now around me. Then I start to feel the ebb and flow of the water coming in and out of the tunnel. I feel the pull of the moon creating the tides. I feel the push of the ocean to move in the direction of the moon’s gravitational pull.

Then all of a sudden my eyes become wide open. My eyes are glowing with a bluish white color.

You’ve just made the link, Richard. Congratulations.

Thank you, La.

Everyone sees my eyes are now glowing with a bluish white light.

Pakku sees this and makes a comment. “He did it, Aang. He has made the connection.”

Aang smiles, “Yes he did, Pakku. I felt his struggle. He was overwhelmed at first, but La helped him take it step by step.”

“I felt it too. Did you feel it, Brianna?”

“I do, Master Pakku and Aang. Now we can communicate with both worlds now. That would be the land animals and the sea life.” Brianna walks up to me and takes hold of my hand carefully.

I turn to face her. My eyes dim to normal. I give a wide smile.

Brianna smiles back at me.

Then we both hug each other and kiss each other. My fairies see this happening. The come flying and hover above.

“It is now our turn, father. We need to connect to the water world as well.”

Brianna and I look at the fairies with a smile.

“Yes, it is your turn to make the connection.”

“If they can do it, Richard. Then nothing will be impossible for them. Your offspring will definitely help bring peace to your world.”

“Don’t forget my own children, Master Pakku. Some of my sons and grandsons will give birth to their own fairies.”

“That might be true, Brianna. What about your daughters and grand daughters?”

“It is more than likely that lineage will produce the royalty generations. But as always, it is up to them if they want to accept the responsibility of being in that position.”

“That is very true, Brianna. We all hope the royalty here on the Avatar world accept their responsibilities properly. They must act in good faith to be responsible leaders to the people underneath them.”

“Are you ready, fairies?”

“We are, Master Pakku.”

“Begin with touching the water with your hands. See if you can reach out with your minds to La and Yue.”

The fairies glide down and hover above the water. They put their hands in the water. Immediately all of their eyes shine with a bluish white light.

“We did it! How come it was so fast for us, father?”

“It is because you are part of me, Tiger. I have the twelve unicorns within me. We are a part of nature.”

“That makes sense, father.”

“Now remember that experience so you can recall it later during the water bending exercises.”

The fairies respond together in one voice, “Yes, Master Pakku.” They fly up from the water surface. Their eyes become normal. They fly over to Brianna and me. They sit on our shoulders and heads to rest.

“That’s good, my fairies. Now we are ready for the next step. So, what is the next step, Master Pakku?”

“The next step is going from the mind to the rest of the body. The body needs to know what the mind went through. Then you can use any part of your body to do what is needed to water bend.”

Brianna, my fairies and I respond in one voice, “Yes, Master Pakku.”

The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 13
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman

The list of characters mentioned in this story belong to the various authors that created them. This is a fan-fiction story.

~~~000~~~

We take off the satchels and put them in a safe location on the ground. We turn around and walk back to where we were.

“Water is the flowing element. Water is the element of change. To master water, you must release your emotions to where ever they lead you. Water teaches us acceptance. Let your emotions flow like water. Remember these words.”

We let Master Pakku’s words sink deep in our minds.

“The first motion to learn is the push and pull. Watch me do it, then you copy my moves.” He pushes his hands toward the water. Little waves on the water get pushed away from him. He then points his fingers down and pretends he is holding an imaginary piece of rope. He pulls back. Little waves of water are brought toward him.

“Remember your connection to the water. Get far apart as best you can. That way you can see your own efforts.”

My fairies spread apart and hover above the water. When they push and pull with their hands, little waves of water get pushed and pulled back toward them. They smile that they can do it. Brianna and I are also able to do it as well.

Master Pakku looks around and sees that we are successful with the first motion. “That’s very good. You need to do that each day. This will allow you to keep your water bending talent fresh in the mind. Now we are ready for the second motion. Watch how I do it, then you copy my moves and arm motions.”

“Yes, Pakku.”

Pakku gets into a familiar stance that I have seen many times at the Peaceful Dragon. He turns his right foot out so that it is perpendicular with his left foot. He slightly bend the knees. Then he moves his arms in a swinging motion. While the right arm makes the motion, the right wrist is flexed toward the water, as if to draw water out of the Oasis Pool. As he completes the arc, the wrist flexes and straightens out the hand to open the palm. When the arc is finished, the palm is totally open with the three fingers pointing away from him.

The same motion is applied to the left arm and the left hand. Once both motions are complete, some water is drawn up from the Oasis Pool and fall back in. “Now you try it. Remember your connection to the water. See if you can do it without having your eyes lit up with the bluish white light.”

My fairies get into position by standing near the rock ledge or hovering above the water. They remember the connection they made with the water. Immediately twelve streams of water rise up from the surface and fall back into the water. They even did it without having their eyes become bluish white.

“We did it, father, mother, Omega!”

“Yes you did, my fairies. Now let’s see if Brianna and I can do it.”

Brianna and I stand side by side looking at the water. We think about the water connection we just made. We position our feet and flex our knees like Pakku. Brianna and I mimic each other with the same arm and hand motions. Immediately two water streams come straight up.

Pakku speaks up, “Now hold it there if you can with your mind for a count of ten.”

The fairies quickly bring up their own water streams again. We look at the water stream and concentrate. We hold it while we count out loud.

“1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10.” We move our arms down to our sides. The two water streams fall back into the water. All of the fairies’ water streams fall back into the water as well.

“Whew! That took some concentration, Master Pakku.”

“Yes, it did, Richard and Brianna. You need to practice it as much as you can each day. You need to keep your mind very alert and aware. You both did very good. It will get easier as you continue the practice.”

Aang speaks up next, “Hopefully, by the fifth day, this will be automatic for all of you. As much as water can be used to preserve life, it can take away life by a simple drowning.”

“I do agree with you there, Aang. We try to teach the children how to swim so they won’t drown.”

“That is very important, Richard. Water can also be used to create ice weapons that can cut metal, ice claws on the finger tips and ice cages that can’t be broken.”

“But, if I had some fire, I could melt the ice cage.”

“You could, Richard. That is the check and balance between fire and water bending.”

“If I remember right, if lightning is used against a water bender, it could go either way.”“

“That is true, Richard. Water does conduct electricity. A water bender could get a fire bender caught in an ice trap. It is just how Katara was able to defeat Azula, Zuko’s sister.”

“So, let’s continue with the exercises. After we are comfortable with the second move, we’ll then go into the third move by creating a sphere of water and holding it in the air.”

We continue with the second move until we are comfortable with it for another half mark. We hold the water stream up in the air and let it fall back into the water. Slowly our minds get used to it. We then realize we are making our minds stronger.

“Richard, I’m really getting used to this. I think I will be able to earn the white sash with some very good confidence.”

“That’s good, my love. We’ll just take it step by step.”

“Okay, it is now time for the third move. Watch my moves again.” Pakku swings his arms as before to bring up a stream of water. Then with the right hand he opens his palm with all four fingers pointing at the stream. He brings it up slowly. The stream breaks off. He moves the right hand upward to the left hand as he brings it down. The section of water comes together and forms a ball of water. He holds it up in the air. Then he releases the hold with his mind and moving his hands apart. The ball of water falls into the water.

“I think I see a pattern here, Master Pakku.”

“What is it, Richard?”

“Basically, you are a pottery maker. You are using your hands and mind to form the water into what you want.”

Pakku smiles, “That is correct, Richard. If you just use your mind, the water form is very undefined. Your body is the conduit to the water bending because your own body is 60 percent water at birth. It will go down to 45 percent as you get older. Now, let’s see you try it.”

We slowly do the motions that Master Pakku showed us. Soon, we are able to draw up some water and form a ball of water in the air. We hold it in the air as long as we can, which is about a quarter-mark. We then release the balls of water back into the Oasis Pool.

“That is very good for the first day. Come, it is time for the evening meal.”

I look at the koi fish in the water. La, Brianna and I have been talking about going vegetarian. This is because I am the Omega Unicorn Dragon. Is it okay to eat fish and bird?

I understand your misgivings, Richard. Fish have always understood their lot in life to provide meat for others. Not only for the other sea life, but for the land dwellers as well. They will still come to your aid if you ask them to help you. They will count it as a high honor in helping your family in your time of need. It is still okay to be a vegetarian.

I then recall the time I had on the island to prevent the soldiers from taking me on the island where the Rescue Mission is located.

I just received a memory from you concerning your time on the island. That is the way it will be for you and your family.

Thank you, La. What about the birds that are used for food? I picture in my mind meals of chicken and turkey for La to see.

Bird is okay as well. Again, they know they are providing food for the land dwellers.

However, I can not eat red meat and shell fish.. That is because of the illness I got from eating those meats.

That is good, Richard. There is no harm to them when you do abstain from eating their meat. You can teach the dangers of eating the red meat and the shell fish. This has been an ongoing battle for eons on all worlds. Eventually, when the Ultimate Last Battle is over with, everyone will be a vegetarian.

Thank you, La, for your words of encouragement. We look forward to talking to you and Yue in the future.

We look forward to it as well.

Brianna and I look at each other. Did you hear that, Bri?

I heard it all, Richard. Thank you for talking to La about it. It does help in the long run. I never did like eating red meat and shell fish while growing up. It takes a long time to digest red meat. It is easy to gain weight with it. Shell fish didn’t agree with our family as well. We’ll do just fine.

We walk over to where we put our satchels down. We put them on our shoulders and follow everyone back up the tunnel. Once the door is closed, we are standing together on the second level landing.

“Since you are our guests here for five days, we’ll provide rooms for you to stay in.”

We follow them through the tunnels and back out to the second level landing. We walk down the steps to the main ground level. We walk past several buildings and cross over several bridges. Master Pakku then opens a door to a three story building. We walk up a flight of stairs to the second floor. He opens the second door on the left. We all enter inside the room. We find it is a very warm room to be in. There are windows with curtains, beds, dresser drawers. The room is kept warm with a small fire nation furnace. The fuel is stored in a metal container with a hose connected to it.

My fairies take a peak out from the pockets as they look around. “This looks good, mother.”

“Yes, it does, Esmeralda.”

“Since we are located in the northern arctic region. The time of day is hard to determine. Therefore, we use these mechanical clocks to determine the time of day.” Pakku points toward a small box on a dresser top. It is about one foot square and three inches deep. “It has a pendulum and a metal spring. It needs to be wound up every other day. If you happen to forget to wind it, it will start to slow down. You can reset the clock to the correct time from the main clock in this building. It is found near the entrance to this building.”

We put our satchels on the bed. I leave my fairies’ satchel on my shoulder. We follow our hosts to another building down the street. We see people entering and leaving a building.

“This is one of our eateries here. Two silver coins is more than enough to pay for two people. There are only three metals used on the Avatar world for currency. Copper is the cheapest. Silver is the second best metal. Then there is gold. One gold coin can take care of a group of four people easily. Since there are eight of us, I will use two gold coins. Did you bring any precious metals with you, Richard?”

“I have a small bag of coins, Ratook. It contains only silver and gold. My fairies have their own food in this satchel that I’m carrying. They just need some table space to eat with us.”

“That’s fine, Richard.”

We follow them inside. Ratook opens the door for us. Once we get inside, the din quickly dies down. They see the council members are here to eat the evening meal. The din quickly goes back up in volume.

Then a lady at the front desk greets us. “Welcome to Bran-li’s Fish House. We are honored to have you here. It looks like we’ll need three tables for you. Follow me, we’ll put you in the conference room where it is more quiet for you.”

We get greeted by many people along the way. I nod my head up and down with a smile. Brianna has a big smile on her face.

“That was a marvelous demonstration of air bending.”

“Thank you and you’re welcome, sir.”

We get a few more compliments along the way before we enter the private dining area. Brianna and I are sitting together. I look toward the waitress who is sitting us.

“I need table places for my fairies.” I place their satchel on the table next to me. My fairies quickly fly out of the pockets once we get our coats off. They land around two sets of plates.

“What do they eat, sir?”

“I have a selection of nuts, fruits and honey in the satchel.”

“That’s good, sir. We do serve up fish and shell fish here, sir.”

“Thank you for telling me that. Please serve up only fish to Brianna and I.”

“I’ll let the kitchen staff know, sir.”

We sit in the chairs. My fairies quickly open the satchel and open the bags. They take a selection of nuts and fruits out and place them on the plates. They also use the honey bottle to create their own honey water cups. Levi and Shiri quickly warm up the drinks, the nuts and the fruit for a warm meal.

The first dish that is brought out is a salad of several different kinds of seaweed. We see that it has a selection of nuts and cold sea prunes sliced up on it. It is not seasoned with the spices and a dressing on top.

We talk among ourselves while we eat the salad.

“Richard, you displayed an amazing talent of air bending. I’m sure your hand to hand combat is very good as well. What level are you at?”

“I have been studying the martial arts since I was eight. In ten years I graduated from my high school. By that time I earned the purple sash in Shaolin discipline. I then proceeded to earn the higher degree sashes of brown and black. There are ten black sashes before one earns the title of Shaolin Dragon Master. It all depends on how fast you want to achieve it. The desire of most shaolin masters is to earn it quickly. It is not unheard of to be a master at the age of 26. Most of them earn the title by the time they are 50. Then they become teachers for the next generation. Right now, I have the first black sash. I will learn many animal fighting styles and how to use over 600 weapons.”

“That’s a commendable goal, Richard. It will be interesting for you and your family. For us, our bending can be passed down to the next generation. While for you it has to be earned with hard work and desire.”

“That is right, Master Pakku.”

We get done with the seaweed salad in about fifteen minutes. Then table help comes in to pick up our empty plates. Then they come out to serve the main dish. It is fish with more seaweed on the side. This time, there is light spice on the fish dish. Brianna and I taste the fish together at the same time. We look at each other and smile.

This is very good, Brianna.

Yes, it is, Richard. The spice is just right for this fish.

“Ratook, I have a question about your food here.”

“What is it, Richard?”

“Have you given any thought about serving up vegetables with your dishes? I’m just curious.”

Every one smiles. “I understand your question, Richard. We can serve vegetables with our dishes. However, we don’t grow our own vegetables here. It is too cold to grow them here. There is only one cave here, that is the Oasis Pool. We purchase our vegetables from the Earth Kingdom on a periodic basis. It can be expensive to serve up the vegetables here. We have several storage buildings with different temperature zones so the vegetables won’t get any damage from the sub zero temperatures.”

We continue eating the meal in relative quiet. Some of the council members quietly talk to each other. When we get done, Aang is asked to give the thanks for evening meal. Once we get done, we all rise up from the chairs. I see each of the council members put a silver coin on the table. I open my coin bag and take out two silver coins and place on the table. Immediately, two silver coins are replenished in the coin bag.

We put our coats back on and gather up our belongings. We exit the establishment. We are escorted by the council members back to our guest lodgings. Aang walks with the other council members. They will have their own meetings while we are spending our time with Master Pakku.

“That eatery also serves up breakfast as well. It will be fish, sea prunes and seaweed again.”

“I’ll meet you after my session with Hahn tomorrow morning at the third mark in the morning. Be prepared to learn more water bending. In the afternoon, you will meet with the healers. My study room is located in that building across the street.” Pakku points to it.

“Thank you, Pakku and Ratook. Thank you for your hospitality. We’ll see you at the third mark in the morning. “

We walk back up to the second floor. We enter the room. Once we unbutton the coats, the fairies fly out to inspect the room.

“This is not too bad, father. Is there a wash room here?”

I open another door, we see a wash room, the toilet, a shower, and some piping. I touch the surface of the metal pipe. “It is warm to the touch. They must use it for the water and the toilet.”

“Richard, it looks like the fairies will have to use the dresser drawer for their beds.”

“You’re right, Bri. We’ll give them the two top drawers in each dresser.”

We open our satchel and remove our clothes and towels. My fairies take their bed items from their satchel and place them on top of the towels. They set warm spells on their bed coverings to keep warm during the night.

I set the alarm on the clocks to wake us up at the first mark in the morning. I see the usual markings on the clock are similar to ours on Earth and Twainor.

Brianna and I get undressed. We put on our night clothes. Brianna pulls down the covers. She feels the covers are very cold. She quickly puts a warm spell on the covers and the bed itself. Once we get under the covers, we all feel nice and warm.

“Hmm . . . this is nice and warm now.”

“Yes it is, Brianna. It will be tough getting out of bed in the morning.”

“Perhaps, but then I know your libido is still in check.”

I smile back at her. “I can wait for it.”

Then we all start to giggle and laugh. We settle under the covers and soon fall asleep. We only get peaceful dreams during the night. We wake up refreshed and ready for another day.

Brianna sets a cleaning spell on the dresser to clean our clothes. When she opens the drawer, she finds the clothes are smelling nice and look very clean. We put on the clothes. This time I leave my armor in the room. Once the multi-pocket coat is on, my fairies fly in to stay warm again. Then we put on the thick outer coat and button it up.

We exit the building and walk toward the eatery again. I pay for our meal with two silver coins again. We are served a different kind of fish this morning. We enjoy its unique flavor. My fairies have another warm meal with their nuts, honey water and fruits.

After we gave thanks to the owner and to the Creator, we exit the building together. I noticed the clock inside the eatery, the time is about quarter mark before the third mark on the clock.

We walk over to Pakku’s study room. We see Hahn walking out looking a bit unsettled. He quickly looks at us and walks away from us.

We see Pakku standing at the doorway. “Don’t worry about him, Richard. He just realized he will be starting all over from scratch. I gave him some homework to do. Follow me, please.”

We follow Master Pakku to an open area near his building. We review the first three moves we learned yesterday. Pakku can sense it is becoming easier for us.

The next set of moves is learning how to move the water streams around us and to project it away from us. We then played a game of catching and throwing the water ball.

Pakku is pleased that the fairies are using a group effort to control the water ball that is thrown to them. They stop it in mid-air and toss it back to us.

Then we learn something new. How to freeze the water and unfreeze it.

This took some doing to figure out. We have to project our mind onto the water ball and drop the temperature of the water.

Once we figured that out in our minds, we begin freezing and unfreezing multiple water balls floating in front of us.

“If you were to toss a water ball at me while my back is turned. I will know before it hits me. I can sense the water getting closer because my sensory perception is now farther away from me.”

We then start to learn to increase our sensory perception distance. It took a few trial and errors. There were a few times we got wet in the beginning. Slowly we start to feel it coming closer to us in time. We turn around and raise our hands to stop the water ball coming at us from Master Pakku. We slowly increased our distance to the point that we sense the water ball in Pakku’s hand before he tosses it in our direction.

“That’s very good. You’re indeed fast learners. Come, it is time for the noon repast. Afterwards, it is classes with the healers. Tomorrow morning, it will be time to learn the weapons of offense and defense.”

We have the noon repast at the same eatery as this morning. Again it is fish, sea prunes and seaweed. After the noon repast, Master Pakku brings us to a local healer. She gives a bright smile once she sees us.

“Welcome, I’m honored to be their teacher, Master Pakku. Thank you.”

“You’re welcome, madam. You have the afternoon until the evening repast.”

“I’ll be sure to teach them well.”

Master Pakku turns and leaves us with the healer.

“My name is Regina. I’ll teach you the basics today. That will be the cuts and bruises. Tomorrow, we’ll focus on the bones. Then on the third day, it will be illnesses to the body. The first thing to do is to put your hands in the laver here. We need to get the healing touch to your hands. Watch me.”

Regina puts her hands into the laver on the table. My fairies quickly fly out of the pockets once we unbutton the coats. We all watch her carefully. Soon, her hands to begin glow.

“Wow, that is amazing.”

“Yes, it is. Now let’s see you try it.”

“Is there a certain thinking process here?”

“Yes, there is, Brianna. You need to think of your hands as instruments to heal. Water gives us life. Your body has water. Let your emotions and mind flow to your hands. This is ordinary water. There is nothing special about it.”

My fairies try it first. Quickly all of their hands begin to glow. They are glad they have the ability to heal.

Brianna and I do the same thing. It takes a little longer for us. But once we get the right thinking, our hands begin to glow as well.

“That’s very good. It took some time, but that is the purpose. You need to train your mind. Now, I’m going to prick myself with a pin and cause it to bleed. Watch how I get it to heal.”

She pricks her finger with a metal pin. She is able to get a few drops of blood coming out. I see the blood is red in color, like ours. She puts a finger near the cut with her left hand. She concentrates on the left hand, it begins to glow. Then we see the cut close up and the skin gets renewed without a scab.

“That is very good, Regina.”

“Yes, it is, Richard. Now let’s try it ourselves. Hmm . . for you fairies, you will try to heal a pin prick on Richard and Brianna.”

“That’s sounds good to us, Miss Regina.”

Brianna and I get pin pricked on our fingers. Each fairy quickly learns how to do it themselves. They are pleased to learn how to heal a cut. They know it will be different for the more complex injuries.

Then Brianna and I try it ourselves. We quickly learn how to heal the pin prick just as fast.

Then we learn how to heal bigger cuts. This took some doing to get it right. We needed to concentrate on stopping the bleeding before the skin could get healed. But once the steps are told us by Regina, we begin to heal bigger cuts with no problems.

“Regina, does it take energy to heal the bigger injuries?”

“Yes, it can, Richard. But you need to tap into your chi so you won’t deplete your own energy.”

We then start to learn how to heal bruises, Those are blood vessels broken under the skin. We have to learn how to see under the skin to find the broken or cut blood vessel.

Again, it took some time to see the blood vessels under the skin. But once we got jt figured out, healing bruises proved a lot easier to do than we thought. There is no worry about healing the skin as well.

We used up the time allocated to us very quickly. We return back to the eatery for the evening meal. After having the evening meal, we retire back to our guest lodging.

The next day proved to be another challenge for us. How to use water to defend ourselves and to create weapons with water and ice.

The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 14
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman

The list of characters mentioned in this story belong to the various authors that created them. This is a fan-fiction story.

~~~000~~~

We get another peaceful night of sleep again. After eating at Bran-li’s Fish House, we walk out with my fairies hovering around us as we approach Master Pakku’s study room. We see Hahn coming out again. He stops in front of us.

“I just want to apologize for my rude behavior yesterday, Richard. If you hadn’t come along to get my attention, I would have become a bitter man later in life.”

“I accept your apology, Hahn. We all have our own burdens to bear.” Brianna takes my hand and holds it. “But, it helps to have a true soul mate who can share in your life.”

“I’m slowly learning that as well, Richard. Thank you.”

“You’re welcome, Hahn.” Hahn then continues on his way.

Brianna squeezes my hand. I squeeze her hand back as we smile at each other briefly. We turn our faces back to see Master Pakku standing in front of his door with a smile on his face. We all smile back at him.

“Follow me, please.” He stops before a water reservoir. He turns around to face us. “It is now time to learn the complex moves of offense and defense. Richard, have you learned any animals from the water?”

“None yet, sir. I have one sensei and one teacher right now. My sensei is a Shaolin Dragon Master. He is older than me by thirty years. I have a teacher who is fifteen years older than me. He earned the fifth black sash the fastest. He is a prodigy. He told me, he will now seek the higher sashes in his life time. Sensei Chou and I have talked in length about the animal forms that I will be learning. He agreed the five basic animals are not enough for me. They both know who I am. They agreed to keep my secret as quiet as possible.”

“The first five basic animals are the crane, panther, tiger, snake and the dragon.” I quickly go through the moves of the crane. A faint image of a crane appears around me as I do the moves.

“The second animal is the tiger.” I quickly go through the moves of the tiger. A faint image of a tiger appears around me as I do the moves.

I do the same for the black panther and the snake. “Right now I only know how to walk like a dragon. There are two insects that are very important for hand to hand fighting, the praying mantis and the blue scorpion.” I go through those moves. A faint image appears around me as I do each one. “There are a number of weapons to learn with each animal. There is one specialty style, it is called the drunken man technique. It is where I act like a drunk while I fight. It provides deception while dealing with an opponent.”

Master Pakku smiles, “The drunken man technique? That’s interesting. We have that as well.”

“I also have been given small doses of truth serums so that my body knows how to fight against it. The best solution is to get stung by a wasp.” I wave my hand to show a wasp. Then I wave my hand to make it disappear. “The adrenalin rush from the wasp sting really causes the heart to pump out the truth serum poison quickly from the body via the skin pores.”

Master Pakku smiles again, “Excellent, we have similar methods here as well. We have an insect that can do the same as well.”

“The weapons provide a natural extension of the animal. There are six animals for the second and third black sash. For the second black sash it is the horse, the monkey and the chicken. The third black sash animals are the duck, the turtle and the frog. Those three are from the water.” I wave my hand to show each animal I mentioned and make them disappear with another wave of my hand.

“What is the purpose of those six animals?”

“The chicken has a very compact fighting style. The monkey is very elusive. It is like Momo, the flying lemur here. The horse is a land animal, but it can also swim in the water. I did learn the first move for the horse, the foot stomp.” I stomp the ground with my foot with the correct arms, hands and leg motions.

Quickly, Pakku feels the vibration in the ground. “That is the first movement for an earth bender.” Pakku smiles.

“Yes it is, Master Pakku. The biggest land animal we have is the elephant.” I wave my hand. An image of an elephant appears next to me.

“That is a huge animal. I can imagine the foot stomp from that one will be very powerful.”

“Yes, it is, Master Pakku. That will be learned for the earth element bending. We have several different water animals.” I wave my hand to make them appear and disappear one by one. I show him the shark, the dolphin, the whale, rays, the sea dragons, the ancient sea life of fish and the various types of fish.

“You have a big variety of sea life. I’m impressed. Your whale doesn’t even come close to our largest sea animals. But, your sea dragons, Eingana and Leviathan do represent your largest animals. I am glad you are learning so many different kinds of animals. I’m sure each one represents a unique fighting style or technique.”

“Yes, they do, Master Pakku. The turtle might be slow, but it can hold its breath and is very patient. The frog can be on the ground or in the water. It is very adaptive to its surrounding. We have some frog species that have a very poisonous skin surface. It is used by the local people on their arrow tips for instant death or paralysis. The dolphin is fearless and can defend itself against sharks. Dolphins are a natural protector. Sharks are very dangerous because of their teeth and come in various different sizes and shapes. They are predators.”

“What about the dragons and sea dragons? What will you learn from them?”

“That is the ultimate fighting form. It can walk, fly, breathe fire, strong armor, strength to name a few attributes.”

“Well then, when you come back, you will need to show me the water animals that you learned. Now, let’s get into specifics here. You learned the basic moves to push and pull, create a water stream and a water ball. You also learned how to freeze water and unfreeze it. You also learned how to sense water from a distance. Then you learned how to catch and throw a water ball.”

“Yes, Master Pakku.”

“Now we need to do some complex moves. These moves are designed for the movement of water that we did earlier.” Master Pakku then moves his arms, hands, legs and feet in a very graceful pattern. Streams of water move around him like it is a ballet. He then does a thrust with his arms and hands that sends the water stream back to the water basin or hitting a wall. He then collects the water droplets back into a water ball. He sends the water ball toward my feet. Then he quickly erects an cage of ice spikes around me. “Now, get out of the ice cage. Use only the water bending technique.”

I look within myself. I concentrate on the ice spikes to increase the temperature. Quickly, the ice spikes become water. I quickly gather up the water and do the same to him.

He smiles that I’m catching on fast. Master Pakku melts the ice spikes around him and gathers the result into a water ball. He then sends the water ball to the water basin. “That’s very good. Now let the others try it.”

Brianna goes through the same paces as I did. Even my fairies did really well. They acted as a group and individually in melting the ice cage and sending it back to Master Pakku.

Then Master Pakku starts to do something new. He moves his left leg in a circle. He quickly creates a water ball with it. He tosses it to me like a kick ball. I bring my hands up. I take hold of the water ball and hold it in the air. He sends two more water balls at me. I use the other hand to stop it in the air. Then I use my mind to stop the third water ball. I float the water ball between the first two water balls.

“That’s very good. Now let’s what you’ll do with those three water balls.”

“Yes, Master Pakku.” I try to think of something unusual. Sigh . . . All I can think of right now is something romantic, Brianna.

Then go ahead make it creative, my love.

Okay. “Master Pakku, I’m going to do something very creative for Brianna.”

“Then let me see how creative you are, Richard.”

I focus on the water balls. As I move my hands and arms in multiple arcs, the water balls break apart into six water balls. I concentrate on one of the balls to create the outline of a heart and keep it floating in the air. I take another water ball and create an arrow. I send it toward the heart and let it meld together. I then freeze the heart and the arrow together. I set that aside while keeping it floating in the air.

Brianna, my fairies and Master Pakku are smiling widely now.

With three water balls, I create three different flowers with stems. With the last water ball, I create a vase. Then I lower the three flowers into the vase very carefully. I then move the heart with the arrow and the vase with the three ice flowers and hover them in front of Brianna.

I see a tear coming down from Brianna’s face and smile. Master Pakku and my fairies all clap their hands and cheer me on. I set the heart and the vase down carefully on the ground. Brianna and I hug each other and kiss each other several times. We break apart while we look at each other with smiles on our faces.

“You’re such a romantic, Richard.”

“Yes, I’m madly in love with you and crazy about you, Bri.”

“Double that back at you, silly boy.”

Every one giggles and laughs. We turn to face Master Pakku. We see him smiling at us.

“That is very good control, Richard. You made it twice as hard and kept them in the air to present your love gifts.”

“Thank you, Master Pakku.”

“Okay, let’s continue on.”

Then Brianna and my fairies return the favor. Brianna creates twelve head busts of the twelve unicorns on Twainor. My fairies create hundreds of little hearts. They even created ice letters to spell out their name, Brianna’s and mine. Master Pakku is amazed the fairies have complete control of all of the shapes and letters floating in the air.

Master Pakku brings in some water from the basin. He creates several streams around himself. He then quickly joins them together and sends it at my feet. My feet and lower legs get incased in ice. I also get pushed up in an ice tower about three feet in diameter and twenty feet high. I swing my arms in a circle around me like I was shown before. The ice tower quickly melts and flows downward. I land on the ground and quickly gather up the water in front of me. I quickly create three streams around me. I join them together and send it at his feet. I encase his feet in ice and create a similar ice tower like he did to me. He quickly melts the ice. Once he lands on the ground. He breaks up the large water ball into twenty smaller water balls. He sends them at me. I concentrate on the water balls and get them to float in the air in front of me.

Master Pakku quickly gathers up more water from another basin. He creates forty more water balls. He sends them at me. “Keep them in the air, Richard. Don’t drop them.”

“Yes, Master Pakku.”

Slowly I take control of the forty water balls as they come toward me. Soon, I have sixty water balls floating in the air.

“That’s very good, Richard. You have extended your mind to handle multiple objects. Now create two water balls and return the water to the basins.”

“Yes, Master Pakku.”

I create two large water balls by merging the smaller water balls together. I send the two the larger water balls back to the basins.

“That’s very good, Richard. Now let’s see how Brianna and your fairies handle it. Don’t be ashamed if you drop any. Obviously this is a practice to extend your mind to handle multiple objects.”

Master Pakku does the same lesson with Brianna and the fairies. For Brianna, she did drop a few water balls. With another go at it, she learns how to keep sixty water balls floating in the air.

For my fairies, each one had a turn to handle as many water balls as they can. After about fifteen minutes of trying it, they all learned how to keep sixty water balls floating in the air.

We then created ice weapons. We became very surprised that our ice spears easily penetrated into the steel plating.

“It is the mind that gives the ice weapon its strength. You are making the ice spear very dense.”

We make ice claws for our finger tips. I did create an ice sword that proved to be very effective in a sword fight. I used my own sword against Master Pakku. After a few contacts, Master Pakku is a bit surprised that my sword withstood his ice sword.

“Your sword must be very special. I couldn’t break it.”

“I was hoping you wouldn’t, Master Pakku. This sword and armor can absorb lightning attacks and light weapons. There are two metal alloys in the armor and the sword. They are unique to Twainor.”

“If it can absorb lightning and light weapons, then it has been tempered to withstand most metal weapons. There is one metal compound that is the densest. The Earth Benders have it in their arsenal. Only Toph has been known to break free from it. She used her sensory perception to find pieces of raw earth ore scattered in the metal plating. She then knew what to do to break free from the prison cell she was put in. But, you will study that later. Tomorrow, I want to see all of you put it together.”

Master Pakku then dismissed us for the noon repast. We had another lunch at Bran-li’s Fish House. When we get done eating there, we had another session with Regina, the Healer.

Regina then explains the steps to heal a broken bone.

“The biggest problem about broken bones is that the injuries can be more extensive. There could be damage to the organs, muscles, nervous system and blood vessels. The first task is to investigate the severity of the problem. Which part of the body needs healing first. If it is a simple bone fracture and it is still aligned, then a simple touch is needed to begin the healing process. If it is a injury caused by an outside object, that object must be removed.”

“Miss Regina, on my world, we have doctors or healers to do the necessary operation. They are highly trained to heal the body as the best they can.”

“We have healers who are like that. Their healing touch is not as strong as some others are. They help when and where they are at. Now to continue on, by concentrating on the misaligned bone, the healing touch can move the bone back into place. Then it is just a matter of healing the blood vessels, the organs or the muscles.”

“So, how are we to practice that here?”

“By healing a broken tree limb.” Regina steps over to the corner of her room. She takes a wooden staff and breaks it in half into two pieces. She then rejoins the two pieces first. Then she places her hands on the limb and concentrates on it. Her hands begin to glow and the two pieces are rejoined.”

“That’s interesting, Regina. On Twainor, they do something similar. They recite the phrase to use as a spell to do the healing. Here, you are letting the hands do the healing touch.”

“I see, Richard. So, the steps are similar, but the focus is different.”

We break tree limbs of various different sizes. We then practice by rejoining the broken pieces back together. Soon, we become very capable to do that. We also practice by using our minds to see within the body. We see the body in full detail at all levels.

“On Twainor, they use crystals to look inside the body. The crystals can record the image and be played back. It can be stopped at any point to get a closer look at.”

“Hmm . . . that’s a very good idea. It would definitely help me on the complex problems. I’ll have to give it a try. If I can’t, then our type of magic is different from theirs.”

We finally get done for the day by the fourth mark in the afternoon. We leave Regina and walk back to our room and get comfortable in the warm room.

“Richard, if we are alone in the wilderness, I see the need to do this very easily. But, if we are in a city, people could be watching us. We’ll need to be careful in that situation.”

“I agree, Brianna. It would cause a great distraction in our lives. We would have no privacy if the people find out we could do these miracle type healings. We must let the doctors do their best.”

“Couldn’t we use our talent to diagnose the problem and let the doctors do the proper application in medicine and operation practice?”

“We’ll need a talk with Dr. Sarah Mitchell about that. If we start doing the unexplainable, then we could be accused of being doctors without a license. We could get arrested and put in jail.”

“We surely don’t need that problem in our lives.”

We get ourselves ready and walk to Bran-li’s Fish House for another meal. We choose a different fish this time. Again, the meal was very delicious. After we get done eating, we return back to our rooms for another night of sleep.

The next day is our last full day with our hosts. We surmise, that we’ll be leaving in the morning on the fifth day in the Northern Water Tribe. We are all curious how that will be handled by the Emissaries when they arrive here to pick us up.

The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 15
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman

The list of characters mentioned in this story belong to the various authors that created them. This is a fan-fiction story.

~~~000~~~

During the night, all of us get the same dream from the Creator. We appear in the heavenly garden together. We look around to see who is going to meet us.

“Why are we here, father?”

“The last time this happened, we met someone important. I think we’re going to meet someone here, Tiger. We’ll just have to be patient until they come.”

Then over the horizon we see a beautiful lady floating toward us. She is being escorted by the four previous Avatars. They are Roku the Fire Bender, Kyoshi the Earth Bender, Kuruk the Water Bender, Yangchen the Air Bender.

I whisper to everyone, “Hold your ground, everyone. Show your respect to them first.”

We all give the handclasp and bow to them. They stop before us and smile. “You all may rise up. Thank you for showing your respect.”

We rise up and face them.

“My name is Tui. I was the previous Water Spirit in the Oasis Pool. Thankfully, Princess Yue fulfilled her promise so that peace may reign once more on our world. We have been watching you from the heavens. In fact we met a lot of people who have been watching every one of you.”

“My name is Roku. I am the previous Avatar before Aang. We now see what the Creator intends for his Creation. We also had a talk with your family, Richard. They told us of you and your wife’s importance to be king and queen in the future.”

“My name is Kyoshi, the Avatar before Roku. We are all deeply impressed with the skills you have learned so far, Richard. It is amazing to find other element benders on other worlds and no Avatar. Now we plainly see why the Creator took the magic from your world so it won’t be abused. We also discovered there is an Anti-self version of your family. You will join forces to do the Creator’s will. The enemy, King Azazel has no idea what you both are capable of. He will hear only rumors about you. It has also come to our attention, on the fifth day you will meet the Earth King before you leave. The Earth King asked Fire King Zuko why he went to see Aang. Fire King Zuko mentioned your name to him.”

“I understand, Kyoshi.”

“Earth King Kuei wants to meet you. He is intrigued to meet someone who can bend the elements and not be an Avatar.”

I smile, “More than likely I will be tested again. Since I know only air and water for now. That will have to be enough to face their champion.”

“Yes, you will meet Toph. You will have to do the unexpected.”

I smile, then the rest of my family smiles. “Hmm . . . the unexpected? Then I will have to confuse her and make her guess where I am.”

They all smile back.

“We expect nothing less, Richard.”

“My name is Kuruk, the Avatar before Kyoshi. As you know, I had an encounter with Koh, the Faceless One. He still has my wife’s face. While I was up here, I asked many questions and did a lot of searching to find his weakness.”

“Did you find it, Kuruk?”

“I found only one clue. Koh gave up his face to someone in exchange for his.”

“So, if he can show his first face, I will then know who did it. Then it is a matter of finding the other person who has Koh’s face.”

“That’s right, Richard. But you must do it without showing any emotion at all.”

“That sounds like a game of poker to me. I never could show a cold stone face without showing some emotion. My face twitches when I try that.”

“Then there is no hope in undoing Koh’s thievery.”

“However, I think that is the answer for me, Kuruk. I let my face twitch like this. It hides my emotions more easily.” I quickly change my face to a quick smile, a pout, mouth open, jaw from side to side, sad face, squint my eyes while I smile. I create as many different kinds of faces as fast as possible. I then stop and look at them with a smile.

“Is it possible, Tui?”

“It’s possible, Yangchen. We can only hope that he reveals his first face.”

“Where did you find that clue, Kuruk?”

“I found it in Wan Shi Tong’s Library before he sank the Library into the sand, Roku. I found no other information associated with it.”

“Then it must have been one of the earliest writings in the Library. Whoever wrote it, must have put it there for someone to find centuries later. Richard, do you have any ancient writings pertaining to something like this?”

“Well, I do remember reading of stories of evil spirits or demons with a combination appearance like a human body with an animal head. I know there is a story about a Minotaur. He has a human body with a bull head with horns. He is associated with the Greek Gods.”

“We know who they are. Koh is represented by a millipede. That means, someone among King Azazel’s minions has Koh’s true face. I’m certain of it now. He gave him the ability to steal faces. If Koh can get his own face back, he will have to relinquish the other faces he has stolen.”

“So, a demon angel has a millipede face. That is very interesting, Tui. It might be easier to find him first and bring him to Koh to undo the exchange.”

“If we can find him. He could be anywhere, Richard. Well, we have talked enough. We have come here to offer our advice to you and insight in handling the elements. Indeed, you are chosen to do great things for the Creator. We have also met Goku and Yusuke as well. They told us that your use of the spirit energy will be different from our use of it.”

“That is right, Tui.”

“Now we are going to do something for you. This touch is providing a mental link to us. You can call us anytime if you need insight to the element bending that you are learning and going to use. It won’t make you more powerful. You already have the potential to do the impossible.”

Then each one walks up to us. The four Avatars touch their index finger upon our foreheads. Four different colors appear when they touch our foreheads. Kyoshi’s touch is a green glow. Roku’s touch is a golden glow. Yangchen’s touch is a white glow. Kuruk’s touch is a blue glow. Then all of the glows disappear from our foreheads.

“Thank you very much, Avatars and Tui.”

“We are also told that your fairies will teach the other fairies that are hidden on your world. There are also other hidden secrets on your world to discover. Take care until we meet again.”

We all bow toward each other with our hand clasps and rise back up with smiles on our faces. Then we sink below the ground and return back to our beds on the Avatar world.

~~~000~~~

We wake up fully rested to finish our fourth day in the Northern Water Tribe.

“Well, at least we know what is going to happen tomorrow.”

“Yes, we do, my love.”

After we have our breakfast, we walk over to Master Pakku’s study room. We see Hahn come out again. We give each other a quick nod of the head while he walks past us.

Master Pakku greets us, “Come, it is time to put it all together.”

“Yes, Master Pakku.”

We follow him to a large clearing area. We see there are other people gathered around to watch this demonstration. “Richard will now show us what he has learned so far. He will combine it with his own fighting capability. After that, we’ll see what Brianna and the fairies can do.”

Aang is ready with his scroll and pen. He gets to ready write down the tactics used. There are several other scroll writers with him as well. Among the crowd are the council members, Hahn, some soldiers, buffalo yaks, koalaotters and about fifty people watching.

We stare at each other intently. We both start at the same time doing the graceful arm, hands and leg movements. We each bring up multiple streams around us. We look for the right opportunity to strike at the other person.

I’m going to have to do something new, Croin. He has seen the animals I’ve used.

He hasn’t seen all of the animals, Richard. He hasn’t seen the unicorn, yet.

Thank you for the reminder, Croin. I can have the dragon memories shoot out water instead of flames this time.

Yes, you can, Richard.

I then think of Blacklaw, Belgaron, Agaroan, Marcon and Croin. Shoot out water streams at Pakku. Freeze it into ice as it leaves your mouth. I will then do a sneak attack in the confusion.

All of the dragon memories respond together in one voice. Yes, Richard.

I then launch my attack at Pakku by swinging my arms and hands in the air. Five dragon memories appear from the water streams. They shoot out water streams at Pakku. They quickly change the water to ice as comes toward Pakku. I then swing my right arm and fist from right to left. An almost invisible air fist is curving around toward Pakku. I then do the same for my left arm and fist from left to right. Another air fist is traveling around in an arc toward Pakku.

Pakku quickly sets up the water streams to create several water shields. He quickly absorbs the ice stream blasts with ease. “That was too easy, Richard!”

“Or is it, Pakku!”

“What?!” Then all of a sudden he gets a double hit by my air fists on both sides of him. He tries to stay standing up while the air fists pummel him from both sides. “Where did those come from?”

Aang is snickering and laughing that I pulled something like this again. Some of the soldiers and people are giggling and laughing as well. The animals are grunting and nodding their heads up and down.

“I knew you would block my first attack, Master Pakku. So, I sent a second attack right behind it.”

Master Pakku smiles, “That’s very good, Richard. Multiple attacks are a very good ploy.”

We bring up the water streams around us again. This time, Master Pakku sends multiple ice daggers at me. There are twenty ice daggers coming toward me in a spread formation.

There is no way to dodge them all. I quickly create an air wall in front of me by moving my arms about quickly.

Then Pakku quickly has the twenty ice daggers join together and grow out to become an ice net.

I catch the ice net just in time. I concentrate on them to melt and become twenty ice water balls. I send ten of the ice balls in front of several water streams toward Pakku. I send the other ten ice balls to roll along the ground toward Pakku’s feet.

As soon as Pakku intercepts the ten water balls and streams in front of him. He stops the ten ice water balls before they get there at his feet. Then I spring my trap. With another motion of my hand, the ten ice water balls quickly sprout up to cage him. While he concentrates on that new development, I concentrate on the water balls and streams I sent him from above. They quickly spread out to create a thicker cage around him. I am able to pin his arms to his side.

“That’s very good, Richard. Deception is a very good tactic as well.”

“Thank you, Master Pakku.”

He quickly concentrates on the ice cage around him. He quickly melts the ice cage around him. He gathers up the water and creates several water streams around him like before.

We have another round of testing of each other.

Croin, I can’t show him the unicorns. If I did that, then someone from here might tip off Toph tomorrow.

I understand, Richard. Then mix up the animal attacks.

Okay, Croin. I then swing my arms, hands and legs in a graceful motion. I quickly bring up several streams swirling around me. Master Pakku does the same as well. Once I feel my chi is at a maximum, I launch my attack.

I create a roaring tiger. It flies through the water streams. It picks up some droplets of water. It rushes toward Master Pakku. I then create a flying crane. It does the same thing as well. I project out a snake to slither along the ground and avoid the water streams. It moves around in an arc toward Master Pakku. I project out a black panther to follow the tiger quickly. I project out a rooster flying right behind the crane. It is ready with its short leg kicks. I project out a praying mantis. I make it life size. It doesn’t pass through the water streams. It sneaks around in an arc toward him from the left side. I concentrate on my moves to make sure each one attacks at just the right moment.

Everyone who is watching is amazed I’m doing a big attack like this. “Gasp! Look out Master Pakku!”

Master Pakku quickly brings his streams around him to block and absorb the attack. However, he doesn’t see the praying mantis and the snake coming in from both sides. The snake quickly raises itself to strike him on the side.

“Ooof! I didn’t see that coming.”

Then the praying mantis quickly jumps up and hits him square on his jaw.

“Owww!” He puts his right hand to his jaw. He smiles. “That’s very good, Richard. You did multiple attacks with two deceptive moves. That is very good.”

I smile back, “Thank you, Master Pakku. If I moved in closer for hand to hand combat, I could find myself in a disadvantage quickly.”

“Yes, you would. But, since you know how to transport out of trouble, you would have gained the advantage just as quickly. I applaud you, Richard. We’ll practice some more when you come back again. Now, lets see how Brianna and your fairies handle themselves.”

Brianna steps up and takes my place.

“Try to stay calm, Brianna. Think clearly. Don’t let him rattle you.”

“I’ll try, my love.”

Brianna and Master Pakku quickly brings up several water streams moving about themselves. Master Pakku quickly sends several water balls toward Brianna.

Brianna collects the water balls into her water streams. Then Pakku sends four ice balls toward Brianna.

Out of Brianna’s water streams she sends four ice balls to meet the four ice balls from Master Pakku. They crash into each other and break apart into many pieces as they fall to the ground. Quickly, Brianna brings up the pieces and hurls the ice pieces toward Master Pakku.

Master Pakku quickly stops the flight of the ice pieces coming at him. He brings them around and shoots twenty ice daggers at Brianna. Quickly, Brianna brings her water streams around to protect herself. The ice daggers quickly joins together to create an ice net.

She stops the ice net in mid-flight in front of her. She then sends the ice net back toward Master Pakku. However, behind the ice net are several small ice stars. The ice stars are hiding behind the net so that you can’t see them directly.

Master Pakku stops the ice net, but he doesn’t see the ice stars still coming at him. “What?!”

Brianna smiles. We all smile with Brianna.

Master Pakku tries to stop the ice stars before they slice him up. He is able to stop them all, except for two ice stars. The two ice stars slice his outer clothes at the shoulder.

“That is very good, Brianna. You did a very nice deception tactic. You hid the stars behind the ice net so that I couldn’t see them until it was too late.”

Brianna smiles, “Thank you, Master Pakku. I have to thank my Richard for that tactic.”

“Yes, you do, Brianna. I am satisfied with your abilities to do water bending. Let’s see how the fairies do. I surmise, I will surely get tested by them.”

Brianna comes over and stands by side. She takes hold of my hand and holds it tightly. My fairies fly forward to take their position. They evenly space apart in three rows and four columns.

Pakku sees how they are set up. This is good. They have divided themselves up evenly. I will be hard press to take them by surprise from any direction. Well then, let’s see how they do with multiple attacks.

The fairies quickly bring up multiple water streams swirling about them as a group. Master Pakku does the same thing as well.

Master Pakku quickly goes into multiple attack mode. He comes in from all of the directions to catch them off guard. He sends ice daggers, water balls, ice spears, ice balls of various different sizes at them. He comes from all sides at them from below, from the sides, from up above and behind them.

My fairies quickly defend themselves easily. But then, I noticed something about who is controlling the water streams. It is Tiger and Tigress who have control of the water streams that are protecting them all in the middle of the group. The other fairies are taking control of the objects being thrown and hurled at them.
Did you see what they did, Brianna? Tiger and Tigress are protecting them as a group. While the rest of the fairies are taking control of the objects coming at them.

You’re right, Richard. That is very clever of them to do that. Tiger and Tigress are doing a beautiful job of it.

Then the fairies return the objects back at Master Pakku. However, Levi and Shiri are flying closely behind a shield of ice around them. At the last moment, they quickly change into dragon butterflies.

Once Master Pakku takes control of the ice coming at him, Shiri and Levi quickly blow out two very hot streams of flames right at Pakku’s face.

“Aaaaagghh! I forgot about them!” He quickly brings up a water shield to block their attack. The smoke and steam quickly erupt in front of Master Pakku’s face.

Shiri and Levi quickly fly back to the group to get ready for another attack.

We all see Master Pakku’s face is now blackened with soot and ash as the smoke clears. Everyone begins to laugh out loud at seeing the expression on his face. He is a bit upset that his face is now dirty.

Master Pakku then laughs right back at us. “Hah, hah, hah, . . . I love it! I got taken surprise by the two smallest fire benders I have ever seen.” Then Master Pakku smiles and begins to clap his hands.

We all clap our hands and cheer my fairies on.

“That was a great deception attack. I’m sure you will be very difficult to defeat once you have learned the rest of the elements. Now, for the last lesson. It is the power of the moon.”

We gather around and stand in front of Master Pakku. “The moon travels around the world every thirty days or so. It waxes and wanes as it goes through its phases of light and darkness. When there is a full moon at night, the water bender is at their strongest. The same could be said when there is a new moon during the day. However, the exceptions are the eclipses. When there is a lunar eclipse at night, we can not do any water bending at all at its full phase. When there is a solar eclipse of the sun, our strength is at the maximum. But, the fire bender’s power does not exist at its full phase. Only the earth bender and the air bender are not affected by the phase journey of the moon. Does everyone understand that?”

We all shout out loud together. “Yes, Master Pakku!”

“Come, it is time for the noon repast.”

My fairies quickly gather to Brianna and me. They land on our heads and shoulders to rest.

“That was a great idea, my fairies.”

“Thank you, father, mother, Omega. So were you and Brianna. You both did an excellent display of the element bending.”

“Did you get all of that, Aang?”

“I sure did, Richard. You all did an excellent job to get to Master Pakku. Your idea of hiding one attack behind the other is very good. I have it all written down on these scrolls.”

I whisper to Aang, “Aang, tomorrow morning we’ll be going to see the Earth King. He wants to meet me.”

“How do you know about that?”

“While we slept last night, we found ourselves in Heaven. We met Tui and the last four Avatars from your world.”

“I’m sure that was an interesting meeting. I can only meet them in the spirit realm here. What did they talk about?”

“First, they are mind linked to us. We can talk to them if we need any advice on the four elements.”

“That’s good. Go on, Richard.”

“Kuruk found an interesting clue about Koh in Wan Shi Tong’s Library. He found that Koh exchange his original face with someone else. We discussed the possibilities.”

“What are the possibilities?”

“It is a good possibility that it is one of King Azazel’s demon angels who did the first face exchange. If I can find him and bring him to Koh. Then the faces Koh has collected will go back to their rightful owners.”

“Let’s hope you can do that, Richard.”

“They told me that I will be facing Toph when I get there.”

“I’m coming with you, Richard. You’ll need me to see the Earth King. Toph is very good.”

“I know, Aang. They said I should do the unexpected.”

Aang smiles, “Yes, you must do the unexpected.”

We have another lunch in Bran-li’s Fish House. After the lunch, we walk over to Regina for one more session. Aang has another meeting with the council. He tells them what is going to happen tomorrow before I leave.

What they don’t see, that one of the guards takes notice of the meeting they are having. After the meeting, he quickly sends word to warn his earth kingdom friends about Richard. He writes down as much as he can from what he saw the last few days. It is passed off to his underground network. A boat slips out of the harbor and sails all day and night to reach Ba Sing Se.

They agreed that Aang and Master Pakku must be present to witness this face off between Toph and me.

Regina begins her teaching of healing sickness in the body. “The first thing to do is determine what is wrong with the patient. First, you get your hand wet and bring it to the person’s chest. Then concentrate on the body. Search for the anomaly within the body. For us, the biggest threat to our body here is the soot from the Fire Nation engines on the ships and the power plants in the cities. The soot from those devices really pollutes our air to breathe and water to drink.”

“We have the same problem as well, Regina. It is nothing new on my world.”

“Then perhaps someday that will be resolved and solved quickly. But, I surmise it will be hundreds of years before that happens. We need to get the world’s attention of what they are doing to both of our worlds.”

“We hope as well, Regina.”

“Once the problem is determined within the body, then you can focus on what is needed to heal the body. For the body that is damaged by the black soot, we found that the use of earth benders is needed to remove the black soot from the body. It takes awhile to wash out the black soot from the body. Most of it is found in the lungs. Sometimes, there is too much damage, it is beyond repair.”

“We have seen it as well, Regina. We call that condition a black lung. Hopefully, cleaner energy sources can be found so it won’t pollute the air, the water and the land.”

“That’s a good name for the condition. We hope as well cleaner energy sources can be used, Richard.”

“What about the common cold?”

Regina smiles, “Cure the common cold? I see that hasn’t changed on other worlds. That is the easiest to heal. You concentrate on the location where the cold bug has attached itself to. It is usually found just inside the mouth. Once it is found, then it can be removed from the surface inside the mouth with some water. Then toss the infected water ball into a fire pit to destroy it.”

“How many times do you do that, Regina?”

“Anytime we get someone traveling to us from the south. They quickly are not adaptive to our colder environment. We average about five sick cases a day sometimes, Brianna.”

“Can you do the same for animals as well?”

“We can, Tiger. However, it is tougher for us since we don’t see them coming to us for help. They stay away from us as much as possible. We have only the animals among us. The ones that are near to us we see each day. We check out the soldier’s buffalo yaks about once a month. There are very few others that we see. The koalaotters and the other sea animals don’t see us at all. They find their own healing in the waters nearby.”

“I know of a reptile species that is very unique on my world. It is called the alligator. It would spend time in the fresh or brackish water mainly. But, it is not unheard of if they get sick, they would seek out the saltier water to heal their own bodies.”

Regina smiles, “I’m not surprised by that tactic. Salt is always a good cleansing agent on cuts. It might sting, but it does help the body heal faster.”

We then do some more practice with healing cuts and pin pricks until we are very comfortable with it. We also rejoined several more broken wooden branches back into one piece.

“Regina, I have an idea for you. It is about unknown diseases that you might encounter.”

Regina smiles, “I would greatly appreciate any ideas on that subject.”

“On Twainor, they use a white light to bathe the person in. That white light will destroy any unknown illness residing within the body. It helps them when they get visitors from other worlds.”

“Hmm . . . that’s interesting. So, for me, if I cover the body in water. Then I put both of my hands on the body and get the water to light up. It should destroy that unknown disease or illness within the body.”

“That’s right, Regina.”

“I’ll have to give it a try to see if it does work. Since the body contains water, I could concentrate on that water to light it up and do it from within. But, that is approaching the topic of blood bending. Blood bending is a terrible practice. If used, you would end up in controlling the muscle movements of the body.”

“Ugh . . . we wouldn’t want to do that. Let’s hope the external use of the healing arts provides a better solution, Regina.”

“I agree, Brianna. Well, I have taught you the basics of healing. The rest of it is left up to your imagination. Remember, use your chi to heal, not your own body energy. I don’t want to see someone give their life to save another life. Life is a very precious gift from the Creator. Seeing your fairies here is proof of that. Don’t forget to have a container of water with you on your journeys. It will help you when there is no water available.”

We all smile at her. “Yes, Regina.”

I pay her one gold piece for the time she spent with us. She greatly appreciates the payment from us. We hug her one more time before we depart.

We walk back toward the eatery to have our last evening meal. We are joined by the council and Aang during this last meal. We talk about many things that we have learned while we have been here.

“Richard, be on your guard. There are still some people who resent having element benders in their midst. From what Aang has told me, the next Avatar will have their hands full in dealing with them especially. We must be prepared as well when the anti-element benders make their move against us. Little do they realize that an element bender could be born to one of them in any generation.”

Then a messenger comes to Tribal Chief Ratook. He hands him a piece of paper. Ratook opens it and reads it out loud. “This is the formal request from the Earth King, Richard. He wants to meet you tomorrow.”

“Then let’s meet him.”

“We’ll do a direct flight with the air bisons to Ba Sing Se.”

We do some more small talk while eat our evening meal. Once we get done, we go our ways back to our rooms. We get another good night of sleep during the night. I get an idea about how to surprise to Toph tomorrow. I go through the possibilities and tactics in my mind. Once I get it hashed out in my mind, I finally fall asleep.

Then Brianna mutters to me, “It’s about time you finished talking to yourself. You kept us all up.” She then pinches my ticklish side of my body.

I jerk my body quickly. I mutter back, “Okay, okay, I hear you. Let’s get some sleep.”

Then everyone giggles and laughs in the room before we fall asleep finally.

~~~000~~~

In a secret room in Ba Sing Se, three men are talking together. They are reading the note from the Northern Water Tribe.

“If this note is correct, this Richard is very powerful.”

“That may be true. But it also states that Richard is not an Avatar on his world. He is just an element bender who has some very good martial art skill. I say we leave him alone and let him go away from here.”

“But, it also states they are aware of our anti-element movement. We must be more discrete in our movement to gain control of our world.”

“It will take time to recruit more people to our movement. We must plan ahead when that happens.”

“Yes, we must plan ahead. It could be one or two hundred years before our movement is strong enough to eliminate the element benders.”

“But, it is because of them, we have peace on our world.”

“Whose peace? Their peace movement has not brought me any peace. I’ve got two children who are not element benders. The last family member who was an earth bender, was over two hundred years ago. I say we go through with our plans to build up our chi-blocker numbers. We’ll need them for our plan to work.”

The other two men quickly agree to the plan and meet at the city where they will stage their coup. They get up and leave the secret room by opening a door.

The last man stands there very mad. “Grr . . . I hate the element benders!” Then when he looks at a pebble on the ground, the pebble shoots across the floor and hits the wall shattering into pieces.

He sits back in the chair and sobs, “What have I done! In my anger, I discover I’m an earth bender. That means the gift can skip a generation or two.”

He takes a cloth from his pocket and wipes the tears away. “I must go through with it now. I wasn’t the only one who harbored these feelings. Hopefully, the next Avatar will find a way to end this madness of jealousy.”

He enters a hallway and exits through a store front in Ba Sing Se.

~~~000~~~

The next morning we all get up and get ready for the flight to Ba Sing Se. We have a small breakfast in the fish house like before. We then put our winter coats on. My fairies fly into the coat pockets to get warm before we button up the coats. We put our satchels on our shoulders. We walk over to the building where the air bisons are kept. Appa sees Aang walking toward him.

“We need to fly to Ba Sing Se. Land in the royal court yard where Fire Lord Zuko has his air bison kept.”

Appa nods his head up and down. A smaller air bison comes out of the building. Master Pakku mounts him and sits in the saddle on top of the air bison. We do the same in sitting on the saddle on Appa. Once we are given the signal, the air bisons rise up in the air. They fly to the south, toward Ba Sing Se.

We huddle together on the saddle. Aang talks to me.

“I’m sure you went through a lot of tactics last night. You know Toph is very good.”

“I know Aang. I know she is blind. She has trained her mind and ears to do the impossible. That will be my greatest challenge. I think I know of way to confuse her.”

“Will you go invisible?”

“I hope not. The tactic I have in mind is to confuse her sonar ability. There is a way to overwhelm her sensory perception.”

“If you can do that, everyone will be impressed.”

“When she challenges me, I will stipulate the rule that we try to knock each other off our feet and land on our butts laughing.”

Aang smiles, “Now, that I would like to see happen. I would love to see a smile on her face again.”

We then sit in silence as the air bisons fly southward to Ba Sing Se. The air gets warmer as we fly southward. Soon, we see the mega-city of Ba Sing Se. We see the two concentric walls circling the city. The air bisons fly toward the royal compound where Zuko keeps his air bison. We see a group of earth bender guards waiting for us. Zuko and Iroh are standing there with them. Once the air bisons land, we disembark and climb down from the air bisons. We walk up to greet our escorts and co-hosts.

An earth bender guard steps forward and speaks. “Welcome to the Earth Kingdom. You are invited to meet King Kuei. Please, follow us.”

The guards form two columns. Zuko and Iroh take the lead with us following behind them. We enter the royal complex together. We walk down several hallways until we arrive at a pair of very large doors. The earth benders quickly use their element bending technique to open the doors easily. We see that the doors are two feet thick. We walk inside and see the Earth King sitting in his throne chair.

To his left, sits Toph. To his right sits his wife. There is another chair to the right of his wife. A man gets up to greet us. He steps forward to give greetings.

We arrange ourselves by standing side by side to each other. My fairies quickly fly out of my pockets and sit on our heads and shoulders. Zuko and Iroh smile when Levi and Shiri land on their shoulders respectively.

“Welcome to the Earth Kingdom. It is good to see you Aang, our Avatar. It is good to see Master Water Bender Pakku as well. Who are these two people with you, Aang? Who are these winged people? We have never met them before. What are their names?”

Aang steps forward. “His name is Richard Moore. The lady is his wife, Brianna. These winged people are fairies. They are part of Richard’s family. They came to our world to learn the element bending techniques from us. He had to prove to us he is telling the truth of where he comes from and his abilities.”

“So, you are from another world. Is that correct?”

I step forward. I give a formal bow by swinging my arms around me as I bow forward and rise back up. I then give the handclasp and bow toward the Earth King. I take off my helmet to show my face. I hold it in my left hand.

The Earth King smiles as he nods his head up and down.

I look at King Kuei while I speak. I don’t look at the minister who is speaking to me. “My name is Richard Moore. I am from another world. There are element benders on our world, but no Avatars. A long time ago, we used to have magic on our world. But it was abused by certain people when they tried to control the people against their will. So, the Creator caused a major earth shattering event to remove the magic from our world. However, there are still traces of magic left on our world. People have sought it with great perils to their own lives, whether by finding it or achieve it by stealing it for themselves.”

“What about your martial art skill? What level are you?”

“I have been studying the martial arts for over twelve years now. I am now on the path to earn the final ten black sashes. When the tenth black sash is earned, I will have earned the title of Shaolin Dragon Master.”

The minister speaks up quickly, “Dragon Master? How is that possible? There are only two dragons here!”

“We also have dragons on our world. In fact I have met the Great Father Leviathan and the Great Mother Eingana. They gave birth to all dragons found through out Creator’s Creation.”

“Prove it! If you can!” Exclaims the minister.

I wave my arms, then Leviathan and Eingana images appear in the room.

Everyone is astonished at their size. Except for one, Toph.

Toph speaks up, “I’m sorry, I can’t see them! How are you going to solve that! I’ve felt the red and blue dragons at one time.”

“Then they will pass through your mind. Then you will know I’m telling the truth, Toph.”

Leviathan and Eingana shrink down to her size. They quickly pass through her mind. She quickly sees them in her mind in full detail. “Gasp! They are huge! Forgive me, Richard. You are telling the truth. I still want to fight you right now.”

“I know, Toph. I have agreed to it.”

“That’s fine. I’m going to do it right now. Is that okay, King Kuei?”

“You may go ahead, Toph.”

I take off my winter coat and pocket jacket and hand it to Brianna. I show them that I have my armor on. I put the helmet back on. Toph and I walk over to a small fighting area. There is a large circle with the square Earth Kingdom symbol in the middle.

“I see you are wearing metal armor. I can easily bend that and make it a prison around you.”

“You can try, Toph. But I doubt you will have the time to focus on it.”

“Oooh . . . a challenge on speed as well. I heard from Zuko you’re an animal fighter. You let the animals fight for you.”

“Well, not exactly, Toph. I learn how they fight their own way. I apply their moves to my martial art skill.”

“That’s interesting, Richard. So, what is the goal, Richard?”

“How about we try to knock each other off our feet and land on our butts laughing.”

Toph laughs, “You are going to make me laugh? I haven’t had a good laugh in a long time. I haven’t had a good laugh since my time with Aang during the War. Fine, let’s begin.”

We square up and get ready. As soon as I see her move her foot up, I run to my right as fast as I can. I race in a circle around her.

“Whoa! You’re a fast runner, Richard.”

“I know, Toph.” I then project out the twelve unicorns from me. I space them out around her. I jump up onto Avel and ride his back.

Toph has a look of confusion. She places her foot down to the ground to sense where I’m at. She sees twelve unicorn images running around her. “Where did you go! I can’t find you! Where did these horses come from?”

“They are not horses, Toph. They are unicorns.”

“I’ve got you!” She quickly stomps her foot. A two foot square pillar of earth shoots out of the ground ten feet high. It misses me by three feet as the square earthen pillar goes through Avel’s rear body. “Darn it. I missed you. You must be riding one of them. I don’t sense two feet running on the ground.”

Aang, Pakku, Zuko, Iroh, Brianna and my fairies have big smiles on their faces. The minister, the guards, the King and his wife are astonished with mouths wide open. They can’t believe it. Someone has found a way to confuse Toph.

I look at my cloak and see a loose thread. I take it off and hold it in my hand. Set freeze spell on thread. Hit Toph on the neck. Freeze the body from the neck down. I blow the thread from my hand toward Toph. The thread floats through the air until it hits her neck.

Then all of sudden she gets frozen where she stands. “What did you do, Richard? I can’t move!”

Aang, Pakku, Zuko, Iroh, Brianna and my fairies are giggling and laughing. They try to keep it under control. The minister, the King and the wife are astonished that I was able to stop Toph.

I dismount from Avel. As I step closer to Toph, my unicorn images follow in closer and still keep the circle around her.

“I put a freeze spell on a piece of cloth thread.”

“You used magic on a cloth thread? Earth benders can’t detect cloth. There is no earth ore in them.”

“That’s right, Toph. I knew that because your world’s story is told on my world.”

“Then that means you know a lot about us.”

“That’s right, Toph. In a few years, I hope to be back to learn the other element bending techniques.”

“So, you’re hoping to learn the earth bending from me.”

“That’s right, Toph.”

“Well, you still haven’t put me on my butt laughing.”

“I will now, Toph, end freeze spell.” I quickly do the moves to create the horse foot stomp. All twelve unicorn images quickly return to me. An image of Avel appears around me. When I lift my right leg and foot, Avel’s right front leg and hoof lifts up as well. When my right foot lands, Avel’s hoof hits the ground at the same time. I send out the biggest horse foot stomp ever. “Stomp!” The vibrations are so big, everyone feels it. Then Toph loses her balance, “Whaaa . . . !” and lands on her butt, “Ooof!”

She immediately starts to laugh out loud. “Hah, hah, hah,. . . . that is the best foot stomp that I have ever felt in a long time!”

I walk forward and bring my hand toward her. She takes it to help stand up.

“I love it, Richard! When you are ready to learn the earth bending element, I’ll be here.”

“Thank you, Toph. There is one more animal foot stomp that is strongest on my world. It is the elephant.” Quickly an image appears from my hand. It goes through her mind to see it. She sees the comparison with our height in the mind picture.

“That elephant is huge, Richard. I can imagine a much stronger foot stomp from that one.”

We walk up to rejoin the group before the throne.

The minister quickly objects to what he saw. “I object, King Kuei! This test is not valid!”

Toph gives a quirky smile and shakes her head from side to side. She mutters to herself, “stupid minister.”

The King smiles when he sees Toph give her quirky smile, “How is it not valid, minister?”

“He didn’t use any element bending technique on her. He didn’t use air or water bending.”

“He used the foot stomp from those unicorns, minister. I see no problem with that tactic.”

“A . . . a . . . foot stomp! That’s crazy!”

“You want a demonstration from me? It will be very accurate!” I quickly do the motion for a foot stomp aimed right at the minister. As soon as the foot touches the ground, the sound wave travels under several people.

Quickly, the minister loses his balance, “Whhaa. . . . !” He falls to the ground and lands on his butt. “Ooof!”

Everyone is laughing out loud when they see the spectacle.

Toph is laughing out the loudest. “Hah, hah, hah . . . You deserve that, Minister! Thank you, Richard! I would have done the same thing!”

The minister looks very red face and embarrassed right now. He slowly gets up and dusts himself. “I . . .I . . .”

“Be quiet, minister. Please don’t embarrass yourself anymore.”

“Sigh . . . . yes, my king.”

“I would like to do this right now, King Kuei. I would like to do a demonstration match with Aang. We already have tested each other once. This will be more practice for both of us.”

Aang smiles greatly upon hearing my offer. “I accept the offer, King Kuei.”

Everyone smiles, including King Kuei.

“Then go ahead and have your demonstration match. I want to see more of Richard’s abilities.”

“Yes, King Kuei.”

Aang takes off his winter coat and hands it to Master Pakku.

Aang and I walk out to the fighting arena, opposite from each other. Then we see two water basins being brought over by two Earth Bender guards. They place it near us. I push the buttons on my helmet to close the mouth piece and put the visor down.

We quickly spin in a circle. We both create a dusty tornado around us. I quickly launch my attack at Aang. I quickly shoot out several animal images at him.

A dusty tiger comes out roaring at Aang with two claws on either side.

“What was that animal?”

Brianna speaks up, “That’s a tiger, King Kuei. It has very vicious bite and claws to shred.”

“Incredible.”

“He can also do the attacks up close and personal if he wants to. It depends on the situation.”

“I’m sure you’re right, Miss Brianna.”

Aang quickly absorbs the dusty tiger into his own dusty tornado. I follow it up quickly with several more animal attacks. I shoot a flying crane, a black panther, a snake. Each time, Aang absorbs the dusty image into his tornado.

Then we both lift our arms up. We both create two helix tornados around our arms. We bring them down the through the tornados. We shoot out spinning dusty air fists at each other. They meet in the middle and explode on contact. I keep my dusty tornado spinning while Aang stops his. He sends out flames from his hands right at me. I absorb the flames into the dusty tornado. I let the flames crystalize the sand into glass shards and put out the fire at the same time.

Then I shoot out the glass shards at Aang. He quickly brings up a shield of earth one foot thick in front of him to protect himself. He lets the earth shield fall to the ground once I get done shooting the glass shards at him.

This time he takes control of the water in the basin near him. I end my dust and glass shard tornado. I go for the water in the basin near me. He aims his other hand at me and shoots out a lightning bolt at me. I drop the water back into the basin and get ready for the lightning attack. However, the lightning reaches me before I can get my sword out. Sparks are sparking all around me. "Crr . . . Crraa . ..ckle!" I continue to bring out my sword in front of me.

I transfer the lightning from the armor to the sword.

The Earth King and all of the Earth benders are astonished that I am able to control the lightning hit.

“What?! He controlled the lightning!”

I take aim at Aang with my sword. As soon as I launch my attack, he tosses the water ball at me. The lightning gets absorbed into the water ball and lights up inside it. "Crackle!!!" The water ball falls to the ground. The lightning gets discharged into the ground as the water splashes outward on the ground.

We are both smiling greatly as we test each other some more. Aang reaches for more water and the water in the dirt in front of him. I bring up several water balls in front of me. I get them swirling around me in long streams, I wait for his attack.

He moves the muddy water around him in a circle. It is about twenty feet out from him. He sends multiple ice balls and ice spikes at me. I quickly launch several animal attacks. His attack gets absorbed into my animal attacks. Aang absorbs the animal attacks that I sent at him. I send out a snake at Aang’s feet, I get a nice surprise. As soon as the snake crosses the muddy circle. It creates a splash. Aang sees it and stops my ground attack.

I smile, “You’re learning, Aang.”

Aang smiles back, “I should hope so, Richard.”

This time I do several air attacks and not let them pass through the water streams. I send a rooster and a crane at Aang from both sides of him. I also send an air punch right at his mid-section. Then several dragon memories appear. They shoot out hot flames at Aang. He quickly gets his water shield to block the flame attacks. He sees the steam rise up and sees the two birds flying from the sides. The wings come close to his face before he is able to block it. Then he gets hit in the stomach from my air punch.

“Oooof!! That’s very good, Richard. You snuck in another attack before I could react to it.” He returns the water to the basins.

I return the water to the basin.

Then everyone claps and cheer for the demonstration they just saw.

“That was an excellent demonstration!”

We walk back to them. We get hugged and pounded on the back by everyone. They congratulate us on an excellent demonstration.

“I’m impressed, Richard. You will make an excellent earth bender. I’ll be ready once you have learned the basics.”

“I’ll be ready. Thank you, Toph.”

Then a circle of light appears before the throne room. We see two Emissaries appear in a blink of an eye. The two Earth Guards quickly bring their lances forward. The Emissaries quickly move their hands. The Earth Guards move back and hold up their lances.

“We are sorry for the intrusion, King Kuei.”

“Whom are you two? You have the appearance of not from our world.”

“We are not from your world, King Kuei. We are the Emissaries from the Creator himself. Another word that is used to describe us is an angel.”

“Angels? Emissaries from the Creator? I’m greatly honored to see you with my own eyes.”

“Yes, it is, King Kuei. We are here to take Richard, Brianna and his fairies back with us. He still has more worlds to visit and warn them about the Ultimate Last Battle on his world.”

“I haven’t heard about that yet, Emissaries.”

“Aang, Zuko, Master Pakku and Iroh will tell you all about it. Your world will be tested again when the next Avatar appears here.”

“Sigh . . . I understand that all too well.”

“Oh, Richard, before you go. I have a gift for your family.”

“What is it Iroh?”

Iroh takes out a bag from his pocket and hands it to me. “It is the house favorite, jasmine.”

I hand it to Brianna. She takes it and takes strong whiff from the package. “Hmm . . . it’s the real thing, Richard. I like it already. We have the same plant on our world.” She opens the package a bit and sees there are not cut stems, but actual vine seedlings. Each seedling has a cloth bag around the roots to keep safe. She wraps it back up tightly with a big smile on her face.

Iroh smiles, “That’s good.”

“Then allow me in exchange for that bag, a gift from me.” I hold my hand out. A small pot of marjoram appears in my hand in a blink of an eye. It is in full bloom with small purple and white flowers. I hand it to Iroh. He takes it from me. “It is called marjoram. It is from my own balcony. I have another one on the balcony. You use the flowers, green leaves and the stems near the flowers from the plant. It has a very good calming effect for the nerves and sleeplessness as well. It is good to increase the appetite and absorb gases in the stomach. It also has two vitamins that are good for the body’s overall health. It can be added to foods as an herb supplement. However, don’t drink it on very hot days, or give it to people who have a ruptured blood vessel near the brain or for people who are hyper nervous. There are a few more benefits as well for you to discover. It can withstand the higher land temperatures with ease.”

Zuko and Iroh take a whiff from the plant. They smile greatly. “I’ll be sure to cultivate it and add to the selection. Thank you, Richard.”

King Kuei smiles. He makes a mental note to stop by the Jasmine Dragon at least once a month.

Once I get my multi-pocket jacket on, my fairies fly into the pockets to get comfortable. Bianca and Lavan fly into Brianna’s coat pocket. We put our satchels on our shoulders. Then Brianna and I stand next to the Emissaries.

“I don’t know when we’ll back. Take care my friends.”

“Take care, Richard, Brianna and to your special family.”

A circle of light appears around us. We disappear in a blink of an eye.

“Well, that was an interesting visit. Now tell me about this test that a future Avatar will face. Is there anything we can do to help?”

“First of all, I don’t know if you noticed the people on the streets, King Kuei.”

“What have you seen and heard, Iroh?”

“I have seen a lot of people with jealous looks on their faces. These are people who can’t element bend. There is a subtle anti-element movement brewing around our world.”

“An anti-element bending movement? Are they crazy? We need them for the future of our world. It is known that element benders skip a generation or two.”

“We know that as well, King Kuei. We must make every effort to provide support for the element benders. They will need help in their time of need.”

“That might be true, Iroh. Have you heard where the movement is the strongest?”

“In Republic City.”

They all shout out together, “Republic City!”

“That’s supposed to be a model city where element benders and non-element benders can live in harmony.”

“Well, something happened there to change some non-element bender minds.”

“Yes, something happened.”

Everyone ponders on it. After thinking about it some more, they decide they need more information from Republic City.

~~~000~~~

We appear in the Emissaries star ship.

“We are flying back to Twainor. You will get two nights of rest. You two know what you must do during that time.”

We look at each other with big smiles. “Oh yes, we know what to do. Is that right, Richard?”

“How can I forget? You’re ready to have a great night of sex to consummate our marriage properly.”

All the fairies poke their heads up with big smiles. “Yeah! It is time!”

We all giggle and laugh together. Once we calm down, I ask the next big question.

“So, where do we go next, Emissaries?”

“You’ll be going to Christmas World.”

The fairies shout out loud again, “We’re going to see Santa Claus! Yeah!”

Everyone smiles again.

“So, what is the purpose of that meeting? I would assume he already knows what is going to happen in the future.”

“He does, Richard. You will be meeting several important people there. It’s an introduction to each other so that you are aware of each other.”

“Okay, I think you are hiding another person of interest from me when I get there. Is it my Anti-self?”

“It is, Richard. You’ll be meeting your Anti-self there. That includes the anti-Brianna and the anti-fairies. Please, by all means don’t touch each other. You must be in opposite nature to be near each other.”

“So, that means my Brianna and I have our feathered wings out and they have their dragon wings out.”

“That is right, Richard. Then you can shake hands or hug each other. Your fairies must remain in your coat pockets during this visit. They are not fully able to greet each other safely.”

“Will we be spending the night there?”

“No, Richard. You will be there for about three to four hours. You will all be planning out some strategy together. For example, you will be covering six of the twelve multi-verses while the anti-versions are covering the other six multi-verses.”

“I see. That seems to make sense. So, it is up to us, which one we want to handle.”

“That’s right, Richard.”

We stand in silence. Then the star ship engines come to a stop. We look at the monitors and see Twainor on the screen.

“We’ll put you down in front of the Grand Castle. What seemed like over a week, you left here about a half hour ago.”

“Oh boy, talk about jet lag. Or in the case, an Einstein time slip problem. At least we’ll get some sleep the next two nights.”

“That’s right. We’ll pick you up in the morning like before, at the third mark in the morning.”

“Yes, Emissaries.”

One of the Emissaries pushes a button. We disappear in a blink of an eye. We appear near the Grand Sundial in the court yard.

We look around as people are walking around. They quickly notice us.

“You’re back! Welcome back to Twainor!”

The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 16
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman

The list of characters mentioned in this story belong to the various authors that created them. This is a fan-fiction story.

~~~000~~~

We stand in silence. Then the star ship engines come to a stop. We look at the monitors and see Twainor on the screen.

“We’ll put you down in front of the Grand Castle. What seemed like over a week, you left here about a half hour ago.”

“Oh boy, talk about jet lag. Or in this case, an Einstein time slip problem. At least we’ll get some sleep the next two nights.”

“That’s right. We’ll pick you up in the morning like before, at the third mark in the morning.”

“Yes, Emissaries.”

One of the Emissaries pushes a button. We disappear in a blink of an eye. We appear near the Grand Sundial in the court yard.

We look around as people are walking around. They quickly notice us.

“You’re back! Welcome back to Twainor!”

Some one in the crowd immediately enters the castle to relay the news to the kings and queens inside the castle. Several people gather around me quickly. My fairies quickly fly out of the pockets and hover around us. Some fairies from the unicorns fly in quickly. They greet each other with hugs.

We start get getting bombarded with questions from a lot of people.

“Where did you go?”

“What was it like?”

“You seem different than the last time we saw you.”

“Did you get stronger?”

Then the royalty from the castle walks into the courtyard.

Grand King Dryden speaks up, “Please, give them room. They are exhausted.”

King Beltrane speaks next, “They have been away for ten days visiting only three worlds. They have been away for a half-mark on the sundial.”

A lot of people exclaim out loud, “What?!”

Then Sir Halgren and Avel make their way toward me. There are several fairies flying around Avel.

Sir Halgren and I hug each other quickly. We look at each other and smile. “Yes, you are stronger, Richard. I could feel it when we hugged each other.”

Then I look down at Avel and stare into his eyes. He sees what I’ve been through.

“Yes, you did change, Richard. So did Brianna and your fairies.”

Everyone looks at each other with concern over their faces. They wonder what kind of changes took place in us. Brianna, my fairies and I get close to each other. I speak up to calm them down.

“Indeed my friends, there is a change in us. It happened on the last world we were at. There, we learned two of the four element bending techniques. There are five element bending techniques on the Avatar World. They are the air bending, water bending, earth bending, fire bending and the spirit bending. What’s amazing about that, these same five techniques are practiced on my world as well. We also discovered a dragon connection between our worlds. I’ll let my memories of you do the updating.”

I wave my hand, then one thousand images appear above us. They fly quickly to rejoin back to their real selves. In an instant they all know what happened on the three worlds we visited so far.

“That’s amazing, Richard. I didn’t realize you knew so much about them.”

King Dryden interjects quickly, “Richard, we need to meet in the Grand Council Chamber. We need to go over the worlds you visited so far. Even though we appreciate the memory update, there is some information we need more details of.”

“I understand King Dryden.” I turn to face Brianna and my fairies. “Take your rest in being among friends. Fairies, you might as well start teaching your kinfolk what you have learned so far. See if they can do the first two element bending techniques.”

“What are the element bending techniques, Richard?”

“I’ll demonstrate two of them for you.” I walk over to a fountain near the gardens. It is pouring out water from one level down to another level before it enters into the small pool. The water continues to flow down a channel to other flower arrangements. I turn to face them all.

“If you remember the day we were visited by Luke and Kalbek, I created a mini-tornado in my hand.” I bring up my left hand. I concentrate on it and give it a quick twist. A mini-tornado appears in the palm of my hand.

“We remember you doing that, Richard.”

“With more practice on the Avatar World, Brianna, my fairies and I can now do more.” I point my hands toward the ground. I quickly spin around to create a tornado around me. I let it lift me up in the air.

The people are amazed to see this happening. I then lower myself back down to the ground and stop the tornado to let it dissipate into the air. I point my hands straight up and create the helix tornado about ten feet high. I shoot out two air fists twisting around each other. I end the helix tornado.

The people clap their hands and cheer me on.

“Now for the water bending technique.” I point my hands at the pool of water near me. I bring up several streams of water. I spin them around in a swirling motion. With another movement I create a water ball floating in the air while the water streams are around me. I look at the water ball and it becomes an ice ball. I look at it again to make it a water ball again. I return the water back to the pool. “Now here is something interesting about water bending. I can create an ice weapon that will penetrate steel plating.”

“What?!”

“It is the mind that is giving the ice weapon its strength. Also, there is a sub talent in the water bending technique. Water is used to heal the body.”

“That seems to make sense.”

“Water bending uses the emotions of the mind. It is the flowing element. I don’t know if you can do the element bending here. The Avatar World is a magical world like yours. There is one person on that world where all five elements coexist at once. When the Avatar dies, another is born with all attributes. It is the Avatar who brings peace to their world. They have had problems just like any other world. So, please, if you can’t do it, then you can’t do it. The latest problem they are encountering on their world is jealousy. There is a movement of non-benders who are against the element benders. But, it is known there that element bending can skip a generation or two before it is seen again in a family line.”

Then the people look down in humbleness. They realize they have been blessed by the Creator for what they can do here on Twainor.

The royalty look at me with smiles on their faces and nod their heads up and down in agreement with what I just said.

Sir Halgren walks up to me and hugs me again with a big smile. “That is well said, Richard. Indeed we have been blessed by the Creator to do magic here. We will learn how to take it with us in our new ships of sea and space.”

Brianna and my fairies mingle with the crowd. They are escorted to the pavilion camps while I am with the royalty in the Grand Council Chamber.

We get seated in the Grand Council Chamber and begin the meeting.

“Ahem . . . Where should I begin?”

“Begin with your next visit, Richard.”

“The Emissaries told me that we’ll be going to Christmas World. That is an intersecting world as well. The main figurehead there is Santa Claus. Apparently he knows what is going in the Multi-verses. He visits a lot of worlds. So, he is very aware of what is going on. The Emissaries told me that my Anti-self version of me will be there as well.”

“What is special about that, Richard?”

“There are twelve multi-verses that the Creator created. One of them is the Anti-verse. Let’s say a like object from here comes in contact with a similar object from there. The result would be catastrophic. The explosion from the two objects will annihilate each other.”

“What?! Are you saying that you will be meeting your Anti-self version from there?”

“I am, King Tierion. However, I was told we must be in opposite nature in order for us to be in each other’s presence safely. That means I will have the feathered wings out and be the Omega Unicorn. He will have his dragon wings out and be the Omega Dragon. Then we can touch each other safely.”

“That’s amazing. Why did the Creator do such a thing, Richard?”

“Apparently, when he and I combine ourselves together, we will become the hidden weapon that has been hidden from the very beginning of Creation. I was told we’ll be choosing which multi-verse we’ll be visiting. Effectively dividing the Multi-verses among ourselves. It will save time in visiting those worlds.”

“Hmm . . . that seems to make sense, Richard.”

“I have no idea who else will be there as well. It will be a surprise to all of us.”

“I’m sure you’re right, Richard. We’ll wish you the best on that endeavor.”

“Richard, when will you be leaving to do the next trip?”

“I will have two nights to be here with you. Then in the morning, we’ll be leaving at the third mark in the morning.” I give a big smile. “It is time for Brianna and I to finally consummate our marriage properly. She said she’ll be in the cycle at this time.”

Everyone smiles. The ladies scream out in delight, “Eeeek! Yes!”

“Congratulations!”

“Then we’ll definitely leave you alone tonight and tomorrow night. But what about your fairies? Will they be there with you in the room?”

“Uh . . . er . . . we didn’t think about that yet, King Dryden.”

“Then you better discuss it with her and your fairies. I would think you would not want them there for the first night. That is a very private matter between the two of you.”

“You’re right, King Dryden. I will talk with them about it today. Is there anything else to talk about, my friends?”

“Just give us a summary of the events during those ten days. We would like to record it on the crystals.”

“That’s fine, King Dryden.”

Everyone places a crystal in front of them. They recite the spell to record the meeting. I then start to give a summary of the three worlds we have been to so far. I even include the conversations I had with the Indians on Never Land. They smile that I have a few more mysteries to solve on Earth.

When I got done with the Avatar World, we find that is now time for the noon repast. I talked for about three marks on the sundial. We get up and leave the Grand Council Chamber together. We’ll be having the noon repast in the Grand Dining Hall in the Castle. When we enter the courtyard, we get visited by many people. Then I see Brianna and my fairies hovering around her. We immediately hug each other and kiss each other passionately. We break apart and look at each other with big smiles.

“We need to talk about tonight, Brianna.”

“Let me guess, it is about our fairies being there tonight or not.”

“That’s right, Bri.”

“We discussed it with Renard and Trianna. The fairies agreed to wait in the courtyard while we have our time together. Then when it is time for bed, they will fly in through the window to be with us.”

I smile at her. “And I thought we are going to have our first disagreement. But, my darling wife and my fairies rescued us from that distasteful scene.”

Brianna smiles at me, “You got that right, Richard. Have no worries. It will be the best night for all of us.”

Then my fairies land on our shoulders and heads. They hum a soothing melody to keep us calm. We enter the Grand Castle and into the Grand Dining Hall.

We have a wonderful meal served up by the cooks. It is nothing fancy this time. It was a typical grilled fish meal with an assortment of vegetables and fruits. Afterwards, we have the afternoon for ourselves to do what ever we want.

I do another demonstration of the air and water bending elements. This time I face off against my own fairies. We try our best to get the advantage over each other. Since we have seen other battle against Master Pakku, it was very tough do that. So, we got into an exchange of launching attacks at each other and defending ourselves successfully.

The people really enjoyed seeing us do this. They like it when I project out the animal images from the tornado. They clap and cheer for each of us to win each round. After the mock battle, we have an afternoon snack to restore our energy.

We gather again for the evening repast back in the Grand Dining Hall. This time a grilled bird, vegetables and fruit are served up. Afterwards, we gather in the courtyard to witness the colorful display. I play another song on my guitar with the musicians. Everyone enjoys the festive atmosphere we have created.

We then get ready for the night. My fairies stay in the courtyard gardens with the other fairies. They wait patiently until we ask them back into the room.

Brianna and I smile at each other while we get ourselves dressed for the evening. We take out the clothes we have folded away in our satchels. They are complete set of matching satin evening wear. I am wearing a pair of bikini briefs with a satin button down shirt. I look very sharp in it.

Brianna is wearing a baby doll ensemble with an outer blouse buttoned up. We then approach each other slowly. We have big smiles on our faces as we sexually walk toward each other. We touch the satin clothes first and feel our bodies through the fabrics first. I flex my muscles each time she touches a part of my body.

“Ooh, there is my strong hero. I am getting so turned on by that.”

“You’re my sexy wife who is touching me just right.” I then caress her arms and sides. I slowly move my hands down to her hips. She does the same as well in response.

She then unbuttons my shirt slowly with the first three buttons. I undo the first three ties on her blouse. She then unbuttons the next three buttons. I untie the next three ties on her blouse. She unbuttons the last three buttons on the shirt. I untie the last three ties on her blouse. We then push off the shirt and blouse and let it fall to the ground.

We smile at each other as we let our hands roam over our bodies, feeling each other out. She is gorgeous in her pink baby doll ensemble. We hug each other and kiss each other sexually.

She unties the baby doll upper half and lets it fall to the floor. She then kneels before me to lower my bikini briefs down slowly. She sees that I am hard as a rock. She playfully touches the end of it with a kiss from her finger to my male member. I step out of the briefs and she stands in front of me. I then kneel before her to lower her bikini. I do the same in kissing my finger and touching her sex. I make her shiver a bit.

“Mmmm . . . . that’s a nice soft touch, my crazy lover.”

I lower her bikini so she can step out of it. I stand up before her. We hug and kiss each other again. Then we lay on the bed at the same time. Now we are getting very hot together. We rub our hands up and down our legs and bodies. We feel the urge to climax together at the same time.

Brianna turns me around and puts me on my back. She gets above me to ride my male member. She moves up and down a few times, then we both begin to arch our backs at the same time as we reach the right moment together.

We climax together as we moan together at the same time.

“Hnnn . . . mmm . . Oh .. . .that’s it. We can do it!”

Then we both relax once we climaxed together. We give each other a nice surprise. Both of our nipples become rock hard and express some milk. She sprays her milk upon my chest. I spray a much smaller quantity.

She uses her fingers and wipes some of her milk and brings it to my mouth to lick. “Hmm . . . that’s sweet, Brianna.”

I then touch some of my milk and do the same for her. She tastes it, “Hmm . . . that’s sweet, Richard. Now I know what your fairies drink for the first time after their birth.”

We are both sweating together. We embrace each other as we kiss each other again on the bed. I hold her in my arms as if to protect her. She rests her head onto my shoulder.

We still feel the excitement as we try to calm down together. It takes another fifteen minutes to fully calm down.

“Now, we are together, for ever and ever.”

“That’s right, my love.” She looks up at me with a big smile on her face. I see a tear come down her face. I wipe it with my finger and taste it. “Salty.”

She smiles at me, “You silly boy.”

“Yes, I’m silly about you, Bri.”

“Do you think it’s time to invite my fairies in?”

“I’m ready, Richard.”

I slowly uncouple myself from Brianna. I walk over to the window and open it. “You can come in now.”

Quickly my fairies fly into the room while I rejoin Brianna in the bed. They gather around us. The fairies close the windows and let the curtains drape back to cover the window.

They giggle around us. “We heard you in the garden, father, mother, Omega.”

“I’m sure you did.”

“Can we check, Brianna?”

Brianna smiles, “Yes you can, Lavan and Bianca. See if you can tell the difference.”

All of the fairies smile. We make room so they can check out Brianna’s womb. They place their hands and ears to her stomach.

“Yes, there is a change. We can hear the first heart beat. We won’t know which sex until it is confirmed by the ultrasound.”

“That’s very good, Bianca and Lavan. For us, the first heart beat is not felt until the sixth week. The sex is determined at conception. However, it won’t be visible until half way through the pregnancy cycle. So, consider yourselves fortunate that your senses are very sharp.”

They all smile together at us. I then turn off the lights. My fairies fly to their beds in the drawers. We all have a great night of sleep during the night.

We wake up in the morning when the morning sun shines brightly into the room. We wake up slowly and get ourselves ready for another relaxing day. We take a quick bath down the hallway before we have the morning repast.

After the morning repast, I do a demonstration of the air and water bending with the First Ones. They are impressed that I’m getting stronger to do the impossible. I fly around with the dragons doing some aerial combat with them. They are surprised that I can defend against their fire blasts using the air and water shields in front of me.

Brianna and my fairies show the healing lessons they learned to the healers, wizards and sorceresses. They really like the idea of using water to aid in the healing aspect of the body. It is almost the same technique in using the white light to cleanse a body that could be infected with an illness.

After the noon repast, I have a meeting with the Legion Commanders. We talk about the tactics in using the air and water bending I learned. When they see me run underneath an arch without falling down. They see another advantage to apply to their training regimen. To learn how to fight an adversary from any position around them.

“Richard, one of the ambassadors within our Local Group gave us a challenge to seek out two metal ores that are very unique. They said it’s possible we might have them on our world. We won’t know until we start searching the oceans or the lands we haven’t thoroughly investigated. They said it could be hidden anywhere.”

“What are these two metal ores called?”

“One of them is vibranium and the other is adamantium.”

“I’ve heard of them through some of the stories on my world.”

“That’s good, Richard. What are some of their properties?”

“If you are near vibranium. It absorbs any sound in the area. You won’t hear an echo from it. When it absorbs sound, the metal ore becomes stronger. It can absorb kinetic energy. However, Adamantium is very difficult and expensive to create. Some say it is a combination of steel and vibranium. Some say adamantium is indestructible or unbreakable. But with the Evenshard stone and the Ethereal Space Ore, you have a unique combination in your own world.”

“You are right about that, Richard.”

We have another evening repast together in the Grand Castle. We have another enjoyable evening together making music together. However, Brianna and I dance together. My fairies are flying around us as we dance together. We emit a subtle change of colors around us. This is due to last night being in bed together.

We get another great night of sleep from the Creator. I get no warning dreams from the Creator where we are going to be tomorrow.

In the morning, we wake up and get ready for another honeymoon trip. We are going to see Santa Claus on Christmas World. The Emissaries pick up the SRU Wizard, Brianna, my fairies and I for this trip. As we fly to Christmas World, we get last minute instructions from them.

“Now remember, you must be in opposite nature to touch each other. If you don’t, then King Azazel will laugh so much that he will rejoice that he won’t be worried in destroying your world.”

“Yes, Emissaries.”

We arrive at Christmas World. We see a snowy world on the screen.

“Where are you going to put us?”

“There is a beacon on their world. We are going to put you at their front door. It is located in front of this mountain range here.” He points to it on the screen. “They know you are coming.”

We put on another pair of very warm coats to keep us warm. It is similar to the one found in the Northern Water Tribe on the Avatar World. We put warm spells on the satchels so they won’t get frozen down there.

Then we see another star ship approach Christmas World. The monitor screen changes to another Emissary.

“Are you ready?”

“We are ready.”

Then a button is pushed on the console. We disappear in a blink of an eye. We appear before a large candy cane with a white light flashing on top of it. I see there is a phone box on the side of the candy cane. Then we see our Anti versions of us appear as well. We start to spark between each other.

“Uh . . . we better go into opposite nature, twin brother.”

My anti-self smiles, “Yes, we better, twin brother.”

We immediately sprout out our wings as we were told to do. Immediately our sparks disappear around us.

“So, who is going to make the call?”

“I’ll do it, Richard-A.”

“Then go ahead. It is getting cold out here.”

I walk over to the phone box. I open the box and take out the phone and speak into it.

We hear another voice from the other end. “Who is speaking?”

“My name is Richard. There is also my anti-version here as well.”

“What?! I’ll get hold of Santa right now. Geez, I wasn’t told again. I need to have a word with Santa right away.”

I hang up the phone and close the door. We look at each other and smile.

“I heard that our ten other selves were killed.”

“I heard that too, Richard. If there is a Q version of us, it would be remarkable if they could be killed at all.”

“That’s true.”

Then enough snow falls from the side of the mountain to reveal a metal door. A normal size metal door opens on the granite wall. Once the door gets open. We hear someone from inside. “Come on in. It is too cold out there.”

We walk inside. Immediately we feel the warmth of the air inside the mountain. The door closes once we are inside. We follow a green clothed elf down the long lighted hallway.

Once the metal door closes, more snow falls down to cover the front entrance just like it was before.

The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 17
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman
and Stanman

The list of characters mentioned in this story belong to the various authors that created them. This is a fan-fiction story.

~~~000~~~

Then enough snow falls from the side of the mountain to reveal a metal door. A normal size metal door opens on the granite wall. Once the door gets open. We hear someone from inside. “Come on in. It is too cold out there.”

We walk inside. Immediately we feel the warmth of the air inside the mountain. The door closes once we are inside. We follow a green clothed elf down the long lighted hallway. Once the metal door closes, more snow falls down to cover the front entrance just like it was before.

Then the elf talks to us as we walk down the hallway. “When we get to the other end and inside the main complex, you must not tell anyone what you have seen. We rely on the tall tale stories to keep our secret on the other worlds.”

"We will keep your secret. On our world, there are many tales of Santa and the North Pole, by many authors."

We walk for another ten minutes before we get to the next door. He enters a code on a lighted panel to his right. Each button he presses creates a bell sound. When he gets done, he has played the first ten notes of “Jingle Bells’. “Don’t worry. The song changes each day. If someone tries to force their way through the front door, the defenses in this corridor will become active. They won’t make it to this door to do anything. Because, by that time, they will have regressed to babies.”

“Has anyone tried it?”

“There was only one army that tried it. Needless to say, that world learned their lessons the hard way.” He smiles as the door swings open automatically. Immediately our senses are bombarded by the candy sweets made here. We see they are getting ready for another Christmas holiday on another world.

The elf smiles widely, “Well this is it. Welcome to Christmas World. The elves are given a month lay off on rotation. We operate here 24/7 round the clock. Santa gets his days off scattered throughout the year. Follow me please.”

We follow the elf through several very large rooms and hallways. We get the stares and whispers as we walk past the elves.

Our elf escort sees their reaction, “Get back to work! Yes, they are from separate multi-verses.”

The elves return back to work as we walk past them. But we can still hear them talking among themselves as they whisper.

“They shouldn’t be here.”

“Well, they were invited for a special meeting with Santa.”

“Okay, okay . . . I’ll wait and find out from Santa later.”

“Besides, Hermey, our Elf Dentist probably wants to check them out before they leave.”

“Heh, heh, . . . yeah. That will be something to see and hear.”

“Yeah . . . heh, heh, heh . . .”

Our elf escort takes us down through several more hallways and turns. Eventually we get further from the noise in the main complex. Now the floors are carpeted with pictures on the wall of Santa, Mrs. Santa, the sleighs and the flying reindeers. He stops before a set of double doors. He opens the doors and we all walk inside.

When we get inside, we get the biggest surprise of all. We see seven more pairs of Brianna’s and Richard’s in the room. They are talking among themselves. They turn to face us.

“But. but . . . !”

“We were told that you were all killed!”

They all smile at us.

“Apparently we are not dead, Richard and Richard-A. All will be explained shortly.”

“You might as well have your fairies get some fresh air.”

“You are the only ones to have fairies.”

Another Brianna speaks up, “Yes, we are disappointed in that regard.”

I then ask another question, “Then why are you all here?”

“All will be explained shortly.”

We unbutton the winter coats. Immediately all of our fairies fly out of our coat pockets. They fly around quickly. My fairies cautiously approach the fairies from the Anti-verse. They discover they can come close to each other. However, they spark among themselves when they become within one foot of each other. They decide not to chance it. They fly back to their respective Richard and Brianna to be safe.

“We better sit on opposite sides, brother.”

“Yes, we better, brother.”

Everyone giggles and chuckles when they hear our conversation. Then another door opens in the room. We all get quiet when Santa walks into the room. He is decked out in the traditional black boots, red coat and pants. His red stocking hat is tucked into his wide black belt.

“Have a seat everyone. We’ll tell you what is happening and what is going on.”

We sit down behind the arrangement of tables in the room. It is laid out exactly like the one in King Tierion’s Conference room. However, there are no banners for each of the multi-verses represented here.

“As you can see around here, there are nine pairs of Richard and Brianna here. There is the Cartoon Verse. They also have the super heroes from the comics. However, the characters there are very real.” Richard-C and Brianna-C nod their heads up and down.

“The next one is the Q-Verse.” A Richard-Q and a Brianna-Q nod their heads up and down.

“The next one is the Mirror Verse.” A Richard-MR and a Brianna-MR nod their heads up and down.

“They are closely connected to the Star Trek Verse.” A Richard-ST and a Brianna-ST nod their heads up and down.

“The next one is the Magic Verse. They are full fledged wizard and sorceress there.” A Richard-M and a Brianna-M nod their heads up and down.

“Then we have the Monster Verse. The Richard and Brianna evolved differently there from everyone else. They have a reptilian DNA background. But yet, they do look like the rest of you. They have the hardest task to do. Many of the reptilian races want to control the other races. It has been a constant war for them for millennia. They will bring peace eventually to many worlds. Also, it is there, we have the legendary monsters of Godzilla, Rodan, Mothra and the host of other monsters there. The legendary monsters are located in several nearby solar systems.” Richard-Rept and Brianna-Rept nod their heads up and down.

“Then we have the Anti-Verse.” Richard-A and Brianna-A nod their heads up and down.

“The next two multi-verses are very unique. These are Demon World and the Hell Galaxy. Demon World is the Purgatory Multi-verse Realm that is alluded to in many books on hundreds of worlds. There are no Richard and Brianna there.”

“Hell Galaxy is the location where King Azazel is found. There are no Richard and Brianna there also.”

“Then we have the Robot Verse. This is Asimov’s Robot Saga Book Series. There, the humanoid races and the robot races have learned how to live together in harmony. The problem there is that the Richard and Brianna cannot have any children at all. We are still trying to come up with a solution for that. There were laws passed to prevent the overpopulation of their Earth.”

“Now for the main reason you are here.” Santa walks over and stands behind my chair. “All of your stories are told on this world here. In 800 years or so, King Azazel will arrive with his billion star ships and a host of demons to destroy his world. When King Azazel or Lucifer rebelled against the Creator, he was sent to his world first. This was just before the humanoid races rose up throughout the multi-verses. Once he saw them come forth, he then realized that he was being replaced to give the praise to the Creator. Therefore, he vowed to destroy the Creator’s Creation anyway he can.”

“But, have no worries. The Creator realized this would happen when Lucifer was discovered coveting the praise from the angels and Emissaries. Just after one of the praise sessions in the Heavenly Realm, the Creator had a private talk with two of his Power Angels.”

Then all of sudden two angels appear in our midst. We get a big surprise that they look like Richard and Brianna.

“My name is Richard and this is my counter partner, Brianna. Now you probably have a lot more questions now. We’ll explain it now. The Creator asked us to divest ourselves of our power and divide it among the multi-verses he was about to create. He explained it to us. This is to hide the Ultimate Power from King Azazel. We are the Arresting Power Angels. Once the Creator created the multi-verses, we threw Azazel down to Earth. When he learned he was being replaced by the humanoid population, his hatred grew even more. We still have the authority to hold anyone. No one can break our grasp. It is our power that is distributed among you all.”

Angelic Brianna speaks up next, “You were all supposed to be rulers on your world to help bring peace to your own multi-verse. That all changed when we found an assassination attempt on Richard and Brianna in the Robot Multi-verse. The laws were passed to stop that from coming about. We traced it to a demonic group on their Earth. It was they who initiated the virus bomb to destroy all written records. They are hoping to create a demonic robot race invasion to finally wipe out all humanoid life in their multi-verse. They took the Borg technology from the Star Trek Verse and brought it there.”

Angelic Richard looks at me, “Richard, you need to Googleplex your first cube while you are at Secure-Sys. You will be contacted later on how to get it to the Robot-verse.”

“I understand, Angelic Richard. I have been pondering on the next generation 3D-Server.”

“We know, Richard. You must get it done by the time your grandson has graduated from college.”

“Yes, Angelic Richard.”

“Because of this assassination attempt, we felt that all Richards and Briannas are in danger of being killed. So, we brought them here for safe keeping. That meant our Powers shifted to this Richard and to Richard-A and to their wives. However, there is one part of our power that is found in the Cartoon Verse. When Leviathan and Eingana gave birth to their first pair of dragons, they agreed to be part of the Source. Right now there are seven Lantern Corps with the seven different colors. When they have their Blackest Night War, it will become the Brightest Day Era afterward. They don’t realize that it will come back again to your world, but this time the focus will be different. There are the Black Lantern and the White Lantern Corp now. Within those two lanterns are the heart and soul that give it life. They are the Black Dragon and the White Dragon. However, the Black Hand and Oa didn’t look further back into the history of the Universe. They stopped looking when they found the Blackest Night Prophecy.”

“What will these two dragons do once they are released?”

“They will reconcile the power rings and the lanterns into one color, gray. Then they will be reunited with their parents. They will be here to help defend your world.”

“That’s amazing, Angelic Richard. What I want to know, why didn’t Leviathan and Eingana stays in their multi-verse and not be in our Monster Verse?”

“Think on it, Richard-Rept. What would have happened?”

“Sigh . . . the worlds would come to them and have them create more powerful dragons and beasts. It would be a very bloody war. I wouldn’t be surprised if the monsters and dragons would kill all of us.”

“That’s right. Those worlds would have abused them to the bitter end. Now you have a chance to bring peace to your multi-verse. You already are the Omega Dragon on your world. It is now time for you to be the Omega Unicorn to fulfill the other half of you. That goes the same for you, Richard-A.”

Richard-Rept and Richard-A look at each other and nod their heads up and down in agreement.

“That’s good. Because we are going to do something special for all of you. We need another person here. He will help with this process.” Angelic-Richard looks at Santa. “Santa, it is time to bring him in.”

“Yes, Angelic-Richard.” Santa turns around and walks to the door and exits the room.

“Whom is he getting, Angelic-Richard?”

“A very special person. He has the gift to bring healing to the people that he meets. We are going to use his gift to make this happen.”

Then the door opens again. Santa walks into the room. Another person walks in while he pushes a bike along as well.

“I present to you, The Dapper Gentleman. His full name is Gnome Diego.”

“Greetings everyone. I am the Dapper Gentleman. I am here to do a transfer for all of you with my TransBike.”

“What kind of transfer?”

“I will be copying and transferring the unicorn images from Richard and the dragon images from Richard-A to the rest of you. This will allow you to be more powerful than you were. You will also inherit the air and water bending technique from Richard and the earth and fire bending from Richard-A. But, before we do that. I would like for Richard and Richard-A shake hands together. The two Briannas do the same as well. This includes the SRU Wizard and the SRU Wizard-A as well. Once they do that, then their fairies can finally greet each other properly.”

"I have heard about you at the Big Closet website."

"Do you believe, Richard?"

"Gnome Diego, I have seen many wonders. Yes, I believe in your mission to use TransBike to bless others."

"As do I," affirmed my Brianna.

“As do we!" confirmed our other selves.

Then the TransBike's headlight glows with a golden glow.

"TransBike thanks you," said Gnome Diego.

We get out of our chairs and approach each other carefully. We shake hands as we were instructed. We each feel a sudden jolt.

“What you felt is the experience with the other bending elements. You are both first degree black belts in the Shaolin Dragon Master program. Now, you will be able to do it more easily. Also, the twelve unicorn images from Richard get transferred to Richard-A. The twelve dragon images from Richard-A get transferred to Richard.”

We smile as we finally get to hug each other quickly. Once our Briannas shake hands and hug each other, our fairies come out to finally hug each other and give greetings.

“Now that is over with, we can now do the same for the other Richards and Briannas. Richards and Briannas please come here while Richard and Richard-A and his groups are over there.”

Everyone arranges themselves accordingly.

“Now project out your images, Richard and Richard-A.”

I project out the twelve unicorns in front of me. Then Richard-A projects out the twelve dragons. The Dapper Gentleman gets on his bike. He spins the pedals quickly. Then all of a sudden the images multiply and enter into the other Richards. They all feel a sudden jolt of energy. The same thing happens to the Briannas as well.

Then the other Richards feel something new within themselves.

Angelic-Richard speaks up, “That’s right, Richards. You are now pregnant with your first pair of fairies. That even includes you Richard-Q and Brianna-Q. The Q-Verse won’t be the same now. You might find it a lot more peaceful now that there are Q-fairies there. Even I am now pregnant with angelic-fairies within me.”

Everyone begins to hug each other in celebration.

Santa speaks up to get their attention. “Now that you are more empowered and able to do more. You can now go back to your own multi-verses to effect the proper change in attitudes. Please, everyone back to your seats.”

We all sit back down where we were earlier.

“One of the ships that will come to Earth at the Ultimate Last Battle is the Omega Unicron. His wreckage has been found and is being rebuilt by the demon angels. He is from the Transformer World, Cybertron. Optimus Prime will come with his Autobots to help protect Earth. There is a file hidden deep in his memory. Optimus Prime must retrieve it and open it. The file will reveal information on how to reinstate the original directives. It will over ride the demon’s efforts to program it to their uses. Richard, you must transport Optimus Prime to inside the Omega Unicron. You must improve your anti-virus program to be very powerful. Your suit will change to have a computer within the armor.”

“I understand, Angelic-Richard.”

“Now, for an update on the Ronin Warriors and Talpa. This story occurred in Richard’s world. The battle in the comics took place in the Andromeda Galaxy. The Creator gave inspiration to the writers on his world to write the story.”

“Also, the Ronin Warriors will finally rejoin with the Nine Dragon Spirits. They will be able to bring their armor back to its original power level when Ronin had it for the first time.”

Santa speaks up, “Now that the rest of you are empowered with the unicorns and the dragons, your lives will now get prolonged until the Ultimate Last Battle takes place. Your worlds are now in synchronization, except for the Robot-Verse. It will be another ten thousand years before they are in synch with you.”

“If you need any help from another Richard and Brianna, you can contact each other with these crystals.”

Angelic-Richard waves his hands and ten crystals appear in front of us. We see a light green crystal appear in front of us. We pick it up to look at it closely.

“Once you reach another Richard or Brianna in another multi-verse, you can be transported there in a blink of an eye.”

We all nod our heads up and down in agreement.

“More than likely it will be Richard and Richard-A who will be called to the other multi-verses to help them. Therefore, we need to divide which of them visits the other multi-verses.”

After talking among ourselves for another thirty minutes, we divided it up. I get the Cartoon Verse, Demon World, Magic Verse and Robot Verse.

Richard-A gets Star Trek Verse, Mirror Verse and Monster Verse.

“Don’t worry, Richard-A. You will be very busy with those three, plus your own.”

“Don’t I know it? The one connection I do have with the Cartoon Verse is the Anti-Monitor. I thank the Creator he is in my multi-verse now. His power is greatly reduced. I have encountered him a few times already. I have won each time. But, if he gets to your world, Richard. Be very careful. That is where he is most powerful. You and I must learn the Spirit Bending technique before we face him again.”

“Thank you for telling me that, Richard-A.”

“There is one more thing to worry about. It is Frieza and Cell from Goku’s World. Their holding cells will be opened. They will come here to wreak havoc. So is Voldemort as well. He will be on the warpath to find Harry Potter.”

“What happened to Harry Potter, Angelic-Richard?”

“Richard will find out what happened when he visits the Isles during the second part of his honeymoon. Richard has already visited Middle-Earth. Richard-A, you will do the same on your world.”

Richard-A nods his head up and down in agreement.

“What is interesting about that is this. The dark power of the two Melkors and Saurons are the same. They both have had the same effect on each one. What we are trying to say is this. The two Tolkiens wrote the same story. They are an exact match, word for word. When Richard and Richard-A become one, so will both Melkors and Saurons. It is in this state that Sauron will no longer be a ghost. He will become solid again and be able to open the Door of Night.”

“Then we let the events play out as were told earlier.”

“That’s right, Richard and Richard-A.”

“That is all we have to discuss and talk about. You are now free to go back to your own multi-verses. We’ll be watching you to see how you are doing. If you need help, you can use the peridot crystal to contact another Richard or Brianna, or even us, the Emissaries.”

Then Santa exclaims out loud, “Who knows? I might be able to bring Christmas to all of the multi-verses!”

We all clap our hands and cheer for the wonderful blessings that we have received. We all get up and talk among ourselves. We hug each other and get close to each other, face to face. Even the fairies have a great time in talking one to another.

Richard-A and I talk to each other quickly.

“So, did you learned the earth and fire bending first?”

“That’s right, Richard. Did the Fire Nation kill the Moon Spirit, Tui?”

“That’s right, Richard-A. Then that means the Fire Nation killed La in your multi-verse. Who replaced La on your Avatar World?”

“Prince Hahn did, Richard. Our Yue had to learn her lessons the hard way.”

“That’s interesting, brother. Our multi-verses are alike in some ways, but opposite in experience. I have encountered Sauron’s ghost a few times.”

“So, did I, brother. One more comparison to do. Who got killed in the so-called plane crash?”

“My parents and my two brothers. So, that means your Wilson family was killed in the plane crash.”

“That’s right. Here’s a thought, since we are both security programmers. We should be able to pool our memories to combine our 3D-Servers into a much better version. It should be able to rival Gallifrey’s time circuits.”

“Or get close to it, brother. We don’t need to create a massive black hole between our multi-verses.”

“No we don’t, brother. Do you remember a Star Trek episode about the anti-matter universe?”

“I do, Richard-A. Perhaps when the time is right, we can rescue both Lazarus in that corridor.”

“Yes, we should be able to do that.”

After another thirty minutes, we leave Christmas World, a group at a time. We arrive in different Emissary Star Ships and are whisked back to our own multi-verses.

On our star ship, we get informed of our next world to visit.

“It is now time for you to arrive on the Cars World. There is a connection there with your family.”

“There is?”

“Yes, do you remember the Model-T ford that your family rebuilt?”

“There is no way I can forget that experience. We all had a hand in restoring that car. We even given it a name, Tedford. We even put a small computer in him to make his engine run very efficiently.”

“That’s right, your dad sold the car so he can send you to college.”

I look with a sad face, “I remember that weekend when he sold it. We were all saddened by the news.”

“Yes you were, Richard. Now we need to give you an update on Tedford. We found him and brought him to the Cars World. While he was here on one of our star ships, we were able to bring him to life. In his computer memory is a picture. On that picture shows another star ship coming to destroy their world. The Cars World has no satellites around it. The star ship will be there in about five to ten years.”

“So, I need to prove to them of this threat that is coming to them.”

“That’s right. Your contact will be Finn McMissile.” Then we see the Cars World appear on the screen.

“Where is Tedford now?”

“He is in North Car-o-lina. When you get there, he will be the Grand Marshall for another Antique Car Show in Gasville. Gasville is in the same location as Asheville.”

“Once Finn sees the photo in his computer memory, he will have the proof to get satellites and rocket platforms built and launched in orbit around their world.”

“Then Tedford and I can talk about old times.”

The Emissary smiles, “You can even do that. It will make Tedford even more popular than ever.”

An Emissary pushes a button on the screen. He contacts Finn via a special frequency.

Finn sees the Emissary’s face on his internal computer screen.

“I remember you now. You are the Emissaries from the Creator.”

“Yes, we are, Finn. We have someone here who needs to meet you. He is a human being. His name is Richard Moore, his wife’s name is Brianna. They will have some fairies with them as well. Hopefully they will be there for the day only.”

“Human beings are coming here? It must be very important for them to come here. What is the new situation?”

“Richard Moore’s family has a Model T Ford on your world. His name is . . .”

“Tedford. I know the name very well. He is the best rebuilt Model T Ford on our world. What’s so special about him?”

“The family put a small computer on him to make his engine smarter and more efficient. There is also a photo hidden in his memory. It shows a star ship that is en route to your world. They are coming to destroy your world in about five to ten years.”

“That is not much time to prepare. How are we going to defend ourselves?”

“Richard will give you the ideas for that. He is the best security programmer on his world. He will access that photo for you as well.”

“That’s good, Emissary. When will he arrive and how?”

“He has his own magic. He will be invisible, but you will be able to detect him with your on board EM scanners.”

“I understand, Emissaries. Have him meet me outside London on Route 1 in the countryside and behind a billboard.”

“Will the Lightning McQueen billboard will do?”

“Excellent idea, I will get them inside my car and whisk them to headquarters. Is he cleared for high level intelligence?”

“Yes he is, Finn. You will find him very knowledgeable on many different subjects. He works for Secure-Sys in Jacksonville on his world.”

“That’s an excellent company on our world as well. Perhaps we should get them to meet each other.”

“Yes, that is an excellent idea, Finn. They’ll see you in thirty minutes.”

“Roger that, Emissaries. Finn McMissile signing off.”

The screen goes blank.

“Are you saying there is a car version of me in Jacksonville?”

Brianna speaks up, “And a car version of me as well?”

“Yes there is. However, they have not met each other yet since their split in South Car-o-lina. You will be playing match maker.” They smile at us with big smiles.

We all start laughing out loud at the biggest car joke that we have ever heard.

Thirty minutes later we are parked above the British Isles on Cars World. It is 8 AM on the clock there. Brianna holds my hand.

The Emissaries push a button on the panel. We disappear in a blink of an eye. We find ourselves high above the British Isles. I quickly extend my wings and recite the spell to disappear. We can now fly down without being seen.

Finn McMissile scans the sky. He goes through the different frequencies on his EM scanner. Then he sees us flying down to the ground.

“Oh my, they didn’t say anything about wings. I hope he has a very good story for this one. I better burn some rubber.” “Scrrrreeech!”

Finn McMissile quickly takes off down the road.

The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 18
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman

The list of characters mentioned in this story belong to the various authors that created them. This is a fan-fiction story.

~~~000~~~

Finn McMissile scans the sky. He goes through the different frequencies on his EM scanner. Then he sees us flying down to the ground.

“Oh my, they didn’t say anything about wings. I hope he has a very good story for this one. I better burn some rubber.” “Scrrrreeech!”

Finn McMissile quickly takes off down the road.

We see the Lightning McQueen billboard on Route 1. We glide down and land behind the billboard. I recite the spell to make us appear. We see there are plenty of trees and bushes to hide us as well. I retract my wings back into my body.

After another minute we hear the roar of a car engine slowing down. It rolls onto the grass into a low opening under the trees. We see Finn McMissile coming toward us.

“Are you Richard Moore?” \r

“I am, Finn. This is my wife, Brianna. I take it your world disapproves of human beings.”

“That’s right, Richard. There are some old stories that get told about bad drivers and causing big wrecks. On my scanners, I saw wings on you. Where are they? I’m sure it’s a good story to tell.”

“You’re right, Finn. While I was in college, I was invited to another world. I ended up being their Outside Helper on the planet Twainor. I had another visit to their world after I earned my bachelor’s degree. During that time, I faced an old enemy from my world. It was about to destroy their world. With my science and computer experience, I was able to help Twainor defend themselves. There were two giants who used mind control. They were able to take command of the star ship. I was able to help rescue the people on the star ship. During that time, I learned how their computers operated and what they used for anti-virus protection. I took that experience back with me to create the 3D-Server on my world.”

“So, you took an alien computer program and adapted it to your world. Does that computer program use a series of passwords and go through four gates?”

“Why yes. How did you know?”

“The Secure-Sys company here came up with it as well.”

“I was just told by the Emissaries that there is a car version of me and Brianna. If that is true, the Richard in that company must be getting dreams of my exploits. We’ll need to visit that company while we are over there.”

“I agree, Richard. We need to make sure there are no compromises in their hardware and software programs.”

“That’s interesting. So, on my world, your world’s story is told. And somehow my story is told on your world. Apparently the Creator gives inspiration to our writers about these other places. We have seen the first two stories played out with Lightning getting lost in Radiator Springs. The next story is when you aided Mater to help the catch bad guys with the Allinoil scandal.”

“Thank you for telling me that, Richard. Please get inside my car. I’ll take you to headquarters.”

Finn opens the car doors. I sit in the driver’s seat while Brianna sits in the passenger right front seat.

“So, Richard, tell me more about you. What is your background? Where are you from?”

“Ahh . . . the twenty questions. Are you going to be recording this conversation?”

“It will help me in the long run. I will be doing a stress test on your voice to determine if you are telling the truth.”

“I have no problem with that, Finn.”

“Excellent. Begin with your background and where you are from. Then recall your accomplishments to date.”

“Yes, Finn. I also would like Brianna to interject her point of view in the story line. She and her family are an integral part of our family history.”

We start telling of our stories together. At the one point in the story, my fairies pop their heads out of the pockets giggling and laughing.

“So, it is true. You do have your own fairies.”

“Yes, Finn.”

“Well, you all passed the stress test. I couldn’t detect a single deception tone in your story. You are telling the truth.”

We enter the outskirts of London. Then he opaques his glass windows so we can’t see out the windows. Finn makes several right and left-hand turns.

“I can’t let you see where one of our hidden entrances is located. It leads to M1 Headquarters.”

“I understand, Finn. Okay, fairies. It is time to be quiet. We’ll probably be scanned once we are inside.”

“Yes, you will, Richard. Let me speak first. When I open the doors, then you can come out.”

“Yes, Finn.”

Finn enters a garage. He drives down to an empty bay with a lift. Once he backs up in the bay, the floor drops downward. In its place another section of floor slides into place.

We are lowered down several levels until the lift stops in front of a large door. The metal doors slide open. Finn drives forward and stops before a scanner. A light beam scans over Finn.

A female voice sounds out loud. “You are clear of any homing beacons. I do detect some unusual life signs within you, Finn. Should I proceed to decontaminate you?”

“That’s a negative. I’ll reveal them to you in the briefing room, Holley Shiftwell. Have the top brass attend.”

“I’m sending the message, Finn. The message is received, Finn. They will be there when you arrive.”

“That’s an affirmative.”

Another door opens across the room. Finn drives forward and enter a large room. It has multiple layers with ramps getting to the various levels. Finn drives forward and make a right turn. Several cars drive pass Finn.

“Hello, Finn.”

“How was your drive in the countryside?”

“It went well.” Finn drives along until he comes to a large door. It splits open and he drives inside.

Inside the room are ten other cars of various makes and models. The chief is Jaguar One. There is a Mercedes, Lamborghini, Holley Shiftwell at least in the room.

Finn drives into his location.

“Hello Finn. Holley Shiftwell tells me we shouldn’t decontaminate you. Are you carrying some sort of precious cargo?”

“I am, Jaguar One. Does everyone here remember the Emissaries from the Creator?”

They all look at one another and nod the front of the cars up and down.

“We do, Finn. Are you telling me they contacted you recently?”

“They did, Jaguar One. They told me an interesting story. It appears we have a special car on our world. It belongs to a family where they came from.”

The cars mumble among themselves. They get quiet when Jaguar One speaks up.

“There is a car from Earth here?”

“There is, Jaguar One. There seems to be an interesting connection between their world and ours. In fact, the Emissaries told me that this car has a photograph hidden in its memory. It shows a star ship coming to destroy our world. It will be here in about five to ten years from now.”

“What?! How are we going to defend ourselves from such a threat? We need help!”

“Calm down everyone. I did bring help.”

Everyone calms down from the terrible news that Finn just gave.

“What help did you bring?”

“I have within me, two very important human beings. One of them is a family member of the car I mentioned.”

Then several spot lights are shown on Finn. Finn opens his doors. Brianna and I slowly step out of the car. Finn closes his doors once we are clear.

“What is your name? Who are you?”

“My name is Richard Moore. This is my wife, Brianna. There is a car here that used to be in our family. It is a Model T Ford. We gave him the name of Tedford.”

They all shout out loud, except for Finn. “Tedford!” He has a smile on the front of his face.

“That’s right. My dad bought him from another person on our world. He was about to send the car to a special junk yard. The car would have been sold for the parts. The Model T Ford is more than 200 years old on our world. There are many car collectors who try to salvage the antiques and keep them in their collection. My dad wanted one for the family. So, my two brothers, mom, dad, and I each had a part in rebuilding the car. We found the best parts in the best condition. If it wasn’t available, we would make it from scratch. Doing the leather seats was the easy part. My mom took care of that. There are some parts that are modern. They won’t rust at all. That would be the gas tank, brake system, wiring, gauges, and head lights for example. We were determined to make the car last a few more hundred years. I am the computer genius in the family. I installed a computer on the car. This computer made the engine run more efficiently and be smarter on the road in adverse weather conditions with the braking system. We figure, the only parts that need to be replaced periodically are the rubber tires and the brake pads for example. I have a picture of Tedford with me.” I open my satchel. I retrieve the photograph from my wallet. I hold it up and show it to everyone.

Holley Shiftwell scans the photo. It is soon shown on a large screen. She brings in another photo from their archive.

“It is a match, Jaguar One.”

“I agree, Miss Shiftwell. That is an interesting story, Richard. So far, your story checks out. I am sure there is more to your story than just seeing the family car.”

“Yes there is, Jaguar One. Brianna and I need to tell you the rest of our story. Then you can decide if you want to act on the information. Finn did a stress test on our story. He knows we are telling the truth.”

Brianna and I tell our story again. We don’t tell them about the royal connection that we have. At the moment I mention my fairies, they come flying out of the coat pockets. They fly around quickly to check everyone out. Then they come back to sit on our shoulders and heads.

“We can trust them, father. They want to do what is right.”

“That’s good, my fairies.”

Everyone chuckles and giggles when they hear the assessment from the fairies.

“So, do you have the proof you are the Omega Unicorn?”

“I do, Jaguar One.”

Brianna and I step away from Finn and walk behind him. We thrust our arms and hands out to the side. Immediately all of our unicorn images come out on either side of us. We extend our wings out to show them. My fairies hover above us and Croin comes out and hovers above us.

“Gasp! It is true. Then your story of the 3D-Server is true as well. Then we must ask the Richard here if he dreamed about you. If he did, then you must tell us how we can defend ourselves when this star ship comes in ten years.”

Croin and our unicorn images return within us. My fairies return back to the coat pockets. Our wings get retracted within us.

“I’ll do that for you. My first question for you is this. Have there been studies or launches of rockets into space here?”

“There have been numerous studies on the atmosphere. Each time we send a high-flying air craft, the engines would cut off. That seems to tell us there is little or no oxygen in outer space.”

“That is correct, sir.”

“My name is Q.”

“That is correct, Q. You need to come up with another propellant system to get up there. Our best choice is the use of hydrogen and oxygen in a controlled reaction. Is there a drawing board that I can use?”

“Yes there is, Richard.”

Holley speaks up, “Lowering the drawing board screen.”

A drawing board screen comes down from the ceiling.

“You can use your finger if you like, Richard.”

“Thank you, Miss Holley.”

I draw out a basic rocket shape with the tanks inside the rocket. I also draw another rocket as well. This is to show the use of solid propellants.

“In this rocket, there are two tanks. One is filled with liquid oxygen and the other is filled with liquid hydrogen. I’m sure you have tested these types of engines before.”

Q smiles, “Yes, we have, Richard. Please continue.”

“You have to determine the amount of thrust needed to lift a payload into space. The other type of rocket is the solid propellant. It is designed for immediate thrust to the lower atmosphere. The shell returns to the ocean for pick up by a tug boat. It is brought back to be refurbished and refilled.”

“Now you are wondering what kind of payloads they should be. They could be almost anything. But it needs small thrusters on the payloads so it can turn around to look in any direction.” I quickly draw some satellites with little thrusters on them. “The payload could be a space telescope, a communication satellite, a defense platform with various types of weapons on board. The first weapon is the laser. If it is going to hold rockets with explosives, then you must come up with a ferry system to reload the platform when it becomes empty. The best weapon for space is the rail gun.”

“We have that in our arsenal. We have been experimenting with larger explosives delivered by a larger rail gun.”

“That’s good. Now the satellite and the platform need a source of electrical power. Solar energy is the best solution here. Have it on a recharge cycle with power cells of oxygen and hydrogen. It is the perfect enclosed system to be in space.”

“What about computer attacks with viruses?”

“You need to have on board the 3D-server to begin with. I have been designing in my mind the next generation for the 3D-Server. It is where I googleplex the first cube of the core.’

“Googleplex the first cube? What is the number of cubes you will end up with?”

“First of all, the first cube is six processors. You start with that number. So that means, the first iteration is six to the sixth power. Take that number and take it to the sixth power. Then divide by six to get the number of cubes that will be made.”

“That would mean it would be over the order of ten to the 28th power.”

“That’s right, Q. So, for starters, I will do the first level. That comes out to 46,656 processors or 7,776 cubes.”

“I would assume you know how to do the connections for that many?”

“I do, Q. It is done with the 3D-Server. I need to create a 3D drafting environment to design it. I designed it that way.” I give a big smile.

Everyone giggles and laughs. “Now we know why you are here. You can help us to make our world safer.”

“That’s right, Jaguar One.”

“Finn, take our guests to America. Find Tedford and get that photo. Then take them to Secure-Sys headquarters in Jacksonville. Get them updated with the latest ideas. We’ll start collaborating with the Americans on getting the rocket designs, satellites and weapons’ platform built and launched. We have at least five years before they show up.”

“Roger that, Jaguar One. I will have to use our private jet to get them there without being seen. Richard, did the Emissaries tell you where Tedford is?”

“They did, Finn. He is in Gasville, North Car-o-lina attending another Antique Car show. He is the Grand Marshall there.”

“He has been the Grand Marshall at a lot of events. He will be watched, Finn. Find a way to get that photo carefully.”

“What if everyone else sees, Richard and Brianna? Their presence could cause a riot. Do you have any ideas, Richard?”

“Well, it needs to be done carefully, that is for sure. Has Tedford told any stories of where he’s been?”

Jaguar One smiles, “Yes, he has. He tells stories of mountain and country side roads and a small town called Mt. Blanc, NC.”

“That’s great. I still own the cabin in Mt. Blanc, NC. So, he must be recalling his time there.”

Everyone giggles and laughs.

“Heh, heh, heh, That’s a good starting point, Finn. Take it from there.”

Finn smiles back, “I’ll do that, Jaguar One.”

“It has been a pleasure, Richard. Perhaps some day, some of us might be at the Ultimate Last Battle.”

“I look forward to the help if it arrives. There are other star ships that travel faster than the speed of light, Q. They even have some special capabilities that are different from other worlds. I know of one world that can protect itself from laser attacks and projectiles. You’ll have to be creative in your thinking. Even it’s opposite to what you are used to.”

Q smiles, “Thank you for the tip, Richard.”

Everyone else smiles. Finn opens his doors, Brianna and I get inside and sit down. Finn closes the door and backs out and leaves the room.

“Okay, while they are doing that, we need to get busy on our end. Ramp up your R&D, Q.”

“Yes, sir.”

“Robert, you’re our liaison to the Prime Minister and the Queen. You need to call for a high level meeting with our Ambassadors. They need to be brought into the loop. We need to make sure the world is together on this endeavor.”

“Yes, sir.”

“Brian, you’re our Military representative. We need the best minds on designing the weapon platforms. It needs to be multi-functional and self reliant. Once Secure-Sys has their next-gen 3D-Server ready, we need to install it on the platforms, satellites, space telescopes and our computer networks here on the ground.”

“Yes, sir.”

Jaguar One looks around at everyone else. “If you get any ideas how to fly faster the speed of light, let Q know about it. Even it’s a wild guess. We have to try all options. If you get any ideas on how to stop laser and rail gun attacks, let Q know about it. We now have a common goal to work for. Let’s make this happen! I still expect to see daily and weekly reports on my desk!”

Everyone shouts out together, “Yes, sir!” They all leave the room to their assignments.

Q thinks to himself as he leaves the room. He said it might be opposite to what we are used to. Nah . . . he can’t mean that. If that is true, we need to find a way to control a matter and anti-matter reaction or something close to it. We have been toying with that idea for years. Ever since Einstein came up with his E=MC-square law, it has solved a lot of problems with our instant communication network. He must mean there is a way to apply it to space craft.

“Is there something on your mind, Q?”

“No . . . I mean yes, Jaguar One. It was Richard’s last statement. It got me thinking really hard.”

“I heard it too, Q. It is one thing to take an idea from paper and make it for real. Take it step by step and really slow. There is a lot more variables involved when dealing with space objects. We don’t need any accidents.”

“I know that all too well, sir. Thank you for the reminder about the caution factor.”

“You’re welcome, Q. I’ll check on you later.”

“See you later, sir.”

Jaguar One and Q split apart and go their ways.

~~~000~~~

Finn keeps his windows opaque as we drive out of London to Heathrow Airport. “Albert, this is Finn.”

“Hello, Finn. What’s the destination?”

“We are going to America. Land in Gasville, NC. We’ll be there for two hours I think. Once we get done with business there, then fly to Jacksonville.”

“I understand, Finn. Is there anything special I need on the plane?”

“Yes, have two beds, human size.”

“Human size? Okay, I won’t argue with you about it. They will be ready when you get here. Air-Transport Three out.”

“Finn out.”

We drive to the main airport in about fifteen minutes. Finn slows down. He sends his authorization code to the gate sensor. The gate swings open and Finn drives onto the main tarmac. He drives down the air side strip until he sees the private jet waiting for him. The rear ramp is lowered down for him. He drives up into the transport. Then the ramp swings up and closes.

The engines rev up on the jet. Albert the plane, taxis down the air side strip to the main runway. Once he is given clearance from the control tower, he takes off into the sky and flies westward to the Americas.

From the side opening hallway, Holley Shiftwell rolls into the room. “Hello, Finn.”

“I see your curiosity got the best of you.”

“It did, Finn. I have never met any humans before.”

Finn opens his doors. Brianna and I step out of the car. Finn closes his doors once we are clear.

“It is an honor to meet you, Richard and Brianna.”

“It is an honor to meet you, Holley Shiftwell. I remembered the part you played in the movie with the Allinoil scandal.”

Holley blushes a bit. “Thank you. Your beds are in the back room. I suggest you get some sleep. We’ll be chasing the sun to the Americas. We’ll be in the air for about eight hours.”

“Thank you for the reminder about the jet and time lag, Holley.”

“It is the second door on your left. Your beds are set up there.”

“Thank you.”

Brianna and I walk down the hallway to the second door on the left. The door opens automatically and we walk inside. We see two beds placed there with pillows. We put our satchels on a nearby table. My fairies quickly fly out to check out the room.

“Where are we going to sleep, mother?”

“That’s a good question, Esmeralda. Do you have any ideas?”

“How about if you two sleep on one bed and we sleep on the other bed?”

“That’s a good idea, Lavan. Is that a good idea, Bri?”

Brianna smiles, “Yes it is, my love. It is only for eight hours.”

“I’ll set up your shower on the table and your food bag on the bed. Keep the crumbs to a minimum.”

“Yes, father, mother, Omega!”

We all giggle and laugh together.

I take out their shower set up and place it on the table. I put their satchel on the bed. They take out their blankets and pillows. They move the top cover around to make it more comfortable for them. After they have eaten some nuts and dried fruits, they wash their hands and faces in the shower set up and turn off the water.

Brianna and I move the covers down the bed. We take the two pillows and put them in a comfortable position.

“I don’t like sleeping in day clothes, Richard. I’ll make the best of it.”

“So will I, Bri. Perhaps at the next world we’ll have an opportunity to get a proper night of sleep.”

We undress ourselves to our underwear. Brianna is in her panties and bra. I am in my briefs.

We lay on the bed and snuggle up to each other, side by side. We have our heads on the pillows. Bri lays her hand on my chest. Soon the light is turned off in the room by itself. We fall asleep in about thirty minutes. During the sleep, I dream about the times my family had with Tedford.

~~~000~~~

Holley looks at the screen while we are sleeping. “Sigh . . . they make a beautiful couple and family.”

“Yes, they do, Holley. But they are enjoying every moment of peacefulness when they can get it. There will be times when trouble comes, but he is the chosen one for their world. We’ll have to be ready as well.”

“You’re right, Finn. So, what is next on the agenda?”

“When we arrive in Gasville, we need to go to the Antique Car Show. It is an international meeting place for a lot of antique cars. Even some of our antique cars are there as well for the show.”

“What else happens there?”

Finn accesses the internet to see the pictures and videos of the event. “Apparently a lot happens there. There are races for all ages from go-carts to street legal cars to the antiques. Everyone shows off their best paint job and condition of themselves. A lot of trophies are handed out for a lot of different categories. The main event is the National Car Race. It is the league below the Piston Cup Series.”

“Has Lightning McQueen shown up there?”

“He has done it a few times. He is in high demand for appearances at a lot of races.” He pages through the website until he finds the list of special appearances. “Yes, Lightning McQueen will be there. We better be on high alert for anything.”

“What could happen there? Aren’t there enough police cruisers at these events?”

“There are, Holley. But all it takes is someone with a bent mind to kidnap a vehicle for parts.”

“What?! They would strip all the parts off and leave the chassis behind?”

“They would, Holley. Especially, Tedford. That is why he has several body guards around him at all times.”

“Well, I hope nothing goes wrong this time around.”

“I hope so too, Holley. Come, we need to rest our circuits. You have the Comm, Albert. Wake us up when we get to the coast.”

A voice is heard over the speaker. “Roger on that time request, Finn. Enjoy your rest.”

Holley and Finn drive down the hallway to their own rooms. They put their engines into idle. They back up so their exhaust tail pipe enters a receptacle waste chute. It delivers the emission to the rear engines of the plane. Soon, they are asleep.

The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 19
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman

The list of characters mentioned in this story belong to the various authors that created them. This is a fan-fiction story.

~~~000~~~

It is 9 AM at Secure-Sys on Cars World in Jacksonville, Florida. Richard, a sleek red Pontiac Grand-Am, looks at the 3D screen in disgust and grumbles to himself.

“Grr. . . . what happened? I was just about to come up with the next generation version of the 3D-Server. It was just in my mind and now it is gone.” The sliding door to his room opens up. Mr. Bryson, a Mercedes, rolls into the office.

“What’s wrong Richard? Lost your mojo?”

“I was just about to come up with the next generation version for the 3D-Server. Then all of a sudden it is not in my mind. What’s going on, sir?”

“Well, don’t worry about it for now. You have other things to do. I don’t want you to lose too much sleep over it.”

“Sigh . . . you’re right, sir. Hopefully, it will come back to me.”

“I’m sure it will. You are one of my best employees here. Ever since you caught Brent and his three friends embezzling our company and stopping the potential world crisis they would have created, our profits have sky-rocketed.”

“Thank you for the compliment, sir. Okay, I’ll get back to the usual work around here.”

“That’s the way to think about it. I’ll check in later today.”

“See you later, Mr. Bryson.”

Mr. Bryson leaves Richard’s office. The sliding door closes. Richard, changes the 3D-design screen to the usual display on the panel. He looks over the code just written by some of the other employees in the company.

~~~000~~~

Albert the plane sounds the alarm to wake everyone up when he approaches the east coast of the Americas.

“BZZZZZZ. . . . .”

Everyone on the plane slowly wakes up.

Brianna removes her hand from my shoulder. She looks up at me. She sees that I’m slowly waking up. She moves a stray hair that has fallen down in front of my face. She smiles at me.

I look down at her. “I love that smile of yours, Bri.” I crack a smile at her.

“I love that smile of yours too, Richard.”

Brianna slowly gets off. Then for good measure, she pinches my side to really wake me up.

I jerk my side away quickly. “Oooh . . . I’ll have to wait for my turn later.”

We hear the fairies giggle at our playful tactic.

“Giggle . . . I’ll be waiting for it. What is for breakfast, Richard?”

“Hmm . . . I know they will have water here. Either I bring it here by magic or we forage for it in the woods.”

My fairies perk up when they hear about food.

“We can look for some more nuts, seeds and fruits for you, father and mother, when we get on the ground.”

“Thank you for the offer, Ruby. Until we are alone together, then we can try for it.”

“You’re welcome!”

My fairies quickly take a morning shower on the table. They eat some more nuts and dried fruit. Brianna and I pour out some water into our own cups. My fairies offer some of their nuts and dried fruit to start the morning at least. I see that the spell is still holding on the water container, the nut and fruit bags. The bags refill automatically once we have eaten some of the dried fruit and nuts.

We get ourselves dressed. I decide to leave the armor on the jet for the time being. I can always call for it with my own magic spell.

The door slides open as we approach it. We walk back to where we earlier. We see Finn and Holley going over some things on a screen. It goes blank once they hear us. They turn to face us.

“I hope you slept well.”

“We did, Finn. Are there any other questions bugging your brain?”

“Yes, there are, Richard. I went over the text of your background. I think I found a gap in your story. Did you omit anything that we shouldn’t know?”

“Sigh . . . I was hoping not to say anything about it. I don’t know if the problem exists here either. But, you never know. Brianna and I are descendants from royalty. Our roots are in Ireland, Wales, Scotland and England.”

“Wow, I see what you mean by keeping quiet about it. What are the circumstances behind it?”

“About fifteen hundred years ago, King Arthur ruled the land with his wife, Guenevere. King Arthur did have a son, but he also had a nephew. His name is Mordred. Mordred wanted to be King of the Isles. After Guenevere gave birth to their only son, Arthur sent him away with the original royal rings to a trusted knight and friend, the Moores. I am his descendant. Brianna comes from the royalty side of the Picts and Ireland. From what I know, Mordred and his mother made a deal with the devil to live a long life. They became known as Mordred’s Legacy. They eventually became assassins for hire to keep the current monarchy in power for generations. Our families were found in the Isles and they fled to the Americas to hide once they found out they were being hunted. That was about three hundred years ago. I found a diary in the Mt. Blanc cabin home. It contains the list of names for our lineage. We are waiting for the right time until the current monarchy collapses. When that happens, we’ll be there to pick up the pieces.”

“You don’t mess around, Richard and Brianna. I don’t think we have that problem here, Richard. We won’t know until we have a talk with Richard on our world. Also, we need to know if Mt. Blanc exists here as well.”

“That’s right, Finn. So, until then, we’ll have to be quiet about it.”

“I agree too, Richard. It is another secret for me to keep.”

“Thank you, Holley. That is greatly appreciated.”

Then we hear Albert on the intercom. “I am approaching Gasville International Airport. Get ready for the landing.”

“Hmm . . . we don’t have chairs for you to sit on.”

“That’s okay, Finn. We’ll go back to the bedroom. We’ll be lying on the beds.”

“That’s a good idea.”

We walk back to the bedroom. Brianna and I fluff up the pillows. Then we lie on the bed. Our fairies quickly get comfortable around us.

Finn and Holley lock their brakes as Albert makes the landing. After a couple of skips on the runway, Albert is firmly on the ground. He begins to slow down and taxi down the air side strip. Albert parks himself in a location so that he has no obstruction to the main runway.

We get up from the bed and and walk back into the meeting room. Finn opens his doors, we get inside and sit on the seats. He then closes his doors. The back ramp opens and swings down. Holley and Finn rev up their engines and depart from the plane. The ramp door swings back up.

Finn opaques his windows slightly so that we can see outside. Soon, we see the billboards displaying the events for the week. We see pictures of Tedford and Lightning McQueen on several of them. Finn sees that he needs to drive out to the racing track complex. We also see that we are just in time for the start of the race week.

I see that the complex and the race track is much larger than the one in Asheville. Here, there are several tracks for everyone to race against.

Finn and Holley make their way through the crowd.

“How many are here, Finn?”

“Probably about 100,000 will be here for the week, Holley. It culminates on the last day with the National Race.”

“Do you think we can get this done today?”

“We should be able to, Richard. I’m looking for Tedford now.”

We mill through the crowd. We see Lightning McQueen up above on a platform. He is posing with his patented smile as he turns around. Then we see Tedford. He is on another platform right next to him. We see the four body guard trucks around him. Tedford has a big smile on the front of the car. His eyes are bright on the windshield glass.

Someone shouts out from the crowd, “How do you do it, Tedford?”

“What do you mean?”

“How come you are not rusting away? You seem to be in the prime of your life!”

“Well, it comes from good construction stock background. If I get any salt water on me, I need to wash it off right away. Well, you’ll have to excuse me. I need to retire to my tent.”

The crowd groans, “Ahhh . . .”

“I’ll be back for the next hour. Even I need to rest my circuits once in awhile. I know you all do as well.”

~~~000~~~

“This is our chance, Richard.”

“I agree, Finn.”

Finn and Holley slowly make their way through the crowd. Tedford drives off the ramp down to the ground. The four trucks get around him. Everyone gets out of their way as they head to Tedford’s tent.

Lightning McQueen quickly recognizes Finn and Holley. He drives down the ramp onto the ground. He drives around quickly to get beside them. He talks quietly to Finn.

“Why are you here?”

“We’re here to see Tedford. Something has come up. I have a couple of questions to ask him.”

“You’ll need me to get past his guards.”

“Okay.”

Lightning McQueen leads them to Tedford’s tent. They stop when two of the trucks block their way.

“What’s your business, Lightning?”

“These two need to see Tedford. They are from London Secret Service.”

The truck looks at him, “Is that true?”

“It is. Something has come up. We need to ask him some questions.”

“Hmm . . . Okay, I’ll let you pass.”

“Thank you.”

The trucks move further apart to open the tent flap. Lightning, Finn and Holley drive into the tent. We see Tedford sipping on some water and drinking down some oil in a large mug. He stops when he sees Lightning approaching.

“Hello, Lightning. Who are these two guests with you?”

“They come all the way from London, Tedford. They have some questions to ask you.”

“All the way from London? Then fire away. I hope I can answer them.”

“What do you remember about your early days? Where did you come from?”

“I remember a family of humans that rebuilt me. As soon as their son gave me a smarter brain. I became very aware of my surroundings even though I couldn’t speak.”

The two guards and Lightning sound out astonished together, “What?!”

“That’s right, you yahoos. I remember a town that we visited quite often. I would be put on a trailer and towed from Charlottesville to Mt. Blanc. Once we get there, they would unload me and drive me around the town. They were a very good family to me. I do miss them though. I would like to see them again.”

“Charlottesville? Don’t you mean Carsville, old man?”

“You better be smarter, Mac. It’s Charlottesville. I hired you to protect me. I know I’m a unique car around here.”

“Yes, sir.”

Then I speak up out loud as a tear comes down from my eyes. “I miss you too, Tedford. If it wasn’t for you, I would not have been able to go to college. We were all sad when dad sold you.”

“I know that voice like the back of my fender. Where is he? Where are you, Richard?”

Finn opens his door. I slowly step out and stand before them. Lightning is stunned that he is seeing a human being standing right before him. The other two truck guards have the same look.

“Hello, Tedford. It has been too long.”

“It certainly has, Richard.”

“I have some interesting news to give you. Do you remember Brianna Wilson?”

“You talked about her all the time while you sat in my seat. Did she find you?”

“She found me, Tedford. We are finally married.”

Finn opens the other door. Brianna gets out and stands as well. Finn closes his doors. Brianna and I walk toward Tedford. We both hold our hands together. We have big smiles on our faces.

“Now you didn’t come all this way just to see me, did you?”

“No Tedford. Do you remember the Emissaries on a star ship?”

“I do, Richard. They showed me a large ship. For some reason I can’t bring it up.”

“That’s okay. I’ll bring it up and give the photo to these two here.” I motion my hand to Finn and Holley.

“That’s great, Richard. It will give me more memory to remember.”

I walk toward Tedford. A truck rolls forward to block my path. “What are you going to do?”

“I’m going to his rear trunk. That is where I put the computer. My family also put a small plaque there as well. It list the names of our family. You can look first if you want to. The names are Robert and Allison for mom and dad. Then there is Kenneth, Michael and Richard, the three sons. There is a picture in your memory Tedford. It shows us all together as a group photo.”

“You’re right, there is a family photo.” Tedford accesses his memory. He quickly brings it up on his windshield.

Everyone sees it.

“You’re right, Richard. You’re telling the truth.”

Tedford opens his trunk, they look in the back and see the gold plaque mounted there.

“Where did you install the computer, Richard?”

“It is under the back seat. Out of sight and out of mind as we say it. If a thief happens to see the black box, he would rip it out for his own use. There is a cable coiled up and tucked between the panels there. That is the access point. All you need is a wireless keyboard with a small display.”

“I think I can do that for you, Richard.”

“Thank you, Holley.” I walk around to reach for the coiled up cable. “Where should I hook it up?”

“Hmm . . . looking at that connector is no problem. You will find it on my dashboard.”

“Okay.” I extend the cable as Holley turns around to get closer to the trunk. I reach inside and see the reception hole in her dash board. I plug it in.

Holley displays a 3D keyboard in front of me.

I type in some passwords to access Tedford’s hard-drive.

“You created a three level password, Richard. That’s very good.”

“Thank you, Holley. It was the best solution I could think of at the time.” I type in some commands to find the photo file in question. I see the “Moore-Tedford” photo file and the “star-ship” photo file.

“Thank you, Richard. I’ll copy it, delete his copy and bring it to my memory.” Holley quickly does the commands. The photo disappears from Tedford’s memory.

“Whoa! That’s a relief, Richard. Thank you kindly.”

“You’re welcome, Tedford.” I unplug the cable from Holley’s dashboard. I coil it up and place it back between the panels in Tedford’s trunk. I close the trunk.

Finn comes over and looks at the photo. “Richard, have you seen this star ship before?”

I walk around to take a look at it. “Oh, my Creator. I do recognize that star ship. They are a bad sort, Finn. That is a scout ship for a much larger fleet. I’ll tell you later after we get under way. I don’t want anyone overhearing who they are.”

“I agree, Richard. We need to keep quiet as much as possible.”

Holley turns off the image.

“Apparently that news can wait, Richard.”

“It can, Tedford. This world has some time to get ready.”

“Well, I would love to take you and Brianna for another ride. Perhaps during the parade.”

“I don’t know, Finn. Our presence could cause a riot.”

“It would have to be done carefully.”

Then all of a sudden we hear a commotion outside the tent.

“Momma! I need to know how to drive better! Who better to teach than Lightning McQueen!”

“He’s a busy car, Jeffery. He doesn’t have time to help everyone.”

We see the look on Lightning McQueen’s face. “So, someone needs some driving lessons.”

“Take a look first, Lightning. You need to know how big the kid is.”

“That’s a good idea, Tedford.”

The trucks take a peak, through the tent flaps. They see the two trucks out front barring their way. They see it is a Camaro and a go-cart. They roll back quietly. “It’s a go-cart, Lightning.”

“A go-cart?! How can I teach him how to drive better? Do any of you have any ideas?”

I speak up, “I can do it.”

“You can teach him how to drive, Richard?”

“Tedford, do you remember a go-cart race that we went to at one time?”

“Whoo!! Hoo!! I remember that go-cart race. Your two brothers were racing around really fast. You tried to keep up with them. You kept spinning out through the corners. It wasn’t until your dad gave you some pointers on how to drive through the corners safely.”

Lightning looks at me, “You raced go-carts?”

“I did, Lightning. That was for about five years before I started turning my attention onto computer science in high school. I did eventually beat my brothers a few times. What does he look like?”

An image appears in front of us. We see it is a typical go-cart with a low seat, gas pedals, and steering wheel. The engine behind the seat looks typical for its size. The go-cart is at least five feet long from end to end. There are two small head lights for his eyes. He speaks through the front bumper.

“I see no problem in helping him. When is his race? Is there a time when he practices?”

“Yes, there is, Richard. We are all given a few practice laps to qualify for the starting position.”

“That’s good, Lightning. It is the same approach with our races.”

Then we hear out loud through the speakers.

“Ladies and Gentlemen! It is time for the parade. Meet at the main race track and get into position! The stands are filling up fast!”

“So, do you still want us to sit with you, Tedford?”

“I would be honored, Richard.”

“Besides, it will make you more famous.”

Everyone chuckles and giggles.

“Yes it would, you old Model T!”

“You’re calling me old, Lightning! I know you’re the fastest for your generation. I was the fastest in my generation. Let’s leave it at that, friend.”

Lightning McQueen smiles, “That sounds fine to me, friend. Come on, let’s make some history.”

“Mac Trucks, I’m counting on you to watch my rear.”

“Yes, Mr. Tedford. We’ll keep a sharp eye out for you and any sudden movements toward you.”

Brianna and I sit in the front seat of Tedford. We buckle up to secure us in safely. We hear our fairies giggling in our pockets, they peek their heads out once in awhile to see what is going on.

The Mac Trucks open the tent flaps some more. Tedford and Lightning McQueen exit first. They are followed by Finn and Holley. As soon as the rest of the cars see us, they get really quiet.

Tedford speaks up real loud, “What’s the matter? Haven’t you seen humans before? These two are special to me. They are my guests. No, they are not drunkards and bad drivers! I know they are good drivers. There with me during the parade. So, take your pictures if you want to. But don’t pester us with questions! You got that!”

“Yes . . . yes . . . Mr. Tedford!”

Then Brianna and I smile and wave our hands at the other cars as we roll past them. We slowly make our way to the tunnel under the race track. We enter it and come out in the in field portion of the race track. About three dozen cars line up behind Tedford and Lightning McQueen. Everyone is taking pictures of the spectacle. There are horns blaring, streamers are shot into the air. Once we make two laps around the track we exit the main track to fill in the infield. There are two inner tracks in the infield. One is for go-carts, the other is for midgets. I step out of the car and try to find the Camaro and the go-cart. Lightning McQueen follows us. Cars get out of the way as we approach the go-cart track. Then we hear the commotion again.

“I tell you mom, I’ve got to get in there. I wish Lightning was here. He would tell me how to drive the right way.”

“I’m sorry Jeffrey. Lightning is a very busy car. He can’t be everywhere at once.”

Lightning smiles and gives the “Ahem!”

They turn around and get a big surprise.

Mom looks astonished that Lightning is right there before them.

“Lightning! You’re here!”

“Hello Jeffrey. I hear you want to learn how to race the right way.”

“That’s right, Lightning. I know I can beat them out there. But I’ve got no one to teach me.”

“I know someone who can teach you, Jeffrey. He’s not a professional racer, but he knows the basics.”

“Who is he, Lightning?”

“It is this human being here. His name is Richard.”

“A human being is going to teach me? How do I know you won’t crash me?”

“Haven’t you seen races with multiple car crashes?”

“I have, sir.”

“What happens most of the time?”

“Sigh . . .it is someone who is not fast enough and can’t get out of the way who is faster.”

“That’s right, Jeffrey. Now there is only one way I can help you. I am going to coach you right through the turns by sitting in that seat of yours.”

“Mom!”

“How are you going to learn, Jeffrey? I know you like real fender exerience. I trust him to teach you the basics.”

“Okay, mom. I get the message. You can sit on my seat, sir.”

“Thank you, Jeffrey.” I slowly make my way and straddle my legs on both sides of him. I lower myself down carefully into his seat. I put my feet into his gas pedals. I take off my satchels and hand them to Brianna. “Brianna, I need to get my helmet. Hand me my clothes satchel.”

“Yes, Richard.”

Brianna hands my clothes satchel to me. I reach into it with my hand. I recite the spell for my helmet to appear in the satchel. It appears in a blink of an eye without anyone seeing what I did. I take out the helmet and hand the satchel back to Brianna. I put the helmet on my head. I push the buttons to secure it to my head.

“Now, you need to let me drive for a couple of laps. Once you see how I am doing it, you can try it.”

“Yes, sir. You’re not as heavy as I thought you were.”

“That’s good, Jeffrey. Take us out to the race track. Ignore the others and their laughter, okay?”

“I’ll try to ignore them.” Jeffrey takes us to the go-cart race track.

An official car comes up to us. “You’re just teaching him some basic driving lessons. Is that right? He must do the qualification laps himself.”

“I understand, sir. Hopefully he will get the hang of it within the ten laps.”

“That’s good. You may enter the race track, Jeffrey.”

“Thank you, sir.”

Jeffrey enters onto the race track. The other go-carts are laughing at the sight.

“Okay, Jeffrey. Now pay attention to what I’m doing.”

“Yes, sir.”

I step on the gas pedal and zoom forward. As I approach the curve, I slow down through the half-way point of the curve. I then accelerate out of the curve. “Did you see what I do, Jeffrey?”

“I think I did, sir. You slowed down before the half way point and then accelerated out from the half way point of the curve.”

“That’s right. You need to keep your tires gripping the asphalt. If you are too fast, you will lose the grip through the corners.”

“I get it now. But how do I control it when I do slide out of control?”

“You need to keep your front tires pointing the direction of the curve. Then your rear end will slide out behind you. I’ll show you.”

I accelerate to the corner again. This time I come in too fast as I try to slow down. As I make the turn, the rear end slides to the right, but I keep the tires pointing in the direction of the curve. When I come out of the curve, I accelerate again and straighten out again. I press on the gas pedal zooming down the back stretch.

“That is neat. That is how Lightning did it on the dirt tracks.”

“That’s right. As you get older, do some dirt track racing. You need to judge the curve for the right speed. It will take more practice for the different types of curves you will encounter.”

“That is so true, sir. There are hair pin turns, high bank turns and so on. I think I can do this now.”

“Here is something to think about, Jeffrey. When you go for the qualification, don’t go for the fastest speed to be first. Try to come in a lower position. It is all about tactics and psyching out your challengers.”

“Heh, heh, heh, That would be great to do. Thank you for the tip, sir. Let me do it on my own now.”

I lift my feet off the gas pedals and take my hands off the steering wheel. Jeffrey quickly races around the track and drives through the corners much better. He even tries coming in too fast to find that edge to get around his challengers and make a pass around them.

The other go-carts realize he is a much better driver than they thought. We see some of them talking quietly among themselves.

“Jeffrey, look out for them. I think they are going to try and knock you out some how.”

“I’ll be ready for them. Besides, they will be penalized if the officials sees it done on purpose. I will just have to shoot out between them before I get boxed in.”

After the ten laps of practice, Jeffrey drives over to the side. I crawl out of the seat and stand back up.”

“Thank you, sir. Thank you for the lessons.”

“You’re welcome, Jeffrey. Jeffrey, what is your last name and where are you from?”

“My full name is Jeffrey Gorton. I like to be called Jeff. I am from California.”

“You will do just fine, Jeffrey. I mean Jeff.”

Jeffrey quickly drives up to his mother. “Mom! Mom! Did you see that?”

“I saw it, Jeffrey. We’ll tell dad the good news on the phone.”

I walk toward to Lightning. “So, did I do all right, Lightning?”

Lightning smiles, “You did just fine, Richard. Do you think he will challenge my Piston Cups total?”

“How many have your earned, Lightning?”

“I have seven Piston Cups so far.”

“I think Jeff will get at least four Piston Cups. So, he will make his own mark and history. I don’t think he will come close to your accomplishments. Besides, you won a few international races as well.”

Lightning smiles again, “That’s true.”

I walk up to Tedford. “Well, it is time for me to go, Tedford. I need to get to Jacksonville.”

“Can’t you stay a night at least?”

“I will have to stay on the plane that brought me here. You know there are no human beds on this world.”

“Oooh . . I forgot about that. I know you can camp out in the woods if you want to. The problem there is finding a safe location in the woods.”

“Before I go, Tedford. Have you tried to find Mt. Blanc here?”

“I did find it, Richard. However, it is a much smaller town here than back where we are from. I did find the cabin, though. It is a bit run down. It does need some work.”

“Hmm . . . my dad told me that is how he found it when they went looking for the ideal mountain cabin.”

“It is bigger than yours, that is for sure. It is designed for cars to live in. I’ll look into it and see what it takes to get to make it liveable again.”

“Oh, there is one more thing, Tedford. We know there is car version of Brianna here. They used to be neighbors in South Car-o-lina.”

“Heh, heh, . . . that would be something to see. It would make it full circle here.”

“Yes, it would, Tedford. I am going to Jacksonville to meet myself down there. We should bring the other Brianna. She should be in Knoxville, Tennessee.”

“Do you think the same phone number would work there?”

“I don’t know, Tedford. But it is worth a try.”

Brianna gives her family phone number to Finn. He dials it up.

“Ring . . . ring . . . ring. . . . click . . . This is the Wilson Residence. Mrs. Wilson speaking.”

Brianna smiles that the voice sounds like her mother.

“Hello, my name is Finn. Do you have a daughter named Brianna?”

“We do, sir. What is this about?”

Brianna steps in closer. “Do you remember a next door neighbor in South Car-o-lina. The last name is the Moores?”

“How come you sound like my daughter? Who are you?”

“My name is Brianna as well. Did you catch the news about humans coming to the car race in Gasville?”

“I did. What? You mean that is you?”

“Yes it is, ma’am. For your benefit, we are going to save you some time in getting back together.”

“Yes, please tell us where they are at?”

“The Moore family is in Charlottesville, NC. I mean, Carsville, NC. Richard is in Jacksonville. He is working at Secure-Sys.”

“Thank you for telling me that. I will definitely relay the news to the rest of the family. That is greatly appreciated.”

“You’re welcome, mother. You sound like my own mother right now.”

“I understand. Perhaps we can compare notes at another time.”

“I don’t know when that will happen. But I look forward to it when we all get together.”

“That would be some family reunion.”

“Yes it would, Mrs. Wilson. I have to go now. We are going to Jacksonville right now. We’ll relay the same news to Richard down there.”

“I appreciate that very much. Thank you.”

Finn ends the connection. “That would be something to see. Come, we need to get going.”

“Now don’t be a stranger, Richard. The Emissaries told me what happened to your family, Richard. I hope you find the guy who killed them.”

“I know who did it, Tedford. Right now, I am just a thorn in his side.”

“That’s good, Richard. Well, take care until we meet again.”

Richard and Brianna walk up and rub our hands on his front hood.

“We hope to see you again, Tedford.”

We walk back and get back to Finn. He opens his doors, we get inside and sit down in his seats. Finn closes his doors. Holley and Finn then drive back to the Gasville Airport.

“So, what about that scout ship, Richard? Who are they?”

“They are the . . . . .”

The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 20
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman

The list of characters mentioned in this story belong to the various authors that created them. This is a fan-fiction story.

~~~000~~~

Two months ago on Earth, the doctors in the prison gather around a medical bed. They look on the monitors to confirm the time and day. They see all of the monitors are flat lined.

“At this moment in time, George Weisenthall is pronounced dead at 9 AM on May 2. May he rest in peace.”

A nurse gives her disapproval under her mask. Hmmmph . . . So, he gets away with a heart attack. He caused a lot of people to lose their jobs. We’ll pick up the pieces.

~~~000~~~

In Heaven there is judgement being passed onto a mortal soul. George Weisenthall is standing before the Creator.

“So, George. You tried to commit murder in your quest for power. That is unacceptable. Do you have anything to say in your defense?”

“All I can say is this. I was influenced by Sauron, Creator. He gave me ideas that I never dreamed about. It was as if he was changing my mind.”

“Hmm . . . that is a valid point, George. Sauron is definitely a problem. However, I have a servant on Earth that will keep him in check until the last battle. Okay, this is what I am going to do for you. I am giving you one more chance to do what is right.”

“Thank you, Creator. Where will I be going? Will I be going to Purgatory?”

“No, that is not necessary. You will be placed on a parallel Earth. If I get word that you actually took the life of another, then you have used up your chances.”

“Thank you, Creator. I will try very hard to live a good life.”

“I hope so too, George.” Then with a wave of light brushed over George, George disappears from the Creator’s presence.

~~~000~~~

George slowly wakes up. He looks around and sees that he is in a much larger office than he had in Charleston. In fact it looks almost the same, except that it is larger. He moves around and gets a surprise motion.

“Huh, what happened to my feet? I seem to be rolling forward somehow.” He takes a look at a mirror across the room. He doesn’t like what he sees. He sees a SUV in the mirror. The windshield eyes blink at the same time he does.

“Arrrghhhh! Noooo . . . . ! I am a car!!!”

~~~000~~~

We walk back and get back to Finn. He opens his doors, we get inside and sit down in his seats. Finn closes his doors. Holley and Finn then drive back to the Gasville Airport.

“So, what about that scout ship, Richard? Who are they?”

“They are the Skrull Empire. They are from the Andromeda Galaxy. However, they have established a presence where ever they go. I am sure they have never encountered a world such as yours. You are not humanoid like I am. I think you can present problems to them.”

“Hmm . . . Well, the first test is dealing with the scout ship and our response to it. If they get the message that we are not to be trifled with, they could leave us alone.”

“That’s true, Finn.”

Finn and Holley drive back to the Gasville Airport. Albert lowers the rear ramp. Holley and Finn drive up inside the plane. The ramp rises back up. Albert taxis down to the runway. Once he gets clearance from the tower, he revs his engines and takes off into the air. He heads south to Jacksonville.

Finn opens his door. We get out to stretch our legs. My fairies fly out of the coat pockets. They fly back to the bedroom to get a snack from the food bags. Brianna and I walk back as well. We get ourselves comfortable on the bed and to relax as much as possible. It takes about two hours to arrive at the Jacksonville Airport. Albert lands again and does the same tactic in getting ready to take off when we come back from Secure-Sys.

We get back into Finn and sit on his seats. The ramp is lowered down. Holley and Finn rev up their engines and depart from the plane. It takes about an hour to arrive at Secure-Sys. Once Finn and Holley show their credentials to the guard, they are allowed onto the property. Finn and Holley drive up to the main entrance and enter inside. They are greeted by the receptionist there.

“Welcome to Secure-Sys. Please sign in and state your name.”

“My name is Finn McMissile.” Finn signs the registry book with a laser pen extended out from his body.

“My name is Holley Shiftwell.” Holley signs the registry book with a laser pen as well.

“We are from London Secret Service. There is an employee here that we would like to speak to. His name is Richard Moore.”

“That’s fine, Finn. But, first I need to contact Mr. Bryson.” The receptionist contacts Mr. Bryson’s office.

“Mr. Bryson, I have two agents here from the London Secret Service. They wish to see Richard Moore.”

“I’ll be right down.”

After five minutes, Mr. Bryson appears in the lobby. He checks the registry to see their names. He then turns to face them.

“So, what is this about Finn and Holley?”

“We received a special guest in London. He and his wife are here visiting our world. Did you see the news about the humans riding Tedford in North Car-o-lina?”

“I just caught the news during the lunch hour break. Are you telling me they are here?”

“In fact they are with me right now.” Finn opens his doors. Brianna and I step out and stand before them.

“Amazing, you look almost like my Richard here in some ways.”

“I know, Mr. Bryson. You look like my Mr. Bryson as well. I need to see myself here. I have come to give you my latest design to the 3D Server.”

“What? Are you saying you are the originator of the 3D Server? If that is true, why is our Richard is just as smart as you?”

“It is possible we have two distinct personalities, but the experiences are the same. It is also possible he is getting his inspiration from me. Your world is closely tied to my own world. Here is a good example. There is a legendary car racer here with the name of Darryl Cartrip. On my world, his name is Darryl Waltrip.”

“I see. That seems to make sense. This morning, my Richard said he was about to come up with the next generation for the 3D Server. But it is not in his mind. When did you arrive here?”

“I arrived on your world this morning.”

“Aha! That explains it.”

“Hmm . . . I wonder. This is just a test, Mr. Bryson. Let’s see if my own ID card gets accepted here.”

“Yes, let’s try it, Richard.”

I take out my wallet from my pants pocket. I open it and take out my Secure-Sys ID card. I put it on the counter. The receptionist scans the ID. Then a green light appears on the panel nearby.

“It’s a good ID, Mr. Bryson. It is one of our older trial versions, but it is still valid.”

Everyone smiles widely.

“Well, that confirms it. Let’s go see my Richard here.”

I take my Secure-Sys ID card and put it back into the wallet and then put the wallet back into my pocket.

We follow Mr. Bryson to a large elevator lift. There is enough room for all of us. We go up to the next floor and get out. We follow Mr. Bryson down several hallways and turns. Some of the employees are astonished they are seeing humans for the first time. But, then they just realized we are the same ones that made the news today.

Mr. Bryson stops before a door. It slides open, we see a much larger office that can hold all of us. They see Richard going over some programs. What I see on the screen is a very similar program that I would have written. But, I do see some new lines that show a much greater improvement than what I wrote. I keep what I see in the back of my mind.

“Richard, we have some guests here. They would like to talk to you.”

“Yes, Mr. Bryson.” Richard turns off the monitor. He turns around to see us. All of a sudden he looks startled. “You! . . . .”

We all see him about to faint. He gets ready to roll to his side. I immediately jump forward to prevent him from tipping over. As soon as we make contact, an electrical charge takes place between us. It is not strong enough to take me down.

Richard settles back down onto his wheels. “What just happened? Now our minds connected again. I can now see what the next generation server is. What’s going on, Mr. Bryson?”

“It is because this Richard here, is the originator of the 3D Server.”

“Have you been getting dreams about me and my life story? My name is Richard as well.”

“Why yes, Richard. I wrote the stories down before I forget them. I just change the perspective to our world here. However, I do not have the Shaolin sashes earned here. In fact my entire family is still alive at this moment.”

“That’s all right, Richard. We just made contact with the Wilsons. They are located in Knoxville, Tennessee. We just gave them an update of where you and your family is located.”

“What? That means I will get to see my Brianna again. Thank you very much. I really appreciate that. You must be the Brianna from his world.”

Brianna smiles, “Yes I am, Richard.”

“Now, Richard. Let’s create the next generation 3D Server.”

“I’m with you on that, Richard.”

“Your world will be visited by an alien scout ship. It will be here in about five to ten years.”

“Who are they?”

“It is the Skrulls, Mr. Bryson. Your world here is in the Cartoon Superhero Universe. I am from the Earth with real people. Your story is told on our world.”

“Hmm . . . then you two better get busy.”

The both of us respond together, “Yes, Mr. Bryson.”

“Fairies, I think you better go with Brianna. You can sit outside near the garden area with the pond, Brianna.”

“Yes, father, mother, Omega!” My fairies fly out of my coat pockets. They land on her head, shoulders and sit in the empty pockets on her coat.

Everyone giggles and chuckles. Brianna, along with everyone else, leaves the office.

“So, it is true, there are fairies on other worlds. That’s amazing, Brianna.”

“Yes, it is, Mr. Bryson.”

Brianna gets led out to the outside area of the complex. Quickly, they see many flowered gardens all around. They immediately take off to get a drink of nectar from the flowers. Holley leads Brianna to a cool shaded tree. Brianna sits down on the ground and leans against the tree. She looks at the water to feel her emotions flowing along with the water.

~~~000~~~

Two additional cars come rolling up to the front gate. A sleek red Lamborghini and a black Camaro. In front of the black Camaro, an orange light sweeps back and forth. Once their credentials are confirmed, they are allowed onto the property.

~~~000~~~

“Okay, Richard. Bring up the 3D design cube. Display the main CPU core with the six processors.”

“Okay, Richard.” Richard the car brings up the 3D design cube and the main CPU core with the six processors. “How many cubes are we going to use?”

“We are only going to googleplex the first cube to the first level. That should be enough. That will be . . . .”

“7,776 cubes. That is a lot of cubes, Richard. Okay, let’s do the first ten. I would think a combination of serial and parallel cubes would do nicely. We can set aside a group of parallel cubes to act as the Main CPU. The serial cubes within the main cube can handle different functions with redundancy.”

“That’s my thinking as well. I think my grandson will take it to the next googleplex level.”

Once we get the common ground and the power supply points connected. It is easy to see how the rest of the cubes get linked up. We create nine more rows of ten cubes each. Then we parallel connected them together. We do a trial test with the first one hundred cubes. All of a sudden we get a nice surprise. The processor speed goes up exponentially. It reaches 95% in less than one second. We estimate the speed to be about 15 Peta-Hertz. (A peta is ten to the fifteenth power).

“That’s incredible. It is holding and it is stable.”

“Yes, it is, Richard. Let’s do the rest of them. Save that setup and copy it.”

“Yes, Richard.” Richard the car saves the first one hundred cubes. He then copies it again.

We keep at it until all of the cubes are used up. We have a big smile on our faces. The speed sky rockets to 1 Terra-Hertz and it is stable. We do see the temperature out put is very high. It is about 110 Fahrenheit. We then proceed to come up with a new configuration for cooling system. We also come up with a new power supply board, RAM and ROM chipset. All of the circuits are fiber optic.

“That heat generation can be used as an energy source, Richard.”

“Yes, it can. Let’s come up with a heat recovery cycle to power the cooling system.”

“That sounds good. We are so loving this, Richard.”

“I know. For once, I get someone who can understand my own geek-speak.”

We chuckle together on my joke.

We design a heat recovery system. When we apply it to the setup. We see one percent increase in speed to 1.1 Peta-hertz.

“Well, that should do it. Thank you very much, Richard. Before you go. Let me make a copy of that and give it to you.”

“Thank you, Richard.”

Richard the car, makes a copy of the new processor and puts it onto a laser DVD disk. The disk gets ejected from the panel. I reach for it and take it from the panel. Richard the car gets a plastic case. I put it into the case and put it into my clothes satchel.

Richard the car saves the work we did and files it away. “I’ll send it to our manufacturing facility in Charleston. Randy will be loving this.”

“Heh, heh, heh, so will my Randy as well.”

Richard the car opens the sliding door. I follow him to the elevators to reach the first floor.

~~~000~~~

The red Lamborghini and the black Camaro wait until Mr. Bryson shows up in the lobby.

Mr. Bryson shows up and immediately recognizes his two guests. “Hello Sideswipe and Kitt. What can I do for you?”

“I just received a communique from our London counterparts. They said there is a potential threat to our world that is coming. I am here to meet the human Richard and Finn.”

“My Richard and the human Richard are designing the next generation 3D Server, Kitt. Finn and Holley are outside by the gardens. Richard’s wife, Brianna is out there taking her rest.”

“We’ll need a high level meeting right now. It can’t wait. We need to know what or who the threat is.”

“I agree, Sideswipe.”

Then Richard the car and I walk into the lobby. Immediately I recognize the black Camaro.

“You’re Kitt. I didn’t know you were here. Your stories are told on my world.”

“I was the actor who provided Kitt’s voice on the TV show. The Creator brought me here after I died. He put me in this real Knight 2000 Camaro. I can tell you that I have the special bonding to the armor restored to the car’s armor. However, the Creator put one more element into the sequence so it can’t broken down again. I also have the speed equipment to be one of the fastest cars on this world.”

“My name is Sideswipe. I am an Autobot. Once we found this world, Optimus Prime decided to put ten of us on this world to monitor it. It is easy for us to hide in plain sight here.”

“Why are you here, Richard?”

“I just designed the next generation 3D Server with Richard the car here.”

“How many processors are there?”

“There are 7,776 cubes. It is the first googleplex level. We were able to reach speeds up to one point one peta-hertz. That is on the order of ten to the fifteenth power.”

Mr. Bryson smiles. Richard will get nice bonus for this effort. I’m sure the other Richard will get a nice bonus as well.

“That’s incredible. How fast is your system, Sideswipe?”

“It is on the order of ten to the twenty-first power. You’re catching up real fast. I am impressed, Richard.”

Both of us say it at the same time. “Thank you.”

“We have a conference room where we can meet more privately. Take them there, Richard. I’ll get Finn and Holley.”

Mr. Bryson immediately leaves the front door. He drives around the building to find Finn and Holley. He sees them under a tree staying cool near the pond.

“Finn and Holley, you need to go inside. Sideswipe and Kitt just showed up. They want a high level meeting right now. I’m sorry, Brianna.”

“That’s okay. I am perfectly safe here. We’ll keep each other company.”

“Thank you, Brianna.”

Finn and Holley leave the garden area and follow Mr. Bryson. The fairies immediately fly off into the woods to see if they can find any nuts and fruit for Brianna to eat. They come back in about ten minutes carrying several fruits, nuts and seeds. They have a nice lunch together sitting around and enjoying the cool air under the tree.

Kitt, Sideswipe and I follow Richard the car down the hallway. He opens a sliding door. We all roll and walk inside. I see it is a very high ceiling. In the next moment, Mr. Bryson, Finn and Holley show up in the room. The door slides to close off the room.

Sideswipe transforms himself into an Autobot.

“So, who is this threat, Richard?”

Holley produces the photo in 3D in front of her.

“I could be wrong, but I doubt it. That saucer shape craft belongs to the Skrulls. It is a scout ship.”

“The Skrulls? You could be right, Richard. When are they expected here?”

“The Emissaries said they will be here in about five to ten years. I think they are still looking for worlds to conquer, Sideswipe.”

“You’re right on that point, Richard. Let’s see the next generation of your 3D Server.”

Richard the car goes to a console. He accesses his office to find the file. He finds it and displays it on a large 3D video screen above the table.

“That is very good. I really like it. It should confound anyone who tries to come here. What about defenses?”

“When I was in London, I gave Jaguar One and his staff a lot of ideas about getting rockets into space.”

Kitt speaks up, “That’s right, Richard. We’ll be in collaboration mode in designing the defense platforms, satellites, space telescopes and the like. We’ll try to get most of the countries involved in this endeavor. Once we get our earthbound telescopes locate the scout ship, everyone will know we are not alone in the universe.”

“Since this world is machine based, they should have a tough decision to invade this world or not. If we can get some very smart defense platforms up there with your new 3D Server, no one should be able to take this world by surprise.”

“Sideswipe, I have a piece of information for you. The Emissaries told me of a potential problem in the future when we have our Ultimate Last Battle on my world.”

“What is it, Richard?”

“They told me the wreckage of the Omega Unicron is being reassembled by a group of demon angels.”

“That is not good news at all, Richard. What is our hope to defeat it again?”

“They told me when the Omega Unicron is brought to our world, Optimus and a group of your Autobots will be there to help us. They said I will have to update my armor to house the 3D Server. On my world, I am the Omega Unicorn Dragon. I can transport Optimus into his data core. There, he will find the original prime directives files to restore his original self.”

“Well that is good news there, Richard. So, you call yourself the Omega Unicorn Dragron. What does that entail?”

I look at Richard the car, “Why don’t you bring up the stories you have written so far. Let them read it.”

Richard the car smiles, “That’s a good idea, Richard. Now remember this my friends. These are stories that I dreamed about from that Richard.” Richard the car looks at me. “I change the context to fit our world here. What that means is this. When you read mechanized unicorns, it refers to real life unicorn on his world. It is the same for the dragons as well. The cars you encounter in my stories are real people in his universe.”

Richard displays the books one at a time. Everyone quickly speed reads the pages up to Chapter 19 of Book 4. They get done reading it in ten minutes.

“Wow, I see what you mean, Richard. So, there are twelve universes. I’ll talk to Optimus about this. How are we going to get to your world and universe, Richard?”

“There is a blue stone monument on the British Isles. It is called Stonehenge. Is there something similar here, Richard?” I look at Richard the car.

“Yes there is, Richard.” He quickly scans the internet. He finds the pictures of Stonehenge. However, the stone blocks are carved to look like cars. “What is special about this blue stone is its special reaction to magic. We do have magic here according to our use of it. It is used to create more cars or vehicles likes boats and planes. When a child is born, the child’s spirit enters the vehicle and it becomes alive according to our world. It grows up in stages according to the parent’s wishes. No one has applied magic to the blues stones yet. When I post my chapters on a website here, I average about 100 kudos a week. However, the numbers are slowly growing. I had very few in the beginning.”

Then I speak up, “When magic gets applied to the blue stones, you should get transported to my world in my universe.”

“Is there a special stone that has magic, Richard?”

“There is, Sideswipe. The stone is the Ethereal Space ore. It is usually found in the magnetic rocks. A sign that you have it is in the Aurora Borealis lights in the northern and southern poles.”

“Aha! So that explains it. So, all worlds have the capability of magic, but the Creator removed it to keep it from being abused for the wrong reasons.”

“That’s right, Finn.”

“How big will be your new 3D Server, Richard?”

“Will be miniaturizing the original CPU core to be even smaller. It should look like this when it is built. We are sending the specs to our Charleston office to build it.” Richard the car brings up a prototype visual of the new 3D Server. It is about 4 times as big as the first version. “It will have some new features inside the box. It will generate enough heat inside go up to 110 Fahrenheit. There is a heat recovery system and a new cooler system to make it effeciently as possible.

Richard the car takes the layers of the new box to show the other components inside the box.

“That is very good. I really like it. It is approaching the model of an electronic neural brain.”

“Thank you, Sideswipe.”

“Well, we must be going now. It is a pleasure to meet you, Richard, the Omega Unicorn Dragon. You will be a most formidable ally in the future. I’ll tell Optimus about you.”

“Are you going to stay here longer, Richard?”

“I was hoping to see Tedford one more time before we go. There is a race week in Gasville, NC.”

“We can take you back there, Richard.”

“Thank you, Finn.”

Sideswipe transforms back into a red Lambourghini. Then we all leave the conference room. We walk outside. I look for Brianna and the fairies by the pond. I see them talking and having a nice lunch with fruits, seeds and nuts.

Brianna sees us approaching her. “So, how did it go, Richard?”

“It went fine, Brianna. I was thinking, how about we go see Tedford one more time before we leave?”

“That sounds wonderful, Richard. We refilled the food bags with some fresh nuts, seeds and small fruits. I made sure we save some for us as well. I know you are getting hungry by now.”

“I am, Brianna. Oh Richard, before I forget. The Wilsons are in Knoxivlle, Tennessee. We told Mrs. Wilson where your family is in Charlottesville, NC. I mean Carsville, NC.”

“Here is the phone number and address . . . .”

“Thank you, ma’am. That is greatly appreciated. It will be good to see them again.”

My fairies fly into our coat pockets. I help Brianna to stand up. We walk over to Finn. He opens his doors to allow us to sit on his seats.

Finn, Holley, Kitt and Sideswipe leave the compound of Secure-Sys. Kitt and Sideswipe head back to Virginia to tell them the latest news to the American government there.

Finn and Holley drive back to the Jacksonville Airport and board Albert the plane. Albert takes off and flies back to Gasville, NC. I have a nice lunch with Brianna in the bedroom. We enjoy the peacefulness during the flight back. Once we get on the ground in Gasville. Finn and Holley drive back out to the race track to find Tedford.

As we enter the race complex, they encounter a very disturb crowd. They look for Tedford, but they can’t find him. They search for Lightning McQueen. They find him by Tedford’s tent. There are only two Mac Trucks there.

“Lightning, what is going on?”

“Didn’t you hear the news?”

“We haven’t heard a thing in Jacksonville.”

“There must be news blackout. Tedford has been carjacked.”

“What? By whom? How?”

“While we were are going to another nearby event, a huge semi trailer with several cars blocked the road. We got separated from them. The other two Mac Trucks are following them right now at a distance.”

“Where are they heading to?”

“The best we can figure out is they are heading to Charleston, SC.”

“What did the other cars say when Tedford was abducted, Mac?”

“They said they will be taking him to George W.”

I exclaim out loud, “What? I know a George Weisenthall back on my Earth. I know where his office building is located. If it’s the same one.”

“What did George do on your world, Richard?”

“George tried to buy up all of the fishing fleet businesses and be the sole provider of fish to the Eastern Seaboard. He tried to kill me, Brianna, some friends and a family in the process. But he was eventually stopped and the people got saved.”

“I’ll contact Kitt. Let’s see if he knows anything about it.” Finn contacts Kitt on a special band frequency. “Kitt, this is Finn. Did you hear of carjack of Tedford lately?”

“I just learned about it, Finn. We are heading to Charleston right now. I’ll meet you there with your special guests.”

“That’s understood, Kitt. I’ll meet you there at the airport in Charleston.” Finn disconnects and talks to Lightning and the Mac Trucks. “Okay, I’ll be heading to Charleston right now. Hopefully we’ll be bringing good news.”

“I hope so, Tedford can be a stubborn car.”

“From what I heard here the last time, he is not to be trifled with.”

“Heh, heh, that’s right Finn. Take care until we see each other again.”

“You do the same, Lightning.”

Finn and Holley quickly drive back to the airport and board Albert the plane. Albert quickly takes off and flies toward Charleston, SC. He gets there in about a half hour. They see Kitt waiting nearby on the side runway. Holley and Finn disembark from Albert. Brianna and I are sitting inside Finn.

“I know where George’s office is. I am going to head there first, using magic and my armor. I’ll scout ahead to find out what is going on.”

“Okay, Richard.”

“Okay, fairies, you’ll have to stay here with Brianna.”

“We understand, father, mother, Omega.”

My fairies fly out of my coat pockets. They land on Brianna and fly into her coat pockets.

“Armor on. Transport invisible!” My armor appears on me in a blink of an eye. I disappear in a blink of an eye. I quickly look for George’s office building. I soon find it. It is much larger than the one I knew. But it is the same shape and design for it. I pass through the floors looking George and Tedford. I quickly find them on the top floor suite. I overhear their conversation to know what is going on.

~~~000~~~

George looks at Tedford closely. “You are a very unique car, Tedford.”

“Why did you carjack me?”

“Once I saw you in the news and see a Model T Ford that appears brand new. I knew I found a way to live longer.”

“What do you mean?” Tedford starts to look a little shaken now.

“I am going to put myself into your engine. I will be kicking you out and put you into this rust bucket I am in.”

“You can’t be serious?”

“I am serious, Tedford. I will live for another 300 years while you live for another 50 years. Hah, hah, hah, . . .!”

~~~000~~~

That’s enough Croin. He hasn’t learned his lessons.

No he hasn’t, Richard. I’m sure he was given another chance to live right.

Yeah, something happened to him back on Earth.

Then we hear the Creator’s voice in my head. His body died while he was in prison, Richard. I brought him here to give him one more chance. Scare him with your power, my servant. That should wake him up.

Yes, Creator. I draw my sword out and point it at George with my right hand. I aim my left gauntlet at him. End transport spell and appear in the room.

~~~000~~~

All of a sudden I appear in the room. George looks real scared when he sees me again.

“You! How can you be here? You’re the Omega Unicorn! Why?”

“First of all, I am here to rescue Tedford. He’s family.”

Tedford quickly smiles when he recognizes my voice and my reference to family.

“What? You are a human being! Since when are cars family members?”

Tedford speaks up, “Boy, are you dumb, George. Cars have always been family members for a hundred years. Once a human family has found the favorite car, they get taken care of really special. And I know I’m special. I will always have family. It is very important for identity and self worth.”

Then I speak up, “But, since you are trying to do this heinous act, George. I am going to give you a lesson the hard way.”

“Y . . . . you’re not going to freeze me and set me on fire, are you?”

“Nah . . . not this time, George. I am going to give a car’s worst night mare!”

“Wh . . . What is . . . is . . .that?”

“Love bugs!”

“No! Not love bugs! I hated love bugs in Florida when I visited there! No!”

I bring up my left hand. A cloud of love bugs appear outside the building. I use my left hand to force some air to open the window. I quickly thrust my right arm and point my sword at George. “Now!”

The swarm of love bugs enter the room. George’s eyes get really small. He looks shell shocked. NOOOOooooo . . . . .!” He closes his eyes quickly.

The swarm of love bugs quickly fly in to splat on George the car and under it. Once he is covered, the love bugs who are alive quickly leave the office.

“Bleech! Ptui! Yuck! I hate love bugs! Its in my mouth! Yuck!”

Thank you for coming, love bugs.

You’re welcome, Omega. We are glad to be of service. The love bugs return to the outside and disperse into the air.

That was great, Richard. I love it.

I knew you would, Croin.

The stench from the dead love bugs permeate the office. “Come on, Tedford. It is time to leave. Let’s hope he has learned his lessons this time.”

“I hope so, my family friend.”

We leave the office. George still looks shell shocked and stinks really bad. We hear him grumbling to himself. “I’m sorry, Creator. I’ll be good now. Ewwww . . . I hate love bugs! I need a wash now! I can’t see out my windshield! I need a new paint job! I need a new office! Bleech! Ptui! Ptui!”

Once we leave the office, I put the sword in the scabbard. I sit in Tedford’s seat as he drives out of the building. I recite the spell to put my clothes on the outside of my armor to hide it. I take off my helmet. Once we exit the building we are greeted by Finn, Kitt, Sideswipe and the two Mack Trucks.

“So, what happened up there?”

“What was he up to?”

Tedford speaks up, “He wanted to put himself into my body so he can live for another 300 years and put me into his body to live for 50 years.”

“Oooh . . . That is hard to swallow. What did you do, Richard?”

“I opened the window and brought in a swarm of love bugs to give him his worse night mare. Needless to say, he and his room is stinking very badly now.” I give them a wide smile.

They all laugh out loud. “Hah, hah, hah, that is great! The car’s worse night mare! The scourge of the universe! I love it! It will take him a long time to get cleaned up, get a new paint job and a new office! Did you get them under his chassis?”

“I sure did, Kitt. The stench will linger for a very long time. No deodorant or extreme car wash will get him totally clean. We heard him grumbling that he will be good now.”

“We’ll hold him to it. That is for sure. We’ll keep an eye on him. Thank you for coming, Richard.”

“You’re welcome, Kitt.”

Then all of a sudden everyone outside of our group appears to be stop motion and still. Two Emissaries appear in our midst in a blink of an eye.

“We are here to take Richard and Brianna to their next destination. They have a lot more worlds to see and warn.”

“I’ll miss you, Richard.”

“I’ll miss you too, Tedford.”

“Don’t worry Tedford. In 300 years, you will see Richard and his family again. That will be after the Ultimate Last Battle. Stay safe on this world.”

“Thank you, Emissaries. I greatly appreciate hearing that good news.”

“Sideswipe, you have a lot to do now in helping this world. Come up with a good plan to scare off the Skrull scout ship. They are expecting to see humanoid races, not sentient machines.”

“I understand the ploy, Emissaries. I’ll let Optimus know about the Omega Unicron.”

“Yes, the demon angels are rebuilding it to make him more lethal than ever before. King Azazel will be bringing a billion star ships to destroy Richard’s Earth. But that is a ploy as well. Once they realize they are being duped, King Azazel will unleash his double trap of doing a mass possession with his demon angels.”

“Hmm . . . that is not good, Emissaries. Is Richard’s new 3D Server strong enough to stop their mental attacks?”

“The first googleplex order is fine for the star ships. It must go to the next googleplex level to get on that level. That will be created by one of Richard’s own grandsons. It will be used to solve a special problem in the robot verse.”

“That’s good. We can wait for it until then.”

“Well, we must go now.”

Brianna gets out of Finn the car. She walks over to me and holds my hand. My fairies quickly fly over to sit in my coat pockets, while Lavan and Bianca stay with Brianna.

A circle of light appears around us. We disappear in a blink of an eye. We appear on the Emissaries star ship to hear where we are going next.

~~~000~~~

“Well, that was an interesting visit. Come on friends. It is time to get busy.”

Then two Mack Trucks drive up and stops before them.

“Tedford, thank the Creator you’re okay. What happened?”

“I’ll tell you all about it as you haul me back to Gasville. There is still more racing this week.”

“Yes, it is, Tedford.”

Tedford drives around. The ramp gets lowered from one of the trailers. Tedford drives up and secures himself inside. He turns on the lights to his portable office inside the trailer.

Everyone drives off to their destination and gets ready for the Skrull scout ship.

The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 21
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman

The list of characters mentioned in this story belong to the various authors that created them. This is a fan-fiction story.

~~~000~~~

We gather around the monitors on the Emissaries star ship. We see the next world we’ll be visiting. I see the world heavily damaged by a large meteor. There is a gaping hole in its side.

“We are in the Andromeda Galaxy. This is Acmetropolis. The Loonatics are located here. They have been using the worm hole technology on Planet Blanc to bring peace to as many worlds as they can. They now call themselves the Guardians of the Universe.”

Another Emissary speaks up, “By now, Tech E. Coyote is realizing there is one portal they have yet to go through. He is trying to find out where it leads to. It needs a bluestone pillar.”

Brianna, my fairies and I smile together. “So, all they need is a bluestone pillar to get to my world directly.”

“That’s right, Richard. However, something very unique will happen with the worm hole device. All of the worm holes will light up and feed the good characters they have encountered and bring them to your world.”

“Whoa! I hope they don’t show up in one spot on Earth.”

“This will happen when King Azazel takes all of the villains here and brings them to your world.”

“They will appear in several locations on the North American continent. As you might surmise, it is going to be very crowded there. It is now 2774 for them right now. When the device gets used, the temporal time lapse will automatically get adjusted. They will appear on your world in time for the Ultimate Last Battle.”

“Hmm . . . where is the bluestone pillar?”

“It is located in the floor before the throne on Planet Blanc.”

“They will want proof that I’m speaking the truth and I am not a threat to them.”

“You will first encounter Tech at the Tower. You will have about thirty minutes to prove who you are. Then the rest of the group will show up. Duck will do his usual jump the gun accusations when you are standing next to Tech. Be prepared for a confrontation with them.”

“Is there a nearby water source inside the tower?”

“It’s inside the pipes. You should be able to determine which one is which. Or you can use the moisture from the air.”

“When you get to the front door, try knocking on it for the first time.” They smile at us.

We smile back, “I get the joke. Be nice and courteous for a first time impression.”

“That’s right. Are you ready?”

Brianna and I look at each other and nod our heads up and down. “We are, Emissaries.”

An Emissary pushes a button on the console. We disappear in a blink of an eye.

~~~000~~~

Brianna, my fairies and I appear in a nearby alley. We walk out to mingle with the crowd. We see it is a mixture of humans and animals. The animals are walking upon two feet. We see the Tower straight ahead. We make our way down the streets and crossing at the intersections. Eventually, we walk up the steps and stop at the door. I knock on the door with my hand. “Knock! Knock! Knock!”

~~~000~~~

Tech E. Coyote is looking at the screen. He is seeing the readouts again. “There is no denying it. There will be one portal we won’t be able to go through. I wonder where it will take us? I wish the answer would be right at our front door. For once I would like an easy problem to solve.”

“Beep! Beep! Beep!” A voice sounds out from the speakers. “You have some visitors, Tech.”

He looks at the screen. He sees our images. Tech smiles, “I wonder who those two are? I have never seen them before.” Tech checks the database to make sure. He sees they are not in the database. “Well, let’s find out who they are.”

Tech walks toward the elevator and gets inside. The elevator quickly goes down to the first floor. The doors open and he walks across the lobby area to the front doors. He pushes a button. The doors slide open.

“Greetings. According to my database, you don’t exist.”

“I am not surprised, Tech. I do know your name and your other friends. Their names are Ace, Lexi, Duck, Rev and Slam.”

Tech smiles, “Now, how did you hear about us?”

“Your story is told on my world. As a group, you are called the Loonatics. Now you are called the Guardians of the Universe.”

“Which universe are we in?”

“Well, for starters, you are in the Andromeda Galaxy. I am from the Milky Way Galaxy, your nearby twin galaxy. But you are in one of the parallel universes called the Cartoon-Super Powers universe.”

Tech smiles again, “This is getting better and better. Come inside. We’ll discuss it some more in the lobby here.”

We walk inside. The front doors close.

“I will now tell you some more about us. My name is Richard Moore. This is my wife, Brianna. In our coat pockets are my fairies.”

The fairies poke their heads up and say one voice with big smiles on their faces. “Hello, Tech!”

Tech smiles, “So, fairies do exist in the universe. I am not surprised by that. Please go on.”

“There are actually twelve universes in the Creation from the Creator. Have you heard of the Emissaries from the Creator? They could be called angels in some universes.”

“I have dreamed about them while I slept. They watch over us, to make sure everything is going okay.”

“That’s right, Tech. As for myself, I am a special person on my world. I have been chosen to be the Omega Unicorn Dragon. It is a title more than anything else. However, there are some unique aspects about myself. While I started out as a normal human being, I should live to one hundred years old. But my life, and my wife’s life have been changed to let us live longer. I am currently learning the Shaolin Black sashes that lead to the title of Shaolin Dragon Master. I learned two of the elements so far. I can bend air.” I raise up my hand and give it a quick spin. A mini-tornado appears. I then dissipate it into the air. “I can also bend water. There should be some moisture in the air. I feel some air conditioning here.” I swirl my hands as if making a ball. I draw in the moisture from the air to create a small water ball. I show it to Tech hovering in the air above my right palm. Then I dissipate the water ball into the air.

“That’s amazing. What are the other elements?”

“The other three elements are earth, fire and spirit. I am also an animal fighter. I learn their moves in offense and defense and apply it to my skill.”

“Then why are you here?”

“I know it is 2774 right now on your world. It is about 2100 on my world. About eight hundred years on my world, there will be a battle that is called the Ultimate Last Battle. There is an enemy out there that you haven’t met yet. His name is King Azazel or Lucifer. He was the one who defected from the Creator’s group of Emissaries. He will be coming to my world to try and destroy it. He will be bringing one billion star ships of the most ruthless enemies known throughout the multi-verses.”

“What is our hope?”

“We have the High King on our world. I will be one of his generals. All of the good forces will come to our world to protect it. However, there is a problem. It is just a ruse so King Azazel can unleash his double trap. He is going to send in legions of demon angels to possess us. I haven’t been told everything yet. But, I’m guessing that the High King will have a surprise of his own when he tries that.”

“So, how are we going to get to your world?”

I smile at him, “Through the last unused portal on Mount Blanc.”

Tech smiles again, “Aha! That explains it. But, I would surmise a special key is needed. Where is it?”

“You need a bluestone pillar from my world. It was put there by the Emissaries a long time ago. Right now it is in the floor before the throne on Planet Blanc.”

Tech smiles again, “So, it is right under our noses all this time. Computer, is he telling the truth?”

A voice is heard through the speakers, “Richard is telling the truth, Tech. I detected no deception in his voice.”

“Well then, I would assume you have other talents than being a fighter.”

I smile back, “I do Tech. I am a security computer programmer. Did you have any breaches in your systems lately? I could go over it and recommend any upgrades if you need them.”

“I would like that very much, Richard. Please follow me. Computer, allow Richard, Brianna and his fairies admittance into the tower, per my authorization.”

“Richard, Brianna and his fairies are admitted into the tower, Tech.”

We follow Tech to an elevator shaft. The doors open and we walk inside.

“To the Command Level, Computer.”

The elevator quickly goes up the shaft. It stops at the Command Level. The doors open. We walk across the floor. I see several large computers. I also see a portal platform nearby. We walk up to the main console.

“Okay, Tech, give me a walk through. Let’s see how it is structured first.”

“Yes, Richard.” Tech pushes some symbols on the panel. A screen quickly changes to code scrolling upward.

“Hmm . . . have you accounted for all of the data portals? How many do you have?”

“We have more than a million data portals. It is possible we have some unaccounted for.”

“During my time, I encountered a four-gate system on a star ship. It uses a revolving five-password system. You have to know the previous sequences to know what the next password sequence will be. I created a very good algorithm for it. I also created a 3D-Server. It utilizes a 3D design cube in the space in front of you. The first design is six processors to form a six sided cube. I accounted for all of the ports. No one has been able to hack it yet. I just created the next generation 3D-Server. It has 7,776 cubes.”

“That’s genius! That’s on the order of an electronic neural brain.”

“Yes, it is, Tech. I googleplexed the first cube to get the first level. A generation or two later, it will be googleplexed again.”

“That would put it on the order of ten to the twenty-eighth power.”

“Yes it would be, Tech. The first googleplex level will prevent any ship from hacking your system. I was told the second googleplex level will be able to withstand the spirit possession of any system. I am sure you have encountered electronic villains out here.”

“We certainly have, Richard. Each time they try to take over our systems. They try to use our defense weapons against us.”

Then out loud we hear a sound from the portal platform. “EEEEeeee . . . !” In a flash of light, the other members show up.

Danger Duck speaks up, “Boy, I am glad to be back home for a break. That was a doozy of a fight we just had.” Then he sees us over by a control panel. “Hey, who are those people over there? Are they stealing our information?” Duck runs toward us.

Ace shouts out loud, “Stop Duck! Tech might have invited them in.”

“That’s ridiculous. Step away from that console, intruder! You’re under arrest for trespassing!” His two hands begin to glow with an orange blob in each one.

I turn around to face Danger Duck. My fairies quickly fly out in butterfly mode and land around Brianna to keep her safe. “If you want to know, Tech invited us in.”

“That’s insane, intruder. You must have done some sort of brain washing on him. Why don’t you fight me? Are you one of those p . . . p . . . pacifists?”

“No, I am a fighter. I know how to defend myself.”

~~~000~~~

Ace, Lexi, Rev and Slam walk over to Tech.

“Is everything all right, Tech?”

“Everything is fine, Ace. I did have his story checked out. He is not an enemy. He is a very important ally.”

“Let’s see how this plays out, Tech. For once I would like to see Duck get a taste of his own medicine.”

Lexi walks up to Brianna. “Who are you?”

“My name is Brianna. That is Richard Moore out there. He is my husband. These butterflies you are seeing are actually fairies.”

“Fairies? I heard they are myths.”

Then all of my fairies quickly change from butterflies into fairies in little flashes of light.

Lexi smiles, “Oops, my correction. Fairies do exist.”

They all smile together and respond in one voice. “Yes we do, Lexi.”

“You are so adorable and cute.”

“But we also know how to defend ourselves as well.”

“I’m sure you do.”

Then they all turn their attention to the confrontation in front of them.

~~~000~~~

I take off my satchels, and hold them in my hand. Several of my fairies quickly fly forward to take them from me. They return back to Brianna. I put my helmet on and secure it on my head. “Now here is my surprise. Outer clothes off, fold up in the satchel.” All of a sudden my outer clothes disappear in a blink of an eye. My clothes’ satchel gets slightly bigger. He sees that I am wearing my armor.

“Oooh, not bad, intruder. Did you use a teleport trick?”

“I didn’t use a teleport trick, Duck. I used magic.”

“Phah! Magic, shmagic! Magic doesn’t exist here in this universe!”

“Maybe not, but it does exist elsewhere in the twelve multi-verses.”

“Now I know you are lying. There is only one universe, and we are in it.”

“Then I will have to give you a taste of your own medicine.” I recite the spell to disappear in a blink of an eye.

“What? Where did you go?” Duck quickly transports himself around the round. He can’t find me. “Where did you go? You must be a coward to hide from me.”

While I’m invisible, I put on my forearm shields. I shoot out several freeze darts and hide them in several locations in the command center. I end the spell and reappear in a blink of an eye on the floor.

“There you are! I got you now!” Duck quickly throws his ‘eggs’ at me.

I quickly spin around to create a spinning tornado around me. Slam smiles and likes what he sees. He takes a step forward to join in the fight. However, Ace puts his hands on his chest to stop him.

“Not yet, Slam. He might be a better fighter than we think he is. Lady, does he know any martial art skills?”

“My name is Brianna, Ace. He has earned the first Black sash that leads toward the Shaolin Dragon Master. There are ten such sashes.”

“I knew it. Even I would be hard pressed to find an advantage if I fought him, Slam. We might as well learn some new moves.”

Slam smiles and nods his head up and down while he grumbles to himself.

The orange blobs quickly blend into my tornado. It becomes an energy tornado.

“What? You took my ‘eggs’ away from me. Let’s see how you do with a bunch of them.” Duck quickly throws ten more ‘eggs’ at me.

I absorbed them all. “Thank you for the energy ‘eggs’, Duck. Now it is my turn!” I quickly displace some air and shoot out a tiger right at Duck. It comes right at him with the mouth open and claws out. “Roooarrrr!”

“What? He created an animal and used my energy blasts?” Duck quickly teleports himself to another location. Brianna and the fairies quickly bring up a water shield from the air around them. They put out the energy tiger in a cloud of steam. “Shhhh . . . .!”

“Thank you, Brianna. You saved our command center.”

“You’re welcome, Ace. I suggest you do like wise.”

“Point taken, Brianna. Okay, Guardians, protect our command center while those two duke it out there.”

“Yes, Ace!”

They all get into position around the perimeter. Brianna and my fairies stay near Tech.

As soon as Duck materializes, I shoot out a flying crane at him. He quickly disappears and materializes elsewhere. I keep him on the ‘run’ as he teleports in and out around the room. Each of the Guardians is able to contain and disperse the energy animals I throw at Duck.

Duck appears winded the next time he appears. “Pant . . . pant . . . pant . . . That is the most I have done ever in one day. What?” He looks at his hands. “I can’t teleport now?”

“That’s fine, Duck. Now for some hand to hand combat!” I quickly run toward him. I do a tiger slash at him. “Rooooar!!”

Duck quickly dodges it just in time. “What?! You’re an animal fighter?”

“That’s right, Duck. Now for some close combat moves!” I do several chicken leg kicks, wing slashes right near him. I hit him each time. I back away as I stalk my prey again.

“Hey! That hurt!”

“That’s right, Duck!” I do a forearm tiger slash at him. The wind from the punch knocks him back.

“What was that?”

“That was a tiger slash!” I come running in again.

“Oh, oh!”

I plant my feet and jump up high in the air. I come down with a double wing crane slash.

He puts up his hands to block it. “I give up! I know when I’m outmatched!”

I direct the wing slash past his head and miss it. I land on my feet before him. I lower my hand toward him.

He looks up carefully. He gets up quickly without my help. He stares at me.

“I also had a back up plan, Duck.” I rise up my gauntlet. “Freeze darts return to the gauntlet.”

Then all of the freeze darts return to the gauntlet. “Thwip! Thwip! Thwip!”

“Okay, it looks like I jumped in again too soon, Ace.”

Ace walks up to Duck. “Don’t feel too bad, Duck. I don’t think we would all be able to take him down.”

“That’s right, Ace. If you had used your laser eyes, my armor would have protected me. The sword can absorb lasers and I can send it right back to you. My forearm shields can reflect them as well.”

“Now I see why the forearm shields are highly polished.”

“I can also match with Slam in a tornado fight. If he wants it.”

Slam smiles and puts up his hands. He grumbles as he turns his head from side to side.

“Yeah, Slam agrees. You would have been too much for him to handle.”

“But it would have been a great test for him.”

Slam smiles as he nods his head up and down.

Rev speaks quickly, “How about speed? How fast are you?”

“I have the speed of twelve unicorns put together. Obviously, you are faster than I, Rev. But I can also have the strength and endurance of twelve unicorns put together, if I need it.” I bring out my hands and the twelve images appear out from me, I then quickly bring them back in. “Not only that, I can sprout wings if I want to fly.” I quickly sprout out and retract both types of wings. “I can move faster when I’m in the Ethereal Space. That is why you couldn’t find me, Duck. I was in another frequency than the one you use.”

“So, that means I was snookered and taught a tough lesson.”

Ace pats him on the back. They look at each other and smile. “Yeah, that’s right, Duck.”

Then Tech speaks up, “But, he is also a security computer programmer. We were discussing how he can help us upgrade our computer system, so it won’t get hacked again.”

“And we showed up while that was happening. So, why else are you here?”

“Richard just told me, there will be one portal that will be left over.”

“I remember you telling me that, Tech. So, where does it go to?”

“It goes to his world. But we need a special bluestone pillar to activate it. The bluestone pillar is in the floor before the throne on Planet Blanc.”

They all smile.

“So, when do we go there, Richard?”

“When we have the Ultimate Last Battle, there is an enemy out there that you haven’t met yet. He is the very first enemy of the Creator. His name is King Azazel or Lucifer. Right now, it is 2774 on your world. Right now it is about 2100 on my world. About 800 years from now, this Ultimate Last Battle will take place on my world. King Azazel will be bringing one billion star ships of the worst villains in the multi-verses. He will come to try and destroy my world first.”

“But that is not going to happen when all of the good guys show up to help protect your world.”

“That’s right, Ace. Your story is told on my world, and thousands of other stories are told from all of the multi-verses. But, it is actually a double trap, Ace. King Azazel will unleash his demon angels to try and possess us all. By doing that he hopes that we all kill ourselves or tries to take control somehow.”

“So what is our protection against this mind possession?”

“That is what Richard and I were discussing. What did you come up with?”

I reach for my satchel and take out the laser disk. “Do you have a slot for this type of disk? It is a laser disk. It will be displayed in 3D.”

Tech takes it from my hand. “I have a slot for it. Computer, do you have 3D capability?” Tech puts the disk into the slot.

“Configuring sensors to display 3D images. It will appear in the Command Center.”

Then all of a sudden, the 3D images of the 7,776 cubes appear. “That’s genius, Richard. That is the first googleplex level of one cube. Incredible.”

“Thank you, Tech. My grandson will be googleplexing it to the next level.”

“What will that do for us, Richard?”

“There are four main gates that all data go through, Ace. Every single data port must go through the four gates before it gets to the firewall, then the hard-drives. Then it will exit out through another firewall with four different gates. I discovered that most viruses, Trojans and malware are similar in some ways. The gates will test the data to make sure there are no viruses attached to the data. If it discovers a similar one, it will get added to the library. It will stop the virus and strip it off before it goes any further. The library is self learning. If a massive electrical discharge or data flood is detected, the gates get turned into dams to block the onslaught. So, even with one cube, it will stop a hacker. The speed of the system is on the order of ten to the fifteenth. It is very stable. This was just designed on another world that has a connection to my world. It will protect your own ship from hackers, or if a ship tries to hack your system.”

“Do you think you can adapt this to our system, Tech?”

“I should be able to, Ace. Let me make a copy of the disk.” Tech makes a copy of the disk. He hands my original disk back to me.

I put it back into the case and put it in my satchel. “There is another person who is much stronger than I. He is the High King. He is directly from the Creator. He will have a few surprises as well. I know I will be one of his generals when that time comes.”

“When should we go, Richard?”

“When you activate the portal, all of the other portals will send your good friends. The time displacement will get in line with my world. It will be about 2950 or so on my world.”

“So, we need to find our good allies and tell them what will happen when all of our villains disappear.”

“That’s right, Ace.”

“Okay, Guardians, while we do our worm hole hopping, we’ll be visiting our allies and give them the latest news. Especially when they discover, the bad guys are missing from their sector.”

Then a circular light appears around Brianna and me. My fairies quickly fly into our coat pockets. Then two Emissaries appear next to us.

“You must be the Emissaries from my dreams.”

“That is right, Tech. We do actually exist. Take the 3D model and adapt it to your system. There will be few more attempts to take down your computer system.”

“I’ll surely do that. Thank you, very much.”

“Ace, you’re the leader of the Guardians. You have done a very honorable and worthy job in leading your friends.”

Then Duck speaks up, “What about me? Don’t I get any kudos?”

“You have your own share of thanks from the Creator. But, don’t let it go to your head too much.” They all smile at him.

“I get it, keep that humble attitude. It looks like Danger Duck gets to practice that some more. Geesh!”

The Emissaries and we disappear in a blink of an eye. We appear on their star ship.

~~~000~~~

“So, where do we go to next?”

“You are going to the Magic Verse. There are several worlds to visit there. The first one is where your counterparts are. They are trying to protect the unicorns from getting slaughtered for their horns.”

“So, I need to get the people’s attention what they are going is wrong.”

“That’s right, Richard.”

“Have our counterparts been able to do anything there?”

“There are protecting them as best as they can. They do need your help. Especially with your one thousand memory friends.”

I look at Brianna, “Are you ready for a fight, Bri?”

“I hope so, Richard. Where are they now?

“They are located in a remote valley between two mountain ranges in a temperate zone area. There is a river flowing through the valley. The mountains are very high with snow caps.”

The Emissaries quickly change multi-verses. Then a world quickly appears on the monitors. The continents are very similar to my own Earth.

“Yes, the continents are similar to your own world, Richard and Brianna. They are located here in this valley. It matches with the Shenandoah Valley on your world. They are friends with the Cherokees there.”

“That’s good. At least there are some allies there. What is the population count of the world here?”

“The population is about thirty million people. The countries and government style are different here. There are kingdoms with Kings and Queens. Right now, the various Indian tribes rule all of the Americas. Magic is used here primarily. So, that means that electricity is used minimally in the bigger cities and towns.”

“Once word got out there are unicorns in the Americas, the Eastern countries have been forcing their way onto the Americas. They think the unicorn horns are magical. But as you know, it will turn to dust thirty days after it is cut off.”

“Are the unicorns related to the unicorns on my world?”

“Yes, they are, Richard. There are descended from Silverwind and Star Dancer.”

“That means they will know Brianna and I are their kin.”

“That’s right, Richard and Brianna.”

Brianna quickly takes my hand and squeezes it.

“I would presume there are fairies there as well.”

“Yes there are, Richard. The male unicorns do give birth to their own fairies. They’re also centaurs as well.”

My fairies quickly pop up their heads. “We’ll teach them how to use the element bending methods.”

“You must do that, fairies. Once they learn how to do it, they will be able to help defend the unicorns better and themselves. Plan on being there for three days at least, hopefully no longer than that. You must get the people’s attention somehow.”

“Are there dragons here?”

“There are dragons here, Richard.”

Croin pops up his head. “Have they been hunted as well?”

“Yes, they have, Croin. They don’t realize it they will be needed to help defend their world.”

“Now for some very important information, Richard. On this world, there is a black magic movement that was brought in by a Demon Angel and his assistant. The leader is Leonard. His lieutenant is Mullin. There are two of his lieutenants in the Anti-verse.”

“Will I be facing them?”

“You will, Richard. This will be your first major test of putting everything you know to use. Use your experience with Sauron’s spirit as your main inspiration.”

“So, that means they are possessing two people right now.”

“That’s right, Richard. They are possessing two kings right now. They will throw everything they can at you when you confront them. You have the power contain their power. When you do that, then the Angelic Arresting Angels will show up to take them away to the Hell Galaxy.”

“King Azazel won’t be happy when he sees them.”

“No, he won’t, Richard. Therefore, we suggest that you come up with a message that you will give to them. Once they get there, they can give your message to King Azazel.”

“Heh, heh, heh . . . I get to give a message to King Azazel? I’ll make sure it is very painful from me.”

The Emissaries smile together, “That is what we are hoping for. Your Anti-verse counterpart will be doing the same thing with the other two lieutenants.”

“Oooh . . . quadruple the pain. I like that.”

“We thought you would, Richard.”

“So, are you ready?”

Brianna, my fairies and I look at each other. We nod our heads up and down. Brianna and I hold our hands together as we look at the Emissaries.

“We are putting you down where your counterparts are in the Shenandoah Valley. It will be just outside their encampment. The invading forces are on the eastern side of the Appalachian Mountains. They just docked their ten ships and unloading their provisions and setting up camp on shore.”

“Hmm . . . It might be best to confront them in the camp. Rounding up the scouts shouldn’t be too hard to do.”

“We suggest you do that, Richard.”

An Emissary pushes a button on the console. We disappear in a blink of an eye.

~~~000~~~

It is bright and early in the morning. The sun is coming over the peaks of the mountains. The encampment is very large in the valley. There are hundreds of centaurs, forty unicorns, thousands of fairies. Wizard Richard, Sorceress Brianna and the Cherokees are tending to them.

Wizard Richard and Sorceress Brianna then walk over to the lodges where the Cherokees have set their encampment. They sit on the logs with the other chieftains.

“You told us that you contacted the Emissaries, Wizard. When do you think they will arrive?”

“I was promised they would be here this morning. They will tell us what is really going on.”

“We hope so, Wizard. This black magic they are bringing is too strong for us to fight against. We must have hope they are stronger.”

“You told us you have power to be greater, Wizard. Have you tried to use it?”

“I have, Chief Black Raven. But, I seem to lack the experience to call it up. So, therefore, it is my hope they can help us all.”

“Then we must have the hope as well, Wizard.”

~~~000~~~

Brianna and I appear on the trail. Immediately, my fairies fly out of our pockets. Quickly several fairies from the encampment see us appear. They fly toward us and hover in front of us.

“You must be they. You look like our Wizard and Sorceress.”

“Yes, my name is Richard. This is my wife, Brianna. These fairies who are with me, are mine. I gave birth to them, except for Amber and Cobalt. They come from Avel.”

“Avel? We know that name! He is told in our stories here.”

Another fairy speaks up, “Come with us, we’ll lead you to the encampment. We have been waiting for you.”

Quickly, four fairies fly ahead to the encampment to give them the good news.

We follow the four fairies to the encampment.

The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 22
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman

The list of characters mentioned in this story belong to the various authors that created them. This is a fan-fiction story.

~~~000~~~
Half way around the world, in the Hague, Holland. The thirty Kings of the world are gathered together to discuss their options about the Americas.

“So, how are we going to divide up the Americas, High King Leopold?”

“I have been thinking about that really hard. I think the Spanish will like taking over South America. The British will like taking over North America on the East Coast. The Chinese can take over the West Coast of the North America. Once we kill all of the unicorns and dragons there, it will be easy to conquer their lands. We’ll spread our Black Magic there to control the people. So, King Sui, have you killed all of the dragons in Asia yet?”

He looks down in humbleness, “Uh, er, no, High King.”

High King Leopold face changes to a look of disgust, “And why not?”

“Our continent is vast, High King. They have proven very elusive.”

“That is no excuse. We have given you the black magic tools to subdue them and kill them.”

“We did try using them, High King. However, it seems they are waiting for a special dragon that will lead them to victory. They said this dragon will reestablish the true light on the land.”

“Who is this dragon they are waiting for?”

“The dragons and some of our people call this dragon the Omega Unicorn Dragon.”

Huh? The Omega Unicorn Dragon can’t be here, I made sure that prophecy will never come true on this world and on many other worlds. “Have you been using the black magic the right way?”

“We have, High King.”

“I’ll give you another black magic spell to use. If it fails, then you leave me no choice to do the unthinkable.”

King Sui looks scared now, “No! I will make sure it works, High King.” I don’t want to be a mindless body! Help us Creator. His black magic is too strong for me to keep him out. I’m doing the best I can in feigning this illusion.

Help is on the way, King Sui.

Thank you, Creator.

High King Leopold gets up. He retrieves a small box from his coat pocket. He walks over to King Sui’s table and places it on the table. King Sui reaches for the small box and takes it. He puts it in his coat pocket. “Thank you, High King.”

High King Leopold smiles with an evil grin. “You’re welcome, King Sui.” He turns around and sits back down in his chair.

King Charlemagne speaks up, “But, they have a full fledged wizard and sorceress there as well. We haven’t been able to possess them yet.”

“I know, King Charlemagne. It seems we need to find a way to weaken their minds and will power. Then we should be able to conquer them.”

“Our fleet has arrived on the shores of the Americas. Our scouts tell us they are gathered together in a valley on the other side of the Appalachian Mountains.”

“Those mountains are very high, King Mulford. The mountain passes will have to be used to cross the mountains. Too bad we can’t go underneath it and use a tunnel, High King Leopold.”

“But that would take too long to make a tunnel under the mountain. Thank goodness there are no dwarfs over there.”

“Yes, they have been a thorn in our sides ever since we arrived here. Curse those dwarfs. We’ll eventually conquer them as well.”

“Well, does everyone agree to our plan to kill all of the unicorns and dragons of this world?”

All of the Kings nod their heads up and down in agreement. They all respond in one voice. “Aye!”

“Are there any abstentions?”

No one speaks up.

“The motion carries to kill all of the unicorns and dragons on this world! This session is now at an end. We’ll meet again at the first mark after the noon repast to discuss further how to divide up the Americas.” High King Leopold takes the gavel and bangs it on the sound block. “Bang!”

Everyone gets up and leaves the main assembly hall for the noon repast. High King Leopold and King Mulford are the last two to leave.

High King Leopold and King Mulford lean in closer to each other as they smile. “As if they get a choice. Soon, our minions will possess every single soul on this world.”

The laugh together, “Heh, heh, heh, hah, hah, hah, hah, . . ..!”

“Then we can use the dragon spirits to become even stronger!”

“Hah, hah, hah, hah, . . . .!”

~~~000~~~

The four fairies quickly fly into the camp. They yell out as loud as they can. “They’re here! They’re here! Praise to the Creator they are here!”

Quickly everyone looks at each other with smiles on their faces. The four fairies quickly enter the Cherokee lodge encampment. They hover in front of the Chieftains. “They’re here! They’re here, Wizard Richard, Sorceress Brianna and the Chieftains!”

“Then we must welcome them with wide open arms!”

The Chieftains, the Wizard and the Sorceress all stand up and straighten out their clothes. The Chieftains take their own banner staff from their bearers. They arrange themselves in a semi-circle near the smoldering campfire.

~~~000~~~

As we get closer to the encampment, we get greeted by the centaurs and the Cherokee Warriors whom are guarding the encampment.

Each one of them puts their right fist over the heart as they nod their heads up and down at us. We smile and do the same thing as well. Then we see the unicorns approaching us. They stop before us, we stop as well. Then the two leading unicorns approach us. The Chieftains sees this unusual approach. They come forward to gather around us.

“You have the smell of unicorns and dragons upon you. Please explain this paradox.”

“I certainly will. My name is Richard Moore, this is my wife, Brianna. I gave birth to these fairies, these two fairies are from Avel the Unicorn on the Planet Twainor. Their names are Amber and Cobalt. About five years ago I was invited to be an Outside Helper to the Planet Twainor. I found the six unicorns. Their names are Avel, Makaela, Einhorn, Athena, Silverwind and Star Dancer. They have also given birth to more unicorns on Twainor. I have also within me, a drop of dragon blood. On Twainor is Eingana, the mother of all dragons. The father of all dragons, Leviathan, is alive and well on my Earth. He breathed upon me to awaken the dragon blood. I have been given the title of the Omega Unicorn Dragon. My wife has also been changed as well. Here is our proof that we are speaking the proof.”

Brianna and I put our hands out from our sides. Then all of a sudden, the images within us come out. Croin and the thousand memories within me come out. That includes Leviathan, Eingana, the host of dragons that I have met. The twelve unicorn images come out from me. The six unicorns come out from Brianna.

Everyone looks around and above them. They see the spectacle before them. Then everyone cheers and claps their hands. The unicorns come up to us. We hug their necks. They press back into us.

“Yes, you are our kin.”

“Thank you, for coming. Now we have hope against the darkness here.”

We hug them all. My fairies do the same thing in hugging the other fairies gathered around as well.

The leading male unicorn speaks up, “My name is Stellarwind. This is my mate, Sapphire. I am from Silverwind and Star Dancer. She is from Athena and Einhorn. You have the scent of our parents upon you.”

“We know, Stellarwind. It is through them that we became changed on Twainor. We now live like unicorns. We were brought here to help you all to fight against the darkness that is trying over take your world.

A Cherokee Chieftain speaks up, “My name is Chief Black Raven. What or who brought this darkness upon our world?”

“I was just told by the Emissaries who they are. There are two Demon Angels here. Their names are Leonard and Mullin. They brought part of their legions here.”

A murmur is heard through the crowd. I raise my hands to quiet them down. “Brianna and I do have the power to contain their power. We are here to help you.”

The crowd murmurs ceases. They get a lighter heart within themselves.

“We will also teach you what you can do, so this won’t happen again.”

Everyone has a big smile on their faces.

“But, the first thing we must do is this. There are scouts who are watching us at this moment. There are ten ships docked on the Eastern shore. They are unloading their provisions and making camp right now. They are coming here for the unicorns. I will take care of them for you. Then once you see how I do it, then you will know what to do the next time. It is also my intention to meet Leonard and Mullin as well.”

~~~000~~~

A scout is hiding among the trees. He sees and hears what is going on. “Oh my. I need to warn our ships on shore. This is big trouble.”

He climbs down from his hiding place. He carefully gets onto his horse without making a sound. He rides the trail that leads to the nearest mountain pass.
Several birds fly up in the air and chirp out their calls loud and clear.

~~~000~~~

We see and hear the birds fly up into the air. We hear their calls. I hear the birds speak in my mind.

Omega! There is a scout leaving! Hurry!

“There is one leaving the area now! I’ll get him! Armor on!” In a blink of an eye, my armor is on. My outer clothes get folded up and placed in my clothes satchel. I sprout out my feathered wings. I disappear in a blink of an eye. I fly quickly toward the birds. Soon I see the scout racing down the trail. I fly over the hill rise and land on the other side. I appear in a blink of an eye. I aim my gauntlets at him. I wait for him to appear over the hill rise. I retract my wings back into my body.

~~~000~~~

“Did you hear what the birds say, Brianna?”

“I did, Sorceress Brianna. You must let your mind communicate with the animals in their mind. That is one of the greatest gifts you have with the unicorn images within you. That is the same for you Wizard Richard. You will be able to talk to the horses, the birds, the bees, the butterflies, cougars, bears and so on. They will become more aware of you as well. They will help you when you need them. Of course, you don’t want to see them die for you in a battle. Life is a precious gift from the Creator.”

“Will we be able to hear them speak to us?”

“That is a good question, Chief Black Raven. Since this is a magical world, anything is possible. You must pay attention to them. They will give you clues that needs your attention. It has been proven that the native tribes of the land are in tune with the land more closely.”

All of the Cherokees smile together. “We’ll certainly try, Brianna.”

~~~000~~~

The horse and rider starts to crest the hill rise. The horse stops when he sees me.

“Ride past him, horse. I command you!” The scout kicks his heels on the sides of the horse.

The horse shakes his head from side to side. Help me, Omega! He is possessed by a black spirit!

I’ll help you. Hold still. I shoot out a freeze dart right at the scout. “Thwip!”

The freeze dart hits him the shoulder. “Thoo!” The dart returns back to my gauntlet. “Thwip!”

“What? You shot a dart at me! That is nothing to me.” Then he looks down and sees his hands getting iced over. “Y . . .you are using a freezing spell on me!”

Soon the ice layer soon freezes him from head to toe. He can’t speak and sees the forest straight ahead.

I walk up to the horse. The horse brings his head down lower. I pat him on the side of the head.

Yes, I froze him. Come on. Let’s get back to camp. I need to trap this black spirit in a special box.

The horse nods his head up and down. Yes, show us how to keep them out of our lives.

I walk back to camp with the horse. The scout keeps his frozen stare looking straight ahead. The black spirit with him speaks to himself. Oh, oh . . , this is not good. Someone knows how to trap us within bodies. I can’t move or do anything now. My Master is not going to like this. There is no way I can warn the others now.

~~~000~~~

Wizard Richard and Sorceress Brianna quickly reach out with their minds. Soon, they learn how to talk to the animals from mind to mind. The Cherokees are pleased as well they can do the same as well. They now have a great advantage in knowing what is going on in the forest around them.

Soon they see me walking down the trail from the forest. They see something they didn’t expect to see. They see an ice frosted scout. Several fairies quickly fly up to take a closer look.

“He is covered in ice, Omega. How did you do that?”

I raise up my hands to show them. “In these gauntlets are darts. I can put any spell on it. I can put a sleep spell or a freeze spell on the darts. I discovered sometime ago, I encountered an evil spirit on my world. He was possessing some one. When you shoot a freeze dart at a possessed body, that evil spirit is trapped as well. When dragon fire is blown at them, they get a big surprise. The evil spirit will experience pain since it is still possessing the body.”

The evil spirit screams within the scout’s body. No! That’s impossible! I have never experienced pain! I am a demon!

Everyone smiles together.

“But, if I did that, he would flee in pain and warn the other evil spirits here. I don’t want that to happen either. I want to trap this evil spirit in a wooden box. That way he won’t flee to warn the others.”

“It would have to be a special box to hold them, Omega.”

“Yes, I but I can make it stronger so that it is impossible for any evil spirit to leave an ordinary box.”

A Cherokee quickly walks back to his encampment. He enters his lodge to find a wooden box. He finds it. He opens it and takes the items from it and places them under his bed roll. He leaves the lodge with the empty box. He walks back to us and hands me the wooden box.

I look at it. “This will do. Thank you very much.” I open it to see how it is constructed. “I going to put a permanent ice layer inside the box. This ice layer will keep any black spirit inside it. I will leave a small pinhole open in the top. That is where they will enter it.” I look at Wizard Richard. “You can do the same thing as well. I’ll show you later.”

“Thank you, very much.”

I point my finger at the opened box. I put a permanent ice layer on the inside. “I am making the ice as strong as steel.” I close the box. Then I run my finger around the opening to seal the ice seam. I then point my finger at the middle of the lid. I create a pin hole opening.

I hold it in front of me with my left hand. I take out my quartz crystal with my right hand in my right pants pocket. I look at the scout. “Croin, it is time to warm him back up. Evil spirit, by the power invested in me by the Creator. I command you to enter this box! Now Croin!” I light up the crystal to make it very bright in white light.

Croin comes out of me. He quickly blows his hot flames at the scout. The scout screams in pain!

“Arrrrrrgggghhh! Noooo . . .! The pain!!!! That light! It is too bright!!”

Croin quickly returns within me.

The white light reveals the true form of the evil spirit. It is a hideous lower class demon. It has small wings, goat legs and a hairy body. The face is disfigured with one eye larger than the other. The ears are pointed. He screams as he flees the body and enters the box.

The body shrinks down to the width of the pin hole as it enters the box. “ARRRRRGggggghhhhh!! The pain!!!! NOOOOOooooo.....!!!”

Then all is quiet. The scout wavers. “Uhh . . . .” He quickly leans over to his right. Several Cherokees quickly help him down from the saddle. They lean him against a nearby boulder. “Uhhh . . . what happened?” He brings his head up and looks around. “Where am I?”

“You are in the Shenandoah Valley of the Americas.”

“Oh my! There are ten ships on the Eastern Shore! They are coming here to kill the unicorns!”

“That’s not going to happen. In fact we’ll stop them before that happens.” I turn around to look at the hill sides. “Hmmm . . . . I wonder.”

“What are you looking at, Richard?”

“I think there are more scouts and evil spirits in this valley or near it.”

“How will you get them in the box?”

“In masse, Chief Black Raven. Wizard Richard, take the box and hold it above your head. I am going to hover in the air above us.” I extend my feathered wings out. I flap them and fly into the air. I aim my gauntlets out into the air. Seek out all scouts in this valley. Freeze them where they are. I shoot the darts into the air. “Thwip! Thwip! Thwip! Thwip! Thwip! Thwip! Thwip! Thwip!”

The freeze darts seek out the scouts. The darts return back to my gauntlet. I determine there are five more scouts watching us when three darts come back late.

“I need five dragon friends. Appear before them and blow your hot flames them. Evil spirits! By the power invested in me by the Creator of the Universe, I command you evil spirits to enter the box that Wizard Richard is holding!” I recite the spell for the quartz crystal to shine brightly. I hold it above my head.

A white light appears in the valley. Soon we hear the screams of the scouts in the valley. Then we see five evil black demon spirits flying toward the box. They quickly enter the box.

“ARRRRGGGggghh! NOOOOOooooo . . .! Curse you! EEEEEE . . . eeeeee . . . .!!! The pain!!! I can’t see!!!”

Soon there is silence in the encampment.

About a half mark later, five scouts on their horses enter the encampment. They look a bit worn out from the experience. They quickly see their comrade nearby. They get off their mounts and come to him quickly.

“What happened, Daniel?”

“We were possessed by evil demon spirits, Roger.”

“Where did they come from?”

I come flying in and land on the ground. I quickly retract my wings. I walk up to them.

“Who are you?”

“Are you an angel?”

“I am not an angel. I am a human being. I have been chosen by the Creator to do great things. There is a Demon Angel on this world. He has brought his minions to conquer this world.”

They see the unicorns nearby. They quickly humble themselves when they see their graceful beauty.

“We were told that we must kill all of the unicorns and the dragons. Then we’ll have peace on this world.”

“That is a lie from the pit of Hell, Daniel. If that were to happen, then your world will be like my world. You will have wars that will never end. There are over five billion people on my world. You need the unicorns for peace. You need the dragons to help you defend your world. There are evil forces out there that want to conquer other worlds or destroy it for its riches. What is your choice?”

“You mean to tell us that there is no power in the horn of the unicorn?”

“There is no power in the horn of the unicorn, Roger. Once the horn is cut off, the horn will turn to dust in thirty days and the unicorn will die in that same amount of time.”

“No! That can’t be! We were told the horn can neutralize any poison.”

“That was the same lie that was told on my Earth a long time ago. When the last unicorn was killed on my world, it ushered in the Dark Ages into Europe. There was no exchange of knowledge for a thousand years.”

Stellarwind steps closer. “He speaks the truth, young scout.”

“What? You can talk?”

“Yes, we can talk. So do the dragons as well.”

All of the scouts bow their heads solemnly. “Tell us what we must do to get our world back. How can we get rid of this black shadow upon our world?”

“It will start with educating your ten ships that have docked on the Eastern Shore. We’ll remove the black shadow from them and hold them in this box. Then we’ll go find the Demon Angels and face them once and for all. Where do the Kings meet?”

“They are meeting in the Hague, Holland this week. It is one of three cities they gather in to meet periodically.”

“Then we’ll meet your ten ships tomorrow morning. Are they expecting you tomorrow morning?”

“They are, sir. They need to know what the current situation is.”

“What is the total count of men in the ships.”

“Each ship holds fifty soldiers. All of them are heavily armed. They have cannons and catapults.”

“That doesn’t sound like a force to kill unicorns, Chief Black Raven.”

“It certainly isn’t, Richard. That sounds a like an invasion for war.” Chief Black Raven looks around and speaks up. “We are going to the Eastern Shore encampment. I am going to bring only one hundred braves with me. The rest of the forces will be provided by Richard.”

I look at Wizard Richard. “I need you to do something for me.”

“What do you want me to do, Richard?”

“Have you ever seen a large gathering of Indians in one place?”

“I have, Richard. I saw two thousand braves gathered on the plains. We were having a meeting on what to do about the Europeans.”

“That’s good. Now think about them. Look within yourself. Imagine that scene in your mind.”

Wizard Richard closes his eyes. He remembers the scene. “I am recalling it now.”

“That’s good. Now with a sweep of your hand like this.” I show him. Then all of my 1,000 army memory appears in a blink of an eye above us.

Wizard Richard does the same thing. Then all of a sudden two thousand braves appear above us and are next to my group.

“You did it, Wizard Richard. You now have a two thousand army of braves. They can’t be killed. You can make them faint like ghosts. The enemy’s weapons will go right through them and they will not get hurt. Or they can absorb the bullets from the weapons to catch them off guard. You can send any group of them to do anything you want. They can speak to the enemy if you want to. It is up to your imagination. You can use them to disarm the opposing army.”

Then everyone breaks out to a very loud cheer and clapping of hands. They give the praise to Creator.

“That means I can call up the dragons that I met so far.”

“Yes you can, Wizard Richard. There is one more thing you can do. Remember, unicorns are pure beings. No one can lie to a unicorn. If you need the truth from someone, all you need to do is stare at them. Then they will get a glassy eye look. Then they will answer your questions truthfully.”

“That’s good to know. Thank you very much, Richard.” Then Wizard Richard moves his arm and hand again. He calls up ten dragons. They are flying above us. Then we see several real dragons flying in toward us. Wizard Richard makes the images disappear with another sweep of his hands. I make mine disappear as well. The three dragons land in a clearing near the encampment. They wait for us to come to them. The Chieftains, Wizard Brianna, Sorceress Brianna, my fairies, my Brianna, Stellarwind and Sapphire and I approach them. The scouts stay behind.

We stop about fifty feet before them. We all give a formal bow to them and rise up. They nod their heads up and down in like manner. Then I see a familiar blazing diamond symbol on the top of their horned heads. It was told to me while I was on Never Land.

“Who are you? You look like Wizard Richard.”

I speak up. “My name is Richard Moore. This is my wife Brianna.” I give a brief summary of where I am from and how I became the Omega Unicorn Dragon.

“I was asked to come here to help you. There is a most profound darkness on your world here. There are two Demon Angels here. They have brought their minions. Their names are Leonard and Mullin. It is my intention to meet them in the Hague, Holland.”

“We know that place very well. There is extreme darkness in those lands. We praise the Creator that someone has come to help our world. Perhaps someday, we can return the favor in the future.”

“That is good news to hear as well. What are your names?”

“I am Uktena. These other two are my children.”

“I think I was told a story about you. It was on another world.”

Uktena looks at me closely. She smells the air around me. “I have never met you before. What and who told the story about me?”

“His name is Chief Hileni.” I wave my hand, the image of Hileni appears next to me.

Quickly Uktena and her children smile. “Please tell me more.”

“I met him on Never Land. He told me of a story where your image is in the ground on my Earth. You are guarding your young in a nearby mound. Your head points toward the summer solstice when the sun sets on that day. Your blazing diamond can vanquish the dark ones with ease. You are related in a story with the great Thunderbird, Tsidi. The people complained that it was you who brought the serpents to attack them. But, that is not true. The serpents came from the changed Nephelim’s animals they brought from the stars.”

“What is the story that is told to you about Tsidi?”

The people begin to wonder who would know about Uktena and Tsidi.

“Chief Hileni told me that Queen White Dove and King Oren told you that Caliber the Unicorn is dead. Here is their image that I actually met them.” I wave my hand, the image of Queen White Dove and King Oren appear next to me.

“Please continue with the story.”

“Then you sent your spirit to the mound that bears you image. Then Tsidi swooped into bring your body to their nest in the mountain range that is far to the west of here. I am guessing their nest is located in a high mountain bowl. It is along an imaginary line called the Great Divide. On the West side, all rivers flow to the Pacific Ocean. On the East side, all rivers flow to the Atlantic Ocean. You said you would come when I need you the most. Then with your blazing diamond, you will send out a signal to the high mountain bowl. Then Tsidi will come to defend our world with you. You have lightning in your tail and Tsidi and his brood have lightning in their talons.”

“I give praise to the Creator that you have finally come forth to be among us, Omega Unicorn Dragon. For now I have seen with my own eyes our representative for the animals of the Creator’s Creation. You are well on your way to be the greatest animal warrior that will ever be.”

“I also have met my counter parts on Christmas World, Uktena. My Anti-self, the Anti-Brianna, my Brianna and I have been entrusted with the power of the Arresting Angels. There will be a day that we will merge together to face the darkest foes imaginable. We met the other Richards and Briannas on Christmas World. There, the Anti-Richard, Anti-Brianna, my Brianna and I shared our unicorn and dragon experience with the others.”

“Ah, that is why Wizard Richard and Sorceress Brianna are more powerful than they were before.”

“Uktena, how did Richard know about you on his Earth?”

“It is because I was there, Chief Black Raven. Chief Hileni, Tsidi, and I came up with that story after Caliber’s death. We had to make it obscure as possible that it would be too incredible to believe in. Then the Creator took Tsidi and I with our broods to this world for protection. Little did we realize that the darkness would come here as well.”

I speak up next, “So that means, after King Azazel was taken from our world to his new prison, his Demon Angels quickly spread through out the multi-verses to do what they can to spread the darkness before he returns for his vengeance on my world.”

“That’s right Omega.”

Then a scout steps up. “Excuse me, didn’t we see you all bow toward these serpents? Are you all worshiping this serpent?”

We turn to face the scouts. “That is not true, Daniel. We bowed before Uktena to give our respect. It is much better for all of us if we do that.”

“Don’t they eat people?”

“They don’t eat people for food, Daniel. Uktena is a dragon not a serpent. She is from Eingana, the Great Sea Dragon. Her father is Leviathan, the Great Fire Dragon.” I wave my hands for them to appear life size.

Uktena and her children smile in seeing them again.

“The serpents or snakes came from the Nephelim. You will have to do a proper historical study with your ancient texts here to prove that I am right. I don’t know if the Nefelim came here or not. All dragons eat fish from the sea. They don’t eat people or the land animals. On my world, it was our population increase to five billion people that persecuted the dragons. They wanted the land for themselves. However, I did discover there are dragons hiding on my Earth. They are waiting for the right time to appear. I know that Queztalcoatl, the Silver and Gold Dragons, the Ice Dragons, the Nine Dragons from China are hiding on my world. They are waiting for me to to contact them. There are other hidden mysteries on my world that haven’t been solved for thousands of years. There are the Romanian Dragons, a Basilisk, and a hidden sword to name just a few. There are probably griffins and other mythical creatures hidden as well. So, anything is possible in the multi-verses.”

The scouts look at each other and lower their heads in humbleness. “Please forgive us. We didn’t know.”

“That is not a problem. You were told things about the dragons and the unicorns that were not true. As you can see, they are honorable and trustworthy. All they want is respect so they can live life to the fullest as well.” I look at Chief Black Raven. “We need to meet them on the coast as quickly as possible, Chief Black Raven. I know I can get there faster than the rest of you.”

“We’ll leave right now, Richard. We will take the scouts with us. They will be needed to meet the ships’ captains.”

“Do you have a map? I have a feeling I am going to be here longer than three days. I keep forgetting about transportation speeds. I can probably get to the coastline in a few marks on the sun dial. I do that by using magic to enter the Ethereal Space.”

“Ethereal Space? We have that here, Richard.”

“Can you disappear and travel faster than by using a boat or a horse?”

“We certainly can, Richard.”

I smile at them, “Well then, let’s get to the East Coast encampment.”

“Our shamans have the magical capability for this quick transportation method.”

One hundred Cherokee Braves get ready for the travel to the East Coast. They get their weapons ready, bows and arrows, knives ready. They put on the war paint to their faces. They look fearsome when they do that.

The five shamans line up in a clearing. Then the braves put their hands to shoulder to either side of the shamans. Twenty braves are to each shaman. I take several tribal chiefs with me. The scouts and their horses are with another shaman. Wizard Richard is also with me as well.

“My fairies, you have an opportunity to start teaching the other fairies how to do the air and water bending methods.”

“Thank you for reminding us of that, father, mother, Omega.”

Once we are ready, the shamans and I recite the spell to transport to the East Coast. We disappear in a blink of an eye and fly straight into the air. We fly over the mountains and descend down the other side. We see the ships docked in a tributary bay nearby. We see them assembling catapults, spear launchers, and cannons. It looks like we are in the Virginia bay area complex. We make our descent and land in a clearing that is far from the main encampment. They are at least several marks from us.

The scouts mount their horses and get ready to meet them.

“We’ll try our best to convince them. If they won’t listen to reason, then you will have to remove the black shadow from them.”

“We understand, Daniel. May the Creator give you wisdom when you need it the most.”

“I’ll be watching closely as well.”

The scouts turn around and ride down the trail that leads to the encampment.
“Okay, I’ll take several of you with me. We’ll be invisible to them. We’ll listen to their talk and determine their attitudes.”

“That’s a good idea, Richard. We need to know what their state of minds are at. Then we can plan our response better.”

“Braves and shamans, make camp here. Keep watch until we return.”

“Yes, Chief Black Raven.”

Black Raven puts his hand on Wizard Richard. Another Chieftain puts his hand on my shoulder. We recite the transport spell and disappear in a blink of an eye. We fly toward the shore encampment.

We fly above the crowd of people to find the scouts. We see them making their way to several tents. They dismount their horses and tie them to several posts just set into the ground. They salute the two guards in front of the tent. The guards salute back. They open the flap to allow them inside the tent. We follow them inside. We see a table set up with several chairs around it. There are three men looking over a map of the Eastern Shore of the Americas. They look up when they see the scouts.

“What is the report on the other side of the mountains, Daniel?”

“There are forty unicorns in the Shenandoah Valley. However, there are about five hundred Cherokees gathered there as well.” Daniel points to a location on the map.

“Hmm . . . it is going to take a week to get over those mountains. But, we have our orders from High King Leopold. We are to enter the valley and kill all of the unicorns that we can find. There are ten more ships that will be arriving in a few days. We’ll be spreading out to engage in any resistance from the Indians.”

“How can you be sure you can beat them, Captain?”

“We have an arsenal of black weaponry. The black spells will protect us against their bows and arrows.”

“What about the dragons? Will the black spells work against them?”

“We are told it will work. We’ll be able to remove their feeble spirits from their bodies. We’ll put them in special wooden boxes. They will be used to make us more powerful.”

~~~000~~~

“Grr . . . I have a mind right now to appear right before them. They are making a mockery of the Creator!”

“Calm down, Richard. I am angry too. But we must plan this out better. There are ten more ships coming here from Europe. They will be here in a few days.”

“You’re right, Wizard Richard. We can use the sea dragons to stop them on the high seas.”

“Yes we can. Come, let’s get back to our encampment.”

We leave the tents and fly back to our encampment. We appear before the braves and the shamans in a blink of an eye. We all gather around to discuss our options.

“I would like to scare them very much.”

“Is there a way to appear that you have more than one hundred braves?”

“Yes, there is. We can beat sticks against hollowed out trees. The sound can be deafening when there are a lot of them sounding out.”

“That’s good, Chief Black Raven. We’ll use our memory forces as the first advancement wave. Then you can send in your braves right behind them. If they try to fight back, we can put freeze spells on our arrows.”

“Richard, I think it is best that I send my Cherokee memories in first. They expect to see them, not your soldiers from another planet.”

“Okay, I agree to that. I’ll hold mine back. They will contain any who try to escape the area. We’ll keep them hemmed in.”

Once we get everyone to understand the plan, several braves look for some hollowed out tree trunks. They find three good sized downed oak trees. They check inside them to make sure it is hollowed out. They are pleased to find they don’t have to hollow out any more. They start to look for other tree branches to use as clubs to beat on the hollowed out trees.

Once they get their clubs cut and trimmed they look at us to start the noise. Chief Black Raven arranges his braves in a semi-circle. Wizard Richard creates his two thousand Indian Brave army. He gives them a ghostly pallor with fog around their feet and bodies.

Chief Black Raven then motions his arm downward. The five braves start to beat the hollowed out tree trunks in unison.

“Thooom! Thooom! Thooom! Thooom! Thooom! Thooom! Thooom! Thooom! Thooom! Thooom!”

~~~000~~~

The soldiers in the encampment hear the drumming noise. They start to have the look of panic on their faces.

A soldier quickly runs to the Captains’ tents. “Sir! Sir! The Indians are on the war path! Help us!”

The Captains and the scouts quickly exit the tents the look toward the mountains.

“That’s nothing to us. We have the black magic to keep us safe.”

“What if they have magic that is stronger than us?”

“That’s impossible!” The Captain yells out really loud. “Stay steady men! They are just blowing hot air! They are nothing to us! We have our orders!”

They continue to hear the drumming noise. “Thooom! Thooom! Thooom! Thooom! Thooom! Thooom! Thooom! Thooom! Thooom! Thooom!”

Then they start to see fog rolling in from the forest into their encampment. It curls around their feet as it spreads through out the encampment. They start to look very scared now. They are trembling where they are standing. Then they see ghostly images walking into the encampment.

They see hundreds of Cherokee braves walking slowly toward them.

“They . . . They are . . . .ghosts!”

“We can’t fight them!”

The turn to flee in a panic. “Arrrghhhh! Ghosts have come to haunt us!”

They scatter through out the encampment. The Captains are trying their best to control the men. The scouts take their horses to a secluded area where the other horses are kept.

The horses quickly communicate with each other. They are told the Omega Unicorn Dragon is here. They stay calm and quiet while everyone else is running in a great panic.

Then they hear the sounds of arrows. “Thwip! Thwip! Thwip! Thwip! Thwip! Thwip! Thwip! Thwip! Thwip! . . .” Then they hear, “Thoo! Thoo! Thoo! Thoo! . . .” Soon they all are standing frozen where they stand. The arrows then return back to the braves. Then right in front of them, dragons appear right before them. They blow their hot flames right at them.

“Noooo! . . . Dragons! Arrrgghhh! The pain!!!!”

Then all of the evil black spirits fly out from them. They try to fly to Europe across the Atlantic Ocean. They soon find themselves pulled back against their will.

They all stream and fly toward the forest. Then all of a sudden they see Wizard Richard holding a wooden box. They see another person holding up a crystal with a bright white light emanating from it. They all squeeze themselves into the black box.

They all scream while entering the box. “ARRRrrrgghhh! I can’t see!!! The light is burning my eyes!!!! The pain!!!! NOOOOOooooo. . . . !!!”

Then the drumming stops. All is quiet. The soldiers quickly collapse to the ground. Wizard Richard makes his army of braves disappear along with the fog. I create my army and keep them on the perimeter as back up. All of the braves, the Chiefs, Wizard Richard and I enter the encampment.

We see them groaning in pain. We help them up. When they see the Indians, they have a startled look.

“You’re not going to kill us?”

“We are not. We just removed the black shadow that is hiding among you.”

They look within themselves. They are relieved to know they are finally delivered from the evil black ones.

“Thank you very much. We greatly appreciate that. If you are here, then why are we here. What is your name?”

“I am Wizard Richard. We will explain it all, captain. Gather your men together.”

“Yes, Wizard Richard.”

The Captains gather their men together. Wizard Richard and the Chieftains explain what is happening on their world. Soon, they realized they need to cleanse their world of this evil black magic on their world. They start to pack up their belongings, they take apart their engines of war and stow them back on the ships. It takes the rest of the day to get everything back on board. They sail with the tide and head back to Europe and their home ports.

The Cherokee Braves, the Chieftains, Wizard Richard and I look at the horizon as they sail off to the East.

“Now we need to take care of those ten more ships, Richard.”

“I need to contact the sea dragons here.” With a wave of my hand, Eingana and Leviathan appear above me. Then we see several large waves of water approaching us. The waves stop. Then three large sea dragons rise up and appear before us.

“Who called us? We see the images of our Great Father and Great Mother.”

“I called you. My name is Richard Moore. This is Wizard Richard that you already know. I met your Great Father on my Earth and your Great Mother on the planet Twainor. I have a drop of her blood within me. Leviathan breathed upon me to active the dragon. Here is the proof that I am the Omega Unicorn Dragon.”

I thrust out my hands. My twelve unicorn images appear. I quickly sprout out my feathered wings. I retract them quickly, then I sprout out the dragon wings.

“Indeed you are the Omega Unicorn Dragon from Earth. What about Wizard Richard and Sorceress Brianna? Can they do the same proof?”

Wizard Richard concentrates within himself. Then he thrusts his hands out. Immediately twelve unicorn images appear. He sprouts out his feathered wings. “I am sorry sea dragons. I don’t have a drop of Eingana’s blood within me.”

“That is all right, Wizard Richard. At least you are greater than what you were earlier in the year. Your title for now is the Omega Unicorn upon our world. Is there something you want us to do?”

“There are ten ships leaving these shores. We just took the black spirits that were possessing them and trapped them in this wooden box. However, there are ten more ships heading this way. We need to stop them and take the black spirits from them and trap them in this box. It is my intention to face Leonard and Mullin in the Hague, Holland. I am hoping to trap all of the evil black demons in the wooden box.”

“What will do with them?”

“The Emissaries gave me a suggestion. Use them to send a message to King Azazel. I have an idea on how to make the message very painful.”

“That is a worthy goal to achieve, Omega. We’ll find those ten ships and make sure they make their landing here.”

“Thank you, honorable sea dragons.”

We all bow to them and rise back up. They bow their heads in response. They lower themselves back into the water. They swim out to the Atlantic Ocean to find the ten new ships. They discover, they don’t have far to go. They just reached the Outer Banks to the south. The sea dragons blow water and fire just beyond the horizon from the south. The ships turn around to head North. They decide to use the same landing as the previous fleet did. As they approach the shore. They see us standing there waiting for them.

Once they anchored, they send out their leadership to greet us.

Chief Black Raven speaks up first. “What is your intention on our lands?”

“We are to make peace with you.”

“We don’t believe you, captain. Wizard Richard, get the truth out him.”

Wizard Richard looks at them closely. Soon their eyes are glazed over. “I repeat the question again. What is your intention on our lands?”

“We are to make war with the Indians. We are also here to kill all of the unicorns and the dragons of the world.”

“Are you possessed by black evil demons?”

Their faces start to sweat now as they start to stutter, “Uh, uh, er, uh, er, er . . . No!”

Then Chief Black Raven makes the call. “Do it now!”

I shoot out freeze darts from my gauntlets toward the ships. “Thwip! Thwip! Thwip! . . . .” The darts hit the soldiers and sailors. “Thoo! Thoo! Thoo! . . .”

The darts leave the body and hit them all. Then the darts return back to my gauntlet. “Thwip! Thwip! Thwip! . . . .”

“Dragons memories! Warm them back up and don’t harm the ship! Evil spirits! By the power invested in me by the Creator, I command you to enter this wooden box!” I light up quartz crystal to make a bright white light.

The dragons memories quickly appear and fly toward the ships. Croin warms up the captains standing in front of us. Soon we hear them screaming in pain. They fly toward Wizard Richard who is holding the wooden box.

“ARRRRRGGGGGgggghhhh!! The pain!! I can’t see!!! The light is too bright!!!! NOOOOOoooooo . . . !”

Soon all is quiet. The men groan and get weak. We help the captains to stay standing.

“What happened? Where are we?”

“You are on the Eastern Shore of the Americas. You have come here to make war with us. You have come here to kill all of the unicorns and dragons of this world. We also removed the evil black demon spirits that possessed you. Those spirits are now within this wooden box.”

They all look relieved that the darkness is gone from themselves. “Thank you very, Cherokees. We are sorry for what we would have done here.”

“Be thankful and praise the Creator, captain. It is our intention to remove all of the evil black demons on this world of ours.”

“Well, good luck with that. We’ll be on our way now. We’ll sail back to our home ports in Europe.”

“Thank you, captain.”

The captains get back on board their ships. The raise the anchor and turn around to leave the Eastern Shore and sail back to their home ports.

I look at each one as I ask my next question. “So, how are we going to Hague, Holland to face Leonard and Mullin?”

“I think a good night of sleep will help us right now. We’ll talk about that in the morning. Come, lets fly back to our encampment in the Shenandoah Valley.”

We reconnect with the shamans, Wizard Richard and I. We recite the spell to disappear in a blink of an eye. We fly back across the Appalachian Mountains to the Cherokee encampment in the Shenandoah Valley.

The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 23
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman

The list of characters mentioned in this story belong to the various authors that created them. This is a fan-fiction story.

~~~000~~~

My fairies begin their training sessions with the other fairies right after we left for the Eastern Shore encampment. They all gather together not far from the encampment.

“The first element to learn is the air element. Since we can fly through the air, making the use of the air will be easy for us. Now watch us how we use it.”

Tiger quickly flies in a tight circle to create a mini-tornado. Once it is created, Tigress gets underneath it to hold it in her hand. Then the rest of my fairies quickly get in a circle. They start playing game of ‘catch’ with the mini-tornado by throwing it to one another. Then they all take a hand in dispersing the mini-tornado by flying around it in the opposite direction.

Then the rest of the fairies try to make a mini-tornado. They find it really easy to do that. They created many groups so that each one has a chance to try it. Once the mini-tornados are dispersed into the air, they gather in front of my fairies again.

“That’s great everyone, now for the next air movement. You can send wind slashes from your wings at another person or object. That way you don’t have to be up and close to defend yourselves. It might take some practice until you get it right. For now, we’ll air slice some leaves while they are still on the tree.”

“Also, with more control and practice, you can make the cuts any size you want them.”

“That’s right, Tigress. Let’s show them how it is done. Watch our forward wing motion.”

My fairies fly around in a circle. Then one by one they approach a tree. They do a quick forward horizontal motion with their wings. Then little air currents quickly fly toward a leaf. Each one of them slices a small ‘x’ on a different leaf.

All of the other fairies quickly cheer out loud. Then my fairies take a group of fairies to other trees nearby. Most of the other fairies proved to be fast learners. However, there were some that took more time to get it right. After a half-mark later, they are able to do it. Then they hover in front of my fairies again.

“That’s great, my cousins. Now you need to learn how to do a group effort when you need to.”

My fairies look around for something too heavy to lift. They find an outcropping of large boulders on a nearby hillside.

“This should do, Tiger.”

“Yes, it can work, Ruby. We can have them fan some air to blow the boulders up the hillside. Let’s see if we can do it first.”

They fly in a vertical pattern. They continue to blow the boulder up the hill. They try it with several different sizes.

“We need to build up their confidence and make them heavier each time, Tiger.”

“That’s right, Lavan. Okay, let’s roll them back down the hill and get them into position at the bottom of the hill.”

My fairies soon get them rolling down the hill. They are able to control it so it won’t get rolling out of control. They then get the boulders into position side by side. They fly back to the other fairies and bring them to the boulders.

Once they have arrived, they explain to them what they are trying to do. Then my fairies get into position in front of the boulders. Then as a group, they fly vertically in a circle. Soon they get the boulders rolling up the hill and rolled back down with excellent control.

Then the rest of the fairies try it as well. They do it in groups of ten rolling the boulders up the hill and back down. There were a few times they needed help from my fairies when they tried to roll in back down the hill. After they have gone through the different sizes, they stop to take a rest.

“That was great. Remember, teamwork is very important. So, apparently we need a rest soon. Here is an air movement trick that we learned. We are going to create little ‘air scooters’ underneath us. It will allow us to fly around quickly without exerting too much energy.”

My fairies point their arms and hands underneath them. Then they spin the arms in a tight circle. Quickly, little puffs of air are generated underneath them. They quickly move about the glade. The other fairies catch on really quickly. Soon all of the fairies have little ‘air scooters’ underneath them. They giggle and laugh while they have a game of ‘tag’. After a quarter-mark they stop to catch their breath.

“I don’t know about you, but we are hungry. We burned up a lot of energy. When we get done eating, we’ll then move onto the water element.”

Quickly the unicorn fairies lead my fairies into the woods to find an assortment of nuts and berries to eat. They also change into butterflies so they can drink the nectar from the flowers as well.

After a half-mark of eating, they gather again to learn the water element near a creek that flows into the main river in the valley.

Tiger speaks up, “Water is the flowing element. Water is the element of change. To master water, you must release your emotions to wherever they lead you. Water teaches us acceptance. Let your emotions flow like water. Remember these words.”

“Who told you those words, Tiger?”

“Water Bending Master Pakku told us those words. We met him on the Avatar World in another multi-verse. We committed those words to memory.”

My fairies repeat the words again and again until they get the words memorized.

“We are now going to show you the basic moves. But, first you need to reach out with your minds and hands. Touch the water like this.”

My fairies hover above the water and put their hands into the water. Quickly their eyes glow a bluish color then it fades. The other fairies try it as well. They all became able to connect to the water when their eyes glow a bluish color then it fades.

“Why did we connect to it so fast, Tiger?”

“Because we are part of nature. We are part of the world the Creator created. We are directly connected to it. The world around us becomes our strength. We haven’t learned the earth and fire bending yet, but when we do, we’ll really be strong.”

“Where did you learn these element moves, Tiger?”

“The foundation is found in the martial arts taught in China.”

“We know there are fairies and unicorns in China right now. Some of them are kept hidden for protection from the dark shadow on our world. Let us hope your Richard will be able to defeat them.”

“We know he is able to do it, my cousins. Let’s show you what you can do with water.”

“The first motion is pushing and pulling back the water.”

My fairies put their arms and hands in front of them. They push water forward to create little waves from them. Then they pull back the water to bring the waves back to them.

“The reason we can do this is because of the moon. The moon creates the tides on your world. It is the same with our world.”

All of the fairies line up side by side. They push their hands forward. Then waves of water ripple away from them. Then they cup their hands to pull the water back. They create little waves of water coming back to them. They all smile that they can do it.

“That’s great, my cousins. Now watch our hand and arm movements. We are going to draw out a stream of water and let it fall back into the water.”

Tigress and my fairies do the arm and hand motion to draw out a stream of water and let it fall back into the water.

All of the other fairies give it a try. About half of them this time get the motions right. The others take more practice to get the flowing motion right with the wrist, hand and arm motion. After a few more tries they are all able to do it.

“That’s great. You need to keep practicing those first two motions every day. That way you can stay connected to the water in your mind. Now watch us how we create a water ball and keep it floating in the air.”

Each of my fairies draws out a stream of water. With their other hand, they bring up the water stream and break it from the creek. They gather their hands together as if to form a ball. The water comes up and forms a ball hovering in front of them.

“Now you need to hold it in the air as long as possible. Don’t worry if it falls back down. You are stretching your mind to get it stronger each day.”

The other fairies make the attempt to create a water ball and keep it floating in the air. Because of the experience with the water stream motion, creating the water ball proved to be easier for them. They are able to hold it in the air for five minutes before they let it fall back into the water.

“That’s great. Now there is a unique property about water. When you get your winters here, what happens?”

Some fairies quickly shout out really loud, “The water gets turned into ice.”

“That’s right. Now we are going to turn the water ball into ice and back into water.”

“How do you do that?”

“By using your mind again. With your mind you must lower the water temperature to make cold. Then with your mind, you can warm it back up to make it water again.”

My fairies quickly show them how it is done. Then the other fairies try it for themselves. Most of them get it right. It takes another five minutes for all them are able to do it.

“That’s great again, my cousins. Now here is something you can do with water. You can make ice weapons, ice shields and host of other objects. You can even make an ice weapon that will be hard as steel so it won’t shatter. It can even pierce a metal shield if you want to. You must use great wisdom when you need to make a weapon to defend yourself. There are other ways to defend yourself. We’ll show you how.”

Soon my fairies create several ice weapons of spears. They ‘throw’ them at several boulders along the shore line or into the ground. But the best defense they are shown is to use water streams around themselves. My fairies do a quick demonstration of fighting each other. Each one is able to defend itself from the water and ice attacks that is thrown at them. Soon, the other fairies quickly realize that is a better approach to defend themselves and their own unicorns.

“Remember it is up to your imagination how you want to use the water bending element. The last thing we need to show you is this. Water is also used in the healing arts. Water is needed for life. Water can heal simple cuts, if the heart stops after being hit by lightning, you can restart the heart. However, it cannot mend broken bones, that will take the effort of a healer or a doctor who has that knowledge.”

Tigress continues with the teaching lesson, “That’s right, Tiger. The first thing to remember when you heal with water, you must let the water do the healing. Do not use your own life force to heal the body. If you did, then you will end up sacrificing your life for another. Remember, life is a precious gift from the Creator.”

“Now watch us how we can heal a simple cut.” Tiger quickly flies about to find an animal. He finds a small family of deers nearby. He explains to them what is going to happen. They agree to show and tell.

Lavan takes his knife and cuts a small gash on the deer’s rear flank about an inch long, a drop of blood comes out. The other fairies gather around to watch the demonstration. Tiger takes some water and holds it in his hand. He places his hand on the cut. He concentrates on the wound and the hands. His hands soon glow a golden color. They see the wound on the skin become whole once more like it was never harmed.

All of the fairies cheer that the cut is healed. The other fairies quickly go up to the other deers. Some find some scars on the male head deer. They hold some water in their hands and place it on the scars. Soon those scars are healed as if they were never in a fight. Some of the other fairies quickly make small cuts on the other deers. It doesn’t take long until everyone has a chance to try it.

The family of deer give their thanks that their old scars are healed before they head back into the forest.

“Well, that is all we have to tell you. Now you can help your own unicorns and yourselves better protection.”

All of them cheer and thank my fairies many times over. Then they fly back to rejoin their unicorns and the Cherokees back in the encampment. They do their own show and tell for all of them. All of them give praise to the Creator that they can do more than ever before.

My Brianna tried to do the same thing for the ladies and the shamans the healing arts. It is discovered they can use the water aspect of healing for the body. The shamans greatly thank the Creator for showing them another method to help heal the body. They are also relieved that the women can do it as well. They can’t be everywhere at once. They decide the more difficult healing cases will come to them.

However, what is unique, the men and the braves discovered they can’t do any air or water bending yet. When they tried it, they got very little results for their efforts by themselves. But, when acting as a group, they discover they can do the impossible.

We arrive back in the camp from the Eastern Shore encampment in the afternoon. Everyone shows their new abilities to the Chieftains and the other braves. The Chieftains give praise to the Creator that they can do more than ever.

Everyone lends a hand in making a grand celebration evening repast for everyone present. Another lodge is set up for my Brianna and me to sleep in tonight. My fairies agreed to spend the night with the other fairies. I see they have made great friends among themselves. I wonder if any of them will stay here or be with me this time.

Brianna feels my emotional heart strings being pulled. She reads my mind very quickly. She takes her hand and puts it around my waist and draws me closer to her. “I feel your pain and misgivings, Richard. Let us pray they come back to us.”

“I hope so too, Brianna.”

We turn around to join the others in the encampment. About a dozen small fires are lit up to feed everyone. The women walk down to the stream to catch the fish for evening repast and collecting fruits and nuts from the trees. Corn is brought out from their food bags they brought with them. It takes about a mark on the sundial to get everything ready, cooked and served up to everyone present.

Uktena and her two children fly over to the main river in the valley. They swoop down and put their mouths into the water. They quickly gather up fish into their mouths to eat. Once they had their fill, they fly back to their lair. It is located in the Ohio Valley where they have their nest. Uktena and her brood do not dwell in the mountains like the other dragons do. They like to see the rolling landscape before them. They have excellent eyesight to see very far. Uktena gives the good news to her mate and her other two children that the Omega Unicorn and the Omega Unicorn Dragon are now among the animals in the multi-verses.

We have a grand time eating the evening repast. Afterwards, we all give thanks to the Creator for his wonderful blessings. We do this by chanting a Cherokee song of thanks to the Creator. I discover it is the same song that I learned back on my Earth when I’m with my Cherokee friends.”

Then we watch the sunset in the western horizon. We see the clouds change color like the colors of the rainbow. We see a thunderstorm cloud on the horizon. It will miss to the north of us. We give thanks again when we see the rainbow set in the clouds. Then we see the stars shining brightly. I see the same constellations as I saw them back on Earth. About an hour later, the full moon comes up very brightly to make its dance across the night sky.

After we see the spectacle before us, we all retire to our lodges. The unicorns and the centaurs gather together under some leafy trees. The fairies quickly make grass beds for the night. They use large magnolia leaves to cover themselves for the night.

During the night, Wizard Richard, Sorceress Brianna, my Brianna and I have the same dream together. We find ourselves somewhere else. It is not the flower field in heaven. We see a dark gray pallor over the land. We see demons flying through the air wherever they want to go.

“Where are we, Wizard Richard? I don’t recognize this place.”

Sorceress Brianna and Wizard Richard quickly hold each other hands. “I know where we are at. We are in the Isles. This is where we come from. We fled to the Americas once we heard there is a murder contract out for us.”

My Brianna and I hold our hands as well. “Our families are from the Isles as well, my friends. However, they fled the Isles about three hundred years ago. We know we are descended from royalty that goes all the way back to King Arthur.”

“Will you ever claim the throne again?”

“That will be the hard part. Right now Mordred’s Legacy has been keeping the current monarchy in power. The Mordred and Morgana Le Fay on my world made a deal with the devil. They have elfish blood within them so they can live a long life. Right now we are just waiting for the right moment to claim the throne. We think it will happen when some disastrous event will happen to the monarchy line. Are you related to any monarchy on the Isles? When did the darkness arive here?”

“We are from royalty, Richard. The darkness arrived here about five hundred years ago. It quickly spread throughout Europe, Africa and Asia and the islands. The Americas are the last continents for them to conquer. The center of the darkness is in the Hague, Holland.”

Sorceress Brianna speaks up, “Because of the darkness, the demons make sure the royalty are possessed first. When I was born, my parents discovered I couldn’t be possessed. I have an uncle and aunt who hid me in their family in Scotland. My uncle told me I had a white glow about me when a demon tried to possess me. When I became of age, I was told our family heritage. I was told there is an ancient prophecy that I would be paired with my husband who would be the Omega Unicorn Dragon. He would be from Wales.”

Then Wizard Richard speaks up next. “Yes, I am from Wales, Richard. I am descended from royalty as well. Our kingship runs through my bloodlines. My father is a Duke in Wales. His uncle is King of Wales. Just like what happened to Brianna also happened to me. I too glowed with a bright white light when a demon tried to possess me when I was born. I was immediately hidden from the rest of the royalty in Wales. I took residence with the Moores in Wales.”

“Is there a Caledfwlch in Wales?”

“Yes, there is, Richard. It is currently buried in the lake at this moment.”

“So that means you have your own King Arthur background.”

“That’s right, Richard. However, our Mordred and Morgana Le Fay didn’t cause problems for King Arthur. They lead good lives. The royalty line is still intact since King Arthur.”

“That’s interesting, Wizard Richard. There are similarities and yet there are differences between us.”

“Yes, there is, Richard. In our prophecy, it is the Omega Unicorn Dragon who will reestablish the light on the world. The darkness will be defeated once and for all. They only question I have, since I am the Omega Unicorn right now. How do I become the Omega Unicorn Dragon?”

“You will need to make a trip to China. There you will learn the way of the dragon. It is directly opposite from the Isles on the globe. I learned my animal fighting skills from the Shaolin Monks.”

“But you haven’t been to China yet. How or where did you learn it?”

“About three hundred years ago, the Shaolin Monks were persecuted by the ruling Kings and Emperors in China at the time. They fled to the other parts of the world. They set up new Shaolin Temples wherever they could. They set up several temples here in the Americas.”

“So, they came to your America. It looks like I will have to go to China.” Wizard Richard turns to his Brianna. “Are you ready to make a journey to China?”

“I will go wherever you go, my husband. We have a destiny to fulfill on our world.”

“That we do, my love.”

They hug and kiss each other warmly. A white glow appears around them. Then they come apart and look at us. The white light fades a bit.

“Is there any light in the Isles, Wizard Richard?”

“There is Richard. We must come here first before we go the Hague. I know an enclave of Wizards and Sorceress here. They are doing the best they can in fighting the darkness. However, it has been a standoff. With your presence, they will gain new confidence that all is not lost. It is located in the Forbidden Forest in Scotland.”

“Is there a castle there by the name of Hogwarts?”

They smile back, “Yes there is, Richard. Apparently there is a Hogwarts on your world as well. It is in Hogwarts where we met for the first time.”

“There is, Wizard Richard. A hundred years ago, a young wizard by the name of Harry Potter defeated Voldemort.”

“That’s interesting. Our Harry Potter is the current head of the school. It looks like we’ll have an interesting conversation when we meet him.”

“Yes, we will.”

We then fly back to the Americas. We see the sun coming up from the horizon. We enter back into our bodies and wake up well rested in the morning. We get ourselves dressed appropriately for the day. I put on my armor first, then the outer clothing to hide it. I put my helmet and the gauntlets in the satchel. We step out of the lodge to meet the morning sun. We see my fairies flying to us to greet us in the morning. We see they are not alone.

We see Stellarwind and Sapphire approaching us. Then we see Lavan and Bianca each have a fairy with them, hand in hand. They introduce themselves to us.

“Hello, my name is White Acacia and this is my sister, White Rose. We are from Stellarwind and Sapphire. I think we have fallen in love with your Bianca and Lavan. Will you please accept us into your family?”

Brianna and I look at each other with a slight smile. We turn to face them.

“It was bound to happen. Stellarwind and Sapphire do you agree to the arrangement?”

“We do, Richard and Brianna. So, far these are the only two who wish to come with you. So far, none of your other fairies wish to stay with us at this time.”

“Then Brianna and I agree to the arrangement. White Acacia and White Rose are accepted into my family. Lavan and Bianca are heart tied to my wife. They now have their own soul mates to help my Brianna.”

All of the fairies quickly cheer for their acceptance. The four of them quickly fly to Brianna and sit on her shoulders. They quickly hum a tune of love and togetherness. A tear comes down my Brianna’s face. They quickly taste the tears and wipe it from her face. Then they sense something new about Brianna. They hover in front of Brianna. They put their hands onto her stomach.

“You are pregnant. Is this your first child, Brianna?”

“It is White Rose. We just consummated our marriage some time ago.”

“Congratulations!” Then they fly over to me and check me out. “You are not pregnant again, Richard.”

“I am not, White Acacia. I am currently in my six-month rest period. My last pair I gave birth to are Levi and Shiri. It is during my six-month rest period that I train the hardest to earn the Black sashes for the Shaolin Dragon Master title.”

“Well then, we’ll rejoice when you give birth to another pair of fairies.” They fly up to Stellarwind and Sapphire. “We’ll miss you, father and mother.”

“We know, White Acacia and White Rose. We will all miss you. Be glad in your hearts that you found your soul mates. Think of us when you need to. You are joined with the Omega Unicorn Dragon on his Earth. You won’t be alone. You will help them to achieve their destiny. There are other fairies on their world that you will meet. You will help them when needed. Grow in love with your new family.”

They each shed a tear. White Acacia and White Rose quickly put their hands into the unicorn’s tears and taste it. They put their own tears onto their unicorn lips to remember their taste and smell.

Then they fly to Brianna and sit with their soul mates on her shoulders. We gather with the Cherokees to have our morning repast. The fairies all have nuts and fruits to eat After we have the morning meal of fish and corn, wooden goblets are brought out from the lodges. All of the centaurs, the Cherokees, and us each have a wooden goblet in our hands.

Chief Black Raven speaks up next, “This goblet contains fruit juice from the trees that we grow on our farms. The fruit tree is the pawpaw tree. It is a very thick yellow fruit juice. It is very good for you. Let this cup of juice be a sign of good will for all of us. We are thankful that we have our own Omega Unicorn now. He and his wife will rule with justice when they reign on the Isles. If they don’t, they are greatly welcomed here to stay among us.”

“Where will they stay, Chief Black Raven?”

“They will stay in Atali Unega. There is a cabin near one of our ceremonial fire locations. It is where we do the Corn Dance.”

“That’s interesting, Chief Black Raven. On my world, there is the same cabin. It is also located near that twin fire ceremonial location. The Cherokees also do the Corn Dance there as well.”

“Then that is a special connection between our worlds. There is continuity throughout the cosmos in that one location. Indeed we’ll celebrate the time of the Corn Dance with special emphasis. From there, peace will reign throughout the cosmos. We will thank the Creator for his wonderful blessings upon us for all time.”

We lift the cup up. Then we drink the thick nectar. My fairies dip their hands into the thick juice to taste it as well.

“This is good father, mother, Omega. We need to have this fruit tree as well.”

“We will Emeril. I’ll make sure we have a tree at the cabin and our future house.”

“Now go to the Isles. Bring light back to our world. Defeat the darkness and drive it away from all of our lands. You have taught us well on how we can defeat the demons. They will flee from us once they realized they are not welcomed here anymore.”

We put our satchels upon our shoulders. Wizard Richard makes sure the wooden box is in his satchel. Our Briannas put their hands onto our shoulders. My fairies quickly fly into our coat pockets. Then all of the shamans gather around us. They each bring out a quartz crystal. They recite a short spell to make them glow with a bright white light. Then we recite the spell to transport ourselves to the Isles. We disappear in a blink of an eye and fly to the East. We fly across the Atlantic Ocean at a very high rate of speed.

“Apparently the white light gave us an extra boost to fly faster, Wizard Richard.”

“Yes it did, Richard.”

Then we see a black shadow on the horizon. As we approach the Isles, we see a white lighted area in Scotland.

“That must be the Forbidden Forest.”

“Yes it is, Richard. I estimate it is noon time here. The sun is directly above us. We’ll land and appear just inside the front gate entrance.”

The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 24
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman

The list of characters mentioned in this story belong to the various authors that created them. This is a fan-fiction story.

~~~000~~~

Then we see a black shadow on the horizon. As we approach the Isles, we see a white-lighted area in Scotland.

“That must be the Forbidden Forest.”

“Yes it is, Richard. I estimate it is noon time here. The sun is directly above us. We’ll land and appear just inside the front gate entrance.”

As we make our descent, we see four guards standing watch at the gates. They are looking out into the darkness in all directions. Once they see a demon spirit flies toward the fence, the demon spirit gets an electric shock in the air above it.

It quickly retreats back into the darkness in pain. “ARRRRgghh . . . the pain!!! We hate it!!!”

“That’s another one, Brant.”

“Yes it is Cyril. They’ll keep trying. Our perimeter force field is holding.”

~~~000~~~

“Richard, put your hand on my other shoulder. I’ll get us through the force field.”

“Okay, Wizard Richard.” I put my left hand on Wizard Richard’s right shoulder.

Then Wizard Richard puts a matching force field around all of us. We make it through the force field.

~~~000~~~

The guards see a familiar disturbance in the force field above them.

“We have another visitor, Brant.”

“I see it, let’s hope they bring some good news.”

We land on the ground and appear in a blink of an eye.

The moaning and groaning outside the property intensify greatly.

“OOOOoooh. . . . oooooOOOOOOoooo. . . .MMMMMMmmmmm . . . !!”
“Jo . . . in with us! Beeee. . . .stronnn . . . .ger!”
“MMMMmmm . . . .Ooooo . . . OOOOOO . . . mmmmmmMMMM!!!”

Immediately the guards recognize Wizard Richard and Sorceress Brianna. They are taken aback when they see their twins.

Wizard Richard puts a finger to his lips momentarily, “Shh . . . don’t say our names out loud.”

“We understand. It is good to see you. Why have you come back? Do you have some good news for us?”

“Are these your twins?”

“We don’t want to say anything right now, Cyril and Brant, not with them out there. We need to get to the castle.”

“We understand. Go quietly to the castle.”

The moaning and the groaning continue to intensify outside the property.

“MMMM . . . mmmm . . . ooooOOOOOOoooo . . . mmmmm . . . MMMM . . . mmmm. . . .!”
“Jo . . . in . . . us . . . s . . . s. . . . Be stronnnn . . . ger!”
“OOOoooooooOOOOOOOOOOOoooo . . . .mmmm. . . . MMMMM . . . mmmm . . . ooooo . . . OOOOO . . . OOOOoooooo!!”
They send word to their master that four people have arrived at Hogwarts.

We walk down the roadway until we get to the carriage stop.

We see several birds taking notice of us. We look up at them and speak to their minds.

Yes, I am the Omega Unicorn now. My wife has been changed as well.

We’ll tell the others in the Forbidden Forest that you have come back. Who are these twins with you, Wizard?

The other Richard is a full fledge Omega Unicorn Dragon. He was the one who I summoned to help us in our time of need. They and their fairies are from another multi-verse.

Welcome to Hogwarts and the Forbidden Forest. We praise the Creator that you have come to help us.

I am pleased to be here, feathered friends. Hopefully, tomorrow everyone on this Earth will be free from the dark shadow. I know who brought this darkness here. I won’t say his name yet.

We understand Omega Unicorn Dragon. We’ll praise the Creator when the darkness is gone from our world. We’ll send word and hope to all of the animals here. They fly off in several directions. They sing out their songs as they fly away from us.

We get in the carriage. The driver snaps the reigns. The two horses quickly gallop down the road to Hogwarts Castle. We are deep in thought of what to say to the people gathered here. We put our arms around each other as we make the trip. Along the way we see homes built.

I ask Wizard Richard who is across from me in the carriage, “How many are here?”

“There are about five thousand people here who sought refuge from the invading darkness. They can’t take any more people. If they did, they would disturb the sanctity of the First Ones who live here for their own protection.”

It takes fifteen minutes to arrive at the main entrance to Hogwarts Castle. It is the same layout as I saw it in the movies back on Earth. We get off the carriage and walk hand in hand with our loved ones. We cross the stone bridge that leads to the main entrance. Several more guards stand at attention as we walk past them. Then two more guards open the large doors to the castle. As soon as we enter the castle, the doors close behind us with an echo. “Bam!”

~~~000~~~

In his private bedroom chamber, King Leopold gets up from the bed and sees his next conquest already asleep.

“Sleep well, my pretty. When you give birth, it will be stillborn. Heh, heh, heh, . . .”

Then a black raven flies through the open window. It lands on the table. The bird’s face metamorphs into a black human face. King Leopold looks at the demon. “Well? What do you have to say?”

“I just received word that four people arrived at Hogwarts.”

“Is there any more information?”

“They said that the two men appeared as twins and their wives appear as twins. They kept the guards from saying their names.”

“Hmm . . . two sets of twins arrived at the castle. That’s interesting. Since they didn’t say their names, I have no idea whom they are. Have you found the fabled sword in the Isles?”

“No my Lord. We don’t know which lake they buried it in.”

“Well, if and when we do find it, I will corrupt the sword so that I can use it against them.”

“Yes, my King.”

“Is there any word of our fleets sailing to the Americas?”

“There is no word at all, my King. We should be getting daily reports from them directly, but we are not. It is as if they are blocked from coming here.”

“We armed them well. They should have no problems in defeating their shamans’ magic. It has worked to perfection in the other countries we conquered. Something is not right here. But, how can I worry about it, if I don’t know what the problem is?”

“Is there something you wish for me to do for you?”

“Yes, focus your efforts on the dwarf colonies in the Alps. We’ve got to find out how they know what we are doing before we get there.”

“Yes, it’s driving us batty how they are two steps ahead of us all the time, my King. We’ll keep trying, my King.”

“You may go now.”

The bird bows his face downward. He raises it back up and metamorphs the face back into a bird face. The bird flaps its wings and flies out of the room through the same window that he came through.

King Leopold smiles evilly, “I think it is time to cause some more sinners to sin. I love it, no matter hard they tried to repent of their sins, it always comes back to haunt them. Heh, heh, heh . . . !”

King Leopold gets dressed for a morning walk. He exits the bedroom and looks at the well-endowed scantily dressed maid standing there. “You can go in now to clean up. Once she is dressed, you can escort her out.”

The maid curtseyed and rises back up, “Yes, my King Leopold.” The maid opens the door and walks inside.

~~~000~~~

Deep in the Alps, several dwarfs are looking at the various images being projected from the bank of contact crystals in front of them.

“If he ever finds out how we are doing it, Gyldor. He’ll have a heart attack. We have to give praise to the Creator that we were able to put contact crystals in the chandeliers when this dark shadow arrived here a thousand years ago.”

“Yeah, but he has no heart to begin with, Braghorn. Who just arrived at Hogwarts?”

“Wizard Richard and Sorceress Brianna and their twins arrived at Hogwarts. I don’t know where they are from, Gyldor.”

“What is the energy reading from the mystery twins?”

He passes his hand over the image, “Adjusting the spectrum of the image . . . what?!!??. He looks at the bar graph on the bottom of the image. “It is off the scale!! According to these readings, they are more powerful than Leopold and Mulford.”

“Do you think they are here to confront them, Braghorn?”

“It’s possible. We’ll need to keep our eyes on the chamber in the Hague. If I wanted to defeat them, it would be there.”

“Aye, we’ll need to inform our Dwarf Kings of the situation. This might be the day that we finally get rid of the dark shadow on our Earth.”

They activate the contact crystals to reach the ten Dwarf Kings throughout the world. They inform them the latest developments at Hogwarts Castle.

~~~000~~~

Then everyone turns to see who comes to visit Hogwarts.

They all scream with joy when they recognize Wizard Richard and Sorceress Brianna. Most of them give us a double take looks when they see there are twins here.

“Richard and Brianna, it’s good to see you again! How is it in the Americas?”

“Have the Indians been treating you both with kindness?”

“You haven’t been sleeping on the ground have you?”

“Who are these twins? They look like you! Are you sure you didn’t clone yourselves? You know clone spells don’t last long.”

“Are these your doubles? Wherever did you find them?”

“Have you come for the sword? Are you ready to be King of Wales?”

Wizard Richard and Sorceress Brianna hug and shake hands with as many people as possible. Some of them also greet us as well. We try to keep them from hugging us too much. I don’t want them to hurt my fairies sitting in our coat pockets.

Then a bearded giant man walks up to us. My fairies change into butterfly mode and fly out of our coat pockets. They hover around us.

“Hello, Richard and Brianna. It is good to see you again.”

“It’s good to see you again, Chadwith.”

Chadwith looks at us and our butterflies. “I might be wrong, but I’m probably not. I think we have some fairies here. They are usually with the unicorns.”

Wizard Richard motions with his hands to come in close. Chadwith bends down to listen in. “You’re right, Chadwith. Right now, don’t go blabbing right now. We’ll tell you during the meeting today.”

“I get it, Richard.” Chadwith stands erect now. “Welcome to Hogwarts. Be careful where you walk. There are too many surprises around here. I’ll see you all later.” Chadwith turns around and goes about his business.

Then everyone leaves when an instructor comes up to greet us. He immediately recognizes them. He pauses to look at them. He comes in close to speak quietly, “You are very different, Richard and Brianna. I think you have become more powerful.”

“This is only half of it, Mr. Kendall. I need to learn the other half in China.”

“China? What is there for you to learn?”

“We’ll tell you later. We need to convene a meeting with the leadership here. I’ll explain the appearance of my twins here.”

“This should be a good story. We’ll let you know when the meeting is.”

“It must be today. Tomorrow we’ll be going into the lion’s den to the south of us. Trust me, we’ll be victorious.”

“Hmm . . . okay, Richard. We’ll discuss all of the options. Have you eaten yet?”

“We just ate a half mark ago in the Americas for our morning repast.”

“How fast did you fly to get here? Normally that takes two marks to fly here.”

“Again, we’ll explain it during the meeting.”

“Sigh . . . okay, Richard. I’ll wait for it. Well, take your rest. What are your guests’ names?”

“Richard and Brianna.”

“What?” He looks at us with wonderment.

All four of us smile at the same time.

Mr. Kendal moans when he sees our smiles, “Ohhhh . . . I’m getting too old for this. Very well.” Mr. Kendall looks at us. “Welcome to Hogwarts. Enjoy your rest. We’ll let you know when and where the meeting will be held.”

“Thank you, Mr. Kendall. We’ll wait patiently until then.”

“Sheesh! He even sounds like you. This is too much!” Mr. Kendall turns around to find the leadership of Hogwarts Castle. All four of us giggle and laugh as we see Mr. Kendall shakes his head from side to side.

“So where do we go now, Wizard Richard?”

“Come with me, we’ll go to the library. That is a good place to start.”

We follow Wizard Richard and Brianna down the hallways and taking a few turns to the left and right. My fairies follow us in butterfly mode. He opens one of the double doors. We walk inside and see rows and rows of books up to the ceiling. The shelves cover every square inch of the walls. We see several people are here as well.

“So, which book are you looking for, Wizard Richard?”

“One of my instructors showed it to me while I was here. I put a finder bookmark spell on the book itself.” He takes out his wand and points it out in the air. He recites the words, “Bring the Moore and Wilson book to me.”

A book flies out of the very top shelf of the library. It floats down and comes to his hand. He brings it over to the table. He puts his wand back into his cloak. We gather around to look at it. My fairies land on the table. They change back into fairies in little flashes of light.

“This is an old book, Wizard Richard.”

“How do you know it is your family history book?”

“Yes, it’s an old book. My instructor passed his hand over the book to activate the opening spell. Then he had me put my hand and Brianna’s hand on the book at the same time. It will only open to us when we do it at the same time.”

Wizard Richard and Sorceress Brianna put their hands on top of the book at the same time. The book glows a white light then it fades. Then the book opens automatically to the first page. An image of a man appears above the first page. All of a sudden, my Brianna, my fairies and I get a shock. We are seeing the SRU Wizard!

“Greetings, Wizard Richard and Sorceress Brianna. What do you wish to know?’

“That’s the Grand Wizard from my Earth or Merlin. He is also known as the SRU Wizard.”

The SRU Wizard turns to us. “Ahh . . . I see you have met your counterparts, Wizard Richard. Welcome to the Magic Verse. Stop, before you ask your next question. I know what the answer is. The simple answer is that I can’t be everywhere at once. I help out the Emissaries any way I can.”

Then we all giggle and laugh as quietly as possible.

“The other answer is this. After my time on Richard’s Earth as Merlin to King Arthur.” He points to me. “I became Merlin here to this King Arthur.” He points to Wizard Richard and Sorceress Brianna. “They are two different people. However, from my experience with my first King Arthur, I became determined the events here would be different. Therefore, Mordred and Morgan Le Fay lived a better life here. They didn’t cause the problems that I had with the first King Arthur.”

“So, what about us, Merlin?”

Merlin or the SRU Wizard looks at Wizard Richard and Sorceress Brianna. “You are half way there to be the Omega Unicorn Dragon for your world. Learn all you can from your counterparts before you go to China. The ultimate powers of the two Arresting Angels are still with this Richard and Brianna and the pair on the Anti-verse. But in both of your cases, you will be powerful enough to defeat and banish any new dark shadow that comes from the Hell Galaxy in the future. You will be powerful enough to send them back where they come from.”

“That means, they will be less powerful than the ones here.”

“That’s right, Wizard Richard.” Then he looks at us. “I am very proud in how you are progressing, Richard, Brianna and your fairies. I know you have a new pair with you. There are still two more magical worlds to visit. Take care until we meet again.” Then he disappears from above the first page.

Wizard Richard turns the page. “This book contains the lineage of both of us. Do you have something similar on your world?”

“We do, Wizard Richard. It is in two separate books. They were written down by the Goddess Rhiannon a long time ago. She is still exiled on our Earth.”

“Ah . . . the Goddess Rhiannon. It is told the Celtic Gods had a hand in making the Caledfwlch.”

“That is the same story told on my world as well.”

Then we look at each other quickly.

“You don’t think they made nine copies of those swords?”

“It’s possible, Richard. Anything is possible from the Creator. The way things are going now, I wouldn’t be surprised. But, if there are two of you with the ultimate power, its possible two of those swords are more powerful than the others.”

“Yeah, I think you’re right. It’s also possible the nine swords have different attributes.”

“You could be right on that, too.”

Then the door opens into the Library. We see Mr. Kendall walking up to us. He stops to take a look at us. Then he sees the fairies. “Mr. Chadwith is right. There are fairies here.” Then he looks at us. “Come, it is time for the meeting. I suggest you stay in your fairy mode. There will be some fairies and a unicorn with us during this meeting.”

Wizard Richard closes the book. The book flies back up to the top shelf and sets itself back into the same empty location where it came from. We follow Mr. Kendall out of the Library. We go in a different direction this time. We walk down several hallways and make a few turns to another pair of double doors. He opens one of them. We follow him inside. Mr. Kendall closes the door. Then a white light glow appears on the doors and it fades from view.

We walk into their assembly room. It is a round room. It is like a small three-quarter circular arena with tables and chairs as they descend upward. There is a twelve pointed star symbol in the center of the floor. Within that star is a nine pointed star. Within that, is a round symbol with the letter ‘S’. There are two dots in the larger part of the lobes of the letter. We look around and see thirty robed men and women sitting in the chairs. Chadwith is sitting on a large chair on the main floor. We don’t see the unicorn and fairies yet. They are probably waiting for the right time to reveal themselves. As I look at each face, I see one that gets my attention. I see the familiar forehead scar on a gray bearded gentleman. I speak to Brianna with my mind. That has to be Harry Potter, Brianna.

It’s possible, Richard.

Then another robed gentleman walks in to join us. He addresses the assembly. It is Mr. Kendall.

“Ladies and Gentleman of the Hogwarts School of Witchcraft and Wizardry. More than a thousand years ago, a dark shadow invaded our world. Scholars from around the world have been trying to determine what this dark shadow is. But, according to the records, this dark shadow starts to change people’s minds and attitudes. The best we can determine, this dark shadow contained evil demon spirits. We tried to evict these demons through the typical exorcism rites. We soon learned they are actual demon angels who can possess people. They have spread their evil shadow on the main continent of Europe and Asia. It quickly spread to Africa and the islands. The only land they couldn’t touch then, was the Isles and the Americas. We were at a loss on how to fight them. None of our methods worked.”

“Then one day, about five hundred years ago, the dark shadow established itself here on the Isles. People sought refuge wherever they could. They fled to the churches mainly. That lasted for about fifty years before the next generation succumbed to the possession. We then heard the voices in the dark shadow. They told us they were searching for the Omega Unicorn Dragon. We asked our First Ones in the Forbidden Forest what it meant. They told us it would be somebody who would drive out the dark shadows until the Ultimate Last Battle. We asked them who and where the Omega Unicorn Dragon would come from. They said it would be a future king and queen from the four ancient houses of the Isles. They said the Omega Unicorn Dragon would reclaim the sword.”

“We then decided that we had to secure our heritage as quickly as possible. The Caledfwlch was thrust back into the stone from whence it came. We used our strongest magic to get it back into the stone. Then it was sunk back into the lake to hide it.”

“We asked the First Ones again how would we know which descendant would be one.”

“They said the bodies of the would-be King and Queen would glow with a white glow when a demon would try to possess them. The white glow would expel the demon spirit.”

“We waited for generations to see who would be the chosen King and Queen. Then about twenty-five years ago, it finally happened.” Mr. Kendall points his finger at Wizard Richard and Sorcerer Brianna. “When they were born, their bodies glowed white to expel the demon spirits. With the permission of the families, we raised them here in the Forbidden Forest. We educated them and told them of the prophecy here at Hogwarts. When they graduated from Hogwarts, they were titled as full fledged Wizard and Sorceress.”

“Then we heard from among the possessed people, there is a contract to murder them. We sent them to the Americas to hide. They hid among the Cherokees for years. That was the last we heard of them.”

“Wizard Richard and Sorceress Brianna, please tell us the rest of the story.”

“We will, my friends. My Cherokee friends put us in a cabin which is located in the heart of the Cherokee Nation. They taught and showed us everything they could. We saw unicorns, centaurs, flying dragons and fairies in the Americas. They are beautiful to behold. The unicorns brought peace to all of the Americas. The dragons helped protected their lands.”

Then Sorceress Brianna speaks up next, “Then one day, while we were inside the cabin. A circle of light appeared around us and we vanished in a blink of an eye. The next moment, we appeared on a star ship that belongs to the Emissaries.”

“Who are these Emissaries, Wizard Richard?”

“They are the angels or representatives of the Creator himself.”

Most of the people exclaim out really loud, “The Creator?!”

The four of us and my fairies smile together.

“That’s right, my friends.”

“Where did they take you?”

“They took us to Christmas World. It is one of the intersecting worlds that holds the multi-verses together. When we arrived there, we discovered there is a total of nine pairs of Richards and Briannas.” He points his hand to us. “This is one of them. This is Richard and Brianna from another Earth that is parallel to us. What is unique about these two, Richard is a full fledge Omega Unicorn Dragon. He is very powerful. He has earned the first black sash that leads to the ten black sashes for the Shaolin Dragon Master title.”

My Brianna and I nod our heads down and up to them. When we look back up, I see someone who looks very nervous. His forehead is sweating a few drops of sweat. He takes a handkerchief to wipe his forehead dry. I also see the Head Master reposition himself in his seat a few times.

Did you see that, Croin? I think we have a demon spy here. He must have been here before they erected the force field.

I see him, Richard. I’m ready when you are.

Then they all look at us.

“So, you are Richard and Brianna from another multi-verse. He also says you are the Omega Unicorn Dragon for your Earth. Do you have the proof you are the Omega Unicorn Dragon?”

“I do, sir. Before I reveal myself, I would like to ask a few questions.”

“You may go ahead.”

“What is the meaning of the symbols on this floor? I’m just curious about them.”

“The twelve pointed star is for the twelve months in a year. The nine pointed star is for the nine emotions or attributes of men and women. The circle with the ‘S’ is for the two halves of being bad or good.”

“I see, to me that represents something else.”

“What do they mean to you?”

“The twelve pointed star is for the twelve multi-verses in the Creation from the Creator. I can go along with your explanation for the other two symbols.”

“There are twelve multi-verses? We find that hard to believe.”

“Then perhaps I need to step into the circle and prove it to you. I think it is designed to identify the Omega Unicron Dragon.” I walk into the center of the symbol. Immediately the Yin Yang symbol lights up with a white and black light. “That is the Yin Yang symbol. It represents the good and evil in people. You must have martial art training to know what the symbol means.”

Then the nine pointed star lights up. “This star is for the nine emotions or attributes of the human soul.” Then the twelve pointed star lights up. “This is for the twelve multi-verses the Creator created.”

I then project out my twelve unicorn images and feathered wings. Each unicorn image appears on a point of the twelve pointed star faces outward. Then I retract my feathered wings and project out my dragon wings.

The man is sweating profusely now. He can’t keep himself in check anymore. He quickly metamorphs into a winged demon angel!!

“Die!!! Omega Unicorn Dragon!! Die!!! I don’t know how you escaped our traps. But we have been given orders to kill all of the Omega Unicorn Dragons in the multi-verses!!” He leaps up to the table in front of him.

Everyone screams in astonishment!
“EEEEeeekk!”
“There is a demon here!!!”
“How did he get past our force field!!”

He brings out a black blade from behind him. He flashes it out quickly.

The twelve unicorns’ images quickly return back into me. I bring up my right hand and point it at him. “Armor on!!” In a blink of an eye, my helmet, my gauntlets appear on my hand. My outer clothes disappear in a blink of an eye and get folded up in my clothes satchel. I concentrate on the cool air moisture in the room. I bring it together in the air. I create a water ball. I shoot it at the demon’s neck. It flies through the air and hits him in the neck. I quickly turn it into steel ice!!

The demon screams in pain. “AARRRrrrrghhhh! The pain!!!”

I hold him floating in the air. I bring him closer and keep him from getting within arms reach of his slashing sword. He squirms and tries to twist himself free. He slashes out with his sword from time to time.

The crowd quiets down once they see I have everything under control. Wizard Richard, Sorceress Brianna, my Brianna and my fairies are all smiling widely.

The demon angel screams a question at me. “Which world are you from?”

“I am from the Earth where Azazel was thrown down to!!”

“ARRRRrrgggg!!! No!!! That’s impossible!!! Your family line should have been killed off! You should have been killed in the plane crash!!!”

“I was still in school, idiot!! It was my plan to be there when the semester ended. It was Sauron’s Spirit who caused the plane to crash into the car that carried my family. They decided to drive there instead of taking the plane to fly in!!!”

“ARRRRRgggghhhh!! NOOOOOooooo!!!! What will you do with me?!!” He continues to squirm and tries to get free. Once his left hand touches the ice collar, he yanks his hand away in pain, “The pain!!! Curse you Omega!!! The ice on my neck is burning me!!! Curse you Omega!!!”

“Before I cast you out, you are going to do something for me.”

“I’ll never help you!!!”

I stare at him. Soon he gets a glassy eyed look. His body goes limp, yet he still holds his sword in his right hand. “You are going to answer my questions now.”

In a monotone voice, “I will answer the Omega Unicorn Dragon’s questions. What do you wish to know?”

The people in the room see that I have mesmerized the demon angel to tell the truth. They whisper among themselves.

“Incredible, he has him under control.”

“I didn’t think it was possible.”

“My first two questions are this. How many of your kind are here? How did you get here?”

The demon angel answers in the same monotone voice, “There are ten of us here. We were here before the force field was erected. We couldn’t contact our superiors. We tried to find the source for the force field. But we found out it is located in an ancient book. It too is protected by the same force field. So we stayed and learned as much as we could. We are hoping to influence someone to remove the force field from the ancient book. We’ve been unsuccessful in that endeavor.”

“My last question is this. Do you know the name of your superior demon angel?”

“I do. I dare not evoke his name. It can only be used in his presence.”

“Which letter does it begin with, the letter ‘S’ or the letter ‘M’?”

“It begins with the letter ‘M’.”

“That’s all I need to know.” I clap my hands. “Clap!!!” “Thank you.”

Then the demon angel shakes his head. He looks at me with an evil grin. “You got me to tell the truth!! How did you do that?!!!”

“Because I am the Omega Unicorn Dragon! No one can lie to me!”

“EEEEeeeeekkkk!!! Curse you Omega Unicorn Dragon!!! Curse you!!!”

“Now to put you away for the time being. You will be released when I say so.”

“You can’t confine me!!”

“Yes I can. I’ve got an ice collar around you for starters!!”

Wizard Richard takes out the wooden box from his satchel. He holds it out in front of him.

I take out my quartz crystal. I recite the words to light it up to a bright white light.

“ARRRRRggggghhhhh!!! The pain!!! The light is too bright!!!! It is burning my eyes!!!”

“By the power invested in me by the Creator of the Multi-verses, I command you and the ten demon angels within the Forbidden Forrest enter in this box. Croin! Fire up the ice collar. Now!!!”

Croin comes out of me. He aims his flames right at the ice collar. It is now a fire and ice collar!!!

He screams in double pain!! “ARRRRRgggghhhh!!! The pain!!!! Curse you!!!! Curse you, Omega Unicorn Dragon!!!! Curse you!!!!”

I melt the ice collar around the demon angel. The water quickly evaporates and the flames go out. We see a burnt neck as he enters the box. Then he flies to the box and squeezes into a thin line and enters in the wooden box.

The ten demons scattered throughout the Forbidden Forrest are quickly drawn to Hogwarts Castle. Three of them are animals. They change back into their demon form and fly to the Castle. The other seven are students within the Castle. The students in the teaching rooms get a big surprise when they turn into demon angels.

“EEEEEeeeekkk!! A demon angel!!!”

“I thought she was my friend!! EEEEWwwwww!!!”

“Gross!!! My bedroom partner was a demon angel! Yuck!!”

They all fly through the walls toward the assembly room. They pass through the walls. Then all of a sudden they see the bright light. Their true forms are now plainly seen. All of them are hairy goat demon angels with two horns on their heads.

“EEEEEeeeeekkk!! The pain!!! The light is too bright!!!! Curse you!!!!”

We count the demon angels until there are ten within the box. Then all is quiet.

“Obviously you know more what is going on. Who are their superiors?”

“The Emissaries told me the two names. The first one is the leader, his name is Leonard. His lieutenant’s name is Mullin.” I retract my dragon wings back into my body.

They all slump back in their chairs. “Oh . . . my . . . Creator. We have the Master of Black Magic here. It is no wonder we have been unable to make head way against the dark shadow here.”

“Are you a wizard on your world?”

“I am not, sir. My Brianna and I are descended from our King Arthur and Guenevere on my Earth. We know we are destined to be King and Queen some day in the future. My expertise is in computer security.”

“That is enough for us. Can you give a brief synopsis of how things are on your world?”

“I can sir,”

“My name is Gregory Longdale.”

“I can, Mr. Longdale.” Then my Brianna and I give a brief story of our lives. It takes about forty-five minutes to tell it all. That even includes some of our historical past to put things into perspective with magic and the Ethereal Space.

When we get done, Mr. Kendal speaks up next. “That is why you want to go to China, Wizard Richard. You need the dragon half to fulfill your destiny. You’re our Omega Unicorn Dragon for our Earth.”

“That’s right, Mr. Kendall.”

“What happened while you are on Christmas World?”

“There are only two sets of Richards and Briannas who have the power of the Arresting Angels. We were supposed to get a share of it. But, once the murder contracts came out, we were taken to Christmas World for safety. This Richard and Brianna and their Anti-selves have the power now. Then with the miracle of the Transbike, we were infused with a copy of the unicorns. I received the twelve unicorns. My Brianna received the six female unicorns. I am now intersexual. I will be given birth to my own fairies like a male unicorn. Since I don’t have a drop of dragon blood within me, I can’t sprout out dragon wings. We’ll show you.”

My Brianna, my fairies and I step aside. Wizard Richard and Sorceress Brianna step to the center of the circle. The symbols don’t light up. They thrust out their hands. Then all of the unicorn images come out from them.

Then we hear some horse steps coming into the room. We see a unicorn and ten fairies hovering around the unicorn. We turn to face them. The unicorn sees the images. Quickly, the images and the feathered wings are retracted back into their bodies.

She walks up to me and gives me a sniff. “You have the smell of Caliber upon you.”

I look at her. “I only met him in heaven. Here is the proof I met him in heaven.” I sweep my arm. The image of Caliber appears next to me. I make him solid. The unicorn comes up and brushes her head against Caliber’s head. She steps back at looks at me.

“Yes, that is my Caliber. My name is Rachel. It means ‘G-d’s Mercy’. It’s a common name. I was taken here for safe keeping. These fairies who are around me come from Caliber himself. What happened to my Caliber?”

Tears come down our faces. “He heard there was a call to cut off his horn. Once he heard that, he sent Oren and White Dove to the Americas.” I wave my hand to show King Oren and Queen White Dove images. Immediately they recognize their kin.

“They are still alive. Praise to the Creator.”

Soon the other people are shedding tears when they heard the news about Caliber. They take a handkerchief to wipe their tears away. We do the same as well.

“Right now they and their kin are on Twainor for a visit. They are in the same multi-verse as I am. I just met the forty unicorns in the Americas here. I met Stellarwind and Sapphire over there. They are from Silverwind, Star Dancer, Athena and Einhorn.”

“I am glad to hear that, Richard. I met them a long time ago. In the Forbidden Forest on your world, I left a group of unicorns there. Do you know anything about them?”

“There was a story told about them. It has to do with Harry Potter. Voldemort was possessing someone at the time. His current solution then to stay alive is to drink the silver blood from a unicorn.”

“What happened to Voldemort?”

“The whole story took seven books to write out from the author. They were shown on the movie screen. Eventually, Harry Potter defeated Voldemort. He also broke the Elder Wand so it won’t be used for evil anymore.”

Then the head master stands up and walks down to the main floor to join with us. “I am that Harry Potter from your world, Richard. Now you are probably wondering why am I doing here?”

“That’s right, sir.”

Then Harry Potter takes his wand and touches his shoulders. The gray beard retracts back into his face. He looks a bit younger without the beard.

“After our grandchildren were born, we knew it was time to leave Earth. So, the Emissaries took me, my wife, Ron and his wife, Hermione. They explained to us what had happened. They told us that we’ll be facing Voldemort one more time. But it will be at the Ultimate Last Battle back on our Earth. They told us that Voldemort ashes are now floating through space toward the Hell Galaxy. It is there, he will be gathered together to become whole again. They told us, he will be more powerful than ever. The Emissaries told us we must become more powerful. Then they said something strange.”

I smile at Harry. “What is it?”

“They said we will learn a new technique from the Omega Unicorn Dragon. It will help us withstand the lightning bolts from him. Do you know what it is?”

I smile again, “I certainly do, Harry.” I draw out my sword and show it to them. “This sword can take on laser strikes and lightning hits. It will absorb the blast. Then you can direct the energy anywhere you want to.”

Harry looks at the sword with a smile, “That is great. How is it made?”

“First of all you need the evenshard stone.”

“What is evenshard stone?”

“It is a stone found on Twainor. It has the unique property of absorbing light and projecting out a force field at the same time. Watch this.” I concentrate on the light crystal on my forehead, it lights up. Then all of a sudden a force field appears and disappears. It pushes back Harry Potter to the wall.

Harry tries to push against it. But he can’t move.

The other people are astonished to see it. I turn off the light crystal to release Harry Potter from the wall.

Harry walks forward, “Do we have something like that here, Mr. Kendall?”

“I don’t know, Harry. If it is here, it’s probably hasn’t been discovered yet.”

“This belt that is around me, contains pieces of the Ethereal Space ore. It is my source of magic. Also, this armor has the evenshard stone in it. If I don’t have the sword up in time, the armor will protect me as well. If an energy blast comes at me, I will be able to absorb the light from the blast to make it inert. Then the heat will dissipate into the air safely. Then I can use the light to make me stronger or send it back to the enemy.”

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~00000000000000 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~00000000000000 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

Goku and Yusuke are looking on the 3D Video Screen in Heaven.

“Did you hear that, Goku?”

“I sure did, Yusuke. Now if we can harness that light energy, we can stop the likes of Brody, Frieza and Cell from their planet destruction rampage.”

“You got that right. We’ll start off small and work our way up to the planet destruction level.”

“That sounds good to me, Yusuke. Come on, let’s try it.”

“If we are successful, we’ll teach it to our friends.”

They fly away from the 3D Video Screen. The screen changes back into the rising sunset screen saver.

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~00000000000000 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~00000000000000 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

Mr. Kendall looks at us. “You said you will be going into the lion’s den tomorrow, Wizard Richard.”

“That is right, Mr. Kendall. Richard will be the one facing them.”

Mr. Kendall looks at me, “What are your plans?”

“To confine them into this box. Then I will put a certain command onto the demons here. When the box is delivered to King Azazel, they will unleash the painful message to him.”

“Hmm . . . that is a good idea. But it needs some more work to take them by surprise. He will definitely come up with a black spell to bind you somehow. You need to be ready for that.”

Then a green light appears in my pants pocket. I take out the peridot crystal. Quickly, I see the image of my Anti-self.

He smiles at me, “Hello brother. How is it going on your end?”

“Hello Anti-brother!! I am in the Forbidden Forest. I just boxed up eleven demon angels who were trapped within the force field on the Isles.”

“Well, I boxed up fifteen here. Who is in control there?”

“It is the Master of Black Magic himself, Leonard and his Lieutenant, Mullin.”

“That’s great. Richard-Rept contacted me for some help. I found two Master Demon Angels with their legions here in the Monster-verse. They are the ones who caused all of the wars and lies here. They are Pruflas and Pyro. So, what are we going to do with them?”

“This is just an idea, Anti-Richard. If we each have a pair of boxes, we can split up their legions into them. Then on each box, we have them use one of the four elements. When the boxes get delivered by the Arresting Angels, we’ll give a short message that we are onto King Azazel’s plan. Then the boxes open up. They all come out to deliver our message to King Azazel.”

Anti-Richard smiles widely. “I love it. I know which two elements to use and so do you. Make sure they don’t remember how to do it later. Make sure they use the element once and forget it. It’s good to see you again, brother.”

“It’s good to see you again, Anti-brother. You know we can’t wait until you earn the rest of the black sashes.”

“I know it, brother. But, we’ll take it step by step. We need to be in complete control of the elements.”

“Speaking of control, I have a question for you Anti-brother. Did you ever learn how and when to use the blue flame?”

“I did, Richard. However, it is too powerful for me to handle right now. I only tried it once to know what it is like. I can tell you that we need to earn all ten black sashes before we can use it. It takes great will power to keep it under control. It taps the yin or the dark side too much. The yang must be just as strong as the yin.”

“I see. I was just curious about it. I remember a point in the story here that Zuko’s sister could produce the blue flame. I can see her rage is fueling the blue flame. She forgot the teachings how to keep herself under control.”

“That’s the idea, brother. We must remember our teachings all the time. Okay, I’ll let you get ready to meet Leonard and Mullin.”

“Yeah, we’ll all need a good night of sleep for this one. See you later, Anti-brother.”

“See you later, brother.”

The image disappears above the peridot crystal. We look around and see their faces with dropped mouths.

“Uh, was that your Anti-self there, Richard?”

“Yes, sir.”

“Didn’t you explode when you met on Christmas World?”

“We almost did, Mr. Kendall. Sparks quickly reached out between us when Anti-Richard, Anti-Brianna and the Anti-Wizard showed up. I quickly produced my feathered wings, while Anti-Richard produced his dragon wings. We became opposite in nature. If an orange from here came in contact with an orange from the Anti-Verse, they would definitely explode in a great explosion. Anti-Richard learned the earth and fire elements first. I learned the air and water elements first.”

“I see. That seems to make sense. We need to get a box for you to use tomorrow. Seeing the size of that box, I think we can get an appropriate box for you.”

“Right now, we need to come up with a better plan for tomorrow. We need to catch them off guard.”

We hash out a lot of ideas. There was one idea that kept cropping up, they expect to see Wizard Richard and Sorceress Brianna. They don’t expect us to be there.

So, with that idea, we came up with a great plan to confound them and catch them off guard.

Harry Potter regrows his beard by magic before we leave the assembly hall together. We get a nice tour of the Castle and the grounds outside. After seeing the place, we gather in the hall to have our evening meal. We are invited to sit with the leadership on the main stage. Wizard Richard and Sorceress Brianna are on the right hand side. My Brianna, my fairies and I are sitting on the left hand side. There are several plates of fruit and nuts for my fairies to eat. They also each get a glass of honey water to drink from.

Once all four classes are gathered in the hall, Harry Potter stands up to give the opening word.

“Students, teachers and the leadership of Hogwarts Castle, we are at a critical juncture on our world. Tomorrow morning, it is our hope that the dark shadow will finally be removed from our world. The light of the Creator will be bright once more. However, we expect some darkness to return back to us from time to time. When that does happen, our own Omega Unicorn Dragon will help drive out the darkness until the Ultimate Last Battle. We pray to the Creator that he continues to show us the way in the light.”

Then Harry Potter raises his glass in front of him. Everybody else stands up and raises their glasses as well.

“Let this food give us the strength we need to fight the good fight. Praise to the Creator!”

Everyone responds back in one voice, “Praise to the Creator!”

Everyone takes a sip from their glass. We sit back down to eat the evening meal. There is a dull roar as people talk among themselves while they eat the evening meal.

After forty-five minutes at the dining table, everyone exits the dining hall. Most of us walk out to the quad area to watch the sunset. We see the clouds change color. But, as the sun sets, we see the black shadow at the horizon. We are reminded they are not free yet.

We walk back into the Castle. My Brianna, my fairies and I get escorted to our room to sleep tonight. We see it is very comfortable for all of us. We put the fairy’s satchel on the table. Then we realize we are short a bed set for White Acacia and White Rose.

“What are we going to do, father, mother, Omega?”

“Well, since they are your soul mates, Bianca and Lavan. You need to share your bed with them.”

“That means White Acacia and Bianca are in one bed, and White Rose sleeps with me.”

Brianna and all of my fairies smile together.

I smile as well, “That’s right, Lavan. When we get back to our Earth, we’ll come up with some bigger bedding material. White Rose and Acacia, did you bring any extra clothing with you?”

“We only had two extra sets that we brought with us.”

“That’s fine. My fairies can help out in making a new set when you need it.”

“Thank you, father, mother, Omega.”

The fairies set up their beds on several pillows in the bedroom. We change our clothes into our sleep ware. I turn off the lights and close the window curtains. Brianna and I get under the thick covers and rest our heads on the fluffy pillows. We all have a great night of sleep. We get a dream that the light has come back to their world. Everyone is rejoicing that they can see again.

The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 25
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman

The list of characters mentioned in this story belong to the various authors that created them. This is a fan-fiction story.

~~~000~~~

During the night I get an unusual dream from the Creator. I am standing in a white room with no sense of walls and a ceiling. However, I do feel myself standing on a white floor.

From beyond the whiteness, I see a very bright white light approaching me. After a few moments I hear a name in my mind.

“Have no fear, Richard. It is I, Michael the Arch-Angel.”

“It is an honor to meet you, sir.”

“I know it is. The Creator asked me to do something for him. He wants me to use this crystal to touch your two index fingers on your hands.” He holds up a crystal in his hands.

We see it emanating a very bright white light that is brighter than the room. However, we can both tolerate its brightness.

“When will I use it?”

“When you create the two ice claws for Croin to use. Croin then will embed the claws into their stomachs. The pieces of light will remain within them until the Ultimate Last Battle.”

I give a quick smile, “Obviously, the Creator has something on his mind concerning this. It will be revealed according to his time schedule.”

Michael smiles back, ”Yes, that is his way of telling us to be patient.”

“Then I’ll do as he requested.” I bring up my hands.

Michael touches the crystal onto my index finger of both of my hands. I see the finger nail glow to a white light then it fades. Then I sink beneath the surface and fly back to my body that is sleeping on the bed next to Brianna.

~~~000~~~

We wake up in the morning fully rested as the sun comes up. We pack our satchels up to get ready for the day. I put my helmet and gauntlets in the satchel. I wear my outer clothes to cover the armor. Once we get cleaned up, we exit the bedroom. We walk down the moving stairs until we get to the main floor. We get greeted by several paintings along the way.

“Go get them, Omega. We are rooting for you!”

“Praise to the Creator! The dark shadow will finally be gone from our world!”

“My name is Merwyn the Malicious. Give the old goat a kick in the rear for me. I owe him one for not paying a jinx I created for his amusement.”

“I’ll see what I can do, sir. You know it depends on the timing.”

“Thank you, Omega.” The green robed man smiles widely in the picture.

We arrive on the main level, finally. We enter the main hall to have our morning meal. The sun is shining brightly through the windows. We sit in the same chairs where were last night. After the giving of Thanks to the Creator, we have our morning breakfast. For my fairies, they are given some more nuts, fruit and honey water to drink. For us, we are served up a bowl of cereal with a fruit and nut salad. Our drink is orange juice.

It turns out most of the people are quiet this morning. They know something good will happen this morning. They don’t want to break the somber mood this morning. We get done eating in a half-mark. Wizard Richard and Sorceress Brianna walk up to the front stage. My fairies fly into my coat pockets. We put on our satchels for the trip. I make sure my quartz crystal is in my pocket with Tiger and Tigress. Brianna makes sure there is a quartz crystal in her pocket with Lavan and White Rose. We put on the matching robes and put the hoods up on our heads. Sorceress Brianna makes sure the second box is in her satchel.

Wizard Richard speaks up, “Before we go, we were asked how we got here so fast in a half-mark. The shamans each had a quartz crystal in their hands. There were six of them around us. They recited the words to make the quartz crystals to shine a very bright white light. It is that white light that gave us the extra speed boost to get here that fast. Also, the white light will reveal the true image of the demon. They can’t hide from the light.”

Then Head Master speaks up, “Well then, let’s speed up your flight to the Hague.”

Then six people from the head table gather around. They take a crystal from their pocket. They recite the words to make the crystal shine brightly with white light. Our Briannas put their hands onto their respective Richards. We recite the spell to disappear in a blink of an eye. We fly to the south at a high rate of speed. We quickly cross the Channel and head toward Holland to the East.

We see the dark shadow covering all of Europe. “Hold firm and steady. They will be wailing once we arrive in front of the Hague. They will immediately tell their master we have arrived.”

As we get lower, we hear the wailing increase.

“OOOOOooooo . . . OOOOO . . . ooooo . . . .OOOOOO . . .”

We then appear in a blink of an eye in the front entrance to the Hague. We see a dark grey sky above us. Immediately they tell their boss. We ignore their rants and wailing.

“OOOOOooooo . . . OOOOO . . . ooooo . . . .OOOOOO . . .”
“Join us! Be . . . stronnnn . . . ger!!!”
“MMMMM mmmmmm . . . mmmmmMMMMmmmm . . . . ooooOOOOOOooooo . . . Join with us!!! Be stronger!!!”
“mmmmMMMMMMmmmm . . . ooooOOOOOooo . . . ooooOOOOO!!!!”

We walk briskly to the front doors of the Hague. We open the doors and enter. Immediately we are met by two guards.

“What is your business here, Wizard?!”

“We are here to address the assembly. We want to see all of the Kings here.”

“Everyone is here this week. We’ll send word that you have arrived. What are your names?”

“My name is Richard. This is my wife, Brianna.”

“Whom are these other two people with you?”

We try to keep the hoods over our heads to make it difficult to see us directly.

“They are our friends. We have come to make a plea for the Isles.”

The guard gives a smirky grin, “If that is what you call it. Okay, we’ll send word ahead. Wait here in the lobby. If you can.”

We gather together in a corner of the lobby. We hold our hands together to form a circle. We talk with each other through our minds.

So far, so good. It is up to them if they want to see us or not.

Yes, Wizard Richard.

~~~000~~~

King Leopold sits in his office looking at the daily reports. He still doesn’t see one from the Americas. A knock is heard on the door. “Knock! Knock!”

“Sigh . . .” He puts the reports on the desk. “Enter.” He looks at the door.

The door opens. A guard walks in. “Sir, Wizard Richard is requesting an audience with you and the kings.”

An evil smile comes to his face. “Wizard Richard is here? Who else is with him?”

“His wife, Brianna and two other people. They appear to be a man and a woman. They appeared on the street in a blink of an eye together, sir.”

“That is very interesting. We have two wizards and two sorceresses here. Very well, we’ll meet them in the assembly hall. Have all of the Kings present for this show. We will subdue them and bring them to our side. We will finally conquer their Forbidden Forest once and for all!! Hah! Hah! Hah! . . .”

The guard smiles, “Yes, my King.” The guard leaves the office. He quickly makes his rounds to tell the thirty kings to come for a special assembly. They agree to be there at the appointed time in a quarter-mark.

~~~000~~~

We continue to hold our hands to conserve our strength and build each other up. After a quarter-mark, we hear foot steps approaching us. We look up to see who is walking toward us. We see the guard approaching us.

“Follow me please to the main assembly room.”

We follow the guard down the hallways. He opens a pair of doors. We walk inside. I take the lead with my Brianna. Wizard Richard and Sorceress Brianna walk more slowly to separate us from them. Sorceress Brianna brings out a contact crystal. She recites the spell quietly. It is sending the encounter straight to Hogwarts Castle.

~~~000~~~

Everyone is gathering around several contact images from the crystals. They are holding their breath, waiting in anticipation for the great battle to take place.

~~~000~~~

We look around and see the thirty Kings of Earth gathered together. We see there are several pages standing behind them. I recognize some of the country flags on the tables in front of them. I see France, Spain, China, Egypt, Persia, the Phillippines and Japan to name just a few.

King Leopold stands up and walks toward me. He stops about twenty feet from me as he stares at me. “You’re a fool to come here, Wizard Richard. I have the power to bind you and your wife in darkness!”

“Then go ahead and try it, fool! If you have the guts to try it!”

“You dare mock the High King of Earth! Never!!” He takes a small box out of his pocket. He casts it at our feet.

The box breaks apart easily, quickly a dark cloud envelopes us in black darkness. Just before it envelopes us, Brianna takes my hands quickly. We look at each other with smiles before we can’t see anymore.

“Hah! Hah! Hah! That will teach you respect!” Then he notices the two people behind the black cloud. “Who are you two?”

They move their hoods down to reveal their faces. “My name is Wizard Richard. This is my wife, Sorcerer Brianna.”

Then King Leopold begins to stutter, “Th . . . Th . . . then whom did I just capture?”

“You captured the Omega Unicorn Dragon!”

His face quickly changes to a sneer, “I captured the Omega Unicorn Dragon!! Praise to my master!! I will soon bend his will to mine!!”

“I don’t think so, King Leopold. Look at your dark binding cloud now!”

~~~000~~~

It is time, Brianna.

Yes it is, my love.

My fairies, light up the light crystals!

Yes father, mother, Omega!

The fairies recite the words to light up the quartz crystals. Quickly two bright lights appear in our pockets. They hold the crystals up in the pockets. Quickly, we see our faces shining brightly with big smiles on them.

~~~000~~~

King Leopold screams at what he sees. He sees the dark cloud get bigger and bigger. “What is going on? What’s happening, Wizard Richard?”

“You tell me, King Leopold. It’s your dark magic. Why don’t you try to make it stronger to collapse it back in?”

“Yes, yes, that must be it. My legions, come to your King! Aid me in this hour!! Lend me your strength! Join together to keep this dark binding spell strong!!”

Then all of the evil spirits from around the world come flying to the Hague. They enter the Hague and add their strength to the dark cloud in the assembly hall. The only demons that didn’t come are the demon angels residing in the twenty-nine Kings.

King Sui has a smile on his face when he sees what is happening.

~~~000~~~

We see the darkness trying to enclose us once more. Our love for each other keeps the darkness away from us.

They are all here, my servant. There are one million evil demon spirits here.

Thank you, Creator. Now for the second part, my love. They are all here, my fairies.

Yes, father, mother, Omega.

Then Tiger hands the crystal to Tigress. He uses his hands and waves them in the air with a fluid motion. The satchel opens that contains the water skin. With another movement, the stopper comes off. Then Tiger draws out the water from the skin slowly. As the water comes out, the water skin stays filled. Tiger moves the water all around us and creates a huge water bubble around us. Once the bubble of water is created, he moves the stopper back onto the water skin with a wave of his hand.

Once we see it in place. I say it out loud in my mind. Now!

My fairies quickly turn the water bubble into one million tiny ice spikes! Croin, Levi, Shiri comes out to light up the ice spikes with fire. “Fwooooosh!!!” We are still inside the original dark cloud. The evil spirits have no idea what is going to happen next.

Then with our minds together, we push the fire and ice spikes outward all at once!!

~~~000~~~

King Leopold sees the dark cloud mass get bigger and bigger each second. Then all of a sudden they can’t hold it anymore. The dark cloud breaks down. All of the evil spirits fly out from the expansion from within.

“EEEEeeeekkkkk!!! Help us master!!! The pain hurts!!!!”

One million evil spirits are now pinned against the walls and ceiling!! Each evil demon spirit has a fire and ice spike in their heart!!! They can’t release themselves from the trap.

King Leopold and King Mulford scream out loud together, “What is going on here!!!”

“What is the meaning of this? Who are you?”

I take off my robe and let it fall to the floor while I look at King Leopold with a cold hard stare. “I am the Omega Unicorn Dragon from Earth.”

“Wh . . . whi . . . which one?”

“The one where King Azazel was thrown down to in the beginning!!! Fool!!!”

They both scream out loud. All of the evil spirit demons scream out loud.

“EEEEeeeeeKKKK!!! ARRRRRRrrrgghhhhh!! NOOOOOooooo!! That’s impossible!!!! You shouldn’t be here!!! We killed your family line!!!”

“When was that King Leopold? Tell me!!”

“We killed your family line hundreds of years ago!!”

“Ding!! Wrong answer!! Your demons missed their chance!!! Once my relatives heard there was a murder contract out for them, they fled to the Americas!!”

“GGGGRRRRRrrrrRRRRR!!!”

“Do you want me to say your real name?”

“My name is King Leopold. I am the ruler of this Earth!”

“I don’t think that is your real name, King Leopold. Your real name is Leonard! The Master of Black Magic!! And you are Mullin, his Lieutenant!!”

“NOOOoooo!!! Kill him now!!!!”

Then the rest of the demons emerge from the kings. They collapse in their chairs from exhaustion and put their heads on the table in front of them. They try to regain their energy by drinking some water found in cups on their desks.

Quickly, my fairies and I make twenty-nine water balls from the cool air in the room. We throw them at their necks. We quickly freeze them to steel ice and squeeze it in tight.

They choke as the ice collar gets smaller. “Urkk! Urkk!! It . . . It’s ch . . . choking us . . . us, Ma . . . Master!! He . . . Help us!!! We . . . We ca . . . can’t mo. . . . move!!!”

We hold them in the air and stop their attack. Croin quickly flies out to light up the ice collars. “Fwooooosh!!!”

Then the twenty-nine demon angels are now really screaming in pain!!!

“ARRRgggghhhh!! The pain!!! Help us, master!! It hurts too much!!!” They squirm to try and get themselves free. Once their hands touch the fire and ice collars they scream in more pain. “EEEEEeeeeeKKK!!!! ArrrrGGGHHH!! The pain!!! It hurts, master!!!”

Leonard and Mullin quickly metamorph into their original forms. Leonard has three long goat horns coming out from his head. Mullin has two long goat horns coming out from his head. They have black goat hair on the legs and the lower part of their chest. They have goat feet to stand on. Their wings are folded back. They have razor sharp teeth. Their eyes are jet black. Their muscles are well defined on their body.

“How dare you!! You are nothing to me!!! You don’t have the power to stop me!!!”

“Oh yeah!!! Come and get some pain!!! Armor on!!!” My helmet appears on my head and the gauntlets appear on my hands in a blink of an eye. My outer clothes return to my satchel folded up.

My fairies hold everyone else at bay while I concentrate on Leonard and Mullin. Brianna concentrates on me as back up. I quickly create a tornado around me. Then I bring in more cool air to create small pieces of ice.

“What’s this? I can easily get pass your icy tornado!!”

I then project out quickly an icy tiger at Mullin! “RRROOOO . . . oooAAARRR!!!” An icy image of a tiger comes out and flies straight at Mullin!!! With both claws on either side of the tiger!!!

His eyes get big!!! “WWwwhaaattt!! What kind of magic is this? Help me master!!!” Mullin quickly brings up his arms to block the icy tiger.

“You are witnessing the Omega Unicorn Dragon in all its power!!!”

The icy tiger quickly slams into Mullin. It slices his upper body and arms with little cuts!!

“ARRRRgghhh!!! The pain!!! The ice pieces have shredded my skin!!! Help me, Master!!!”

~~~000~~~

King Sui smiles again. Yes! He is using the animals from afar. He doesn’t want to touch them!! I love it!! Creator, is that dragon a memory or the soul from a real dragon?

The dragon’s name is Croin, King Sui. It is a memory for him. Croin is still alive on Twainor. In fact he can call up anyone he has met and use them to aid him.

That’s amazing. He has learned his Shaolin moves very well. I’m impressed. Thank you, Creator.

You’re welcome, King Sui.

~~~000~~~

Quickly, Leonard conjures up a dark cloud in front of him and Mullin. “This black shield will protect me!!”

“Well, let’s find whose will is stronger!!”

I quickly project out a flying crane!! I make sure it is stronger than the one I did on the Avatar World.

The flying crane starts it forward wing sweeps as it enters the dark shield.

“Hah!! I consumed the flying crane!! You are no match for me!!”

“It is not through yet, Leonard!!”

Then the icy flying crane emerges from the dark shield and slices a big cut on his stomach!!

“WWWwwwhhhatt!! OOOOoohhh!!” He doubles over in pain. “The flying crane got through and cut my stomach!!! Your will is stronger than mine!!”

“That’s right, Leonard!! Do you have any more dark ideas!!!”

“I have one!! Now Mullin!!! Attack!!!”

They flash out their swords at me. They run to me very quickly.

Now it is your turn, Croin!! Here are some ice claws for you!

Yes!!

I create two large ice claws on my hands. There is one claw in each hand that has a light tip in its nail. Croin takes them from my hand as he emerges from me.

He is very angry!! He blows out flames at them as he attacks them. “Fwwwooooosshhh!!!” The ice claws are now aflame!!!

“ARRRRRrrrgghhh!! A dragon!!!!”

Croin yells out loud, “It was you who gave the order to kill dragons!! YOU WILL PAY WITH PAIN!!!”

They are now frozen in fear!!! Their mouths are wide open. They can’t believe a dragon is coming right at them!!

Croin swoops in for the strike!! He lashes out his right claw at Mullin!!

“ARRRRrrrrrghhhh!!! The pain!!!” He looks down and sees the flaming ice claw buried in his stomach!!!! The ice claw quickly melts and evaporates. When the smoke clears, he sees three large gashes in his stomach. The lit up nail stays within his body without his knowledge. “NNNOOOoooo!! Help me Master!!! The pain is unbearable!!!!”

Leonard doesn’t hear him. He is still frozen in fear!!!

Croin turns to his left and slashes his left claw at Leonard!!!

“AAAAARRRRRRrrrrrghhhh!!! The pain!!!” He thought the pain from my crane wing slash hurt. This is hurting one hundred times as much!!!! He quickly looks down. He sees the claw melt and evaporate. When the smoke clears he sees three large gashes in his stomach. The lit up nail tip stays within his body without his knowledge. “NNNNNOOOOOoooo!!! The pain is worse than before!!!! ARRRRRRGGGGgggghhhh!!!!!”

They both fall to their knees and roll onto the ground clutching their stomachs in pain!!!

Croin hovers above Leonard and looks at his face. His eyes are flaming hot!!! “Was it you who gave the orders to kill the dragons!!! RRRROOOOAAARRRR!!! Answer me!!!”

“Yes, yes!!! It was me!!! However, we learned it from Azazel for the first time back on Richard’s Earth!!!”

I walk up to Leonard and face him on the ground. I have cold blue-white light in my eyes!!! “What happened two thousand years ago?!!! Who killed Caliber the Unicorn?!! Answer me!!!”

“We knew that by killing Caliber, a thousand years of darkness would reign over Europe. We wanted to establish the dark side of witchcraft during that time in Europe. It was at that time, Sauron’s spirit arrived from Middle-Earth. We gave him explicit orders to have Caliber killed. So, he entered the body of a Roman soldier to do the deed.”

Creator, what happened to the Roman soldier?

Once he realized what he did, he quickly asked forgiveness. Then Sauron’s spirit felt the remorseful pain from the soldier. He quickly left him to find another body that is more evil to his liking. The soldier is in heaven with his family.

Thank you, Creator.

You’re welcome, Richard.

They quickly recite some dark words to heal their wounds. They look at their stomachs and see the scars are still there. They stand back up to face me. They pick up their swords to face me one more time.

“That hurt!!!! How dare you send a dragon to harm us!!!”

“You deserve it!!!” I create an ice sword in both of my hands. I make it stronger than steel. My eyes continue to have a blue-white glow. “Unicorn speed and strength times twelve!!” I immediately glow with a white light. Then it fades from me.

Leonard quickly comes in with a slash from overhead. “ARGGHHHhhh!!!”

Mullin comes in with a horizontal slash at my mid-section. “Die Omega Unicorn Dragon!!!!”

I quickly dodge Leonard’s slash in a blur!!!

“SWWWiiiiisssshhh!!!” Leonard misses me by a mile!!

“Whhhhaaatttt!! How did he move so fast? I have never seen a human move that fast!!!”

“Hyyyyahhh!!” I bring my right sword in an arc and break Mullin’s sword to pieces. “Clannng!!” Then the pieces make their own sound as they hit the ground, “Tinnnglle! Tingle! Tinnnngle!!”

Mullin has a look of astonishment on his face when I blur away from him and go after Leonard!!!

Leonard prepares to strike me one more time! He swings his sword around with a downward diagonal slash toward me.

I turn around in a blur and bring up my sword in a blur to meet Leonard’s blade. “Hyyyyahhh!!” I break it into pieces as well. “ClannnnGG!!! Tinnnglle!! Tingle! Tinggglle!!” I complete my blur movement away from him and stop.

“What were you saying, Leonard?” My eyes, speed and strength return to normal.

“How did you move so fast? I should have broken your ice sword!!”

“I have earned the first degree black sash in the Shaolin arts. When I earn the tenth black sash, I will then have the title of Shaolin Dragon Master!!!”

~~~000~~~

King Sui smiles some more. Thank you Creator for your deliverance. That was a beautiful display of speed and strength with the air and water elements.

You’re welcome, King Sui.

~~~000~~~

“NOOOOoooo!!!” Then Leonard and Mullin both lunge at me with their broken swords in their hands. I quickly create two water balls in the air and put it around their necks. I make it like the others. Then Croin flies toward them and sets the ice collars ablaze!!! “Fwooooosh!!!” “Fwooooosh!!!”

They both scream out loud, “ARRRRRGggghhh!! The pain!!! Stop it!!! Stop the pain!!!!”

We hear all of the evil spirits moaning in pain. “MMMMmmmm . . . Help us master!!! The pain is unbearable!!! OOOOOooooohhh!!”

I walk up to Leonard, but I keep out of his arm reach. “Now you are going to do something for me.”

He clenches and grinds his teeth, “I’ll never do it, Omega!!”

“Oh yes you will. You will have no choice to do it. You and your legions are going to send a message to King Azazel for me.”

“What kind of message?”

“Let’s say it will be very painful for all of you. You see, I have met my Anti-self. Right now he just solved the Monster-Verse problem. He found Pruflas and Pyro and their legions. You are going to meet them there in front of your boss.”

“Phah!! We’ll just come back to destroy your world.”

“Oh, I know all about that, Leonard. Just save it for the Ultimate Last Battle. Besides, I have to deal with Sauron first before I get to you. So, get in line!”

“GGGGrrrrRRRR!!! You’re making a mockery of our greatness!!”

“You did it first. You fool!! Why do you think the Creator used a goat to be used as the scapegoat for Azazel for a particular new nation coming out from Egypt?!”

“GGGGRRRrrrr! How dare you use our Master’s name that way?!!!!”

“It was the Creator’s idea to turn the so-called Egyptian gods you created on their heads. You made a mockery of the Creator first, triple bone head!! It was you, who twisted their honor into your own playthings!! You deserve the retribution from the Pantheon Gods!!!”

~~~000~~~

Then a massive thunder cloud suddenly appears above the Hague. It sends a huge thunderbolt to the front entrance of the Hague.

“KKKAAAaaaBOOOOM! CRRRRaaaaCCCklllEEEE!!”

Some pieces of pavement get shattered. There is a burnt area when the smoke fades.

When the lightning bolt is gone, in its place stands Zeus with a lightning bolt is in hand. People flee from his presence as he quickly marches into the Hague and enters the assembly room. Zeus is very mad!!!

The doors swing open quickly by themselves. The guards retreat backwards to the walls. He has a mean scowl on his face. He walks up to Leonard and stares at him. Then he turns to face me. His face softens a bit. “We have been waiting for this day, Omega. I know you have plans for him. But, I am going to add one more message for him to deliver for us.”

Leonard and Mullin both grumble with more hatred, “GGGGrrrrrRRRR!!!”

“Excuse me, sir. I need to put another reminder scar on them.” I quickly slice a crane wing slash at their faces.

“ARRRRrrghhhh!!! The pain!!!”

“EEEEeeeeekkkk!! ARRRGGGGgghhh!!! The pain hurts, master!!!”

I put a scar on each cheek. I then walk behind Leonard and kick his rear end.

“OWWWWwww . . . That hurt!! Why did you do that?”

“So you will remember that it was me who stood up to you and defeated you this day!!! That kick in the rear is a suggestion from some one I just met. His name is Merwyn the Malicious.”

“What did he say to you?”

“It is for not paying for a jinx he created for your amusement. He wanted me to kick the old goat in the rear end.”

“The rat wanted double the usual payment!! I never pay what I owe.”

“Then I’ll give you another kick in the rear!!” I walk around and kick Leonard in the rear again.

“OWWW . !!! That hurt again!!!”

~~~000~~~

Everyone is howling in laughter in Hogwarts Castle. “Hah, hah, hah, hah, hah, . . . . !!!!”

Merwyn is laughing so hard, the painting is shaking. But it doesn’t fall down from the wall. “Hah, hah, hah, hah, . . . I love it!! I finally got the old goat back with two kicks in the butt!! Hah, hah, hah, hah . . . Thank you, Omega!!!”

Everyone continues to laugh out loud. “Hah, hah, hah, hah, . . . !!!”

Quickly they try to calm it down so they can hear the rest of the encounter.

~~~000~~

Wizard Richard, Sorceress Brianna, my Brianna, my fairies, Zeus and King Sui give a slight giggle, snicker and chuckle when they hear that last statement from me.

They both growl at me again with hatred, “GGGGrrrrrRRRR!!!”

“Now look at me!!! All of you!!!”

I look around the room. I look at all of the demon spirits and demon angels. Soon they get a glassy eyed look. Zeus smiles when he sees the results.

“Listen to my command!!!”

They drone in a monotone chorus, “We will obey the Omega Unicorn Dragon. What is your command?”

“First, by the power invested in me by the Creator of the Multi-verses, I want all of the demon angels and evil spirits under the direct command of Lieutenant Mullin to enter in the Cherokee wooden box.”

Wizard Richard holds out the Cherokee wooden box. Then about five hundred thousand evil spirits and demons under Mullin enter in the wooden box quietly. They still have the flaming ice darts in their hearts.

“Second, by the power invested in me by the Creator of the Multi-verses, I want the rest of the demon angels and evil spirits under Leonard here to enter the ornate box that Sorceress Brianna is holding.”

Then the rest of the demon angels enter in the ornate box quietly.

I walk over to the wooden box and place my hand on it and speak quietly to it. “They will use the air bending element and focus it on King Azazel. They will forget how they did it and never be able to remember what they did.” I touch the wooden box, a white glow appears on the cover, then it fades.

I walk over to the ornate box in Sorceress Brianna’s hand. I place my hand on it. “They will use the water bending element and focus it on King Azazel. They will forget how they did it and never be able to remember what they did.” I touch the wooden box, a blue-white glow appears on the cover, then it fades.

I walk over to Leonard and Mullin. I create an ice covering for my finger. I touch Leonard’s forehead and repeat the water bending spell for him. I create a small finger size tornado and touch Mullin’s forehead with the mini-tornado and repeat the air bending spell for him.

Then Zeus touches his lightning bolt to Leonard’s forehead. “You will emit the strongest lightning bolt from your hands when the maelstrom reaches its maximum strength. Then, you will never remember how you did it.” The white glow fades from Leonard’s forehead.

Zeus turns to me and smiles. “One of the Pantheon Gods suggested we take a good look at you. We have been watching you since then, Omega. We are waiting for you to release our vows in concerning your Earth. We’ll be there when the Ultimate Last Battle takes place.”

I bow my head in respect and raise back it up. “Then I look forward to that day that we meet again, Zeus.”

Zeus smiles and bows his head slightly. He walks out of the assembly hall. Another lightning bolt flashes down from the sky!!!

“KaabbbOOOOMMM!! CRRRAaaaccklee!!!”

Zeus disappears in the lightning bolt. Then the lonely thunder cloud quickly dissipates into the air.

~~~000~~~

Then all of a sudden, ten dwarf kings and their escorts appear in the assembly hall in a blink of an eye. King Sui walks up as well. The rest of the Kings walk their way carefully and join the group around Leonard and Mullin.

Then a circle of white light appears nearby. The two Arresting Angels appear before us.

“Well done, Richard. We’ll take it from here.”

“You’re welcome, Arresting Angels.”

Wizard Richard and Sorceress Brianna hand their boxes to them. They put the boxes into a pocket in their white robes. Angelic Richard grasps the forearms of Leonard and Mullin.

“Have your peridot crystal ready, Richard. It won’t take long to deliver them to King Azazel.”

“Yes, sir.”

“Before we go, be rest assured that your dark shadow is now gone from your world. However, be on your guard. Some will come back and try to take control again. But, this time, you will have the upper hand. They will be weaker than before.”

“Where will they go when they are released angels?”

He points to me, “They will come to this Richard’s world for the Ultimate Last Battle.”

“But we need an Omega Unicorn Dragon in our midst.”

“You do have an Omega Unicorn, King Sui. It is Wizard Richard.”

Wizard Richard bows his head slightly and raises it back with a smile on his face. “I am half way there, King Sui. But, I need a trip to your country. I need to learn the way of the dragon. I don’t have a drop of Eingana’s blood within me.”

King Sui smiles again, “Then I will be honored to have the Omega Unicorn to be in our country. You will come to complete the other half within you. You will learn the five elements and be the greatest animal fighter on our world. You will be like your counterpart who took care of Leonard and Mullin.”

They bow their heads to King Sui at the same time and raise them back with smiles on their faces.

Then a circular light appears around the Arresting Angels. They disappear in a blink of an eye with Leonard and Mullin.

~~~000~~~

The news spread quickly throughout the world. The dark shadow is gone from their world!! Everyone is celebrating for their freedom!!!!

The churches and temples quickly fill up so they can give praise to the Creator!!! Bells are rung in the churches!!! The ones who committed great sins are relieved that were forced to do them against their will. They ask many questions to their spiritual leaders for their ease of mind and to have solace in their souls that is all well now.

~~~000~~~

Then one of the dwarf kings speaks up, “We have come to have our voices added to the assembly here.”

Then King Charlemagne speaks up next, “Then we’ll be honored to have your presence among us.”

“That is good. Just to let you know, we have been watching and waiting for this day to occur. We have been several steps ahead of the dark forces here. We can provide quartz crystals to everyone. That way, no dark shadow will dare come against us in the future.”

“That is good news to hear. Let’s see this meeting with King Azazel, Omega Unicorn Dragon.”

The gather around me so that everyone has good view of the image in front of me.

I hold out my peridot crystal in front of me.

~~~000~~~

On the planet in Hell Galaxy, its name is Hell World. King Azazel has his throne out in the open. He sees his minions flying about in the swirling orange and red sky.

“Is there any word from my generals in the Magic and Monster Verses, Apollyn?”

“There is no word from them, sire.”

“Hmm . . . we should be getting something from them soon. I don’t like it one bit.”

Then a circle of white light appears in front of them. They see one of the Arresting Angels holding Leonard and Mullin. The other is holding Pruflas and Pyro. Their demon angels look stuporous and drunk. They cast them down before King Azazel. They crawl along the ground and can’t stand back up. The two angels take out the four boxes from their robes. They place them on the ground in front of the throne.

Apollyn has a deep scowl on his face. He puts his hand to his sword. He waits for the word from Azazel.

“Tell me what happened!! Why are they drunk?”

“They are not drunk, Azazel. They were given a message to deliver to you.”

“Who gave them the message?”

“You will see them right now.” They bring out a peridot crystal. Soon, the image of Richard and Anti-Richard appear in the image above the peridot crystals. Then the rest of images of the other Richards and Briannas show up on either side of us. However, they are a few steps back from us.

“What are your names?”

“My name is Richard Moore.”

“My name is Richard Moore. However, I am from the Anti-verse.”

“Your names mean nothing to me.”

“Oh, it should, Azazel. In fact, you were on my world a long time ago. You were cast down to my world after your rebellion against the Creator!!”

Azazel looks more alarmed now, “Who are you!!!”

“I am the Omega Unicorn Dragon!!”

“I am the Omega Unicorn Dragon from the Anti-Verse!!!”

“NNNOOOOOOOOoooooo!! That can’t be!!!”

“Now, Leonard and Mullin, fulfill our commands. Cherokee’s wooden box open. Hogwarts box open.”

Then Leonard and Mullin rise up and stand groggily. “We must obey the Omega Unicorn Dragon!”

The two boxes open up. All of the demon angels and evil spirits are released. One million demons march around the throne and get into position. They drone together, “We must obey the Omega Unicorn Dragon!!”

King Azazel screams out loud, “Stop this nonsense, Leonard and Mullin!! I command you!!”

Then Anti-Richard speaks up. “Now, Pruflas and Pyro, fulfill our commands. Cherokee’s wooden box open. Hogwarts box open.”

Then Pruflas and Pyro rise up and stand groggily. “We must obey the Anti-Omega Unicorn Dragon!!”

The two boxes open up. All of the demon angels and evil spirits are released. They march around the throne and get into position. Then a circle of light appears around the Arresting Angels. They disappear in a blink of an eye.

They drone together, “We must obey the Anti-Omega Unicorn Dragon!!” There are one million demon spirits facing Azazel.

“Stop it I tell you!! Stop it!!”

“We must obey the Omega Unicorn Dragon!!!”

They walk around in a group while they chant their dirge. All of Mullin’s demon angels are opposite from Pyro’s demon angels. All of Leonard’s demon angels are opposite from Pruflas’ demon angels. There are one million facing him on the other side of Azazel.

They continue their drone, “We must obey the Omega Unicorn Dragon!!!”

Then a white glow emanates from Mullin’s demon angels. Then a blue-white glow emanates from Leonard’s demon angels. Then a green glow emanates from Pyro’s demon angels. Then a yellow glow emanates from Pruflas’ demon angels.

“Stop it now, you fools! What are you doing? Wait a second. Now where did I see those four colors before? I know I have seen them somewhere. It was a long time ago. Where was it?”

“We must obey the Omega Unicorn Dragon!!!”

Then it dawns on him where he saw those colors!! “Oh no!! It is the four colors from the four Living Creatures!!!”

“We must obey the Omega Unicorn Dragon!!!”

“Stop it!!! Stop it before it is too late!!!”

“We must obey the Anti-Omega Unicorn Dragon!!!”

Then from their midst they shoot out the four elements at the same time. From the white glow comes the howling wind!! From the blue-white group comes a torrential flood of water and ice!! From the green group comes an avalanche of dirt!! From the yellow group comes a blaze of fire!!!!

Then all four of the elements twist around each other. Every demon angel and evil spirit on Hell World gets drawn into the maelstrom. Everyone screams in pain as they get sliced by wind, water and ice, earth and fire all at the same time!!!

“ARRRRRrrrgghhh!!! The pain!!! We can’t stop it master!!!”

King Azazel yells out really loud, “I hate all of the Omega Unicorn Dragons!!! I hate you all!!!”

“The pain!!! We can’t take it any more!!! NOOOOOooooo!!! ARRRrrrggghhh!!! Help us Master!!! The pain is too much!!!!”

Then the maelstrom binds up tighter and tighter. A whistle sounds out from it and gets higher and higher in pitch. “eeeeeeeeEEEEEEEEE . . . !!!”

Then with a sudden explosion, Leonard emits the strongest lightning bolt from his hands!!! The maelstrom explodes in a great crescendo of thunder and lightning!!

“KKKKAAAAaBBBbooom!!! CrRRRAAACccclkle!!!! Blaaaammmm!!”
“ARRRRRgghhhhh!!!!! TH . . . THE P. . . . Pain!!!”
“HELP US, MASTER!!!”
“CRRRAaackllleEE!!! Booommm!!! CrRRRAAACccclkle!!!!”
“AAAARRRRRRGGGHHHHhhhhhh!!!”
“Boooommmm!!!!”

The storm rages for a full mark on the sundial!!!

The winds die down. Every one of them is panting very fast on their hands and knees. The flaming ice darts in their hearts are gone. The flaming ice collars are gone from their necks.

“Pant . . . pant . . . ”

They get up slowly to see the damage done. There is nothing left of the throne. It is obliterated. The four boxes are also obliterated as well. All of their wings are in tatters and hanging loosely. All of them have scratches on their bodies that cover every square inch of themselves. If any of them had clothing on, it is now gone and shredded to pieces. Leonard and Mullin are still sporting the two long scars on their cheeks and the stomach slashes from Croin. Leonard still has the horizontal crane wing slash on his stomach. Even Pruflas and Pyro have two long scars on their cheeks and large slashes on their stomachs!!! However, their goat horns are chipped. All of the tips of their horns are missing an inch of horn.

“GGGRRRRRR . . . , Leonard, Mullin, Pruflas, Pyro!!! What happened out there?!!!”

“Well . . . It was like this . . . . “

”Before you start. Where did that lightning come from?”

Leonard speaks up, “Zeus, the god of thunder and lightning showed up. I think they are very mad right now. It is because of how we disrespected them.”

“We always disrespected them, idiot!! Now tell me what happened out there? And don’t omit anything!! I want to know every detail!!!”

Soon they give their long awaited report to King Azazel. Needless to say, he is not very happy with the results.

“You are a bunch of blathering mouths of idiots!!! You told them my plans for bringing darkness to their worlds!!!”

They all answer back in a meek voice together, “We don’t know how they were able to get the truth out of us. We’re sorry, master.”

“Is that all you’ve got to say?!!! We’re sorry!!! I’ll really will make you sorry now!!!!”

King Azazel sends more thunderbolts at them that described his feelings.

“KKKKAAAAaBBBbooom!!! CrRRRAAACccclkle!!!! Blaaaammmm!!”
“CRRRAaackllleEE!!! Booommm!!! CrRRRAAACccclkle!!!!”
“AAAARRRRRRGGGHHHHhhhhhh!!!”
“Boooommmm!!!!”

It is not a pretty sight.

After that, they told King Azazel what had happened back on those Earths. However, the four leading demon angels did not tell Azazel about the odd feeling they are feeling in their bodies.

Off in the distance from space, you could have sworn you heard laughter from all of the Richard Moores and the Pantheon Gods in the multi-verses. “Hah, hah, hah, hah, hah, hah . . . !!”

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~00000000000000 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~00000000000000 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

In the throne of Heaven, Michael the Arch-Angel is talking with the Creator.

“Creator, why did they leave a piece of light in their bodies?”

“In time, those four demon angels will get redeemed back into our fold. They had different titles before King Azazel persuaded them to join his ranks. Those four were not under him when he rebelled against me.”

“Does that include the others under their charge?”

“Yes, Michael. For now, they must suffer some pain as a reminder of the choices they made then.”

“Then, I will wait patiently until the Ultimate Last Battle, my Creator.”

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~00000000000000 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~00000000000000 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

The image disappears above my peridot crystal when the Arresting Angels leave Hell World.

“What is the message that you gave them to do for you, Richard?”

“When the four elements come together at once, it creates an explosive maelstrom. Zeus added his lightning to the mix to make it more painful.”

Then everyone smiles together.

“Then they will get sliced and diced by the four elements and the lightning.”

“That’s right sir.”

Then another circle of light appears next to us. Then two Emissaries appear next to us. “It is time to visit another world, Richard.”

“Yes, Emissaries.” My fairies quickly fly into our coat pockets. Croin returns within me. I put on my satchels. Brianna and I walk up and join the Emissaries. We turn to face them. Wizard Richard hands the robe back to me.

“You might need it again, Richard.”

“Thank you, Wizard Richard.” I drape the robe through the opening of a satchel.

“It’s good to see you again, Richard.”

“It’s good to see you again, Wizard Richard. We’ll see each other again soon.”

“I know we will.”

“Take what you learned from me, use it to defend your world.”

Then an Emissary speaks up, “Let peace reign for hundreds of years. You will be tested by the evil spirits who come back here again from time to time. You know what to do take care of them this time. We’ll keep watch on you from time to time. Let your world grow in the nine attributes of the human soul. We look forward when you are ready to join the Ultimate Last Battle in the end.”

Then everyone waves their hands at us as we wave our hands to them. We disappear in a blink of an eye and appear on the Emissary’s star ship.

“Whew!!!! That was some battle.”

“Yes, it was, Richard. Now you and your family are stronger now. The next magical world will be very different. It is told in the Pern books with the dragon riders.”

“What is the problem here?”

“There is a comet that comes close to their system. You must tell them when the comet passes for the twelfth time. Their world will be destroyed. You must tell them about the bluestone pillar. They will use it and come to your world for survival.”

“What part of the world will they come to?”

“They will arrive in the Andes Mountains of South America at Machu Picchu.”

“Do I have to be there to greet them on Earth?”

“You must be there to greet them. That way they will know they have come to the right world. Then the dragons will reestablish their presence in South America. This will happen fifty years before the Ultimate Last Battle on your world.”

“How many times will I visit South America?”

“Count on visiting there often when you need to.”

“Sighs . . . I was just wondering about that.”

They smile at us, “You will do just fine as time goes on. When you come back here on the star ship, we’ll take you the next magical world.”

“Yes, Emissaries.”

“You better spread your dragon wings, Richard. Brianna spread your feathered wings. Fairies, be in fairy mode, Croin, you must come out as well. You will be needed to intercede for Richard to the dragons. They will be curious when they see them.”

Croin raises his head above mine and smiles, “Yes, Emissaries.” Croin lowers himself back into my body.

We fly to the world of Pern. We see it on the monitors. We see a very beautiful world.

“The comet just did its ninth pass, Richard. There is a female white dragon down there that you must meet. Her name is Ruth. After each pass, a new white dragon gets born. They name the dragon, Ruth, in honor of the first one. What they don’t know it is the same Ruth from the first one.”

“So, that means she is a living history of their world.”

“That’s right, Richard. You will be visiting South America during another vacation that is about five years from now.”

“So, I will be making contact for those three dragons in Central and South America.”

“That’s right, Richard.”

“Will I be spending the night here?”

“You will be spending two nights here. They will have to send out a summons for the gathering. Then you will explain to them what is going to happen.”

“Yes, Emissaries.”

An Emissary pushes a button on the console. We disappear in a blink of an eye. We quickly extend our wings out as suggested. Croin comes out of me and I make him solid so he can be seen. We glide down as a group to the world of Pern.

The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 26
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman

The list of characters mentioned in this story belong to the various authors that created them. This is a fan-fiction story.

This story is based upon the works of Anne McCaffrey, notably the incredible Dragonriders of Pern ® series. The legal notice of Anne's copyright is as follows:

The Dragonriders of Pern ® is Reg U.S. Pat & Tm. Office, by Anne McCaffrey, and may not be used or reproduced without permission of the author.

The use of this setting, the world, and their concepts are written in accordance with the guidelines posted by Anne McCaffrey for fan fiction. The specifics of which can be found on her website:

http://www.annemccaffrey.net/fan-fiction-rules.html (March 14th, 2005)

~~~000~~~

An Emissary pushes a button on the console. We disappear in a blink of an eye. We appear high in the sky above their world. We quickly extend our wings out as suggested. Croin comes out of me and I make him solid so he can be seen. We glide down as a group to the world of Pern.

As we get lower, several dragons quickly take notice of us flying downward to them. They fly up to us and fly parallel to us. Then a dragon with a rider flies up to join our group.

“Who are you? You came from the sky. How did you get here?”

“How come we don’t sense a heart beat in you? Are you a ghost?”

“My name is Croin. I am from another world. I am a memory for the man who has the dragon wings.”

“Was he born with them, Croin?”

“No, he wasn’t born with them. However, he does have a drop of Eingana’s blood within him. Eingana is the Great Mother of all Dragons. Leviathan is the Great Father of all fire breathing dragons. Leviathan breathed upon him to activate the drop of Eingana’s blood within him.”

A dragon speaks up, “We have no memory of our Great Father and Great Mother. We were raised here and bred here from the beginning.”

“Why have you come, Croin?”

“We have come here to warn this world that a terrible day will come. We know about the encounter you have had with an outside piece of debris that affects your world periodically.”

“We were able to save our world from the Thread that falls from space. We were able to direct the Red Star in a new path.”

“That might be fine for now. We were told there will be a comet that will destroy your world when the twelfth pass will happen.”

Then the dragons and the dragon rider all exclaim out loud together in one voice, “Whhhaaatttt?!”

“You have to tell us more, Croin. Is there hope for our world?”

“There is always hope. You must let the man with the dragon wings tell you the rest of the story.”

They come closer to me. The dragon rider speaks up, “What is your name?”

“My name is Richard Moore. This is my wife, Brianna. These others who are flying around us are fairies. I gave birth to most of them.”

“Those are fairies? We have never heard of such creatures.”

“They are common when you have unicorns on a world. Unicorns are basically horses with a single horn on its head.”

“Well, we don’t have unicorns either. We haven’t seen true horses since the Second Pass. Their descendants are a lot more stockier now. They are called Runnerbeasts.”

Then a dragon speaks up and speaks to its rider. “Gwena, we must hear them out. I have a feeling we need to know of our impending doom. There might be a way out for all of us.”

“Sigh . . . you’re right, Firelighth. Okay, follow us to Ruatha Hold.”

“Yes, ma’am. This is just to let you know. Brianna and I can retract these wings back into our bodies once we are on the ground.”

“If you can do that, then we’ll land outside the Hold and walk in.”

“Yes, ma’am.”

Gwena smiles, “It is nice to hear some respectful words, Firelighth.”

Firelighth smiles, “Yes it is, Gwena.”

We slowly make our way down toward Pern. I see several large areas where most of the people live. I see castles located in them. In the smaller areas there are no castles.

We make our way to Ruatha Hold. We see a beautiful castle as the central core to the complex of buildings. A lot of people look up to see who is coming in. We land in an open grassy area. Once we land, Brianna and I retract our wings back into our bodies. My fairies and Croin hover around us. We feel the cool air in the wind. I put the robe back on me to keep myself warm. My fairies immediately fly to our coat pockets to get warm.

Another man comes walking up to greet Gwena.

“Gwena, where did you find these people?”

“They came from the sky, Weyrmaster. They have some important words concerning the future of our world.”

“Is it another Thread attack?”

“You know we were able to divert the Red Star to its new path. The man said it will be a comet this time.”

“Aacchh . . .I was afraid of this. That Oort cloud is the source of all comets. We’ll need to keep a watchful eye out for it.”

“That we will. Right now, we must meet Lord Jaxom and Ruth.”

“Yes, you must give them the news. Perhaps there will be a solution so that we can all live.”

“Then we must be on our way.”

Croin stays hovering above us while we walk toward the castle. We are met by several guards and dragons on the parapet. The dragons have a questioning look when they see Croin.

“That dragon has no heart beat, Gwena.”

“I know that. I am told he is a memory of the robed man. We are going to see Jaxom and Ruth now.”

“Okay, we’ll let you pass.”

Once we enter the courtyard area, we see several giant lizards crawling around. They nod their heads up and down as we walk past them. The guards at the castle door opens the doors for us. We walk inside and see a well ordered castle. We enter the main assembly hall. We see two thrones at the back wall. It is raised on three steps to a large stage. We see Jaxom is talking with a white dragon to the right of him. They stop their talking when the white dragon raises its head to look at us. Jaxom also looks at us well.

“You are from Earth. Why are you here?”

“I have come to warn everyone here. In the future, there will be a comet that will impact your world and it will destroy all life. However, I am told there is hope for everyone here.”

“Hmm . . .,” He looks at the white dragon. “Is he telling the truth, Ruth?”

The white dragon bends his head down to Jaxom. “He is, Jaxom. Also, the dragon that is hovering above them has no heart beat. But, I can sense a very active mind from the dragon.”

“That’s interesting. Okay, we will hear the rest of their story.”

“Yes, I am curious to know more about them.”

They turn their heads and look at us.

“We are going to allow you to tell the rest of your story. But you must have proof that you are telling the truth.”

“Yes sir. First of all, your story is told on my world. It has been written down in at least twenty-two books. The original author is a lady. When she passed away, her son took over the book series. Your world is in the Sagitarius star system. It is very far from Earth. You might find this hard to believe right now, but I am telling the truth. There are twelve multi-universes that is created by the Creator. You world is in the Magic Verse. I am from another parallel multi-verse.”

Jaxom looks at Ruth again. Ruth speaks up, “He is telling the truth so far, Jaxom.”

“Incredible.”

I then begin to tell my story and how I became the Omega Unicorn Dragon. I also tell them that Brianna and I are destined one day to be King and Queen of the Isles.

“You mean to tell me, your royal descendants are from the British Isles?”

“Yes, sir. I don’t know when we’ll claim the throne. I suspect it will be about fifty years from know.”

“Do you have the proof that you are telling the truth?”

“I do sir. In fact Brianna and I will show them to you. Remember, we can do our own magic if we want to.”

Brianna and I space ourselves apart. Then we thrust out our hands on both sides of us. Immediately the twelve and six unicorn images come out from us. My fairies fly out of our coat pockets and hover above us. Croin hovers above us. We project our feathered wings.

We then see a reaction from Ruth.

“Jaxom, he can communicate with the animals with their minds.”

“Is he talking to you now?”

“No he isn’t, Jaxom. But I can sense he is not to be trifled with. He is a warrior that can defeat the best fighters on our world.”

“Right now, I am earning the black sashes that will lead to the title of Shaolin Dragon Master.”

Jaxom looks uneasy now, “What does that mean to you?”

“In the Shaolin discipline, the study of animals are used in the offense of and defense. I’ll show you.”

I take off the robe and hand it to Brianna. I take off the satchels and set them next to her feet. I take off the outer clothes and the jacket to reveal my armor. “Yes, I am wearing armor. Jaxom. I can easily move in it.”

I then do the animal movements that have learned so far. I show the various animal forms that I have learned. That would be the crane, the snake, the tiger, the panther, the chicken, the horse, the mantis and the blue scorpion. Each time I make an animal movement, a faint image appears around me. The animal mimics my moves. I come to a stop to slow my breathing down.

“I see you haven’t learn the dragon moves yet.”

“No I haven’t Ruth. I will eventually learn many more animals and weapons as time goes on. It will take years to learn the movements of the dragon. Also, my own body must learn to adapt to the change. The dragon is the ultimate fighting form. It usually takes forty to sixty years to attain the title of Shaolin Dragon Master. But it is not unheard of earning the title in thirty years. I will also learn how to use the five elements along the way. The first element is the air element.”

I give a quick twist with my hand. I create a mini-tornado in my hand. I then quickly dissipate it into the air.

“The second element is water.” With a movement of my hands I create a water ball from thin air. “I am able to bring in the moisture in the air to do this.” I disperse it back into the air.

“What are the other elements, Richard?”

“The next one to learn is the Earth element. It is where you can use the ground to aid you. The next one to learn is the fire element. The last one is the spirit element. That is where you can use your own spirit energy as a weapon. To give an example of the fire element. I am going to ask two of my fairies to demonstrate for you. They were born right after Leviathan breathed upon me to activate the Eingana’s blood drop within me. Shiri and Levi, please come forward.”

“Yes, father, mother, Omega.”

Shiri and Levi quickly hover in front of me. “We can change into butterfly mode to hide from people.” They quickly change into butterflies in two little flashes of light.

“We also have a second form. We can change into dragon butterflies.” They change into dragon butterflies in little flashes of light.

Immediately Ruth smiles when he sees the results. “You are the smallest dragons I have ever seen!!”

“Thank you.” Shiri and Levi quickly blow out little streams of flames. They circle around each other and create a helix tower of flames. Then they fly around the flames to make it disappear into the air.

Jaxom smiles, “So, tell us about this comet that will destroy our world, Richard.”

“I was brought here by the Emissaries. They are the representatives from the Creator himself. The brought me here to warn you of the impending doom for your world. However, they did tell me how your people and the dragons can be saved.”

“We also have dolphins here as well. They are highly intelligent.”

“They are the same on my world, Jaxom. The Emissaries brought a bluestone pillar from my world and placed it on your world. When you use magic upon the pillar, it will transport your group to my world. You will appear in a mountainous region of South America called the Andes Mountains. They said your survivors will repopulate the dragons upon my world.”

“What happened to your dragons?”

“There were some countries who revered the dragons and gave them honor. There were some countries where they were killed. Why? Our world’s population experienced and rapid growth in human population. In two thousand years it went from two million people to seven billion people. The dragons were viewed as a threat to them.”

“I would think so with that many people on your world. Are there any dragons left on your world?”

“There is Jaxom. A lot of them are hidden. Most of them are sea dragons in our deepest oceans. The ones on land, are hidden in mountainous caves or in special stone monuments. For example, there is the legend of Queztalcoatl, the feathered dragon in Mexico. There are the Gold and Silver Dragons of South America.”

“It sounds like this Creator you are talking about is preparing your world for its survival in the future.”

“You are right, Ruth. In about eight to nine hundred years from now, there will be a terrible battle on my world. It is called the Ultimate Last Battle. That is where everyone will be there to defend my Earth. King Azazel is the one who rebelled against the Creator a long time ago. He is determined to destroy my world. However, there is a plan to thwart that.”

“So, when our world ends, we’ll be there on your world to help defend it and start a new life for ourselves.”

“That is right, Jaxom.”

Jaxom looks at Ruth again. “You haven’t seen a bluestone pillar during your flight times?”

“No I haven’t, Jaxom. Remember, you are still cataloging and investigating our world.”

“I know, the surveys are not complete yet, Ruth. I just hope no one has found it and carved it into a statue object.”

Ruth looks at me again. “You said you can do magic. Can you make it appear here?”

“I can certainly try. However, you must tell the rest of Pern about the impending doom.”

“We’ll try, Richard. However, there are some who don’t want to leave here. They are too comfortable here for another change in their lives. It was bad enough with the Thread Fall over the centuries. Then we used the dragons to solve that problem.”

Ruth and Jaxom look at each other. “I rather live on another world to live another day.”

“I would too, Ruth.”

They look at me again. I look within myself and talk to the Creator. Where is the bluestone pillar, Creator?”

“It is located within this Hold, Richard. Someone has found it already. It is still in one piece. The miner crafters found it.

“Hmm . . . I just had a conversation with the Creator, Jaxom. It seems the bluestone pillar has been found already. It is within your Hold here. A group of miner crafters found it.”

They smile together, “That is great news. There are only a few miner crafters here. They will be easy to find. I will purchase it from them and secure it here within the Hold. Ruth, we must send word to the other Holds. We must have a meeting and tell them about the impending doom.”

“Yes, we must have a meeting, Jaxom. I suggest you get that bluestone pillar as quietly as possible and keep it hidden and secured here.”

“Yes, we don’t want to tip our hand to the problem Holds. They would get greedy and use it for themselves and let everyone else die.” Jaxom looks at me. “How long can you be here?”

“I was advised I can be here for two nights.”

“That is plenty of time, Richard. Ruth, tell them the meeting will be held the second morning from now. Don’t tell them about the bluestone pillar. The meeting location will be at our sea side Grand Gathering place. While you are doing that, I will have our guests stay here. I will keep them safe. I will seek out the bluestone pillar and secure it myself.”

“Yes, Jaxom.” Ruth steps away from Jaxom. He looks toward the large window opening. He flaps his wings and hovers in the air. Then he flies toward the window and exits outside.

Ruth quickly communicates with his mind with all of the dragons he meets. The dragons contact their dragon riders for assistance in spreading the news for the meeting. That even includes the dolphins in their oceans.

Brianna and I retract our feathered wings. I put the outer clothes and the robe back on. Then I put the satchels back on my shoulders.

“Come with me, my friends. You must tell me more about Earth and what we’ll expect to find there. Have you eaten yet?”

“The last meal we had, was the morning meal on another world.”

“You must be starving. It is past noon right now. Follow me to one of our smaller eating rooms here.”

We follow Jaxom from the main assembly hall. We walk through a doorway and down several hallways until we arrive at a smaller eating room near the kitchen.

The Honeymoon Trips
Chapter 27
Written by rachel76m
Edited by Don Kaufman

The list of characters mentioned in this story belong to the various authors that created them. This is a fan-fiction story.

This story is based upon the works of Anne McCaffrey, notably the incredible Dragonriders of Pern ® series. The legal notice of Anne's copyright is as follows:

The Dragonriders of Pern ® is Reg U.S. Pat & Tm. Office, by Anne McCaffrey, and may not be used or reproduced without permission of the author.

The use of this setting, the world, and their concepts are written in accordance with the guidelines posted by Anne McCaffrey for fan fiction. The specifics of which can be found on her website:

http://www.annemccaffrey.net/fan-fiction-rules.html (March 14th, 2005)

~~~000~~~

We gather around a large table. We put our satchels in one corner of the room. I take the fairies’ satchel and place it on the table.

Jaxom exits through another door. He sees the kitchen help getting ready for the evening meal. The master cook sees Jaxom entering the room. He walks quickly to him.

“Hello, Lord Jaxom. Is there something you need?”

“Yes, some unexpected guests have just arrived. They are in the side dining room.”

“How many came, Lord Jaxom?”

“A husband and a wife came from a far place to be here. They haven’t eaten since this morning.”

“They must be starving. I will make a late lunch for them with some leftover fish and vegetables from our noon meal.”

“I would greatly appreciate that. Thank you.”

“You’re welcome, my lord.”

They quickly nod their heads to each other. Jaxom turns around and exits the kitchen.

~~~000~~~

My fairies quickly fly out and land on the table. They open the satchel and retrieve their food bags, the honey container and their cups. Croin gets smaller and returns within me. He settles around the Ethereal Space ore on my belt to get himself charged back up.

Jaxom returns to the dining room. “I’m glad to see you brought some of your own food. I didn’t know what your fairies would eat. Now that I see it, we have some nuts and seeds. However, they are very precious to us for the next planting season.”

“What is going to be brought out for us, Lord Jaxom?”

“My master cook will bring out some leftover fish and vegetables from the noon meal we just had.”

“That is fine for us.”

“Where did your dragon go, Richard?”

“Croin returned within me. He is using the energy from the ores on my belt to get recharged.”

Two kitchen helpers come out with several plates filled with food. They pause when they see the fairies for the first time. “I have never seen such life as yours. What are they?”

A fairy speaks up, “My name is Tiger. We are called fairies.”

“What? You can talk?”

“Mind your manners.”

“Huh . . . yes, Lord Jaxom. I’m sorry. That is the first time for me to see them. Their stories are told to our children. Now we know they really do exist.”

“You’re forgiven. Please bring out two more plates for them. Also, we need to keep their presence hidden as long as possible.”

“Yes, my Lord. Thank you, my Lord. I’ll be back quickly.”

Another kitchen helper comes out with three large cups filled with cold water. The other one returns with two extra plates for the fairies. Then he leaves the dining room. My fairies take the stopper from the water skin and pour out the water into the small cups and put the stopper back on the water skin. Then they carefully pour out some honey into the cups. They stir it up with the toothpicks provided in the bag.

“What is that thick golden liquid they added to the water cups?”

“It is honey, Lord Jaxom. It comes from the pollinating insects.”

“Ah . . we have something similar here. Again, it is a precious food product here.”

~~~000~~~

In Tillek Hold, a dragon rider is seen flying down toward them. The dragon lands and lowers its body down for the rider to disembark. The rider quickly walks toward the castle walls. A guard and a dragon on the parapet see the rider.

“Gwena, it is good to see you again. What is the latest news from Ruatha?”

“I need to let Firelighth tell you.”

The guard and the dragon look at Firelighth. The dragons talk to each other with their minds.

What is the latest news, Firelighth?

We just met some very interesting people who came from the skies. They are here to warn of us an impending doom to our world.

Is it another Thread Fall?

No, it is not. They said it will be a comet that will destroy our world.

Is there hope for our world?

They said there is hope for our world. They met Jaxom and Ruth and talked to them. Ruth told us there is hope for all us. If all goes well, we’ll be back on Earth. They said our presence will help reestablish the dragon presence on one of their continents.

If the message is from Ruth and Jaxom, then I will have the trust that the news is true. Where are we to meet, Firelighth?

At the seaside gathering place. .

That should be enough room for all of us from the northern and southern lands. We’ll send word to the Minor and Cotholds.

The dragons quickly communicate with their dragon riders telepathically. They quickly tell their Lord of the news. He agrees to be there at the appointed time.

~~~000~~~

Word quickly spreads to the other Holds on Pern. The dragons with their dragon riders teleport to the southern Holds as well. The Lords and dragons all agree to be there. However, there was one or two Lords that were skeptical of the summons. But they soon relented with pressure from their mates. They want to be seen with the other Holds being present there. This will be an important Gathering of the highest order in social gathering status.

~~~000~~~

“You know you have to go, Darel.”

“I know, Erla. It will be the largest gathering for all of the Holds. I am just nervous about the event. I have a feeling someone will get hurt.”

“There always one or two bad red fruits in the bunch.”

“Well, all we can do is keep a sharp eye out for any sudden movements.”

“That’s right, brother.” Erla smiles, “Now, let’s get packed up for the dragon flight.”

Darel smiles, “That’s very funny, sister. You know our dragons won’t fly there.”

“I know, brother. But I did get a smile on your face!”

“Hah . . . hah!”

The brother and sister giggle and laugh together as they walk to their rooms to get ready for the trip.

~~~000~~~

“You shouldn’t go, Kepiru.”

“Give me one good reason for me not to go.”

“You’re a marked man, Kepiru.”

“So, what?! That means nothing to me. Fax and Gifflen are long dead from now. Besides I just got paid to do my first job.”

“Who are you going to knife?”

Kepiru smiles, “Nice try, but I’m keeping my mouth shut on this one. He’ll never hear or see it coming. Nip taught me well.”

The two men then walk back out from the alley to join the crowd in High Reaches Hold.

~~~000~~~

My fairies take out several nuts and small fruits for each one from the bags and place them on the plates.

We eat the late afternoon meal that is provided for us. Jaxom asks us some more questions on what our Earth is like.

“So, where is the continent located on your world?”

“Hmm . . . I better show you.” I put the fork down and put my right palm outward. I quickly think about Earth and give a quick movement of my hand. A small globe of Earth appears in my hand.

“How did you do that?”

“Well, first of all it is done with magic. Second I am recalling it from images I have seen in books and other technology that we have. This armor is equipped to do magic. The source of the magic comes from the Ethereal Space ore.”

“I don’t think we have that ore here on Pern. If we did, it would probably be abused.”

“Well, we had it on my Earth a long time ago. Then it was removed from us through some major tectonic events. It was removed because it was abused as well. It was used to control people.”

“That’s good to know. So, where are these mountains?”

I concentrate on the globe and highlight the country of Peru’s borders. I turn the globe around so he can see the location.

“Hmm . . . are there any volcanoes there?”

“There are, Jaxom. They are along the Andes Mountains.” I highlight the volcanoes in the Andes Mountains.

“That is a long string of volcanoes. What about the people who live there? Will they accept us?”

“Right now, I would say ‘no’. I have been given several tasks from the Creator to do on Earth.” I close my hand to make the image disappear. I eat several more bites from the plate and take a quick sip of water.

“What are they?”

“The first one is to prepare our world when it gets visited by an outside alien group. That will be fifty years from now. They will be given a test period of having no wars for one hundred years. If they do, they get invited to join the Local Group”

“That will be tough to do. All it takes is someone with a greedy heart to disturb the peace. I know that from personal experience.”

“Yes, I read your story about Fax.”

“Well, at least I don’t have to tell you about it. What is the Local Group?”

“It is a ring of worlds that are like a federation.”

“Ah . . . . that is where we come from. Some of our ancestors are from Ireland, Eridanni, Alpha Centauri and a moon base near Earth. Is there a moon base on your moon?”

“There is Jaxom. However, it is in the early stages of development. We haven’t sent humans beyond our Solar System yet.”

“I am just guessing here. It is possible that our ancestors came from your world instead of the Magic Verse. We are aware of the time and distant problem with transportation.”

“You could be right, Jaxom. Your ancestors haven’t been born yet, but you are here.”

“Our ancestors left Earth because of the wars that were being fought. We never knew what happened after that. We hope peace would finally reign on Earth. So, getting back to the people on your world. How will you resolve that?”

“I know it is a step by step process. I know one major conflict was resolved before I was born. I also know there is still a border problem between the USA and Mexico. I do know that about eight hundred years from now, there will be the Ultimate Last Battle. So, I have to get Earth ready for that invasion from King Azazel.”

“Who is King Azazel?”

“He was an Arch-Angel in the Heavens. He was the one who rebelled against the Creator. We have written records about that encounter. They were passed down from generation to generation among a certain group of people.”

“Again, you mentioned the Creator. I guess I have no reference into what you are talking about.”

“Don’t worry about it, Jaxom. Perhaps during the meeting, maybe something special will happen.”

“That’s a big maybe, Richard.”

“Jaxom, there is something I must tell you. It concerns Ruth.”

“Don’t tell me he will die. If he did, I would probably have to commit suicide to avoid the anguish in my mind.”

“No, it is not that. I was told Ruth will come back again. He is a very special dragon.”

“I know he is very special. He helped bring peace to our world. In what way will he come back?”

“He will retain his memories when he comes back. I don’t know how many times he will live and die. But I think he will be here to help all of Pern again to flee to my world for safety.”

Jaxom smiles, “Then that is a good thing. I’ll be sure to tell him that. It will provide hope for him and for all of Pern. Now for my own curiosity. You mentioned two dragons, a silver dragon and a gold dragon. Are they male and female? The reason I ask is that our gold dragons are the queens of their brood. They give birth to new generations of dragons.”

“From what I know, the Silver Dragon and the Gold Dragon refers to their metal domain. They are male dragons. The Silver Dragon lives in a silver mountain and the Gold Dragon lives in a gold mountain. They guard these two precious metals. Right now, the silver mountain is used by the people in South America. They mine the silver for their own greed. However, the people can not enter the dragon’s lair to kill it. The Silver Dragon is protecting it. I think the Silver Dragon can collect all of the silver in the world if he wants to and add it to his body armor.”

“That’s incredible. Has the gold mountain been found yet? I hope not.”

“No, it is not been found yet, Jaxom.”

“That’s good. I would shudder to think if that gold mountain would be found. It could cause another round of wars that everyone will regret. Usually our female gold dragons mate with the male bronze dragons. If they saw that gold dragon on your world, they might be inclined to mate with it instead. What do they look like?”

“I believe they are serpentine dragons that can fly through the air.”

“Hmm . . . our dragons have four feet to walk on. That will be an interesting meeting when they see them.”

“Yes, it will.”

We smile, giggle and laugh at each other as we recognize the irony of the situation.

We get done eating the late lunch. We give thanks to the Creator in our minds. Then we get up and walk out with Jaxom back to the main assembly hall. As soon as we enter the hall, we see Ruth flying back in. He lands on the floor and walks up to Jaxom. Jaxom hugs his neck when Ruth lowers his down to him. Then Jaxom lets go to let Ruth raise his head.

“How did it go, Ruth?”

“It went well, Jaxom. However, I did feel an uneasy emotion in High Reaches Hold.”

“Hmm . . . it seems events haven’t been resolved there. From what I feel from you, there might be an attempt on my life.”

“You’re probably right, Jaxom.”

“Ruth, I need a private talk with you. Richard and I discussed some things.”

“Okay, Jaxom. I’m ready for it.”

They talk with each other with their minds. They go over it several times to make sure it is understood. Then Ruth speaks up.

“If I had my way, I’d transport us to Twainor.”

“I know, Ruth. But, I don’t know where it is. We don’t have a star map to get there. We don’t know which direction for you to fly to.”

“Hmm . . . I have an idea, Jaxom and Ruth. I know some objects among the stars.” I bring out my medallion and show it to them. “This is really a star map. These two center crystals represent Twainor and Earth. The other crystals represent the worlds in the Local Group.” Then a new thought jumps to my mind. “Didn’t you say some of your group came from Eridanni?”

“That’s right, Richard. Why do you ask?”

“One of the Outside Helpers to Twainor comes from the Eridanni star system. His name is Geve. His specialty is in power generation. If I remember right, his world is highly mechanized with incredible machinery.”

“Our ancestors wanted to leave that type of world to avoid machinery of any kind. They wanted an agricultural society. Is Peru an agriculture country?”

“It is for the most part, Jaxom. However, in the bigger cities, the population will be using machinery to make life easier. Water is a premium value in the arid areas. As you might suspect, their cities and towns are located near the ocean, rivers and large lakes. I would need to see your star charts that you have here.”

“Our Star Smiths would have those. They are located near the telescopes in the Southern Region. I can take you there tomorrow morning. While we are there, we can visit the AIVAS building. It is the computer from the First Landing.”

“That will be an interesting visit for me. I am an expert in security software for computers.”

Jaxom smiles, “That’s great, Richard. Perhaps you can help us determine what is inside some of the locked entries in its memory core.”

“I’ll be glad to help you there.”

` “Well, let me show you to your rooms. Follow me please.”

“I’ll stay here until you come back, Jaxom.”

“That’s fine, Ruth. When we have our evening meal, you can eat yours outside.”

“Jaxom, what do the the dragons eat here?”

“We tithe a number of cattle for them to eat. Why do you ask?”

“Most of the dragons that I have encountered so far, eat fish for their meals. I think that will be a problem to contend with on Earth. But, our dragons learned to eat fish because there are not enough land animals to feed themselves.”

We look at Ruth for a response, “We sometimes fly out to the oceans to eat fish. When we do that, the dolphins immediately leave the area until we are done fishing for our meal. Eating cattle, is easy for us. They are gathered up for us so we don’t have to go searching for food.”

“Here is another thought for you and Ruth. Since you solved the Thread problem, you should be experiencing a huge increase in human population. It will put a strain on the food supplies for the people and your dragons.”

Ruth and Jaxom look at each other quickly. “He’s right, Jaxom. You must find a way to increase your food products to feed your people and us. There might be some terrible choices to make as the Turns go on.”

“I agree, Ruth. We must find a solution to that problem. But, it might be solved when Pern gets destroyed by a comet.”

“Then we better find that bluestone pillar.”

“We’ll do that right after I show them to their rooms.”

“Yes, it shouldn’t be too hard to find them.”

“Richard what does the bluestone pillar look like?”

I wave my hand again. An image of a bluestone pillar appears.

“Hmm. . . It is slightly less than two arm lengths and about span and a half with the hand. Thank you very much, Richard.”

“You’re welcome, Jaxom.” I close my hand and the image disappears.

We are shown to our room to stay for the night. We decide to stay there and relax as much as possible. In the room are several clothes cabinets. We open one up for the fairies to use as their bed. We put the towels in first to make it soft for them. Then they set out their bed covers and pillows. Brianna and I do the same thing in putting our clothes into the other drawers. I take off the armor and set it near a cabinet. Brianna and I put on some warm clothes, then the robes given to us from our time with Wizard Richard and Sorceress Brianna.

~~~000~~~

Jaxom mounts Ruth. Ruth then flaps his wings and takes off through the large window. He searches for the miner enclaves in their Hold. It doesn’t take long to find one. He lands on the ground. Jaxom slides off his back and onto the ground. Serveral miners quickly walk up to greet Jaxom.

“Lord Jaxom, what brings this honor to our enclave?”

“Have you found any new ores lately? I am just curious about your latest efforts.”

They look at each other. “We must tell him, Greglar.”

“I agree.”

They both look at Jaxom.

“During a recent dig in one of our caves, we came across an unusual ore. What is odd about, there is no vein associated with it. It seems as if it was placed there, waiting to be found.”

“Can I take a look at it?”

“By all means, Lord Jaxom. We would greatly appreciate it.”

Ruth stays outside to keep a sharp out for any movement out of the ordinary. Lord Jaxom follows the miners into their cave system. After walking for about a quarter-mark, they stop. The shaft is well lighted. The floor is even and well worn in some areas. The miner opens a door and they all walk inside. Against the wall, they see a bluestone pillar. It matches the description that Richard just shown to Jaxom.

“That is unusual, Greglar. It appears to be very unique. How much are you willing to sell it to me for?”

“Where you will store it, Lord Jaxom?”

“In the treasure vault.”

“That’s a good location. The locks are in good working order. No one should be able to break into it.”

“We’ll wrap up for your flight back to the Hold. How much should we charge him, Greglar?”

“Let’s charge him thirty marks for it. We have to cover our time of digging it up at least.”

“Do you agree to that, Lord Jaxom?”

“I agree to it, Greglar.” He opens his money pouch hanging on his belt. He takes out three ten marks to pay for it. He hands the wooden tiles to the miners.

“Thank you, Lord Jaxom. We’ll get it wrapped up for your flight back to the Hold.”

“I would greatly appreciate that.”

The two miners place the bluestone pillar on a table. They take several sheets of cloth and wrap it around the pillar. Then they attach a rope to both ends of the pillar. They carry it outside the cave system. Ruth lowers himself down. They attach the pillar around his neck.

“It is a very strong stone, Ruth. It shouldn’t break while in flight.”

“That’s good.”

Jaxom climbs up and gets on Ruth’s back. The miners quickly step back to give Ruth room to take off in the air. Ruth flaps his wings and takes off into the air. He quickly flies back to the Hold. He flies through the large window opening that leads to the assembly hall. Several men come into the assembly room and take off the package around Ruth’s neck.

“Where should we store this, Lord Jaxom?”

“Put it in the treasury room for safe keeping.”

“We’ll do that, Lord Jaxom.”

The men carry the package to the treasury room. They use the keys to unlock the heavy wooden door. They carry it in and place it on the floor near a wooden chest. They exit the treasury room and lock the door.

They go about their daily tasks in taking care of the Hold. At about the fourth mark in the afternoon. We gather together in the main dining hall for the evening me

We see a large gathering of about twenty men and women besides us sitting with them. They get a big surprise when they see the fairies. They giggle and laugh as they see them for the first time. They agree to keep quiet about them as long as possible.

We have another fish meal and vegetables for the evening meal. It takes about forty-five minutes to eat the evening meal. Afterwards, we step outside to watch the sunset and see the stars come out.

“I do know that Earth lies in that direction toward those two stars in that constellation.”

“I know of two nebulae along the way. There is the Horse Head Nebulae and the Crab Nebulae. They are very far from us, but they are closer to Twainor.”

“We’ll have to ask the Star Smiths if they have seen them and it is mapped out on the star charts.”

We then go to bed. The air is a bit more colder as we go to bed. We recite warming spells on the blankets and the fairies’ bed covers. Everyone has a great night of sleep. During the night I get another meeting in Heaven. This time Brianna and my fairies are with us this time. We find ourselves in the flower field that we have been to before. It is explained to White Acacia and White Rose where we are at.

“So, who are we going to meet, father, mother, Omega?”

“I don’t know, Tiger. They will soon appear here and explain the reason for the meeting.”

Then we see eight people walking toward us. When they get near to us they stop.

“Greetings, Richard. You don’t know who we are. We are here to explain to you the connection with Pern and Earth.”

“You are probably wondering why Pern is found in the Magic Verse and not in your own Multi-verse.”

“That’s right sir. What are your names?”

“We are the first explorers of the Rukbat Star System. There is a time, space and distance problem. We encountered a stable worm hole tube between the two multi-verses.”

“I thought there is no connection between the multi-verses.”

“We thought so too, Richard.”